《To Walk The Mist》


 1 Valley Master

    Ringing.


    A young man with dark brown hair; half of it secured away at the top of his head and the rest flowing down his back, struggled to get up as his ears rang. He tried to stand but the earth spun.


    "Valley Master! Valley Master!" he heard himself called. A hand held him up steady, allowing his balance to return to him.


    "Valley Master, we won!" the person holding him up shouted excitedly. His ears rung harder at the shout and he winced away from the one holding him, only to stumble back onto the wet ground. He knelt in place and stared up at his surroundings. He could see a jubilant bunch shouting out ''victory''. For a second he wondered what he was doing there, then it all came back to him.


    Valley Master? That was him they were calling, yet it was unfamiliar to him. He was Edward Desecar, Prince of Emerald and Jurazel. He had arrived here a few years ago. Where he was from, he had been on a quest. One of the requirements of the quest was that he walked The Mist. The Mist. Yes, that is where this should be. But he was not entirely sure. He remembered the rippers letting down their dark cloaks and blinding light engulfing him.


    Next thing he knew, he was lying in this unknown place. He had first thought it was part of the test, but he was not entirely sure any more. The first few months, he endured in the Valley, trying to understand where he was. This place was considered part of the west and there was an emerald and Jurazel but they had long become one kingdom. The king there was a man he had never heard of before. This only told him, he may have traveled in time to the future. But the other kingdoms he heard about were ruled by kings he knew were long dead in his world. He tried to ask people what was going on but many stared at him weirdly.


    He started to go by the name Ed here. When he had first told people his last name, they Laughed and said, "thinking your self part of the old blood of emerald, are you?"


    After living here for a few years, he wondered if he would ever get back? He wanted to leave this valley, but one needed 10 spirit tokens to do so. A spirit token was equivalent to three thousand gold coins. He had spent his time doing odd jobs but had not come close to that number. He was comforted by the fact that none of the big families in the valley had these tokens laying around. They would usually have to wait for the trade to get some, and the trade came once every ten years.


    It was on his fifteenth year in this strange land that he was found by the valley chief and adopted as his son. The Valley chief was ecstatic when he met Ed and said that his spirit roots were strong. He wanted to train him into the next Valley chief. That is how he found him self here in this situation, after winning a war against the opposing tribe who rebelled against his adopted father''s position as head of the valley.


    Ed turned to his subordinates with a frown they were used to seeing on his face.


    "Clear up here and return." He left his instruction, before he climbed on his horse and rode back to the tribe.


    His horse was not a normal horse; it was a spirit beast, so he rode faster than horses Ed ever saw back in his world. He was yet to really understand this world, but he understood a few things, he was really weak in this world. Back where he was from, he could be considered one of the best warriors in the west. Yet here, he was nothing more than a normal person. He could not fault this analysis, because he had seen those considered strong here, and they were incredible.


    Many here cultivated spirit bodies. This was the power of this world. He had only started cultivating this art after his adoption,while others had long started cultivating since age three, but he was strong enough to defend his title as the Valley Master and the next Valley Chief.


    Many bowed as he entered the tribe gates that said Jhun Yui Tribe. He rode straight to the main house and dismounted.


    "The great Valley Master approaches." a voice full of mockery said. Ed turned to meet his brother. The true son of the Valley Chief, Hun Ou.Hun Ou stared at Ed his eyes full of hate. He may not have been as strong as the direct young masters of other tribes, but he was still eligible for the Valley Chiefposition. Before his father went out and returned with this unknown man he was supposed to call brother, he was referred to as Valley master even though he had not formally taken the title. Now he was just the Valley chief''s second son. Ed was older than him, so father had insisted he be known as the first son. He, Hun Ou had become ashamed man. A man who could not even maintain his position as first son, a title one was born with, something ordained by fate, and he still managed to have it taken from him.


    Ed but glanced at his adopted brother and walked away. He was already immune to these taunts and he understood why the Valley Chief''s sons did not like him. He was not related to them by blood, and truly, he did not care. He was not of this world. He had to go back and finish his quest. This position of Valley Master held no meaning for him. It''s only perk was that he needed not work too much for the money to leave in five years, he could leave when the Valley Chief allowed it.


    Walking in briskly, he made his way to the Valley Chief''s court yard. He was familiar with the way, so it took little time before he stood before the door.


    "I request an audience with father." he said. Father, that word sounded odd to him. The man looked nothing like his father back home. But nevertheless, this man was his ticket out of here.


    "Enter." a strong voice said from inside. He opened the door and bowed before walking in.


    "You have handled the battle?" Theclean shaved elderly man with a head full of white hair looked at him. Ed kept his head bowed as he answered, "Yes, father. We won."


    "As expected." the Valley Chief said mildly, "Sit down, Ed. I have somethings to discourse with you."


    "What is it father?" Ed asked as he sat down.


    "You mentioned Leaving the Valley to explore once before. I have always said if you reached the picking spirit stage, I will let you go out. After all, that is the only way for you to be safe outside. Something has come up. TheThe Emperor Sage academy has sent notice that they will be coming to hold an examination in the valley. You must forget all your responsibilities and go into contemplation. The other Tribes have been informed. The slots for acceptance is limited. You must make sure you get a slot." the Valley Chief said.


    Ed maintained his forever blank expression and asked, "Who are they? The Sage Emperor Academy, what are they?" He asked.


    "Oh, I forgot, you have never bee out of this valley. They are an academy based in the west. They are second best only behind the Spring Light Valley. Both are schools, but the Spring Light Valley is a sect. Unlike the Emperor Sage academy, the Spring Light Valley only accepts girls. Usually a sect would require you swear loyalty to them and would teach you but, they become a clan on it''s own. The Sage Emperor academy, concentrates on teaching alone. You need not swear loyalty forever. You could graduate and decide to become an elder, but that is up to you. When they come, they will hold a series of tests. You must pass this and bring me Honor." the Valley Chief explained.


    "I will try my best not to fail you, father." Ed said before as he bowed, then took his leave. When he closed the door to his father''s room, he took in a deep breath. Leaving the Valley, he had waited for the moment for fifteen years. As he walked back to his court yard, he wondered about what would happen when he leaves the Valley. This Valley was part of the mist. Would this mean he would be returning to his world? All will be clear when he leaves. He could fill energy sing in his bones as he arrived before his court yard. It was large and greatly furnished. He took a seat on his bed and opened his space bag. From it, he took out a sword. The sword shined a hallow of blue when it touched his hand and the blade seemed to sing and buzz. This sword had been doing this a lot for a while now. He wondered what it meant. This was the sword he was given by the oracle when he accepted his quest. It had come with him to this world. That and a piece of Tyraniya''s Hair. He had cut a piece without her knowledge while she had slept at Deranox.


    As at then, he was not sure why he had done it, he had only just learned of her identity and he guessed curiosity took over. Now, these two things were the only thing he had of his world. The hair was tied together with a white strip of cloth. It was a large amount of hair he had cut because it was the size of a thumb. He looked at the hair and the string. It was a red string when he had used it to tie the hair, but it had turned White the next time he set eyes on it. The hair made him wonder about her, what was she doing? His quest was to go and save her. If he does not leave this place, what would happen to her? What if he takes too long?


    "Are you thinking about her?" a girl asked from the door way. Ed put back the hair and sword first before turning to look at her. She was his cousin, or better Yet, adopted cousin. The only one that did not find him an eyesore. She had sneaked into his room at night to steal the keys to the armory when she heard him call her name in his sleep. She was still a child of fifteen so, she remained na?ve. After escaping with the keys and causing an uproar in the tribe, she asked out of curiosity who Tyraniya Was.When he asked her in anger how she had heard of the name, she said she heard him say it in her sleep, giving away the fact that she had come into his room at night and was the one who took the key. He frowned at her.


    She may be the only one that likes him in the entire family, but her constant insistence to be where he was caused him a lot of trouble, making him wonder if she truly liked him at all. Looking at her innocent face, he sighed inside. This girl, what did she want now?


    "Why are you here, Jian Ou?" he asked her.


    "I heard that the Emperor sage academy is coming to recruit disciples. I know Uncle Valley Chief must have told you. Are you preparing?" Jian Ou asked. Uncle Valley chief? Ed sighed inside. This girl had always been mischievous. He had noticed something about the way she was treated since the day he came. She could get away with anything. She may be a girl from the second family, a daughter of the Valley Chief''s younger brother, but people suspected she may be the Valley Master''s blood child. She was someone the valley Chief dared not hurt. The other tribe chiefs had made it clear, that no one should touch her.


    She was playful all the time, but only around Ed. To others, she preferred to caused them trouble when they annoy her. But with Ed, she was obedient, and even cheeky. Still, she had weird contemplation techniques. Those that were not in the Valley''s Library. How she got these, he did not know. But she always gave him new ones to please him. Her unusual like for him, made the other family members and even elders jealous. He knew this girl must not be simple if even the Valley Chief wanted to be on her good side.


    "How can I practice when you are here?" Ed asked.


    "Oh? Brother Ed, you have risen a rank!" she said excitedly.


    "Are you intending to participate in the admissions?" he asked her and she nodded.


    "Mn. Brother Ed will be there, so I must come too!" she nodded her head vigorously. He wondered if her head would fall off one day. Was he surprised she wanted to come? She had the habit of following him around.


    "Then go practice." he said hoping she would go away.


    "Brother Ed, I have some new techniques, would you like to see?" she pouted as though wronged.


    "Let me see." he said and her face brightened as she bounced over to his side.


    She handed him a space bag full of techniques and he started to scroll through it. He already had a contemplation technique that was suitable for his gray spirit core, so he had no interest in these. Most of the time, he just took some techniques that he could learn when he entered the spirit picking stage. At this stage, he could practice multiple techniques. But something caught his eye; there was a book titled, Space and Realms. It had caught his attention, causing him to open it and start reading as Jian Ou watched.


    The realms of men and immortals are stages as vast as the skies and one ought not aim to reach the pinnacle, one ought to love the journey. This is possible for those aware of the unknown lands; the forests of truth and dare, the runes of ancient kings, The Mist. These are the places beyond time and realms. Places of no place.


    "Where did you get this?" Ed asked almost shouting and startling Jian Ou.


    "Do you like it? It''s just a stupid old book. You can have it." she said excited that he found something he liked.


    "I can keep this?" he asked her and she nodded enthusiastically.


    This was the first time he had seen anything that mentioned The Mist. Could this book be it? Could this be his guide out of this place? Tyraniya.... he had finally got a clue.

 2 Emperor Sage Academy 1

    The Valley was buzzing with activity. The Emperor Sage academy was coming to hold an open contest; those chosen would have the chance to be outer disciples. All through, Jian Ou only dropped by for few minutes to see Ed before leaving; she never stayed as long as she usually did. Ed could tell she was serious about going with him to the Academy.


    She was not the only one serious about the up coming event; he had not seen his brothers appear to taunt him even once through out this period. He enjoyed the solitude. It gave him time to explore this book. He also took his contemplation seriously, because that was also an option to leave this world.


    Many did not know that he was close to his Spirit picking and all he needed to do was stabilize his foundation before attempting to break through. He contemplated in his sleep and when he walked. Split attention; this was something people thought completely rare. He had never told a person about this ability.


    He spent his time reading the book he had gotten from Jian Ou. He had learnt a lot. Most of what was written, he did not understand, but he learnt a lot about the Mist.


    Apparently, the mist was part of a place called the Unknown Lands. In this place, space and time was like a lump of fluid; it mixed up and unraveled. There was no such thing as a time line here. This explained why there were different kings from different eras talked about as though they were of the same time here. He wondered if the king ever met face to face here. Did this place just mix up time lines or replicated the actual people in the real world? Reading on, he understood that this world appeared different for those living in it. Many people don''t experience the same thing. He understood that the Kingdoms he knew were referred to as mortal world here.


    It was a place devoid of power, his world. The Mist was a like a passage way into the higher realms, where power was life. He understood that this Valley was just a region under the Godhand Gate. He understood that there were many gates. They all led to different world. He scanned the book looking for the Gate to his world. Nothing. All that was written was that his world was locked during the time of the ancient kings. No one from the higher world can descend to the mortal world. Those of the mortal world must passed through points to reach other realms but can not return. It was written that the powers in the lower world used magic, a force that was not truly understood here. It did say that the Quest takers were the Last people to cross the realms without care. It was their birth right, he had read. This made him glance at his space bag, where his sword was resting. He could almost hear it buzzing. The book said that Quest Takers had reached the stage of God eater to move that freely. The book made mention of legends of those who were so powerful, they could tear open the veil and descend.


    Ed paled and closed the book. Would he have to become a god Eater before he could attempt leaving? It had taken him five years to get to this stage and he was still yet to enter the spirit picking stage. Though others may think that was fast, but for him, that was too slow. How long would he have to stay to get back to his world? He had things to do there.


    "Ed." He heard himself get called. He rose from his bed to see the Valley Chief arrive. The Valley chief always had him called and not the other way round. Even though he was shocked, Ed did not show any expression as usual.


    He got up to welcome him; "Father." He said.


    "Sit. I have come to tell you; concentrate on your contemplation. You do not need to make an appearance for the welcome ceremony. You only have to worry about raising your power. The emperor sage academy is arriving today. Stay inside and contemplate." he said and left there after.


    Ed understood the Valley Chief did not intend for him to be around during the celebration. Though he was his beloved adopted son, he still was not flesh and blood. He had always known that the Valley Chief wanted him to never leave the valley. That way, he would be married to one of the family members and take over as Valley Chief.


    Ed almost shock his head tiredly. They did not understand that no matter what they did, the moment he stepped out of this valley he would not return.


    He understood that no matter his level of strength, he was an older person. He looked almost in his thirties, while the others trying out were in their teens. No matter his strength, he had taking to long to start contemplating.


    Sighing, he concentrated on his reading as though nothing had happened.


    That night, the Emperor stage academy arrived. They were received by the Valley chief and other tribal chiefs, along with their sons. They all smiled and bowed to the ones that had arrived.


    "Valley Chief! It''s been a long time. You have aged." a man in his forties said with a smile. The valley chief laughed humbly; "Lu Guan, you have not aged a day. I see, you have gotten stronger."the Valley chief answered.


    "Well, it''s fate, fate." Lu Guan said and the Valley chief just smiled. One looking would not be able to tell that these two were not complimenting each other but holding back from a good fight.


    The guests were led to the reception hall, where they were entertained and drank through the night. It had gotten a long way into the party when a boy of the younger generation decided to challenge the Valley chief''s sons.


    "Valley Chief, forgive me, I had heard of all your exploits and though I can not challenge you, a tiger can not birth cats. I wish to challenge one of your sons." One of the young boys not older than thirteen said while sipping on his cup of wine.


    Every one in the hall paused. The chiefs of other tribes hid their smiles behind their wine cups as they relaxed to watch a show. The Valley Chief was aware that this was a ploy to embarrass him. He looked round and wondered which of the Tribal chiefs had told those from the Emperor Sage Academy of the disappointment of his bloodline.


    His first son Hun Ou, too slow to understand this was a plot had to stand up bravely and accept the challenge.


    "It would be an honor!" He puffed his chest and said with confidence. Everybody in the valley knew this son of his has no talent in contemplation. He wished he could get up and squeeze life from his shameless body.


    "This is a game between the younger generation. Lets not interfere in this." Lu Guan said with a laugh.


    "Jia lin, you asked for this challenge. Even if you are bored, you can not get up and disturb the Valley Chief''s family like that. You must offer compensation if something goes wrong." Lu Guan said coyly. The Valley Chiefgritted his teeth, trying to suppress his anger. The look on every one''s face said it all, Lu Guan was mocking him. By his words, he already assumed Hun Ou would loose.


    "Haha! No need to compensate. If I, this young master can loose in a mere exchange of pointers, then I am not qualified to enter the emperor sage academy." Hun Ou said. The Valley Chief almost swallowed his teeth as everyone in the room blanched. Did this boy actually think he was going to win? He just made such a daring statement at a gathering such as this, was he stupid or did he have no intention of joining the emperor sage academy?


    "Really? The honor of a man is weighted by the value of his words." Jia Lin chuckled at the na?ve boy.


    "Of course! Please go ahead." Hun Ou said. They all relocated to a training ground where the servants began tolight up brightly with torches. With those torches, the stage was bright even in the darkness of the night.


    Hun Ou and Jian Lin took to the stage and waited upon the referee, who was an inner disciple from the Emperor Sage academy. When the drum sounded, the challenge was considered to have begun.


    On the sound of the drum, Hun Ou moved first, moving toward Jian Lin with a surprising speed. He threw his leg into the air when he got to him and before it landed, he bellowed; "Desert hammer!"


    The air gave way as his foot landed. With one look, a person could tell the power in that kick. If that stage was normal, it would have collapsed. As the kick touched Jian Lin''s cloths, there was a loud sound of bones cracking.


    Jian Lin but looked towards his shoulder, where Hun Ou''s kick had landed and smirked.


    "A nice technique, a weak user. You had not compensated for the lack of strength in your other leg. Did you not consider that if that kick failed to harm me, there by letting the energy you just unleashed pass through me, it would have no where to go?" Jian Lin said as he reached to grab Hun Ou''s leg that was stuck in that position.


    To others, the hand moving to touch Hun Ou''s leg resting on Jian Lin''s shoulder was moving swiftly but lightly. But to Hun Ou, it was like a devil''s hand approaching him from the depths of hell. He felt the danger in that hand and did not dare for it to touch him. He pulled all his strength to move away faster, thereby doubling his speed. He may have escaped twenty steps back, but his entire core was spent. He panted as his eyes bulged in fear.


    How did it turn out like this so fast? The battle had only started and before the time it took to boil a cup of tea, he had no energy to continue. Shame? Yes, he felt it. The eyes looking at him from the crowd were full of mockery. Though he did not look back at them, he could feel their gazes touch his sweat soaked clothes and penetrate through his skin. But, they did not matter. The danger was the person approaching him. He was about to shout a surrender to escape, but a thought crossed his mind.


    "Don''t! I give up!" he said but when the person moving towards him did not stop, he shouted;"My big brother would kill you if something goes wrong." Only then did Jian Lin''s steps pause.


    "I have already surrendered. This was just a case of exchanging pointers, would you still continue?" Hun Ou asked.


    "He has surrendered, so you win Jian Lin." the referee said. Hun Ou sighed a relieve before using his last strength to get up and try to leave.


    "I have lost. Thank you for a good game, I must go and have my leg checked." Hun Ou said and turned away.


    "Wait! You are the first son. Who is this elder brother?" Jian Lin asked and Hun Ou smiled inwardly.


    "Oh? He''s the strongest in the Valley. I may not be good enough to enter Emperor Sage academy, but do you think any of you that came are good enough to fight him?" Hun Ou said and walked away.


    The Valley Chief wished to bend his son over his knee and give his behind a beating that he would never forget. That statement was a clear provocation toward the Emperor Sage academy. The fact that Ed did not even show up to welcome them, now seemed as an act of arrogance. If he told the guest now that he had not had his adopted son appear because this was an important gathering and not a place where adopted children from the wild could appear, they would not believe him.


    The other tribe chiefs all had guarded expressions and some even held expressions as though they were in thought. They wondered if this claim was true? Did they really think this in their hearts? They already assumed Valley Master Ed was going to get in for sure and he would be on top. This was because the extent of his strength among the younger generation, was known to them. But his title of Valley master did not come by defeating all the young men his age and the geniuses in the Valley. It came when he killed a tribe chief with a lazy swing. What he was holding, they knew it was a sword, and it looked ordinary at that. They wondered if he had some hidden power they did not know about. They had increased the amount of spies in the Valley Chief''s residence but got nothing. Many of the tribe chiefs coveted this power no matter what it may be.


    What they did not know was that the look on their faces as they thought of Hun Ou''s statement had already caused suspicion and anger among the guests. This son they did not know about, they were going to have to keep an eye on him.


    Ed sat in his room oblivious of the trouble his brother had caused for him.

 3 Emperor sage academy 2

    Ed had spent the entire night reading through this text, but he was not drained. Instead, he felt energy like never before course through his veins. He examined himself and found he had reached the edge of his growth and was soon going to experience the spirit picking stage. But the spirit picking stage is a very hard stage to reach. Many reached the stage which he stood, yet were unable to reach the spirit picking.


    Getting up, he stretched as he took a look at his body; it was overflowing with spirit energy. He was not sure how much spirit energy a normal person had at this stage, but was sure his was too much. When he had killed a valley master the last year, he had touched this man on his lotus diam, which was a point at the middle of his spine and for a second, his spirit energy connected to the man''s spirit energy and his spirit energy was so large, it started to devour that tribal chief''s own. He was sure that all the tribal chiefs were at least at spirit awareness stage. This stage was separated from the spirit picking stage by the spirit awakening and spirit merging stages.


    How could his spirit energy overwhelm a tribal chief to that extent? That and he had never heard of spirit energy eating another spirit energy. He was sure of one thing, unless someone higher than spirit awareness appears, he should be able to secure a place in the emperor''s shed academy.


    Leaving his room, he went out to the arena where the contest would be holding. He stood in the crowd of people for a while, listening to rumors and tales of last night banquet and sighed. That Hun Ou had put him in a spot. He was a little worried how far the emperor stage academy would go because of this insult.


    "He even said that the best of them could not beat down the Valley master." one man said.


    "Don''t you think so too? Valley master is a very mysterious person. Didn''t you hear how he killed that tribal chief with a lazy swing that time?" another youth asked.


    "It''s probably that sword he was holding. Who knows what treasures the Valley master has given his adopted son." the first youth snorted.


    Ed sighed and walked away. He had always known what people thought since he killed the tribal chief and never intended to explain himself. Several times, the Valley chief had tried to ask him what he did that day, but he had never answered. What was he to tell them? They only saw him put his hand on the tribal chief''s lotus diam and swing his sword. Was he to tell them that he had devoured all the spirit energy from the man causing him to be unable to block that lazy sword swing? It was better if people knew less and less about him. And he intended for it to remain so.


    He made his way out of the crowd and stood by a corner and watched people enter the arena and wait. He listen to debates, bets and even fight about who would win.


    Soon, the tribal chiefs arrived, then the Valley Chief arrived with the emperor stage academy elders. The younger generation followed and got seated. The valley master then stood to give a speech but kept looking around the crowd, making Ed sigh inwardly. He new the Valley chief was looking for him.


    "We welcome our guests from the emperor stage academy. I will not beat around. We all know why we are here. Those who pass this admission will get a chance to become outer disciples at the emperor stage academy, so do well." The Valley chief said and sat down and an elder from the emperor stage academy replaced him.


    "We have five stages. Only ten people can be on one stage. Those who get on the stage and remain before I call the end, will be allowed into the next round. Your time limit, the time it takes to brew a cup of tea." he said, sitting down pouring water into the kettle before him. Silence took over the arena. Many were still waiting for him to say start, but others had already understood that the game had started. Jian Ou made her way to one of the stages then other tribal cheif''s children followed suit. Only then did the others discover that the contest had begun. Ed made his way there too. But unlike others, he was not rushing. Some tribes had already made alliances and taken up all the spot on one stage. Ed had his eyes on one stage. It was where his adopted family all gathered. Those from the Valley Chief''s tribe all took up spots. Ed saw two of his adopted brothers and Jian Ou there. Others rushed to join. Some stages were already filled, so fights broke out. Many were trying all they could to get on the stage. One commoner rushed to the Jian Ou''s stage, but she threw a slap and he felt him self become airborne. After that became history as many did not look to see where he Landed, if he landed.


    "Lady Jian please grant me entrance!" many from the Valley chief''s residence gathering there.


    "I don''t care what you do, this spot is for my brother Ed." she harrumphed and looked away from them.


    Ed had already expected this, that is why he had not bothered to hurry. Many saw his approaching silhouette and gave way as he climbed on the stage taking the last spot on that stage. They all sighed and tried their luck some where else. Fights broke on two stages, but the other three were more or less calm and unaffected as they watched these two stages with amusement. The three unaffected stages were Ed''s stage and the other tribes, who had come to an agreement on who would be participating.


    The other two stages, were mostly commoner''s stages. But some people from other tribes who had been left behind by their tribe tried to gain a spot too. But the commoners could careless fro their person and a fight broke out. It now became a thing of power only those with the most strength will gain a spot. Soon, it was more or less settled as the strongest among them had taken up their spot. Ed had not really bothered to look at the commotion on the other stages as Jian Ou chatted with him non stop. If anything, he felt a head ache from all her talking.


    He felt the hair on the back of his neck rise. He knew someone was looking at him and with eyes of utter hate. Even his adopted brothers did not look at him with such eyes. He looked behind him, and unexpectedly, it was a young boy he had not seen before. The eyes he used to look at Ed made one think Ed had committed a sin against him. Ed but glanced at him for a second before looking back. But Jian ou who had been watching his every move noticed this. She looked back as she felt the hostility from the person probably a year older than her.


    The arena had more or less calm down and many started to look at those on the stage and gauge their strength. Many paid attention to Ed and Jian Ou as they were the most eye catching people. This caught the attention of those from the Emperor stage academy.


    "Who is the young man?" Lu Guan asked.


    "That is Ed. He is the Valley Chief''s adopted son." one of the tribal chiefs said.


    "Isn''t he too old to be trying to enter the academy?" Jia Lin said in mockery.


    "Yes, he is in his twenties." another tribal chief asked.


    "Has he even gone through his spirit picking? Someone that late in age, even if he is a genius, he would not be able to catch up those his age. It''s a waste of resources, Lord Valley Chief." Jia Lin said, causing the Valley chief to frown.


    "He has yet to do his spirit picking but none of the cheifs here would be bold ebeough to fight him. He just discovered contemplating late. But that should tell you how unessary his age is. If at spirit picking all those at spirit awareness can not fight him, he levels up fast too. He had only been training for two an a half years to get to the bottle neck foundation level. You should all know how hard it is to train as one grows older." Valley Chief said slowly as though he was calm, but one could not tell that his blood was boiling at this moment.


    "Is it necessary to over exaggerate? Even if he trains fast and would catch up to his peers fast, there is no need to say that the valley chiefs would not dare fight him. Do you know the difference between the spirit awarenes and foundation level?" Lu Guan said in mockery. But his toned sounded like he was advising an old friend.


    "Are you hearing any tribal Chief claiming other wise?" Valley Chief said calmly. Those from the Emperor stage academy looked at the tribal chiefs who had long looked away as though the topic did not concern them. This caused Lu Guan to frown. Was this young man that dangerous? If he was not already annoyed with these valley people thinking him weaker than their valley master, he was now fuming. He snorted in his mind, how true can rumors be? But his anger did not lessen when he saw a beautiful girl chatting with him non stop.


    "Who is the girl?" he asked, but no one answered. Even the Tribal chiefs. Lady Jian was a no go topic. Lu Guan frowned.


    "What? My disciple can no even admire your daughter?" he asked the Valley chief.


    "It is best if he looks away now. That is someone the emperor stage academy head master would have to be polite too. You of all people know there are powers that hide in the weirdest places. This is all I can tell you, old friend." Valley Master said and Lu Guan frowned. It was rare for him to hear the Valley Master talk that seriously. It had been decades since he had seen that look on his face. He trained his eyes at the girl, so did the others from the academy. They noticed that Lu Guan had not said a thing. Was she that special? Only then did they notice her look back when she saw Ed do the same.


    Her eyes landed on someone and an invisible hand slapped the person she was looking at.


    "Stop glaring at brother Ed before I tear your eyes out!" she scolded the person now bleeding from his mouth. The young boy spat out the blood in his mouth and looked up at Ed who did not bother to look back and glared at his back.


    "You are still looking?" Jian Ou raised her hand over her head as though to strike but Ed caught it.


    "Don''t cause trouble." he said.


    "But he was looking..." she looked at Ed with a wronged expression before glaring at the boy and looking away with a harrumph. Her wronged expression looked so heavenly, many were lost in staring at her.


    Tap!


    They heard the sound of a tea cup click as it was placed onto the tray. The tea had concluded and those who stood on the stage could enter the next round.

 4 Emperor Sage Academy 3

    The elder handling the contests looked cleared his throat and everyone looked his way.


    "The rules are simple. All stages will have to fight it out till only two remain. We, from the emperor sage academy don''t care about your level. All you have learnt before entering the academy matters not. The academy will brand you in our image. We wish to see those with strength and pure will." the elder said and the faces of the valley chief and the tribal chief distorted.


    Usually the academies that come to recruit from the valley always check talent. Wasn''t the emperor sage academy declaring that no one from the valley could even have half enough talent to qualify? Isn''t this a slap on their faces? Strength? Many knew that there were many types of contemplation and occupations one could branch into. Brute strength only mattered for warriors. Warriors were the lowest kind of occupation. Were they declaring that no matter who were chosen, they would only end up warriors.


    The valley heads and elders could only grit their teeth. The Emperor sage academy could do as they place across the entire Sage empire. The participants glanced at themselves, but said nothing. After all, they all wanted a chance to enter the academy no matter the means.


    "People from other stages can challenge those remaining on the others if you are confident you can defeat them." the elder said, "this is a challenge stage. I will make this simple so that we can all leave here. Two people remain on the stage. The rest left behind can challenge them."


    The Valley chief tried all in his power to keep a straight face. He was boiling inside but could not show it. Rushing a recruiting so that he could embarrass him? He laughed in his heart. Lu Guan, you are too vicious. He now saw that even though the Emperor sage academy intended to recruit people from the valley, the fact that they sent Lu Guan as their representative means no one good would get to the academy. Even if there were hidden talents, even his adopted son, may not make it through if he is not strong enough. Strength does not equate to potential. When those chosen get to the emperor sag academy and are tested, the lack of talent will show. If the valley does not produce talents to join the great stage outside, it would not have the opportunity to do so again as the empire will remove it''s name from the list of places recruiting could take place. Lu Guan. So this was your plan, after all.


    All those from the emperor Sage academy watching this disappointing recruiting had a hint of amusement in their eyes.


    "Wow, so simple? I guess they prepared for nothing. Even the little stream academy recruiting is much more exciting, they had put up quite a show. I guess the emperor sage academy has lost it''s lustre." a old man said. Those on the stand looked his way. Though he muttered softly, all those with spiritual energy heard him. Of course it did not help that the entire arena was silent.


    The Valley chief also glanced at this old man. He looked completely ordinary and harmless. His words could pass as rubbish talk, so it would be amusing if the emperor sage academy took offense and harmed him. Their image as righteous protectors of the Sage Empire would be tainted.


    The recruiting elder looked away, not before sharpening his gaze on the old man. "Begin!"


    On Ed''s stage, Lady Guan walked up and glanced at those on the stage. "Get down! Only Brother Ed and I will stand on this stage." she said, causing those there to shiver. Her words were clear to all in the arena. But only the audience paid attention as the other stages had their own struggles to handle.


    "Lady Jian, you standing on the stage is okay, but we have the right to fight for the second spot. Why should we get down?" Ian Ou said, making Ed glance at him for a second before looking away. Ian Ou was one of his adopted younger brothers. The most Quiet amongst them. Ed could not remember when this brother had ever said a word to him since he arrived. He had one more brother after Ian Ou and Hun Ou; Kan Ou. Out of all his adopted brothers, this was one that made him frown. Even the angry Hun Ou had never caused a reaction from him.


    Ed had always seen the look in his eyes and knew that this boy was dangerous. To what degree, he did not know. His quiet demure did nothing to dissuade Ed''s feelings.


    "I don''t care! Get down and find somewhere else!" Lady Jian said and they all glared at Ed. He could care less about what they did, nor what Lady Jian herself did. All he knew was that he was not stepping off this stage. Slowing, his clan''s men got down from the stage, till only He and Lady Jian stood.


    The rest of the other stages had the same result; those who were known to be more powerful won and the others stepped down. The commoner''s stage had the same result. Though it took a more tussle than the rest, every thing was more or less resolved.


    "Now, the challenge. Go up and challenge those standing for a spot." the recruiting elder said. Many hesitated. They did not see the point in challenging people who took spots on stage out of pure reputation. They were going to loose either way. One person stepped forward.


    "I, Lin Rue challenge Master Hunten Gi." the commoner girl said, glaring at the short and thin, Master Hunten Gi standing on one of the stages. Many frowned. A commoner challenging a Tribal Chief''s son? They all turned to Master Hunten Gi and waited for his reply.


    "Accepted." the recruiting elder said and many frowned.


    "You are now accepting for those challenged?" tribal chief Gi asked with a frown.


    "Any one challenged must accept. There is a reason why there are five stages. There are five houses in the Emperor Sage academy and standing on the first stage makes you an outer disciple of the first house and so on. Many of you may not know, but the houses are numbered according to strength, with Broken peak being number one." the recruiting elder said and they all turned to look at the first stage. That was where Ed and Lady Jian stood. The eyes of those on the other stages burned.


    "Any one can challenge anyone. As long as the person on a stage has fought four times, he can no more be removed from the stage. If you win another and upgrade your stage, your will still have to fight four times to stay there." The elder said. The commoner stepped up to the stage and the other on the stage stood aside.


    "To the death!" the commoner said and everyone looked at her strangely.


    "Do you accept this condition?" the recruiting elder said.


    "Yes!" Hunten Gi said.


    "Son!" his father scolded.


    "Begin!" the elder said without care. The commoner immediately planted her legs apart, stabilizing herself.


    As far as Hunten Gi was concerned, there was no way a commoner girl without training could beat him no matter how strong she is. This point of view changed the moment she lifted her hand and swung a sword manifested from thin air. He felt his body pulled towards the sword and panicked. If he did not do something, that sword is sure to connect with his midsection.


    His wrists were swift as his fingers pulled hand signs. He felt his body become heavy and his feet sit on the ground without making a move. When the commoner''s word passed by, the pull stopped. But she was had only begun. He eyes flashed red momentarily before she sprang towards him for in a moment and threw a punch.


    "Heaven''s judgment!" she bellowed. That fist, that move,the energy being emitted, this caused the two elders from the Emperor''s sage academy to stand up. Their reaction did nothing to calm the agitated tribal chief Gi.


    All Hunten Gi saw was a tiny fist coming his way. He emerged his hand to block it, but as the fist came close enough, he felt the power the fist was emitting and this pupil shrank. Though there was no time, he still tried to withdraw the palm he had placed out to receive that fist.


    The commoner girl''s fist still connected with his palm as he tried to move it way. The entire arena gasped. Hunten Gi felt the pain before he looked down and saw the blood. His palm had been shattered to nothing. If he had not tried to move away at the last moment, his entire arm would have been gone. But he had no time to think cause, she did not wait for him to recover as she swung a second fist at his side ribs.


    It only took a second for the feeling of danger to envelope him. ''I''m going to die''; as those words crossed his mind, he activated a shield he wore under his shirt and concentrated all of it''s strength on his right arm which hemoved to protect his rib.


    The valley chief sighed as he shook his head. He could see that he was not the only one who did the same. Tribal chief Gi''s expression turned grim as he rose from his seat only to be paused in place by the recruiting elder''s spell.


    "Interference is prohibited." the elder''s voice sounded softly through the arena.


    Hunten Gi''s shield activated, "Turtle''s shield!" he bellowed as the fist connected.

 5 Emperor Sage Academy 4

    The outcome was as expected.


    The power of the commoner"s fist tore through Hunten Gi''s shields and reached his hands. His elbow was snapped like a twig as the fist met his ribs. Blood filled not only the stage, but the air. That fist should have passed right through Hunten Gi, but the commoner had reduced it''s force after breaking his shield.


    Those with eyes saw what she did, including chief Gi. Anger could be felt as steam leaving his skin in a slow burning rage. Hunten Gi had used all his strength to block that punch and had nothing left in him. His core was empty. He struggled to crawl away soaked in his own blood. As long as he left the stage, the game should be over, he thought. She watched as he did so with a vicious look in her eyes. When he thought he had escaped, he noticed she came down the stage too.


    "Have you forgotten? This fight is to the death." she crashed all the hope in his mind.


    "Mercy." he begged pitifully. This was a shame upon the noble house, but he did not want to die.


    "Did you show my brother mercy?" she growled and with a swing of her sword, took his left foot. The Arena was silenced by his screeching scream.


    "When you sent your men to capture my brother causing us to run away from our home and live in the woods, did you show us mercy?" her eyes reddened as she cut his legs to his thigh. She swung the sword lightly, only breaking his bone but allowing some flesh to remain connected. She grabbed the leg as he screamed and tore it from the body.


    Pain was nothing compared to seeing his leg thrown away like trash. She stumped forward and cut off the other leg. With a small kick, it was on other side of the arena.


    "Mercy? When you took your men and rode out into the woods and hunted us down like rabbits, did you know this word? When you stripped my brother and tore his little behind with your filthy rod, did you remember this word? Mercy?" she grabbed between his legs and crushed his sacks with her hand. His screams could be heard from the valley gates.


    "You did not even let him die. You let your men have their turns! One by one, they plowed his hole like wild animals till last breaths left his body. Mercy? I will show you mercy! My mercy will be worthy of the heavens!" she growled and swung her sword in the air and it suspended there. Circling the sword and the screaming Hunten Gi, she made hands signs that caused the Emperor sage academy elders to stand.


    "Enough!" Chief Gi bellowed, "You have gotten your revenge. Let him go!"


    "Using demonic power is forbidden in the territory of the Godgate hand. No matter your hate, you must not enter the dark! Your only outcome is death!" the recruiting elder warned.


    His words were completely unnecessary as the elders around were already releasing the power of their core, ready to create a barrier. Most of them sighed. They were only in some small valley to recruit disciples and now caught in a messy situation. If she completes her summon, many things may happen. They are not sure if she is trying to summon a demon, a horde of demons or a demon general. The possibilities were endless. How could a little commoner from the valley end up learning such a summoning.


    The watching crowd were confused, making a lot of people unsettled. What was happening? The sun ahead in the sky had deemed till it was a red ball. This caused the sky and clouds to appear red. Lightening cracking in the sky did nothing to calm the audience. Every one was confused.


    "You think you will die and enter the cycle of reincarnation? What right do you have to go where my brother went? I gift you to the demon God to do with as he wishes!" she bellowed under the red sky. A hand tore out from the thunder clouds, grabbed a wailing Hunten Gi and receded back. It happened so fast; as it came, it went and the sky started to clear up.


    The elders emperor sage academy and tribe chiefs of the valley surrounded her in seconds.


    "You have gone too far little girl." the valley chief said with a frown.


    "Using demonic power is forbidden." the recruiting elder said.


    "Grab her!" Lu Guan said and they prepared to pounce. The sky that was receding returned as lightening truck down from the clouds, hitting the commoner on the face. Her whole body went alight for a moment then the sky returned to the way it was as though nothing was wrong, leaving behind the commoner girl with a dark mark engraved on her forehead, her body afloat in the air.


    "Girl..." one of the elders tried to call to her.


    "I am Lin Rue." the girls said, her voice dark and raspy.


    "Grab her now!" Lu Guan said and the elders released similar inscriptions from their hands into the air. When the inscriptions clashed, they formed a prism caging her in.


    "Do you still have your jade coffin?" Lu Guan asked the valley chief.


    "Why? Are you trying to preserve her?" the valley chief frowned.


    "Placing someone in the jade coffin does not only preserve them, it also suspense all their energy from leaking out. Is can also be a good prison." Lu Guan said sternly when he saw the valley chief hesitate.


    The Valley chief had no choice but to hand over his jade coffin. A large glowing green coffin appeared behind him and made it''s way to Lu Guan.


    The next thing that happened, none of them expected. The energy Lin Rue was emitting was like nothing they had ever seen. The prism cracked and shattered like a flimsy glass. Dark figures surrounded Lin Rue in seconds, grabbed her and the jade coffin, and sped away.


    "Pursue!" Lu Guan ordered and the tribe chiefs and emperor sage academy elders did as said. They all moved at incredible speed out of the arena, the audience was flustered. This is not how they expected the day would end. Those on the stage did not know what do. Do they come down or not?


    "Those on the stage will be considered part of the emperor sage academy." Jia Lin said, making every one pause.


    "For those not on the stages, if you think this is unfair and you had no chance to prove your worth, let me tell you now, if someone could make you step down, then you are not qualified to be in the emperor sage academy." Jia Lin said.


    "Who made you in charge?"


    "Can you speak for the academy?" many contestants voiced their in-satisfaction.


    "When my master is not here, I make the decisions." he said, reminding them that he was Lu Guan''s disciple. This silenced them. An inner disciple stepped down towards the stages and looked at those on the stage.


    "You are all outer disciples. But don''t jubilate so soon. This exams was interrupted, so you will be tested in the academy. Only then can you truly be considered a disciple." he said.


    "Except him. The valley chief''s adopted son. You have not passed." Jia Lin said, making the entire arena still.

 6 Old pervert 1

    Ed looked at the person who spoke and frowned.


    "Why? Why can''t brother Ed go with us?" Lady Jian fumed. She did not like the look on that boy''s face.


    "You are too old to be entering the academy. No matter how powerful you may be, you are still not in our generation and you will never meet up no matter how you try." Jia Lin said coldly.


    "Fine." Ed said stepping off the platform. Even though he could not leave the valley now, he did not believe he would not leave one day. He just had to be strong enough. He could feel the smirk of those who hated him. He knew he had a lot of enemies, so this was expected. Lady Jian harrumphed and stepped off the stage too, not forgetting to send Jia Lin a glare.


    "Lady Jian, I presume. You need not follow him. You are admitted." Jia Lin had not intention of letting such a beauty out of his sight. As far as he was concerned, no matter her identity, she grew up not seeing the word. As long as she joins the academy, she would be able to see how powerful he is, how any girls wished to walk beside him.


    "That small thing you call an academy? Is that place worthy? I only joined the admissions because I wanted to go with brother Ed." she snorted and continued after Ed.


    Her words caused those from the emperor sage academy to frown. They held their heads high were ever they went, knowing well that they were from the emperor sage academy. Yet this girl looked down on it?


    Ed did not bother to answer them nor Lady Jian, as he continued walking away. The tension in the air was indescribable. The disciples from the academy wanted nothing but to teach Ed a lesson. But, they had a righteous reputation to uphold so they could only clench their teeth and watch as he walked away.


    Jia Lin saw the most beautiful woman he had ever seen walking away from his sight. It did not help that she looked at him as though he was the smallest thing she had ever seen. Anger engulfed him as he stared at Ed''s leaving back.


    "I know you think you are great, but don''t hold someone back with your selfishness. I can see that Lady Jian is a rare talent. Walking with you will only hold her back and derail her improvement. Don''t be without shame." Jia Lin scolded Ed righteously, but the person in question did not look back. Lady Jain threw him a dirty look but did not waste her breath.


    Jia Lin could feel people give him complicated looks and frowned in confusion. He looked to the new recruits for an explanation. One of them coughed and hesitated.


    "Say it. Do you think I am wrong?" he asked. The boy did not know what to say.


    "Lady Jian... She follows Valley Master Ed around, but... She does not leave his side no matter what he says." the boy said. Jia Lin frowned and looked around at those watching. They all thought he was making a fool of him self. It was clear, this Ed did not even care for her attention. It was her that insists to stay beside him. If the tension was not bad enough, silence could be heard vibrating through the arena, except Ed''s steps slowly walking away. The sound of his feet as he moved slowly out of the arena was like a slp to his face. Suddenly all the emperor sage academy disciples stared glaring at Ed''s feet. Couldn''t he walk away faster? Did he have to move so slowly as though rubbing their embarrassment on their face?


    Why were they the once embarrassed? He was clearly the one that got rejected by the academy.


    The silence was broken by someone clearing his throat.


    "Well, this was uneventful. Hey, boy! How about you come with me?" the old man from before said. His words caused Ed to pause. This man looked like a beggar yet he had the mind to speak at such a time? Everyone looked completely amused. As if the Valley master was not embarrassed enough, an old beggar wants to take him in as a disciple? They were all clearly holding back their laughter.


    "Ya! Old pervert. What makes you think you can talk to my brother Ed like that?" Lady Jian said and the man gave her a wronged look.


    "How did I become a pervert?" the man asked.


    "Speak fast, why are you sprouting rubbish?" Lady Jian asked impatiently. In a blink he was standing before her. Everyone was startled. Blink! That was surely the blink technique! Those well taught inner disciples saw through this. No one under the soul awakening stage could do this. Who was this man?


    Lady Jian did not seem to care about this though, nor did the man care about her unsurprised nature.


    "Little girl, I am a respectable man. What about me looks like a pervert?" he smile widely make her frown more.


    "Have you looked in the mirror?" she said carelessly. The man could only sigh and turned to look at Ed.


    "Boy, I saw you contemplating while the game went on. I could help you out with that. Why stay in this little valley when you can come out? What do you think?" the man said. Every one paused. He was contemplating on the stage? Was that even possible? They stared at the man skeptically.


    "You will take me from here?" Ed asked.


    "Yes. Are you interested?" the man looked at Ed expectantly.


    "Sure." Ed answered causing the man to sigh a relief.


    "That''s good. I''ve never taken a disciple before, I thought it would be harder." he laughed with his head leaned back.


    "Who said I accepted to be your disciple?" Ed asked.


    "But..." the man sighed, " it is really hard then." he mumbled. Then he looked up at abruptly with a smile.


    "How about if you come with me first, if you teach you how to enter the spirit awakening, you decide." Ed frowned at his words. Did this man really want him to be his disciple that much? He knew his split contemplative stage was rare, but was it really that special? He nodded in agreement and the man who he thought could not smile any wider, smiled wider.


    "Even if you are not up to standard, you can be of use to me for a while." Lady Jian huffed.


    "No, you are not coming with me." the man said and she frowned.


    "Yes, I am. I am going with brother Ed." she frowned at his words.


    "Where I am going, I don''t want your people following me." the man said slightly seriously.


    "I don''t care! I am going with brother Ed!" she insisted.


    "Well, have fun now." the man said and vanished with Ed. Lady Jian fumed at first, she stomped around the arena so madly people started to get worried. Then she sat on the floor and started wailing loudly.


    "No need to worry, Lady Jian, the emperor sage academy is the best place for you to...." before Jia Lin could finish his words, a red eyed Lady Jian attacked him with all her strength.


    Kill!


    Her mind was completely gone. The only thing she wanted to do was tear Jia Lin apart. Jia Lin felt an immediate danger as ice cold light flared his way. He activated all his shield, calling up every last drop of strength from his core to protect his body.


    Before the light could reach him, Lu Guan appeared in front of him and blocked the incoming flare with a palm. Even though it was like waking a way a fly to others looking, Lu Guan Himself was shaken as he had used forty percent of his strength to swat the flare away. Still, he felt the backlash. He swallowed the blood that rose from his throat and looked cautiously at the girl below.


    "Why resort to killing my disciple?" he said to her. The mad look in her eyes had not dissolved, as she glared at him with killing intent.


    "Move or die with him." she said coldly.

 7 Old pervert 2

    "Girl, calm down and tell me what me disciple has done wrong." Lu Guan said cautiously. His words did nothing to calm Lady Jian, whose red eyes turned even madder.


    "Then die with him." she said and a stream of power burst from her. Everyone in the arena felt it. It was a terrifying power, yet inside was lased with anger and hatred beyond anything. She pulled from her space, a dark cold sword. The sword seemed to take on some of her madness and rang a blood thirsty screech through the arena.


    Lu Guan pulled seventy percent of his strength from his core and readied to tear this little brat apart. He saw her attack him with fury, swinging her deadly sword at his form. For someone in this stage of anger, he would have expected that she loose the ability to make calculated attacks, but he was wrong. He took out a wipe from his space and blocked the incoming sword holding it in place. Even though it was for a second, she used her other hand and made a slapping motion at his face. He swung out of her way, taking Jia Lin with him, as his string snapped.


    Now a far way from her, he looked down at his destroyed spirit weapon. Not just him, the entire tribal chiefs and those from the academy stared at the string. This string was a piece of a soul weapon Ejrie; a two string musical instrument. Though the soul weapon was lost to time, the string itself was a high grade spirit weapon. His eyes trailed to the sword in Lady Jian''s hand and disbelief and greed shrouded his eyes.


    The Valley chief saw the look in Lu Guan eyes and frowned.


    "Old friend, have you forgotten so soon what I told you? What ever you do, do not harm her. Your entire academy will not be able to stand the backlash of your actions.


    "You wish I stand still as she kills my disciple?" Lu Guan threw the valley chief a cold look. Yes, he had not forgotten. Even more so now that he had seen what arsenal she holds. She must be from a great power he could not afford to offend. But, how does he reason with someone that has lost all reason?


    "Niece Jian, what happened? Where is Ed?" the valley chief asked looking around for his adopted son. There was no way this girl would be too far from him. What did Lu Guan''s disciple say about Ed that would cause her to go mad? This girl did not care to show any emotion unless it concerned his adopted son.


    "That old pervert took him. It''s all that idiot''s fault! If he had accepted brother Ed into their stinking academy, that old pervert would not have taken him!" Lady Jian started to cry and complain. The eyes of the returning older generation who had been pursuing those who took the jade coffin turned complicated. They now understood what happened.


    The tribal chiefs all sighed. They all knew that Lady Jian never left Ed''s side. Someone taking him away without taking her too was enough to make her go mad. They never expected this reaction, but it was not too much of a surprise. This cold girl would turn completely adorable when she was with Ed.


    "What old pervert?" the valley chief frowned. Ed was someone he trained himself. He had plans for that boy and tried everything to keep him in the valley. Even though he allowed Ed to participate in the admissions, he already knew that Lu Guan would not allow someone that started training that late in life join the academy.


    "He took Brother Ed as his disciple. I said I wanted to go too, but he just left." Lady Jian started to cry loudly. Many were not sure what to do. They did not wish to offend her, and Ed was the only one that could tell her what to do.


    "Who did he say he was?" the Valley chief asked but, Lady Jian continued to cry.


    Lu Guan looked to his fear stricken disciple, Jia Lin in question.


    "The man did not say. But he was at least of the soul awakening stage because he used the blink technique." Jia Lin said and Lady Jian''s attention returned to him. He shivered as her angry red eyes met his.


    "He at least found himself a master. That is good enough for someone starting training at his age." Lu Guan said and a wave of anger attacked his being. He looked at the angry Lady Jain and regretted saying a word. He cursed himself as he returned her look with a smile.


    "Girl, why don''t you come and stay at the Emperor sage academy while we look for him. The emperor sage academy will put in all it''s resources to find him for you. How about that? Staying here, you will not be able to find him." Lu Guan offered.


    The valley chief cursed the cunning Lu Guan in his heart. He had always known that Lady Jian was only here for a small time, but since Ed arrived a year later, she had stayed at his side insistently, he had almost forgotten that she would have to leave. Now, Lu Guan was baiting her to go with him. Without Ed here, would she even want to stay? He knew her family would not interfere with issues in the valley, but the fact that she was here, meant they would be watching one way or another. To the Valley chief, it was an assurance of some kind.


    Before Lady Jian could say anything, two men appear above her.


    "My Lady, we should return to the clan." one of them said. This development caused those around to freeze. Where did they come from? Where they always here? Why did no one feel them?


    Lu Guan frowned and the Valley chief sighed. It seems she would really leave this time.


    "But, Brother Ed...." Lady Jian started to cry again.


    "My Lady, he is not in the valley anymore. There is no reason for you to stay." the second man said. His words caused Lady Jian to stop crying instantly. She looked his way with narrowed eyes.


    "Did you do this?" she asked and the man went silent.


    "Did you invite that man to come and take Brother Ed away?" she said and the man looked at his colleague who looked away from him.


    "Dear seniors, we were just pursuing the demon race. From the looks of it, you must have seen all that transpired. Why did you not interfere?" Lu Guan asked. He could not tell the level of the men''s martial arts. This only meant they were way above his level. With people like this near by, they would have caught those from the demon race easily. Even though they were stronger than him, he still felt the need to ask. It is the job of every on to stand against the demon race if they are faced with it. No matter what you may have at hand. Why did they do nothing?


    The two men glanced at Lu Guan coldly.


    "Forgive me seniors asking, but why did you not stop them? From the looks of things, that girl was marked by the demon god. This is not something to be ignored. If you were here, why did you do nothing?" Lu Guan asked again.


    "Who said we were here?" one of them asked. Lu Guan frowned. Sure, none of them saw them, but still, are they saying they just got here? From the look of things, this girl was an important member of their clan. There was no way they would have not been here. He laughed darkly inside. So, they were denying this? Even if he wanted to tell the world that they did nothing, he did not see them at all. These people did not care about any one but the lady before them. Even to let a marked demon girl be taken away.


    "Let''s go." Lady Jian said. Her tears had dried and her demure took on a cold calm.


    "My Lady has decided to go back at last?" the two men''s eyes shinned brightly.


    "When we return, I will enter the aunty Iyan''s mountain." she said coldly and they both froze.


    "My Lady? Why there?" they shivered at the thought."


    "I will enter seclusion and level up fast. When I''m strong enough, I will kill you myself." she said and vanished. The other man looked at his colleague who the Lady wished to kill and sighed. The man''s eyes turned grave as both men vanished, leaving the valley quiet and gloomy.

 8 Old pervert 3

    The darkness that engulfed Ed only lasted for a second. When Ed blinked, he now stood in an inn somewhere that looked exactly like the Valley. Disoriented, he looked around trying to figure out where he was.


    "Sit and eat." a familiar voice said and he looked in that direction. It was the old pervert. He sighed as he noticed Lady Jian''s way of addressing this man had stuck with him so quickly. He sat as told as the man called for food to be brought. The man saw Ed still looking around, trying to figure out where they were and sighed.


    "We are just outside the valley. This town is where people wishing to enter the valley stay and wait for an opportunity." the man said. Seeing that Ed no more looked around, but looked outside the window, he paused.


    "Usually this is where you ask who I am." the man said. Ed stared at him as though waiting for him to continue.


    "You don''t talk much, do you?" he asked Ed. When no reply came, he took in a breath and looked as though in thought before saying, "I am Tie Nse. The patriarch of the heaven alliance." the man announced with a proud expression. He nodded his head with pride, he heard no sound from Ed and thought he had been silent in shock this time. He looked up expecting to see a shocked stiff Ed but met and blank expression.


    "Oh? You don''t know what the heaven alliance is? You see, all the gates are door ways into different worlds including the god hand gate. There are five sects, two alliances and two clans that rule the Ohm realm. The two alliances rule over two gates each and the clans take three each. This Godhand gate and the Earthbound gate is under my command. I am the patriarch of the heaven alliance!" he raised his head high and his grin widened even further. He peeked at Ed''s face and was met with the same blank stare.


    "You really are an old pervert." Ed commented, causing his face to freeze.


    "What? You don''t believe me? I really am! Do you know how many people want to be my disciple? I am the great Tie Nse, the..."


    "How does who you are help me?" Ed asked and Tie Nse froze again.


    "Well, I have all the resources to make you stronger, of course. Who I am, helps you!" the old man insisted. The food was brought by a little boy. Ed waited as the old pervert ate. When he was done, the boy returned with the bill. Tie Nse looked at the bill and a sly look crossed his eyes.


    "Well, disciple, the first quest to becoming a true master is to bear all weight. Only then would you be stronger." Tie Nse said and vanished. The boy turned stiff with fear, but still remembered to look at Ed for his payment. Ed sighed and paid before leaving the Inn.


    He made sure his hood covered his face as he walked out. Keeping his head down, he entered a store and bought a map. He considered staying the night in the inn before starting his journey the next day, but he did not want to stay in the valley any longer. He needed to find a place and train till he could reach his goal. Silently, he made his way from the town into the forest. He made sure to stay away from the main road as he passed.


    He had been travelings for two days now without seeing the old pervert and honestly, he liked it that way. He needed to find a place with dense spirit land and try to break through to spirit picking stage. Slowly, he made his way through the forest till the sun started to fall. He went round picking some wood to prepare a fire for the night, spotting clearly a good cave to rest.


    When he returned from picking wood, the night was darker, but he saw a light coming from the cave he chose. Cautiously, he approached, he wondered if someone else had taken the cave while he was gone.


    Inside was the old pervert siting on a log in front of a fire roasting a whole bird. He frowned at the sight of the man. He wondered what brought him back.


    "Why are you here?" he asked.


    "Come boy, sit. Let''s eat!" Tie Nse said cheerfully.


    "How did know I was here?" Ed asked taking a seat on the log opposite him.


    "I just went away for a while, I always knew where you were. Afraid I had forgotten about you?" Tie Nse laughed heartily.


    "I was hoping you would forget about me." Ed muttered ripping the large bird''s leg and taking a bite.


    "What? Boy! I am the great Tie Ns..." Tie Nse fumed.


    "What do you want?" Ed interrupted him.


    "You don''t recognize my greatness, do you not wish me to train you?" Tie Nse asked haughtily. He harrumphed and looked away making Ed frown. This old pervert, how did he reach his powers with such a childish mind, Ed wondered.


    "You probably don''t have anything to offer me so stop boasting." Ed said as he ate.


    "What? I have a great contemplation technique that would help you. After all, you can split contemplate so it should be good for you. Do you not want it?"


    "How do you know I can split contemplate?" Ed frowned.


    "Anyone with my level of power can see it, boy. You are not able to hide it. I can teach you. So, do you want it?"


    "Sure. This technique you talked about, can it really help my split contemplation?"


    "From what I see boy, when you split cultivate, your body is doing it on it''s own. The type of energy it is absorbing is completely different from the one you absorb when you are consciously contemplating."


    "There are different types of energy?" Ed asked.


    "Of course! Though people only feel it when they reach the spirit awareness, it is there. Every one has an affinity for a certain kind of energy, Physical, Astral, Causal, Mental, Etheric, and heavenly qi. Each energy is sourced from the plane of it''s name. From when a person first starts training, he is absorbing one of this energies. When they reach the spirit awakening, they can now sense it much stronger. Your body is absorbing a different energy than you do when you contemplate. Until the two energies are at the same level, you will not be able to do a spirit picking."


    "Then, this technique can help me absorb energies consciously?"


    "Yes. But you must be prepared. Having more than one energy is rare. Although it is good, you will be slower than others when leveling up. But, as I here, it is not much of a problem for you. Even so, spirit picking is not just a process of picking a heavenly plane energy. You are branding your self to the plane. It is a very painful process. Some people die when they don''t succeed. You spirit picking from two planes means twice the pain. Twice the difficulty." Tie Nse said solemnly.


    "Planes? I don''t understand." Ed frowned and Tie Nse sighed.


    "You really are just a village boy. There are many planes of existence. Physical, Astral, Causal, Mental, Etheric and soul planes. All of this planes, except the physical and soul plane exist in the metaphysical. The metaphysical worlds are of different realms. Like where we are. This is but a realm. We contemplate to be able to perceive the planes and touch the energies."


    "Then, what about the physical and the soul plane?"


    "The physical is an inaccessible world. Once you have ascended to the metaphysical, you can not return to the physical. You can only go up till you reach the soul plane. That, is even very rare."


    "What about places like Emerald and Jurazel? Where are they in the planes?" Ed asked.


    "They are in the physical. But boy, these two places you mentioned, only those high up at the Godhand gate themselves know of them in texts. How did you come by these names?" Tie Nse''s eyes narrowed.

 9 Baju Valley 1

    Ed looked at the old man''s piercing eyes for a second and looked away.


    "I only heard of it in passing. Not sure where." Ed said. How could he explain that that was where he was from? That that was home?


    "Fine. I will not ask if you don''t want to say." Tie Nse let the matter drop.


    "I want to test how many energies you can perceive before I give you this technique. Do you want it now?" he said slyly. Ed nodded and Tie Nse''s smile widened.


    "Good! Then it is time you accept me as your master." he said and Ed stared at him blankly.


    "What? What? It''s simple, bow to me and say, ''master teach me.''" Tie Nse instructed as he saw Ed unmoved face.


    "You really are an old pervert." Ed said.


    "What? You don''t want the technique?" Tie Nse said loudly with his palm cupped around his ear, acting as though he could not hear what Ed said. Ed sighed and made a stiff bow while sitting.


    "Old Pervert, teach me." he said and Tie Nse nodded his head proudly before he registered Ed''s words and paused.


    "How is that even a bow? Say master, that is the official ceremony for taking a master." Tie Nse fumed as he instructed Ed.


    "This is as far as my waist bends. This is all I''m offering, do you want it?" Ed said and Tie Nse frowned.


    "Fine I''ll take it.....wait, you are talking as though you are selling me something. This is why I don''t take disciples. This younger generation talk is too tiring." Tie Nse complained.


    "So, what now?" Ed asked.


    "Come closer, give me your hand. Let me test how many Energies you are absorbing at a time." he said and Ed did as told.Tie Nse''s placed two fingers on Ed''s wrist ad sent a wave of energy from his core into Ed. The energy felt like a warm hug and sharp knife as it passed through Ed. This feeling was very comfortable and prickly at the same time.


    Narrowing his eyes, Tie Nse withdrew his hand with a frown. He looked into the expectant eyes of Ed in shock.


    "I feel four energies within you. How is this even possible?" he said.


    "Is that good?" Ed asked with a frown.


    "Good? One an not really say. Impossible? Even more so."


    "Speak clearly. Does this mean the technique will not work?"


    "It will, but boy, what you can do, should not be possible. It is rare that two energies could flow within one person. Usually when that occurs, one of the energies eats the other out or the person dies. I assumed if you have stayed this long in this state, without any of these two happening, then you must have a jade body. That is why I took you as my disciple."


    "Jade body?" Ed asked.


    "This is a type of body created when one has reincarnated 36 times in the same region. The person becomes almost indestructible. Even countering energies in the skin would not do anything to him."


    "But I am not." Ed said. He was sure of where he was from. There was no way he had reincarnated 36 times.


    "I can not feel it from you. You must not be one. But looking at the energies in your core, they are existing without eating each other out, without conflict. This is impossible." Tie Nse said solemnly.


    "Then, what?" Ed asked.


    "Well, this is new for me. I''d even swear that this is new for everyone. The first thing I want to see is if you will survive your spirit picking. If you do, then we will see."


    "You sound as if you are sure I will not." Ed frowned.


    "Forgive me boy, but you are canceling the basis upon which the metaphysical exist. The laws of the metaphysical insists that you will not survive this."


    "Since all these laws bear no resemblance to me, it means it''s out comes are so too. I will not die, not here." Ed said confidently.


    "Fine. First of all we must make sure that you can survive the pain of a spirit picking of multiple energies. Before I give you this technique, you must train. Come." Tie Nse grabbed Ed and they vanished.


    When they appeared, Ed found himself in a forest. He was not quite sure this was the same one they were in.


    "This is Baju valley." Tie Nse said and Ed turned to look at him. He could here howling from afar.


    "This is where the entire Ohm realm sends the worst criminals." Tie Nse said solemnly. " no one can enter and leave as he likes. Even me. Appearing here is only possible because I have a key." his words caused Ed to frown darkly.


    "Are you trying to kill me before I even do my spirit picking?"


    "Don''t worry, there is no criminal here at the moment. Every one dies within the first night. Even though you are like me, at the soul awakening stage."


    "Exactly my point." Ed hissed.


    "You must reach the other side of the valley. There, is an inn. I will be waiting there." Tie Nse said and vanished. Ed wished he could drag the old pervert back and skin him alive.


    "Never take strangers as your master, Ed." he whispered to him self in anger, looking around the dark and eerie forest. He suddenly felt as though he was being watched.

 10 Baju Valley 2

    Ed could not close his eyes the entire night. He dared not for fear of never waking up. It seemed sometime around midnight, true darkness descended. Not even trees were sight. He felt as though the world had turned of a lamp. He wondered if the valley had entered darkness or his sight had been taken from him. Black; that was all that filled his vision. For the first time since Ed had come to this world, he truly panicked.


    Still, he prided himself a skilled hunter and knew it was times like this when he need to stay quiet. Since he could not see, he did not believe that he could not hear. Trying to still his panicked breath, he listened to the night. Not even a cricket sounded, but that did not scare him. Since he had arrived here, he had heard not a sound as though nothing lived here.


    Even though he had been told no human being lived here, he still wondered about other things crawling in the dark. Did this darkness take away all their sight too? That old pervert never said anything about other creatures. Staying in this land so long, he had heard of creatures so different from where he came from. Here, many dragons were rare but real, creatures he could only ever dream of.


    He felt the temperature in the air drop, causing him to wonder if the valley intended to freeze him to death. If the temperature dropped far enough, he was not so worried about freezing than being the only thing here with warm. His body heat would be like a beacon for what ever is watching. Closing his eyes, he flicked his palm and produced a robe. He slowly sat on the ground trying to make as little sound as ever. He threw the robe around himself, covering his entire form and stopped circulated energy in his core. Forcing his body temperature to slowly mimic that of the surrounding.


    But that was not the only thing that could spot him out. Smell. He forced his body to sit so still as he sucked in the unfiltered energy in the air which was accompanied with the smell of the air around him into his skin. Soon, his smell was no different than others. Still as a rock, he waited.


    It felt like an eternity before he felt light filter through his closed eyes. Pressure like never before pressed upon his head. Opening his eyes, all he saw as the sky as though he was suspended above ground. It felt like a mountain sat on top his head. The pressure kept growing, making his head seem as though it would be crushed. Blood flowed from his eyes, ears and nose. He noticed the pressure only came from above, below, it was as though he sat on air. He felt nothing but wet rock under his feat. Compared to the pressure from above, the wet rock seemed like a feathered pillow.


    He had to think fast, how does he get out of this? He dared not move for fear that his body would be flattened by the pressure. As the pressure increased, he panicked, causing his body to exit it''s previous state and shiver. It was as though the movement caused the pressure to double. He stiffened and rolled his eyes up hoping to see what pressured his head so. He noticed a ban of clouds just over his head. Was he carrying the sky?


    This assumption did nothing to help his panic. Taking in a deep breath, he still once more and tried to feel the energy beneath him. He did not know anything but the utter fact, he needed to distribute the energy or else he will be squashed. Closing his eyes, he tried to concentrate on the energy flow inside him. He paid attention to the internal working in his head area.


    He could feel the bountiful energy pounding away at his skull like a hammer at a blacksmiths, trying to get into his skull but was met with a barrier. He wondered, if the pressure above him was energy and if he could use it to cultivate. He opened the gate above his crown-chakra1 and a gush of energy rushed in. he had forgotten to open the gate bellow. He felt the energy fill him so fast, he was going to burst. Rushing, he let it out below him.


    The pressure above him increased significantly, but he could not feel it except the occasional brush on his nerves, veins and organs as it passed through him.


    It felt like an eternity as he perfected maintaining balance and becoming a perfect gate way, allowing his body to stay completely balanced. He felt as his powers increased slowly, bringing him closer to the spirit picking stage. He felt so close, yet so far. Was it the different energies he is constantly absorbing that is causing this?


    Time trickle on. He was not sure how long he had been sitting there. When he opened his eyes, the next time, he was sitting on yellow rolling sand expanded as far a the eye could see. He sighed when he noticed the storm fast moving his way.


    Just outside the valley was flat untamed land. After the massive plains of farmland, stood a lone resturant. It looked old and shabby from the outside, but the inside was warm and sturdy. A tall woman wiped plates as she stared at Tie Nse drinking while enjoying the warmth from the dancing fire.


    "Your earth bound gate is receiving some serious heat, won''t you go and handle it?" the woman asked Tie Nse.


    "Let them do it them selves. I''ve got better things to do." Tie Nse mildly said, whirling the wine in his cup.


    "Better things? You mean sitting here all day? I''m tired of your old face. Won''t you leave already?" the woman frowned.


    "Are you running a business or not? What kind of business woman rejects a customer?"


    "You have not paid for anything at all."


    "I will pay when I leave."


    "Then leave already!"


    "Leave? I''m not. Can''t you leave a busy man in peace? I am now a master you know? I can''t bother with petty things like the Earthbound gate. I am too busy doting on my disciple." Tie Nse boasted.


    "Disciple? Is the wine your disciple?" the woman scuffed.


    "What? You don''t believe me? He is out training. When he is done, he is to meet me here. Me, being a good master is waiting for my disciple, why can''t you see that?" his childish protest did nothing to help his case.


    "I''m sure you took on a disciple so that you can use him as an excuse to not answer when your alliance calls for you. I still don''t understand how a lazy man like you ended up as patriarch? Was your master blind?"


    "Ya, Madam Ge! You left your entire clan to run a restaurant, yet you are talking about me?"


    "Your master must have..." she started shaking her head as though imagining what the former patriarch had gone through.


    "Don''t talk about that smelly old man! He said if I become patriarch, I get to do what ever I want and go where I want. It is like being a king, but even better, he had said. Now, every single time, those old men at the alliance are calling me about this and that. King? As if! This old man only trained so that he would have a long life to enjoy as he likes." Tie Nse complained so much, one would think life had done him wrong.


    "If the heavens did not curse him with a disciple like you, would he have had to trick you to take the patriarch seat? Tsk..Your master is probably turning in his grave at your attitude. Are you not ashamed?" Madam Ge shook her head in pity.


    "That old man? He is smiling in his grave thinking he succeeded in trapping me in. is that how a master shoud treat his student? Look at me, dotting on my student like it should be." Tie Nse said proudly.


    "A master like you, what kind of student an you even get?"


    "I know what you are doing. You want to annoy me so that I will leave. It will not work!"


    "Oh, I know. You must have picked some weak thing so that your work will be easier. A lazy master like you, I can only imagine what kind of student you will pick."


    "Ya! I was hoping he would only be slightly special, but the boy had to go too far with it. Do you know how much I''m regretting it? I now have to put in more effort than any other person to train him. All my peaceful year are over." Tie Nse complained.


    "If he was that special, you would be putting your energy to train him instead of sitting here day after day. Are you sure you even have a disciple?" Madam Ge scuffed in disbelief.


    "Why do you think I am here? I''m waiting for the boy to fight his way out of the Baju valley. See how much effort I''m putting in? Does any other master put in such?" Tie Nse said in anger before sinking into sadness, "Oh, my peaceful days." he did not look at the woman to see her frozen form.

 11 Changing times 1

    It took some time for madam Ge''s composure to return.


    "Say, old Tie, are you sure he is your disciple or your enemy? Did this boy wrong you in his past life?" she stared at him incredulously.


    "What? I just said he is my disciple. Has making too much wine blocked your ears?" Tie Nse asked mildly, his eyes trained at the fire.


    "Baju Valley, that is not a place you send a precious disciple. It''s not even a place you send your enemy." she stared at him in disbelief.


    "Like I said, he is beyond special." Tie Nse said solemnly, taking a sip of his wine.


    "No body is that special. That is not a training ground, old Tie. That is an execution ground. Have you lost your mind?" Madam Ge asked.


    "It doesn''t matter any way, surviving there will raise his chances of staying alive when he returns."


    "If he will die here, why not let him die in peace?"


    "He refuses to die, so this is the path he must take."


    "So, you have been sitting here for ten years waiting for your disciple you placed in the valley? You really are mad. Even someone like you would not survive a day in there. You know that. Do you really believe he will come out?" Madam Ge asked in disbelief. She had always said this old man was not alright in the head, but she had never thought he was this far gone.


    "He is not dead." Tie Nse said softly, but she still heard him.


    "How do you know?"


    "The life stone. It has not shattered yet." Tie Nse said and the woman looked at the stone on the small table beside him. She had seen it the moment he walked in, but had never thought he had made the rock a life stone.


    "Impossible. Do you know the implications of what you are saying? The Baju Valley has weakened?" she stared at his bowed head.


    "If it has, all the patriarchies of the realm would have known."


    "Then you made a mistake. He is not in that valley or that stone is not connected to his life. That stone cannot possibly be connected to someone in the Baju valley."


    "I told you before; he is special. There has never been anything like him ever seen before. If not, those who had seen were too busy staring with their mouth open to leave a record."


    "Still, isn''t Baju Valley a little much?" she frowned. If such a person exists, shouldn''t he be more careful with training him?"


    "Baju Valley?" Tie Nse scuffed, "The heavens themselves, wish to kill him."


    Silence took over the restaurant as Madam Ge no more wanted him to leave. She too, wished to see the person that survives the Baju Valley.


    Silence may have taken the restaurant, but that could not be said for the rest of the world.


    Lady Jian had entered seclusion to train the moment she returned, only leaving a sentence behind. "When I come out, I will kill you." she had said to one of the elders who returned with her. This sent her entire clan into uproar. Many wanted to know what Elder Hu had done.


    Lady Jian''s parents had rushed over to see her when they heard she had returned but she had not waited for them, swiftly entering seclusion before they arrived.


    The emperor sage academy was preparing for the Godhand meet in five years. Any one that passed would have the chance to be chosen by the Godhand gate. To be trained with the resources of the Godhand gate, that person was sure to become a power in his generation.


    Not only the emperor sage academy, even other sects and schools in the area were preparing for this. Yes, there was still five years remaining, but what was five years in their world?


    The Godhand meet is a competition between those of the spirit merging stage to the spirit wakening stage. This was an opportunity for the Godhand gate to see the talents of the younger generation and accept them into their fold. This was a necessary ritual as all the gates wished to maintain their strength and this was a way to make sure that they have the best talents across all generations.


    The entire Sage empire and other empires where getting ready. Like the sage empire, most royal families only sent their children to the best schools to train them, but the children maintained their titles. This was necessary as the empires wanted to take the entire glory when their children entered the Godhand gate.


    Already, many of the younger generation''s names were resounding across differentempires. This was normal around this time as many wishing to participate in the Godhand meet would be venturing out of their sects and schools, coincidentally meeting those of the same generation and challenging them to a fight.


    These coincidences would usually resound across empires after the clash, raising the reputation of the ones in question. These coincidences were not all ego trips, but also helped the younger generation gauge their opponents strength before the Godhand meet.


    These coincidences were the talk of ever body as they loved this time the most. People gathered around tarverns and inns discussing the powers displayed by the younger generation. When fights broke, news spread so fast and those that can approach to watch do with kin eyes so that they shall tell all that wish to hear. The entire regions under the Godhand gate were very entertained.


    But of course, these also caused conflicts between large powers as as stars were made, potential fell too those powers that had their disciples killed by a stronger opponent did not take kindly to this, causing a feud across generation.


    While these happened, Ed remained in the Baju valley. He had lost track of time and did not know how long he had been there. All through, he had gone through different terrains and experiences. Forests to mountains to deserts to sea. The more environments he passed, the more difficult it was. But he triumphed all till the air around him stiffened as he sat at the bottom of a great sea, relaxed and still. All went black, like his first night in the valley, but he did not panic. Soon, he opened his eyes to a farming plain and a sun down restaurant far ahead.


    The moment he opened his eyes, all the patriarchs and heads of the great powers in the realms, all those who controlled the gates, including Tie Nse and Madam Ge sitting in the restaurant were alerted.


    Someone had escaped the Baju valley.

 12 Changing Times 2

    Ed made his way towards the restaurant at the middle of the plains. As he moved, the air, leaves, grass, seemed to avoid him. If one looked closer, they would notice they were moving in sync with him, allowing him to move past without causing a change to anything in his way. If one looked in his direction, they would not even see him or sense him. He was so much one with the environment, he was almost not there. Even though the plain was flat and the plants were no taller than his knees, one would still miss him passing.


    He opened the rickety restaurant door to see a woman looking at him as though he had defied the heavens. He looked to the side to meet the grinning face of Tie Nse.


    "I see you have reached the perfect foundation state. It is time you try breaking through to the heaven picking stage." the grinning Tie Nse said.


    "Wait... he has not yet done his heaven picking and you put him in..." she could not even continue. This mad man, did this boy offend him in a past life?


    "Give it to me." Ed said. Seeing the old pervert, he had thought he would be angry, but he was not. He wanted to get the training technique he had been promised.


    "What? Oh, the technique? Worry not. I have a perfect place for you to break through." Tie Nse seemed completely happy as he talked.


    "Where? Boy, I think you should have chosen another master. Can you trust this old thing after that?" Madam Ge said.


    "What do you mean? If he cannot trust me, his master, who can he trust?!" Tie Nse fumed.


    "Special or not, no one would put their disciple in that valley. Say, boy. You should not go any where with him till he has told you where he is taking you. Baju valley is only one of many scary places. This old fool can pick any one." Madam Ge advised.


    "It seems I have stayed here too long. Humph! What do you know about raising a special disciple?" Tie Nse said and started walking out, "Come, dear disciple."


    He had gotten to the door when he noticed Ed just watching him pass, only then did he pause. Madam Ge broke into a fit of laughter when she saw the situation.


    "The boy is not stupid enough to follow you again." she said, completely happy at Tie Nse''s misfortune.


    "Boy, what are you standing there for?" Tie Nse asked Ed.


    "Are you going to give me the technique or not?" Ed asked.


    "Of course I will. I need to take you to a place that will help you break through." Tie Nse said righteously.


    "Is there a possibility I will die there?"


    "No... but, who can truly say." Tie Nse said cryptically.


    "Boy, I am Hila Ge, but you can call me Madam Ge. What is your name?" this woman no older than him calling him boy was weird. But he understood that appearance was not everything. She could be much older than him.


    "His name is...." Tie Nse drew a blank, "Boy, what is your name?" Madam Ge paused and stared at Tie Nse incredulously.


    "Boy, don''t bother anymore about this old fool. I can introduce you to a bunch of masters much better than he could ever be." Madam Ge said encouragingly, then her tone sank dangerously, "In fact, if you stay a little longer, you will be able to pick the one you like the most." her eyes darkened further.


    "Exactly why we should leave. I know you a little more than she, you don''t want to meet everybody right?" Tie Nse said. Ed understood that powerful people were coming. He did not want to meet anyone or be involved in what ever drama might occur. He nodded and Tie Nse appeared by his side, grabbed his shoulder and they vanished. This caused Madam Ge to sigh as, immediately they left, nine people appeared in the restaurant.


    Ed and Tie Nse appeared on top a mountain. Tie Nse turned and led Ed into a cave. When inside, he flicked his wrist and the torches in the cave lit up. When he and Ed sat comfortably, he used one large rock to close the cave with the wave of his hand.


    He looked at ed with a rarely seen serious expression. "You must wonder what was the purpose of letting you come out of the Baju Valley." he said.


    "It''s a training ground." Ed answered and Tie Nse''s eyes lit up.


    "I suspected so. I was not quite sure until I met you. Do you know why people die there?"


    "They experience all the energies at once." Ed answered and Tie Nse nodded.


    "When I first went there, I could feel all the energies at once. Well, at my level of power, this is normal. We can at least sense all of it, but can only truly feel those natural to us. That place forced you to feel all the energies at once, even absorb it. At first I had thought, well, it''s because I can not feel all the energies, so this place will surely kill me. If someone could, it would be the perfect training ground for a perfect foundation. In a way, it made me excited. But at the same time, it reminded me why it is such a dangerous place and a natural execution ground. Because, no one could feel and train in all the energies."


    "Until me." Ed said.


    "Yes. You want to level up safely, but that is impossible as you are absorbing the energies at different rates. This is caused by the environment. Some places have more of one energy than the other. Not only would it take longer for you to reach the spirit picking, the unequal energies swirling within you could be catastrophic. Even though I could feel them in complete sync within you, it is best to be safe. That place may be the most dangerous place for everyone, but it is the safest place for you." Tie Nse explained and Ed nodded at his logic. He could feel that he was truly ready to do his spirit picking now. That place was created for him.


    "You walked out of it, how do you feel?" Tie Nse asked.


    "I''m not truly sure I have walked out of it." Ed said and Tie Nse frowned.


    "What do you mean?"


    "I am not quite sure, either I am not out of the Baju Valley or it came out with me." his words caused Tie Nse to fall into deep thought. There was silence fore a while before Tie Nse finally looked up at Ed.


    "The Baju Valley is special, but not the only of it''s kind. There are many things that call emit all the energies at once. But only a hand full can make people who come across it feel all the energies. Never have they been really understood or used like you have. Is it possible it is not only a training ground? Tell me all that happened inside." Tie Nse said and Ed took in a breath and explained what happened in the Baju Valley. When he finished, silence enveloped the cave again.


    Tie Nse retreated back into his thoughts as he analyzed all Ed told him. Suddenly, his eyes shun as he looked up at Ed.


    "Something only you can use, can also be seen as an inheritance. Is it possible you inherited the Baju Valley?" Tie Nse said in awe.

 13 Changing Times 3

    Madam Ge looked at the people in her restaurant and sighed.


    "Hila, how has business been?" a chatty young man said and Madam Ge threw him a glare.


    "Sorry, I mean Madam Ge." he chuckled softly.


    "That is not why we are here. Someone stepped out of the Baju Valley, who was it?" a frowning man said.


    "Straight to the point as always, Se Tibe." the young man smiled.


    "No one has been sent there for thirty years. Who would survive that long?" a beautiful woman said. She was veiled in soft white, making her out as ethereal.


    "The demon general of old is the only person I can think of. Still, that is very impossible that he survived that valley all theses centuries." an old man said. They all looked to Madam Ge in question.


    "Stop all your assumptions. It is Tie Nse''s student." Madam Ge said and they all frowned. Soon, their eyes turned to a man by the corner.


    "Patriarch never said anything about having a student." the old man shrugged.


    "He got a new student and shoved him in the Baju Valley." Madam Ge said cleaning glasses, "In fact, you just missed them."


    Silence took the place as even the smiling young man looked to be in thought.


    "Who is this boy?" the veiled woman asked.


    "Where did he find such a person?"


    "Am I the only one who wants to know how he did it?" they started to ask at the same time.


    "I have told you what I can. This is only because you are entitled to know. Any other information..." she narrowed her eyes, "You know the rules."


    "Ha ha... Sorry Madam Ge. Of course we will pay for the information. How much do you want for it?"


    "One thousand ethereal ores." she said and they blanched.


    This price was too much to swallow. Of course, the people standing in the room are top powers in the realm, but Ethereal Ores were important training ores for those from the soul seeking stage upwards. These ores are rare as they are only available in the lightrealm. This realm was long destroyed in the heavenly calamity. Now, it is a training ground for all realms. Those of the younger generation are sent there to seek for fortune and importantly, bring back ethereal ores for their different sects and clans.


    They all glanced at each other and nodded. This was already a small amount. But the rarity of these ores caused one''s heart to bleed when giving it out.


    "Payment first." Madam Ge said and they sighed and complied.


    They all contributed equally into a space ring and threw it at Madam Ge. Only Si Namfi, the council head of the heaven alliance felt wrong by doing this. He stood in place of Patriarch Tie Nse when he was gone, and the information they were paying for in question, was about their patriarch and his new disciple. No one could take such humiliation.


    When Madam Ge had looked inside the ring and confirmed it''s amount, she put it away and sighed.


    "Tie Nse sat here for Ten plus years waiting for his disciple. The boy had been in the Baju Valley for around that same time. He said the boy was special and it was necessary he went through the valley so that his chances of surviving outside it would increase. He did not explain further. He had a life stone with him all through to know if the boy lives. The boy came out of the valley himself, completely unscathed. I can at least confirm that this boy had not yet done his spirit picking. That is all the information I have about this." Madam Ge summarized and their eyes shrunk as they all descended into thought.


    "He did not say where he found this boy?" the veiled woman asked.


    "He only said he picked up the boy hoping he was a tad bit special. He did not think he would be that special. That is all I know."


    "Did you see what this boy looked like?" Si Namfi asked.


    "Your patriarch paid to keep this a secret. I can not tell you this. So, that is all the information I have. No more questions allowed." She said and they all remained silent.


    They had never truly understood how the Baju Valley worked. This information meant a lot of things. Not only has Tie Nse gotten a one of a kind Disciple adding to the power of the heaven alliance, it means that Tie Nse knows how the Baju Valley works and this scared them. The Baju Valley is used as an execution ground because of it''s ability to kill contemplators from inside out, attacking their internal energy.


    Because of this, no clan or power has been able to make claims to it. If the Heaven alliance can now use it, that puts them at a disadvantage. What the boy gained from staying Ten plus years is unknown to them and has probably been monopolized by Tie Nse.


    Si Namfi understood what everyone must be thinking and they way they would view this. He need to returned to the alliance call for the council and protectors to analyze this. He was the first to vanish, letting those who remained frown. They too returned the same way they came as their various powers needed to sit down and figure out what to do about this.


    When they had all left the restaurant, Madam Ge sighed as she understood that trouble was brewing.

 14 Changing Times 4

    When Si Namfi appeared in the alliance, he called for an immediate meeting. All the council elders and old Protectors made their way to the great hall where Si Namfi was waiting. They saw his solemn face and assumed the worst. Before he rushed to Madam Ge''s restaurant, he had informed some high ranking elders that something went wrong in the Baju Valley and he need to check it out.


    "Council head Si, you left in a hurry for the Baju Valley. Whathappened there that is so urgent to call a meeting?" an old man asked. Si Namfi recognized him. He was Di Tietie, his rival in the council. He had once hoped that Patriarch Tie Nse would make him council head while he is gone. Even though no one was vying for the Patriarch''s seat because of his strength, the patriarch was still never around and the next best thing was the council head seat. When he lost to Si Namfi, he did not hide his dissatisfaction, causing a division in the council.


    "I left I a hurry because I felt an anomaly in the Baju Vally. A troublesome one at that. It felt as though someone had walked out of the Valley." he said causing whispers amongst those present.


    "Your imagination always shocks me, council Head Si. You abandoned the business of the clan for such a thing? Were you born yesterday or did you not know that the no one can walk out of there?" Di Tietie said and all those from his faction nodded.


    Si Namfi was not shocked that he would try to turn this against him.


    "That is why I am council head instead of you. If I had acted like your small minds, I would not have come to a recent knowledge from there." Si Namfi said and Elder Di frowned.


    "Besides, I was not the only one there. All the heads of the nine powers were there in person. They did not even bother to send representatives and rushed over." Si Namfi said and they all looked at each other.


    "What happened?" a neutral elder asked.


    "Someone really did walk out of the Baju valley and it was our patriarch''s disciple at that." this statement from Si Namfi caused loud discussions to arise from each corner of the hall.


    "Our Patriarch has no disciple." Elder Di eyes narrowed.


    "Even if he did, would he tell you?" Si Namfi said coldly and looked past him at everyone else.


    "Madam Ge said that patriarch took on a disciple, put him in the valley and waited in her restaurant for ten plus years for him to emerge. Patriarch only told her that he is special. She did say he had not yet done his spirit picking. She saw his face when he emerged, but patriarch paid her to not divulge his description." Si Namfi said and the discussions only got louder.


    "Do you think you can just give us this information and expect us to swallow it as you said? We need to confirm it before making a decision." Elder Di frowned.


    "Elder Di, if I remember, I am still the council head till the patriarch says so. As for all of you, this information was paid for. Most of you know the rules of Madam Ge''s restaurant. It is not only I who did. The entire nine powers now know that our patriarch can use the Baju Valley. Elder Di, we are all aware of why you would not like this information." Si Namfi said and Elder Di''s eyes narrowed.


    "And frankly, your selfish dreams are your own alone. I did not bring this information for us to debate about the patriarch''s disciple. I brought it because, since all other eight powers now know of this, the implications could bring us trouble." Si Namfi said and those present understood what the other powers must be thinking. As good as a disciple the patriarch got, his strength will make things difficult for them. Those from Elder Di''s faction could care less about his dreams at this point. This development was big. The entire eight powers against them? This is not good at all.


    "Now, I am hoping on one thing to keep the other powers at bay for a while. That is the patriarch. Now that they all think he can control the Baju Valley, or he had gained something from it, it only makes us more of a threat. The Baju valley is not just any place, they will not move carelessly, not without knowing the kind of damage the patriarch can do. They all looked at each other and nodded. All they could do for now, was prepare.


    Elder Di returned to his mountain and called for his son immediately. The young man no older than twenty five walked in and bowed to his father.


    "Father?" he said in greeting.


    "Wong, how is your training?" he asked. This boy before him was his pride. At the age of 12 he had already reached the stage of spirit awakening, making him the youngest in the history of the alliance. Now, he stood at the peak of spirit merging, just a step away from soul seeking. He is the strongest amongst his generation in the alliance and the cause of jealousy amongst his peers.


    "Fine, father. Did something happen at the meeting?" Di Wong asked.


    "The patriarch has taken in a disciple." Elder Di said and Di Wong''s eyes shrunk.


    "Worry not, the patriarch will have to return one day. When that happens, you must be prepared to show off your strength so that you can become his disciple." his father said calmly.


    "But father, this plan of yours could have worked if the patriarch did not take on a disciple. Now that he has... everybody knows the lineage of patriarchs passes from master to disciple. It is the alliance Law."


    "I know. Those old protectors were there when Si Namfi explained today, even if they were hiding in the shadows, I know they know of this development. If the patriarch did not have a disciple, it would have been clear on who would be the next patriarch. There is no one better than you. But there is not need to panic. The patriarch did not care enough to have disciples before. If he has taken one in now, there is still a chance he will take you in when he sees you. After all, there is no one more worthy than you."


    "And that disciple of his?"


    "How ever special he is, it does not matter. You grew up in the alliance and are more connected to it that he is. As long as the choice is between you and him, the alliance will not hesitate to choose you." Elder Di said reassuringly.


    "Father, you don''t seem to want to take his ability into consideration. Are you saying that when it is between him and I, I will loose in strength?" Di Wong frowned.


    "The patriarch took him in as a disciple more than ten years ago, is the assumption. He was only discovered because the patriarch put him in the Baju Valley for ten plus years and he walked out on his own, unharmed." Elder Di said solemnly. His words caused Di Wong''s eyes to shrink.

 15 Demon Lands 1

    Tie Nse looked at ed as though in thought. He took out a jade slip and handed it to Ed.


    "Link your spirit to it. You will be able to see the technique." he said and Ed did as he said. He felt his consciousness sink into a dream land. The world was grey and without colour. A single tree stood at the middle. On it was a green leave; the only colour as far as the eye could see. He approached the tree and tried reaching for the leave. When he touched the leave, everything turned green. Except a clear water droplet.


    The droplet fell to the green ground and suddenly, he was standing on water. He looked around and there was no land in sight; all around there was only this great sea.


    Looking down at the water beneath his feet, he saw the reflected sky. Dark clouds hovered above him, making him look up. As his eyes looked upon the clouds, he found himself standing among them. A vortex of crackling lightening spring and surrounded him. Soon, the lightening descended on the tree and it caught fire. The fire blazed, turning the tree to ash. The ash melted in with the dark earth and a small bud sprung from the ashes.


    Ed opened his eyes to Tie Nse looking at him expectantly.


    "What did I just see?"


    "A heaven grade contemplation technique."


    "Heaven Grade?" Ed was shocked. He knew that heaven grade techniques no more existed.


    "Yes. What did it seam like to you?" Tie Nse asked.


    "Images. That is all. Nothing like I''ve ever felt before."


    "So, you saw something." Tie Nse muttered.


    "Why?" Ed frowned.


    "I only suspected it was a heaven grade technique. After all, they are considered myths. Any time I looked inside, I saw darkness. Nothing but darkness."


    "Why?"


    "Have you ever heard of the Heavenly calamity?" Tie Nse asked.


    "Yes."


    "Legend has it that the heavenly calamity was caused by a great war. No one is sure what it was about. But a lot of people died. A lot of great powers left the realms. This caused the power of the realm to sink. All the soul residence stage martial artists left the realms. There was no more a need for some great techniques. They just seized to exist. Even if I have now come across this heaven grade technique, I can not see inside. Neither can anyone else."


    "Then why can I?"


    "Well, you can not be classified into everyone."


    "So, this is the technique you promised me." Ed frowned and Tie Nse nodded his head.


    "You promised to give me a technique you were not even sure was a technique?" he asked and Tie Nse paused.


    "Are you not experimenting too much with me? What if these your assumptions some day kill me?" Ed asked angrily.


    "How can it kill you? I mean, boy. All conditions are already setting you up to die, I''m going to have to look for unconventional means if I want to kill you.... I mean, you can not die so easily." he said and Ed narrowed his eyes.


    "Say, are you really angry right now? This is the first time I have seen anything but a frown and blank look on your face. You are making progress!" Tie Nse seemed oblivious of the murderous look Ed was giving him as he said jubilantly. He then paused and looked at Ed seriously.


    "Since I don''t know how to practice this contemplation technique, I can not guide you there. All I can do for you is raise your strength. This place is good enough to do your spirit picking." he said and Ed calmed down.


    "The rules for spirit picking may not apply to you or may be worse for you, but I''ll guide you best I can. Boy, prepare yourself." Tie Nse said and Ed took a position at the centre of the cave. Sitting in a lotus fashion, he closed his eyes.


    "The method is simple. Enter into your sea of consciousness. Your are trying to pick a star that well represents your spirit. Some say the stars reflect from their spirit pond. Some see it in the sky above them. Where ever it may be, you must call out to it and also answer it''s call. The rest is up to you." Tie Nse said and sat away from Ed.


    Ed closed his eyes and entered his sea of consciousness. Everything was dark except the night sky that held a well of stars, signally his readiness to break into the spirit picking stage. He was not quite sure what call to a star and accepting a call was but, he just stared up and tried to feel his way through this.


    After sitting in contemplation for more than a day, nothing on the sky called to him. He started to worry that he was not ready to do the spirit picking. After one more day staring at the stars in his sea of consciousness, he started to think that his special constitution may never allow him to do things according to the rules.


    No star called to him. In fact, it was as though they were silent and watching him the same as he was watching them. He frowned in frustration. He thought about all that he must go through to go back home and wondered if time moved here as it did back home. If so, doesn''t that mean that everyone he knew would be dead by the time he is able to reach his goal? Will the quest still hold meaning? What about her? Will she be dead by then?


    He felt his heart of martial arts start to waver, causing his sea of consciousness to tremble. Trying to hold back his fears, he sat in contemplation two more days. On the forth day of his contemplation, he was no more calm. He was angry. Why was he here anyway? That old woman that sent him to the go through the mist, did she have his best interest at heart? Was he going to die in this foreign world?


    No, he had to leave this place. There was nothing that was going to stop him. Even if he had to go back in time when he returned home. He must finish what he started. Did that old woman think she could keep him here forever? Did she think throwing him in here would be the end of him? He will return and he will kill her!


    Looking up at the sky, he raised his hand at the stars in determination.


    "Come." he said to no star in particular. At the sound of his voice, every star in the sky rushed down. It was like looking at the fall of the heavens. Like rain, they fell into his sea of consciousness, but did not touch the ground. They swirled around him as though waiting for him to do something.


    At first, he was shocked at the result, but his heart slowly calmed down. If they were all here, why take one? He asked himself. At that moment, he had made his decision to absorb them all. He sent out his spirit energy like a halo around him, making sure to envelope all the stars swirling around him. He then attempted to drag them lowly into him. What happened next was out of his expectation. He did not absorb them, the forcefully entered his core.


    Pain like never before tore through his being. Outside his body inside the cave started to bleed from all orifices. Blood seeped from his pores, causing him to pale. His body started to wane as he started to loose body mass.


    Tie Nse looked at the scene and sighed. He wondered if this boy would survive this. The first three days were silent, making hi think that the boy could not cross the threshold. Looking at this scene, he could only sigh. This spirit picking was like nothing he had every seen a person go through. He wished he could assist the boy, but doing that will stall his potential. A child that was helped during his spirit picking will never be as good as his peer. It would even be a miracle if he could enter the next stage of his training.


    He soon felt lightening crackling in the sky outside the cave and turned solemn. A spirit picking accompanied by heavenly tribulation. This boy had exceeded reason.

 16 Demon Lands 2

    He soon felt lightening crackling in the sky outside the cave and turned solemn. A spirit picking accompanied by heavenly tribulation. This boy had exceeded reason.


    Tie Nse looked at the struggling Ed with a serious expression.


    "Boy, this heavenly tribulation if any thing, should have happened if you succeed in breaking through. It seems the heavens are not taking any chances." he said to the contemplating Ed, whose situation was getting worse. His skin had stated to die and peel off, landing in the pool of his blood. This was a pitiful scene. Tie Nse sighed and moved the rock and opened the cave with a wave of his hand.


    "I will hold back the thunder. But when you wake, you must be the one to face it. Better hurry up and break through boy." He said, glancing back at the pitiful form of Ed, then closing back the cave.


    Tie Nse looked up at the thunder clouds and his eyes shrunk. It was spread several kilometres across the sky. This kind of thunder would not be sent just for Ed right? Was there already thunder brewing before it arrived? Tie Nse analysed the strength of the thunder ahead in wonder. He soon confirmed that this was not some coincidence of weather meeting heavenly thunder. This was sent just for Ed.


    His clothes fluttered as he took to the sky. He could see the clouds gearing fro it''s first strike so he blocked the way. He floated just above the cave at the peak of the mountain and raised his hands to block the incoming strike. As he felt the thunder approach, his eyes turned serious. This was dangerous!


    He had no intention of taking this lightening. Even though it could not hurt him, talk more of killing him, the heavens could go on for as long as possible and he was not sure how long it would take for Ed to break through. With the level of the bolt''s power, if this went on for days, it would eventually tire him. With a change of mind, he created a shield around the mountain.


    The bolt struck and did not reach it''s goal. The hastily made shield had cracked. Seeing the cloud gear up for another strike, Tie Nse laid down aformation. His hands moved swiftly as he made hand signs.


    "Lion Turtle shield!" he activated it just as the second bolt descended. The bolt could not crack the shield this time. Seeing as it could not reach it''s goal, the clouds darkened the sky further. Bolts descended over and over, each strike more powerful than the last.


    This caused Tie Nse to frown. What kind of Heavenly tribulation was this? It upped it''s power? This did not seem like a naturally spiritual occurrence when someone went against the heavens. This looked like a heavenly being was sitting down on his throne and sending bolts to kill his disciple.


    Tie Nse was now angered. A little more power and it would crack his shield. Consciousness? Heavenly tribulation with a consciousness? He had never heard of this before. Yet again, he had never heard of a someone who could absorb all the variations of spirit energy, yet he was inside that cave below. He started to perspire. This boy broke the rules. That means that he should not expect things to go according to the rules. If this was so, was he not out of his league? Wouldn''t this thunder for a spirit picking kid be able to kill him?


    He returned to the door of the closed cave and sat in lotus fashion. He sent spirit essence from his core into the formation to strengthen the shield. Seeing that the shield got stronger, the strength of the heavenly thunder tripled. It crackled in the sky descending bolt upon bolt upon one spot. It''s power was climbing, causing Tie Nse to pale. At this stage, it could kill even him. What was going on? Was it not going to stop till Ed is dead.


    It was only a matter of time. Tie Nse had exhausted his spirit essence and was now burning his life flame. If even one of this bolt passes though, he would be fried. Preparing for the worst, he used some of his last strength to protect his body.


    The shield cracked at one strike and Tie Nse let go of the formation and protected himself. Even if he could save the boy, even if the boy could breakthrough in time, he would have to come out and face the thunder. Tie Nse did not think Ed would survive this. He felt regret sip into his heart as he thought about how stupid he was to think he could hold off the thunder. He should have saved his energy sent Ed away. This boy that had not even have the opportunity to gain power, had not even gotten the opportunity to reach the pinnacle of strength and feel what it''s like to soar the skies. He felt he would have loved to see that day.


    He swallowed as the bolt landed on the mountain and penetrated into the cave. In a blink of an eye, the cave was gone. Tie Nse looked at the clouds with a sigh, but paused when he saw the clouds gearing for a more powerful strike. Does that mean it did not succeed in killing Ed? He swallowed a bunch of pills to regain his strength fast so that he could leave with Ed.


    The dust cleared enough for him to see Ed still sitting in a lotus fashion. The cloths on his body seemed to have been burnt away by the lightening leaving him stark naked. He no more looked as though his was ding. Eve though he was still pale, his skin was no more drying and flaking off. The clouds rumbled and crackled, signalling another bolt descending. Tie Nse''s strength had not returned as he tried to regain energy fast. His eyes shrunk as the bolt hit Ed.


    Ed''s body was like a hungry baby. It absorbed the lightening that touched it. Ed seemed at little bit healthier that before he was struck. The sight caused Tie Nse to break out in mad laughter. Terrifying Boy!


    "Haha! That''s a good boy! If you want to be abnormal, might as well take it to the extreme!" Tie Nse laughed madly.


    As though provoked by Tie Nse''s mad laughter, the sky darkened further. It was as though night descended instantly. Another bolt dropped. This time, it was stronger and thicker than ever. Still, Ed absorbed it all greedily. This strike caused his complexion to get rosier. He looked healthy and shiny like a new born.


    Tie Nse could see that Ed was using this thunder to consolidate his breakthrough. As if the heavens could see that it was only helping Ed get stronger, it started to retreat. The sky started to clear and the light started to return. But Ed was not done! His eyes abruptly opened and he looked up at the retreating clouds. He sent his energy into it, stopping it from retreating. As his energy touched the clouds, he forced them back together and absorbed all the thunder created from the forceful mending.


    His body was like a vortex that stole all the thunder from the sky. Tie Nse paused as he saw this and his eyes turned weird. Can this boy get any more terrifying? After a while, Ed could no more hold on to the clouds. As soon as he let go, the clouds retreated so fast, one would not even believe it was there.


    "People try to run from heavenly tribulation, not steal the thunder, boy. The kind of enemies you are making, this master will one day die in his sleep, killed for being associated with you. It''s all good and all, but they might not even grant me access into heaven to enjoy my afterlife!" Tie Nse said as he looked at Ed with a weird expression. If only Tie Nse knew that he had just prophesied what would happen to him after he dies.

 17 Demon Lands 3

    Heavenly tribulation of that magnitude would attract a lot of attention, so Ed and Tie Nse moved away. Tie Nse took Ed to another immortal cave ten thousand kilometres from their last location. A while after they left, several masters of the spirit merging stage appeared. Looking at the state of the mountain, their eyes shrunk. What kind of person was defying the heavens here?


    In another immortal cave, Ed and Tie Nse sat as Ed took a better look at his state. Tie Nse waited for him to return from his sea of consciousness before asking,


    "How do you feel?"


    "The heavenly thunder helped to steady my advancement. My energies have merged into one, but I can still absorb them differently." he answered and Tie Nse nodded.


    "I intend for you to go to the demon Lands."


    "Where is that?" Ed asked with a frown and Tie Nse sighed.


    "You should trust me a little more. This will not be like sending you to the Baju Valley."


    "How will it be then?" Ed''s frown never left his face. This old pervert had sent him to an execution ground while still at the foundation level, yet he expected to be trusted?


    "It will be worse." Tie Nse said and Ed''s eyes turned cold.


    "The demon Lands is called the unholy ground. All who walk there will loose their cultivation. Now for those who have reached the soul realization stage like me, it will not matter if we loose our cultivation. At the soul realisation stage, our cultivations are not seated in our bodies, but our souls. We can walk freely even with such restrictions."


    "Doesn''t that mean that everyone will be just as powerless? Why is it more dangerous for me?"


    "You see, the Baju Valley was mostly a training ground for your energies, but the demon Land is a training ground for your body. Boy, at your level, any one at the same cultivation level could kill you." Tie Nse said carelessly.


    "You want me to go to the demon lands, a place without cultivation and survive. If I do, I will grow not only in strength, but in experience." Ed said as though agreeing with Tie Nse. Even though he could careless about his fighting strength, it was necessary in this world. He may just be aiming for the power to leave this world, but hehad to survive in it too. Here, strength was every thing.


    "Not only that. In the Demon Lands is where I first saw something that is of the same origin as the Baju Valley, the Hell tree." Tie Nse said and Ed frowned.


    "It is very beneficial to the demon tribe, though not by much, but it emitted the same combined energies as the Baju Valley. Of course I could only sense it. I could not feel it. It did not force people to absorb it like in the valley, so I do not know at what concentration."


    "Do I need to keep using these kind of places to level up?" Ed said worriedly. He was not worried about the energy. He was only worried about the amount of energy it took for his strength to rise.


    "That is the fastest way for now. Besides, the Demon Land is a place where you could gain some fruitful encounters." Tie Nse understood Ed''s concerns. If it took this much rare materials and rare sacred grounds to raise him, one day they will run out of ideas.


    "Luck is part of strength too." Ed said.


    "There is no such thing as luck. Those that have fruitful encounters must have done something in their past lives to earn it. Say boy, seeing how odd you are, I wonder if you did great evil or great good in your past lives." Tie Nse said. This boy was too abnormal. Was this good fortune of heavenly punishment? Tie Nse sighed.


    "You talked about soul realization. How far is it from God Eater stage?" Ed asked curiously. He need to know where he was going. But his question caused Tie Nse to frown.


    "Boy, I have never heard of anything above the soul residence stage. There are children''s tales explaining the realms and lands. They talk about those who reach a stage called god eaters. But no one really believes such people exist. After all, the lands explained in children''s tales are done for their enjoyment. They are not fact." Tie Nse said.


    "So, you are saying there are no such things as the Unknown Lands?" Ed frowned.


    "Yes. Boy, you must stop reading children''s tales."


    "What about the mortal lands. The physical plane? Deranox? Jurazel? Emerald?" Ed was starting to panic.


    "Emerald and Jurazel? Where are these places?" Tie Nse''s frown deepened.


    "When I came to this world, I asked someone about emerald, they told me of names of old kings. Kings that have already passed. Dead. Gone. When I asked someone else, they told me about kings that have not come yet. How did the people here know of these things if there is no such place?" Ed said anxiously.


    "You speak of the physical planes? The physical planes have been locked from the world since the heavenly calamity. News of the mortal world never filters here." Tie Nse frowned and Ed went silent. His head wad bowed, hiding his face.


    Tie Nse had in fact heard of Deranox. But this was from ancient text from long before the heavenly calamity. Since he had met this boy till now, this was the first time he had showed any true reaction, not to talk of one of this magnitude.


    Ed remembered the text had said the unknown lands was a place outside and inside time. He understood that the mist was considered part of the unknown lands. If he is in the mist, then there is no way this old pervert will know of these places. But those people who had told him of this were real. This only meant that he could interact with people across worlds. Doesn''t that mean that some of the people he comes across are not people Tie Nse will see or be able to interact with? Ed frowned.


    Tie Nse saw as Ed looked up, his eyes had calmed and regained their blank look.


    "The way you talk about these places, it is as though you have been there before." He asked.


    "It does not matter. About the cultivation levels, tell me, how many stages are there before the soul residence stage?" Ed asked. Tie Nse let the topic rest and answered.


    "After the spirit picking, there is the spirit picking stage, the spirit awakening stage, spirit merging stages, spirit awareness stage, soul seeking stage, soul awakening stage, soul realization stage, heaven seeking stage, then the soul residence stage. The soul residence stage is only known. No one has reached this stage since the heavenly calamity." Tie Nse said and Ed nodded. He took out a ring and threw it to Ed. Ed looked at the ring and saw it was a spatial ring. It was much larger than the inner space one gets when they start training.


    He gave Tie Nse a puzzled look.


    "So that no one would say your master sent you into the demon Lands empty handed." Tie Nse said, snapping his fingers and Ed vanished before he could respond.


    Ed had only blinked when he suddenly found himself in the middle of a sand storm.

 18 Demon Lands 4

    Ed cursed the old pervert inwardly as he looked around to find his way. He felt to see if his cultivation still remained and it was still there. With a sigh of relief, he sent his inner sense to find his way, but could not penetrate the whirling band of sand. If he did not move, he would be buried in this sand. He started a forward movement but the sand pushed back hard. It was as if it was alive.


    "Don''t move!" someone shouted. Ed looked around to find who spoke but could see nothing.


    "Hold out your left arm!" the person said, but Ed hesitated. Who was this person, and why was he helping him.


    "I will not harm you. Besides, do you have choice?" the person asked. Ed held out his left arm and immediately someone grabbed it and pulled him out of the swirling sands. His vision cleared, allowing him to see who had saved him. The person was garbed head to toe in black, but the fitting male pants and shirt did nothing to hide her curves.


    "Thank you" Ed said looking back at the sand storm still raging behind him. It was like an invisible wall stood right in the middle. On the other side, a storm raged, on this side calm sands sat under his feet.


    "Why are you here?" the girl asked.


    "I was told I was being sent to the Demon Lands."


    "The demon lands, huh? Well, this is a way to get there. The portal you used should have dropped you on this side of the sand. Who ever controlled it must not be that strong to miss by a few steps." she said and ed frowned internally. Or the person just wanted him right there. That old pervert!


    "I''m Meryl, what about you?"


    "Ed." he answered.


    "What are you going to do in the Demon Lands?" she asked and he frowned. When he looked into her eyes, it was like looking into the eyes of a snake. Why he felt that way, he was not sure. He looked away after a second glance, causing her to frown. This man actually broke my enchanted eye?


    "Meryl, girl! What are you doing there? Let''s be going?" a man shouted from the top of a sand dune.


    "Coming, captain! I found a stray!" Meryl shouted back but the captain had already left. She turned to Ed and assessed him.


    "We are going to the Demon Lands. Do you want to tag along?" she asked and he nodded.


    "Come on, let''s join the crew." she said and sped away. Ed saw the speed at which she was running and paused, before trying to keep up. It was hard. He had no speed what so ever. He only had stamina. As he took on large stride runs, he place his qi under his legs to stop his legs from sinking into the soft sand. He maintained his pace till he was on the other side of the dune. He saw that they were travelling in a caravan.


    "Mer, who is this?" a tall man asked. He, like every other person there, had their heads and face covered with cloths. Was this to keep away from the sand? Ed wondered.


    "I found a stray, captain. He was stuck in the storm." she said and the captain frowned. With a look, he could already see that Ed''s cultivation was only at the spirit picking stage.


    "I told him he could join us." she said and the captain''s frown deepened.


    "And why did you do that? We need people that can carry their own weight, and not be a burden as we move around." the captain said looking Ed in the face.


    "I''m sure he could be of some use." she said and he still stared Ed down. His aura expanded and pressed down on Ed, but it was as though Ed did not notice. Ed snorted inside. He may have no fighting strength or strength at all, but he was sure not even the old pervert''s aura cold press him. Nothing could be compared to the pressure of the Baju Valley. Yet, even that was survived by him.


    The captain frowned when he noticed Ed was casually looking around their caravan, as if he did not notice the captains aura pressing down. The captain was also surprised. When he pressured Ed, it felt as though he was pressing at nothing. The aura of his spirit awakening stage just passed through Ed.


    "He''s odd right?" Meryl asked the captain with an amused voice. He looked at her questioningly.


    "I never tried what you did on him. All I know is that he looked away from my enchanted eyes in seconds. It did not even hold him." she said and the captain was shocked. He knew that he was much stronger than Meryl at late spirit awakening stage, but not even early spirit awareness masters can look away from her enchanted eyes.


    Meryl was from the mermaid clan. Though they had long left the water and walked on land, they still had the bloodline of their ancestors. The mermaid clan were good at illusions. Not only could the cast it, they could unravel it. That is why he got Meryl to join his mercenary group. He needed someone like this.


    "Do you think he will be useful in the salt bed?" the captain asked her. all this while, non of them bothered to ask Ed anything. They just talked to themselves. Ed too, had no intention of talking. As long as they helped him get to the Demon Lands, he did not bother about their intentions.


    "Another pair of eyes is good to have. We don''t know what is there." a man standing behind Meryl said. The captain seemed to consider this, before nodded.


    "Meryl will be in charge of you. We leave now." he said and walked away. Ed looked at the captain favourably. This man did not hold to heart that he was not able to subdue him.


    "Come on." she said and got into one of the wagons and he joined her inside. Soon, he felt the wagon start moving, signally that they had begun their journey.


    "So, tell me how you did it." Meryl looked at him with expectant eyes.


    "Did what?" he asked.


    "When I had asked you what you are going to do in the demon lands, I used my enchanted eyes on you. You must have heard me tell the captain. How did you break out of it?" she asked.


    "What is it supposed to do to me?" he asked her. He had heard of her speak about him breaking out of it. That this convinced the captain to let him join their group, so it mus be important.


    "When I use my enchanted eye, many people fall into a dream. They find themselves telling me what I want to know. It compels people to talk to me. Tell me their secrets. How did you break out of it? It will help my develop it better." she said, looking at him expectantly.


    "That was the enchanted eyes? You looked like a snake at that time." he said and she froze.


    "What?"


    "When you asked me the question, you looked like an ugly snake." he said and she started boiling. A snake, she could not even understand the logic of it, but an ugly one too?


    "Ya! Sir Ed!" she fumed.


    "You asked how I did it. I told you." he said blankly, making her angrier. Most men that have better sight, can make out a form of an enchanting woman when they are in the dream. But he saw a snake? What was he trying to say? She harrumphed and turned away from him, giving him the silence he crave for.


    He may not trust these people, but he liked that they were amiable and carefree. His trust that their conscience holds weight just increased from 1% to 5%. in Ed''s books, that was high. Even the old Pervert only held a 3% in this category.

 19 Demon Lands 5

    Ed may not trust these people, but he liked that they were amiable and carefree. His trust that their conscience holds weight just increased from 1% to 5%. in Ed''s books, that was high. Even the old Pervert only held a 3% in this category.


    In a small courtyard, a man sat with Tie Nse silently, when Tie Nse sneezed.


    "Who is cursing at me?" Tie Nse said.


    "I can make a list. But Let''s start with the one sitting in front of you!" the old man sitting before Tie Nse snorted.


    "Old Iba, you hold on to grudges too long. That is why your advancement into soul realization has been stifled." Tie Nse said.


    "You still dare to scold me? Leave! I am not concocting any pill for you. I will never conduct a pill for you anyway, so you should not have bothered to come!"


    "I promise you will love this one. You have always been a lover of challenges. You don''t even know the pill I want you to concoct."


    "I don''t care! I only came to see you because I heard you took on an unusual disciple, but I''ve suddenly lost interest. Leave!" Old Iba said. Even though he was angry, he made no attempt to walk away, making Tie Nse laugh inside. This old casket that refused to enter the ground. The allure of knowing about my disciple is so much that he did not even send guard to bar my entry like he did the last few times. He even came out of his old shell and sat in front of him.


    "Oh? You want to know about the little boy?"


    "From what I hear, he is not a boy. Where did you get him?"


    "So you can go and get your own? Old Iba, you know he is not a toy, right?" Tie Nse said and Old Iba fumed.


    "Do you think this old man does not have outstanding talents under him?"


    "He is training." Tie Nse said. That was the only information he gave. He knew that for Ed to grow without care, is for him to move without care. He did not even want people to know his name. Old Iba saw that Tie Nse would not say more so, he urged.


    "Training? Like when you put him in the Baju Valley? Where have you sent the poor by now?"


    "He may die there, what does it matter?" Tie Nse said cheekily. This made Old Iba go mad.


    "You picked up that kind of gem and you are playing with it? That is not how to train a disciple!"


    "If I don''t train him like that, he will end up like your little things running around this place." Tie Nse said. OldIba could not get any angrier. This old thing always had a way of getting under his skin. He was a level six alchemist. The only in ten thousand years. His disciples were one of a kind. Where ever they went, many had to bow their heads to them; because they were the closest thing to having him create a pill. After all,there was no way he would create pills for just anyone.


    "I have created several geniuses, I am the best person to advise you. I know this is your first disciple so you don''t know what to do..." Old Iba said mischievously.


    "None of you have seen a genius like him ever, so you are all unqualified." Tie Nse said carelessly. This caused Old Iba to turn solemn.


    "You know that the eight powers are watching your heaven alliance, right? Especially those two clans. You have always been a second rate power. Even though you are the stronger of the two alliances, you are still considered second rate to them. With this boy of yours, they are rattled. They don''t know if you can control the Baju Valley, or he can. If there was a treasure in there or not. They will find you soon." Tie Nse sighed softly.


    "They don''t know where I am so, that means nothing." he said, before looking at Old Iba seriously.


    "Do you want to know what kind of pill I want?" he asked and the old man frowned.


    "Heavenly thunder pill." he said and Old Iba paused.


    "Heavenly thunder pill shrouds a person from heavenly thunder, but it is only useful in the thunder forest in the thunder season there. It cannot protect a person from true heavenly thunder sent by the heavens. Unless you are planing a trip to the thunder forest, it is of no use." Old Iba said, "It is better that person faces the heavenly tribulation. If he succeeds, he would be stronger than his peers."


    "I do not need one that shrouds, I want one that creates." Tie Nse said and old Iba''s eyes shrunk.


    "Do you think me a god?"


    "Even if you cannot create it. Can you make one that stops the heavenly tribulation from receding when it is done?"


    "You want to hold a heavenly tribulation prisoner? Why? Don''t you know that whoever the tribulation is for, may have to suffer if it stays longer than necessary?" Old Iba was done. He had always known this old man was crazy. But why would he be this crazy?


    "Can it be done? A pill that extends the heavenly tribulation. It would be better if you could even strengthen it." Tie Nse''s eyes shined like a child on new year.


    "Idiot! It''s hard enough to keep it from leaving, you want to strengthen it? It can''t be done! If I could strengthen heavenly tribulation, shouldn''t I be part of the heavenly council?" Old Iba snorted.


    "Now that I think about it, there will be no need to do so. The heavenly tribulation that came last time the boy was breaking through was strong enough to kill me. It seemed like the tribulation had a mind of it''s own. When it saw it could not kill him, it kept getting stronger till it almost killed me trying to kill him." Tie Nse said and Old Iba paled.


    "A heavenly tribulation with a mind of it''s own? It almost killed you? The boy you are talking about is that disciple of yours, isn''t it? Say, old Tie. Wasn''t that boy not yet at spirit picking? What kind of spirit picking would attract heavenly tribulation?" Old Iba said and Tie Nse frowned.


    "Who did you tell that I am here? Old Iba, this old trick, isn''t it below you?" Tie Nse frowned. He could tell that there were a lot of people rushing his way. Those old frogs from the alliance? Other powers? He turned to the old man who seemed as though deep in thought.


    "Can it be done?" he asked.


    "On one condition. When next he breaks through, I want to be there." Old Iba said.


    "I will find you about the materials you wish to use. Whether you see him or not is up to you." Tie Nse said and vanished. Old Iba chuckled. He had set up a formation around his residence so that no one can open a portal here without his consent, yet this old Tie had opened one regardless. He sighed. He must see this boy for himself!


    Just as Tie Nse left, a servant rushed in.


    "Sir I.. I..." he stammered.


    "Let them in." Old Iba sighed and two men arrived. Just behind them, a woman veiled in white.

 20 Demon Lands 6 Warning: unedited chapter

    "I will find you about the materials you wish to use. Whether you see him or not is up to you." Tie Nse said and vanished. Old Iba chuckled. He had set up a formation around his residence so that no one can open a portal here without his consent, yet this old Tie had opened one regardless. He sighed. He must see this boy for himself!


    Just as Tie Nse left, a servant rushed in.


    "Sir I.. I..." he stammered.


    "Let them in." Old Iba sighed and two men arrived. Just behind them, a woman veiled in white.


    The two old men that stepped in were quickly recognized by Old Iba. They were the council head Si accompanied by an elder from the Heaven alliance. They were the ones he had called, knowing full well that Tie Nse was more afraid of getting caught by his alliance and forced to go back than meeting the head of one of the other eight powers. Looking at their frowning faces, he was sure they had already noticed that their alliance patraich was long gone.


    He regreted calling them. Now, he had to explain things he wished he did not have to. Talking was too tiring. He saw the vieled woman coming in after them and turned solemn. The heaven alliance must have an information leak, or was it him? Why would she be here? He did not remember calling her. how did she know that Tie Nse was here?


    "Lady Mi." he said, ignring the two men. As far as he was concerned, the one he had to be wary of was the woman. They too, frowned at her timing. Did Old Iba call her too?


    "cotage master Iba." she greeted formally.


    "why is Lady Mi here?" he asked. His words caused the other two to turn cautious. So, Old Iba did not call her. why is she here?


    "why do you all look so guarded? I was only in the area. I saw Patriarch Tie pass and came to say hi. Has he gone so soon?" she said, her voice cold, but casual.


    "you missed him. You all did. So, since you are came to see him and his is not here, let us all have tea." Old Iba waved and a servant rushed over to set up seats. They all sat as the servants served tea. The silence was long, but Old Iba sat casually as though he was having a great day.


    "cottage Master, did our patriarch say where he is going?" council head Si asked after a while.


    "he left as fast as he came, didn''t say much." Old Iba said casually.


    "it must have been urgent to come that fast." Lady Mi said and old Iba smiled. No matter the excuse she gave, the fact remains that she is here right now, and Tie Nse was just here. She was not going to leave without information.


    The other two saw this as well and paled. Even if Old Iba knew something, telling them now, will be just like tellling the entire martial world.


    "oh? I thought you were just in the area. Do you want to know about Tie Nse so bad?" Old Iba said and she narrowed her eyes at him. He knew he could not offend this demon before him, but he also knew she could not offend him. He was the only level six alchemist in the entire lands. No matter who you were, you had show him respect.


    Even though he could careless about her, he still wanted to get rid of them, and fast. So that he could start walking on the ingredient list for the pills for Tie Nse. This was a pill he was fully invested in. this abnormal boy, he wanted to see what he could cook up.


    Still, even though he wished to see this boy and make this heaven defying pillls, he was still Tie Nse''s enemy. Why should he make anything easier for that man?


    "let''s get to the point so that you can all leave. You want to know why he was here, I can''t tell you that. It is my own personal business. But there are things I can tell you. Afterall, Tie Nse is still my no 1 enemy." Old Iba said and they all frowned.


    "do you know where he is?" council head Si asked.


    "no. but I know that his disciple just did his spirit picking." Old Iba answered.


    "what is s special about a spirit picking?" Lady Mi asked.


    "a boy that survived inside the Baju valley for ten years and came ot without aid at foundation level and you are not even a bit piqued about how his cultivation is going?" Old Iba asked then shrugged and kept quiet. He continued drinking his tea in silence, ignoring them waiting for him to continue.


    Lady Mi frowned. This old man wanted her to apologize? She scuffed inside.


    "i am very interested, cottage master. Please go on." she said and Old Iba hurrumphed. This cocky woman, would she even bother to apologize?


    "all I know I that his spirit picking attracted heavenly tribulation." he said and they were all shell shocked. A spirit picking that attracts heavenly tribulation?


    "that''s not all. It seemed as though the heavenly tribulation had a mind of it''s own. Heavenly tribulation with a consciousness, I think is what Tie Nse was trying to say. From what I get, the thunder was powerful enough to kill him." he said and saw the look on their faces. Disbelief, rejecting the possibility?


    "i got this from his mumbling. He refused to explain. But from the look of him, I know it''s true. I noticed his energy was depleted. In fact, it looked as though he was just out of a fight and was not yet recovered. Not only was his aura low, but he emitted low life qi. It looked as though he burned his life energy recently. For me, of a lower cultivation to notice it, you must understand just how low it was." Old Iba said and the men frowned and Lady Mi had a blank expression. One could easily tell she was trying to stay calm.


    "he did say the heavenly thunder with a consciousness almost killed him trying to kill that disciple of his."


    "what happened to the disciple?" council head Si asked.


    "i can assure you the boy is alive. How, I can not tell you. And according to things, he passed through his tribulation."


    "with patriarch taking most of the brunt, of course he would be alive." the elder beside council Head Si said.


    "that old man? Take the brunt? The man does not care if the boy dies as long as he gets strong, from the way he talked. He put his disciple in the worst places to train him. From what he said, he has probably dropped the boy in another dangerous place. Yes, he said it was more dangerous than the baju valley. He is too wicked to help the boy. It looks to me like he got hurt being too close to where the tribulation took place. He probably did nto run far away enough." Old Iba laughed with a snort.


    They all knew his words held some water. What kind of master would put his disciple in the Baju Valley? This had different indications for Lady Mi. was the alliance patriarch training someone more powerful than her her heir? If they let this boy grow, wouldn''t he one day sit on their heads? The heaven alliance is already considered stronger than her jade phoenix alliance. What would happen if this boy grows? Would the heaven alliance become one of the two clans? No, even higher than them?


    "what pill did he ask you to make?" she asked and he laughed.


    "Lady Mi must think this is her Jade pheonix island and this old man works for her." she smied in response to his words before getting up.


    "as I have many things to do right now, forgive me for not seeing you off, Lady Mi." Old Iba said and the other two got up too. This was basically pursuing them. They have gotten their information, with Lady Mi going? What right do they have to stay.

 21 Demon Lands 7

    Word of Ed''s spirit picking had already reached all the powers. Old Iba understood the basis of Lady Mi spreading this news. The Jade Phoenix alliance was already considered the weaker of the two alliances. She hoped that the two clans paid attention to this development. If possible, send someone to kill this boy before he matures. As wicked as her thoughts were, the powers were silent.


    After all, no one knew where Tie Nse was or what he was doing. Nor did they know where he was hiding the boy. No one knows what he looks like or his name. As for now, he was but a myth.


    Ed on the other hand was not aware of how his influence has risen in the past few days. He was still journeying through the desert. As they moved, he heard talks of a place called the salt bed. He could tell they were close to this place as they moved, because they had travelled through the last night instead of stoppingto rest like always.


    He had always wondered why a bunch of martial artist were travelling like mortals. They always stopped at night and went to sleep. He was used to sleeping at night from his time back in his world and did not mind it, but it did not stop it from bothering him.


    He wanted to ask about this, but ignored it. Meryl was ignoring him since he said she looked like a snake and he hoped she would continue with her silence. But of course, hopes will always remain hopes. Meryl jumped into his moving wagon and sat when he started hearing shouting.


    "What is happening?" he asked her.


    "Stay calm, we are entering the salt bed." she told him.


    "Why?"


    "Al right, I will tell you this. We are not actually traders, we are a mercenary group."


    "I noticed, even if you all acted like one, your captain is a martial artist and so is many of you."


    "Most of us here are not from the mercenary group. They are travellers trying to get to the demon land."


    "Then why are.." Ed started to ask.


    "Just let me finish." she said hushing him.


    "We are going to the salt bed. That was our primary mission. A few months back, we heard of news,.... wait... I can''t tell you that. All you need to know is that we pretended to go deliver some high profiled goods to the Jhu tribe living in the desert. As we return, we pretend to be taken by storm into the salt bed. That way, no one knows we are there." she said.


    " A mercenary group like your must have enemies. You don''t want word of your trip leaked and people finding out and coming out to struggle over what ever you are looking for. What I don''t understand is, why don''t you suspect that I am one of them? Why would you tell me this?" Ed asked.


    "I have already talked to the captain about this. He said that the winds are stronger around now. That means the illusions may be getting stronger in the salt bed. He wanted to know if you are interested in joining our mercenary group."


    "You have already told me your secret, you are already leading me into the salt bed. You are not giving me much of a choice are you?" Ed asked casually, completely at ease. The girl frowned. Does he have no fear?


    "What about those that you have picked up from the tribe, acting as though you are deliverign them to the salt bed?"


    "You picked that up from what I said, huh?" she laughed darkly.


    "They are going to die in there aren''t they?" Ed asked.


    "What is your decision?"


    "The choice has already been made for me. So why ask?"


    "Good. You are a smart man. You will be staying with me all through this." she laughed amiably.


    "And after?" he asked and she paused. She looked closer at his blank face. She had not seen his expression change since she met him. Does he not know how to make another expression? Sure, he would be killed after he has overstayed his welcome, but he does not need to know that. She could not gauge his true though by looking at his face.


    "What do you mean, after? You have already agreed to become part of our group, do you not intend to go back to the city with us?" she said.


    "Look, I know you feel as if you can take care of your self. A lot of people come to the demon lands thinking that they will be fine. Let me advise you. The demon lands is not like the outside world. You need to stay under a higher power to survive. You don''t have to worry, now you are part of us, we will take care of you." she said and he almost laughed. But of course this did not show on his face.


    His trust of these people had fallen to 0%. he was sure that they would get rid of him after they get what they want. They needed his ability to see through illusions, an ability he does not remember having. Well, he could just take this as a learning experience. There were so many things he did not know about him self. By going out and adventuring, he would have a better understanding of hi capabilities.


    He felt the wagon shake as though it would break for a long time, but no fear crept into his mind. He still sat calmly, thinking about his next move. These people were powerful. Even though he knew he was strong, he had not truly fought those with power. When he was back at the valley, he had killed a chief, but this was only because he mistakenly touched the chief with his energy. He was sure that this would not have happened if the chief took him seriously.


    Even though he had fought before, that was at the foundation level and he was sure how much strength he had now compare to others. All those he had fought before were on spirit picking below, so he should be able to beat those in his level easily. Since he could beat those at spirit picking when he was at foundation level, he should be able to beat those at spirit awakening while at spirit picking. But he was not sure just how different each of the levels were. He would only know when he fights. At least before he enters the demon lands and his cultivation is sealed, he should know what he is capable of.

 22 Demon Lands 8

    Even though he had fought before, that was at the foundation level and he was sure how much strength he had now compare to others. All those he had fought before were on spirit picking below, so he should be able to beat those in his level easily. Since he could beat those at spirit picking when he was at foundation level, he should be able to beat those at spirit awakening while at spirit picking. But he was not sure just how different each of the levels were. He would only know when he fights. At least before he enters the demon lands and his cultivation is sealed, he should know what he is capable of.


    Meryl was shocked by how calm Ed was sitting there. Even though she knew that these wagons were specially built to take this storm, she was still scared that something would go wrong. Seeing Ed sitting so calmly, she wondered what was the basis of his courage. He did not know about the special wagons, so why was he not scared. Now that she thought about it, he just appeared out of no where. Was he from some great clan?


    She knew that some clans and sects outside send their disciples to the demon lands to train, was he one of those young masters? She thought about it for a while, then snorted. Even if, so what? His clan is so far away, even if he dies, it would be because he is not strong enough.


    Soon, the shaking and rattling stopped and all everyone started to come down. He looked round at the confused faces of some of the travellers.


    "Calm down, calm down. Let me find out where we are." the captain said trying to calm down the travellers. He called out to his vice captain. Ed had seen him around. He was a round man with a scar across his face. The two looked round the environment that seemed like a stone forest. The grounds were dry and white sand filled the grounds. Tall stones stood, blocking a clear view.


    Looking at the captain and his vice call up a crew to look round, and the confused expression on their faces, Ed almost bought it. For a second, the righteous side of him, the side that was still a prince from his world, felt pity for the ordinary travellers who thought they had just hitched a ride to the demon lands. Though they were all martial artists there, most were in foundation level and others at spirit picking, like him. If he had not been considered of some use, they would not have informed him of their plan.


    Still, was it even much of a plan? They basically told him they were searching for something but did not say what.


    Meryl glanced at him for a second and nodded for him to follow. She led him over to where the captain was standing.


    "We will make camp here. All of you need to stay put while we go out ad get our bearings. Don''t wander around alone. Ger, your are in charge while I''m gone." the captain said and a skinny youth nodded. Ed sighed. How could those left behind not notice that there was something wrong? He leaves a bunch on low lever martial artists behind while the high level once go searching. Ordinarily, this would be the norm, but not leaving behind even one high level martial artists for their protection, it was clear he was just leaving them to die.


    Ed followed the group silently, walking beside Meryl who seemed cheerful as always. The captain held in hand, a jade slip map. Ed could tell that he had his qi inside the slip, probably showing them the way. Ed noticed later that what he thought was white sand on the floor, was actually salt.


    The place was like a forest, except vertically placed stones replaced trees and salt crystals replaced grass. They got to a special section that looked like the beginning of rich vegetation.


    "We are getting closer. This salt bed is a strange place. You can see real forest in the middle of a desert." Meryl said.


    She was right. Soon they found themselves in a rich green forest. How was this possible in the middle of a desert? Ed wondered. They continued to move till they were in a fog. At least that is what Ed thought.


    "We must go straight over the bridge. When we get there, Meryl, you and him look out. The tomb is directly on the other side according to this map." the captain said. Ed was confused. Bridge? What bridge? He squinted his eyes to get a better look, but the fog only got thicker. He felt great water energy in the air.


    He looked down on his feet and found they were inside water. An illusion? Wait. Who was in the illusion? He or the others? He glanced at Meryl, but she as still her usual cheerful self. Was it really possible he could see through illusions? He wondered.


    Wait, fog.. it did not really look like fog. It looked like qi. Blue and thick. At first it seemed as though it was to thick for him to see through, that is why it seemed like a fog. Ed was efficient in absorbing qi. The water qi is a compliment to the astral energy. This little qi was created from astral energy. This much qi, the caster of this illusion must be someone of great power. Like breathing, he sucked in the qi. Circulating it in his core, e could see much clearer.


    Water. They were walking into a deep river. This illusion was extraordinary. Without knowing it, they would have committed suicide by drowning. There really was a bridge, like the captain said, but it was on the other side.


    He paused, causing Meryl to look at him with a raised brow. He considered letting them die. After all, that is what they wished to do to him, but..


    "Wait." he said and they all paused.


    "It''s an illusion. You are going to drown." he said and Meryl frowned.


    "What nonsense are you saying?" she asked him.


    "You are walking into a river, without knowing it." he said.


    "Are you dreaming? We are walking on a bridge. The river is over there." she said, pointing in the direction of the bridge and the others frowned. Ed sighed.


    "It seems telling you about the illusion does not break it." Ed said and turned around and walked out of the water.


    "Don''t move! Where do you think you are going?" Meryl shouted after him.


    "I''m going to use the bridge. You can die if you want to." Ed said and they paused. The captain was silent as he watched Ed move to the bridge which he saw as a river.


    "Idiot! Die then." Meryl said, watching Ed leave.

 23 Etheric Fruits 1

    "Idiot! Die then." Meryl said, watching Ed leave.


    "Let''s go." the captain said turning to follow Ed.


    "Captain what are you doing?" the vice captain asked.


    "This was too simple. If I''m right, we are really walking into a trap like he said." the captain answered.


    "Captain, who are you going to believe, him or me?" Meryl asked indignantly.


    "How can you tell if this is not an illusion? If it is, you are in it too. If it isn''t he is in the illusion. His perception is higher than even you, talk more of all of us here. We would walk into burning fire without knowing. Which do you think is more likely? We have superior capabilities with illusions or he does?" the captain asked. They all seemed to see his point.


    They had head that Ed broke Meryl''s enchanted eyes. If this was so, then the odds are they are walking into a trap.


    "So, are you also classifying me in this ''we'' you are talking about?" Meryl''s eyes darkened.


    "Meryl, do as I say! You are just angry about the possibility that he is right." the captain ordered and followed Ed with his men. Her expression turned vicious as she followed behind them.


    By the time they had gotten to Ed, he was deep inside the ''water''. By the time they were neck in, they started to question this. Was this truly an illusion? Were they just following this man to die?


    Meryl predicted that they would turn back after staying under the water a while. She was following slowly behind them, most of her body was still out of the water.


    The group were about to be completely submerged when Ed said, "it''s an illusion. But I don''t think it means you can''t die in it. There is no water. You better believe it; it''s better safe than sorry." Ed said entering the water completely. His words caused the group to tense, before they followed him. Meryl smirked at the turn of events. If they die, she would take the treasure all for her self. This was a good ending, she thought.


    The others first felt water threaten to enter their lungs. Ed breathed in as though there was no water after all, he could not even see the water they saw. It took a while, before the other''s eyes cleared after struggling for a while. They found themselves standing on a bridge. They looked at where they were standing before, saw water and paled. If not for this boy, they would have died. They frowned when they noticed Meryl had returned to the water with smirk.


    They tried calling to her, but the captain stopped them.


    "This is a game a of luck. We brought her to help us through the illusions, yet she falls to one, what is the use of keeping her with us?" The captain said, but then, Meryl stopped half way into the water as though confused then returned to where Ed had ''drowned and dived in.


    to her, she was diving in, to them, she was jumping flat on her tummy, on the bridge. She got up in a daze. When she saw them looking at her, she paled. It seems Ed was right. Many may not have understood the logic of what she just did, but Ed did. She had heard them talking. A look at her expression and you could tell. Though she shook it off moments later, he could tell she was now guarded against them.


    The captain did not spare her much of a glance as he turned and they continued their gourney. They did not bother to thank Ed either, which did not bother him.


    She walked beside Ed silently till they stood at the mouth of a cave. The captain took the lead and walked in. as Ed stepped into the cave, a wave of etheric energy hit him. What ever these people were here for, he now wanted it.


    With a solemn look, he follow quietly. When just when he was looking around for where the energy came from, Meryl touched his arm and her mind touched his. What was this? He frowned. Why was she... he was confused for a second before he saw her gesture to the backs of the others. He now understood. She did not what them to hear her. but why try connecting with his mind? Talking with the mind? Why was he surprised. Since he came to this world, he had adjusted his mind to the possibility of anything. He let down his guard and heard her voice loud and clear in his head.


    "Why did you do that?" she asked.


    "Do what?"


    "You could have used that opportunity to let them die. I was right beside you. If we both left the group and they died, the treasure would have been ours." she said.


    "Even when I announced my thoughts, you thought it wrong, then you say you would have believed me?" he asked. He understood why this mattered to her now. She had finally discovered that she was not really part of the group ad could be disposed any day.


    "Well..." she started to say.


    "Now, we must work together if we want to get out of here." she said.


    "Why? You finally discovered that they can get rid of you just as you wanted to join and get rid of me?" she asked. So he knew....She had thought that he would scuff at her, but even in his mind, his voice was calm and uncaring. Did this man never fear?


    "Well, we are in the same shoes now. It is better that we work together." she said. She did not receive a reply from Ed so she looked his way. She but glanced at her and looked away. This caused her heart to sink.


    "If it''s two of us, we will have a better chance of surviving." she said but received the same silence. This time, she noticed that it was not only Ed that was silent, it was the entire crew.


    "I thought it would at least be guarded but it is not. It''s beautiful." one of the group members said. This drew her attention to where they were al looking. It was a tree breaming with fruits. She could already tell from her distance that this fruit was full of energy. Greed set in her mind.


    "Of course it''s guarded. The information said that the Tunsen Bird guards this tomb." the captain said.


    "That is why we timed it right idiot. The information also said it will be out to hunt at this time, so work fast. Take everything." the captain instructed and they and started working. Ed and Meryl stood by the side, they were supposed to watch for those entering the cave.


    "Captain, isn''t this also rumoured to be a soul realisation master''s tomb?" the vice captain asked, "why don''t we also try our luck with that?"


    "Oh? The gold bird mercenary. You even believe in children''s tales?" an singsong voice said, causing every body to pause.

 24 Etheric Fruits 2

    "Oh? The gold bird mercenary. You even believe in children''s tales?" an singsong voice said, causing every body to pause.


    They all looked towards the location of the voice. Surprisingly, it was above their head. Three young men and two girls stood in the air looking down on them with eyes filled with amusement and disdain. The me were all dress the same, and the girl too. They all looked to be around the same age.


    "My senior apprentice brother asked you a question." one of the men spoke. They looked to the one leading the group. It was a fairly handsome boy with sharp nose and glassy eyes. They all had their long hair tied back, looking ethereal. Those words confirmed the captain''s worst fears. These were students of a sect. From their attire, their sect must still have some influence in the demon lands.


    "Brother, since you know who we are, you don''t mind telling us who you, right?" the captain asked. They were all guarded. He called the young man brother because he could see that they were all in the spirit awareness stage, except the leader, whose cultivation looked to be around the peak of spirit awareness; a step ahead of his.


    "Had over the bad of etheric fruits and leave." their words made Ed think, Etheric fruits, that;s what they were called? Well, it makes sense wince they have a well of etheric energy in them.


    "We found these fruits fair and square." the vice captain said and the newcomers laughed.


    "Only power will decide." one of the boy said and the captain paled. Even though the two groups were more or less at the same level of cultivation, he knew that those trained by sects where more powerful, as their sects spared no expense to raise them. If a fight broke out, he would be on the loosing side.


    "Ed!" Meryl spoke into his mind and Ed looked at her.


    "This may be our chance. If a fight breaks out, we should use that opportunity to escape." she said, but Ed did not answer her.


    "Are you really so righteous, you would save them, then still fight with them?" she asked in anger. She did not believe Ed would give up his life for people he did not know, and she was right. Ed did not save them because of his righteous heart. Righteous heart? He left that back in his world. In this world, he is ready to climb on heads to get to his goal, even if it''s infant''s blood he must drink.


    He save them because he needed them to lead him to this fruits. Now that he is standing in front of it, he had no intention of walking away. He intended to take the fruits and leave.


    "Fight then!" vice captain said and the two groups geared to start.


    "Do you think it''s winner takes all? We came to kill you and take the fruits. We don''t need people out there that can tell other that we have it." one of the girls laughed softy and attacked. She pulled a sword out of her spatial ring and her body warped. The next moment she was standing before one of the men. Soon as she appeared, he sword descended.


    The man was well experienced as he had fought many battles. He snorted and blocked with his axe. With one swing she broke his axe, causing his eyes to shrink. She did not stop there, she swung her sword at the others and attacked. What was she holding? A high grade human weapon? They paled.


    Her actions showed them that she intended to fight them all alone. Her action caused their anger to rise. They noticed that the others were just hanging around and watching. This was a blow to their self esteem. She was faster than all of them combined. In a heart beat she had taken two of them out.


    "Ed!" Meryl called, but Ed ignored her. he was looking for an opportunity to take the bag of fruits. With a huff, she tried to escape on her own. She turned and dashed out of the cave. Approaching the cave mouth she met one of the boys at the entrance.


    "I don''t like to hurt women, so..." he kicked her back into the cave. "why don''t you consider becoming my slave? I will treat you right."


    "It''s better she dies? The dead a best off than your slave" the other girl said with a scuff. The leader kept watching Ed with interest. This man had not moved. He looked completely uninterested in what was happening.


    "Vice captain, the bag." Ed said, neither loud nor soft. The vice captain there him the bag, hoping Ed would escape with it. It was a desperate act, but they rather the fruits be gone than the newcomers take it. The girl fighting narrowed her eyes at Ed''s form as she finished of the last person. One could see the regret and unwillingness on the faces of the corpse. A testimony of their disbelief that their life ended like this.


    They were prepared for Ed to make a dash for the door but he did not. They watched as he looked into the bag, then at them. He completely ignored the dead and the coughing Meryl, looking at the leader square in the eye.


    "Hand it over. Do you think a spirit picking junior like you can do anything?" the leader said. He looked at Ed interestingly, as though looking at something hard to figure out.


    Ed was never one for words. He placed the bag in his spirit ring and removed a wooden sword from it. Holding the wooden sword, he stared the blankly.


    "Come." he said.

 25 Etheric fruits 3

    Ed was never one for words. He placed the bag in his spatial ring and removed a wooden sword from it. Holding the wooden sword, he stared the blankly.


    "Come." he said.


    They all had a complicated look on their faces. What was this? This had never happened to them before. A spirit piking junior acting like this?


    "It looks as if you have no fear." the girl who had just killed the group said.


    "You want to fight so badly, I will indulge you." she said, pointing her sword at Ed. She saw that Ed did not flinch at her words, making her angrier. She appeared before him instantly. Ed recognised this skill. Blink? no. only those with at least soul awakening even of cultivation can use this skill. This was a much lower and mediocre martial skill, made to imitate the blink technique.


    She arrived before him in seconds ad with a swing of her sword, a wave of water qi filled the air. A normal spirit picking junior would have felt as though he was drowning. Ed felt like he was splashed cold water. The wave formed a seal around him as though to suffocate him. With him inside the large ball of qi trying to suffocate him, she swung her sword right at the middle. The sharpness of that sword could be felt by her fellow disciples. They snorted as they thought it would cut right through with Ed in it.


    Right at that moment, Ed tore his hand through the wave and grabbed her wrist.


    "Crack!" they heard the sound of breaking bones, then came the yelp of their fellow disciple. What they did not know was that Ed could see right through the wave and could see all the key points of her qi. Not only did he break the wrist, he broke her connection to the wave of qi.


    To Ed, his greatest asset was the energy inside him. He channelled an amount not smaller than a drop of water into her. his energy acted like deathqi, entering her and ageing her qi points till it reached her core. She looked as though she was burning from inside out as her eyes turned white and she fell like an empty sack.


    What did he just do? The others wondered. The leader more so. All he saw was Ed hold her hand and break it. Why did she fall?


    "Junior apprentice sister!" the other girl called. She could not feel her apprentice sister''s life qi from where she stood. She rushed to grab her, but Ed was waiting. The flaw of his ability to use his energy was that people had to be close. He had to be capable of touching them. He wanted them to come to him. The closer they were, the greater his chances of killing them.


    "You wish to die!" the girl growled but was held back by a frowning youth.


    "There is something odd about this boy. We fight together." one of them said. They now took Ed seriously. They considered the possibility that he was hiding his true cultivation and they could not really see through him.


    Ed was not sure if he could take them all together. He did not know any fighting styles except basic swings. This wooden sword in his hand, he did not bring it out to look down on them, he just did not want to take out his Yhenxia sword. It was one of the few things that came with him to this world.


    Looking at the wooden sword, he coated it with his energy. The sword suddenly seemed sharper. If his energy cuts someone, he wondered what would happen to them?


    "He could feel the sword vibrating in his hands. This sword will not be able to take his energy that long. Looking at all of them charge, he suddenly felt a rush like never before. Fight! He always loved going to battle back in the valley. This time, the opponents were much stronger than back in the valley. This excited him. It was like he was possessed.


    The sect disciples were very coordinated, a sign that they had fought side by side before. One of them swung a halberd and the smell of blood filled the air. Oh? A blood cultivator? Ed had only heard of them. Blood seals sprung up around him, caging him inside. Blood hounds tore out from under it grabbing Ed in place. Ed suddenly felt a pressure from above.


    He looked up at a giant hammer descending on him.


    "You dare kill my senior apprentice sister? I will make sure, even your soul is destroyed." thegirl said as she swung down her giant hammer on Ed. Trapped in the blood seal, there was no where to go. Ed raised his sword, and increased the density of his energy coating it. He intended to take the giant hammer with the wooded sword?


    "Taking a high grade human weapon with an ordinary wooden sword? he is mad." the leader said. Meryl could not move, but she could still see the battle. She too thought Ed was mad.


    The hammer descended on the wooden sword and a tear rang through the air.


    Tear! The wooden sword cut through the hammer like a knife through butter. Shock could not describe the look on their faces right now. Were they dreaming? As the sword broke through the other side, it crumbled like biscuit to the ground. Ed moved swiftly, and manifested another. The destruction of girl''s sword destabilized her, causing her to fall towards the direction ofthe raised sword. They all saw this. Her cultivation was not high enough for her to pause mid-air.


    One of the others jumped and tried to grab her back, but Ed was having none of it. He grabbed the broken handle of her hammer which was still tied by cloth to her wrist and pulled. She fell faster into the sword. The result was as expected. She felt the wooden sword stab her through to the back. She did not even have the chance to puke blood when Ed threw her with the stuck sword into the disciple who had tried to grab her.


    when he turned, a halberd was swinging at his mid section. As the halberd got closer, he could feel the blood thirst from the sword. He swayed out of the way and it missed him. They were much faster than him, but he could see their qi. He could see that seventy percent of the movements they made were unnecessary. With this, it did not matter how much slower he was. As long as he could see their next move clearly, he could counter it.


    He threw the boy a punch and his fist met with steel skin. This caused him to frown. What was this boy made of? If his ordinary fist could not cause him harm... Ed circulated his energy at his core to boost his speed as he swayed out of the way. He circulated his energy around his fist and descended upon the boy.


    His punch was one hundred times more deadly this time, as it tore through the boy''s steel skin and right through his organs. Ed was ecstatic. This was what he needed, more fights like this, where he would have no choice but to think fast. These improvisations he has made, would help him develop his own personal fighting style.


    The rush of the fight pulsed through his veins like alcohol. He wanted more. He had completely torn through the boy''s body and retracted his bloody arm, leaving behind the boy, dead in his own blood.


    Finally, the leader moved.

 26 Etheric fruits 4

    The rush of the fight pulsed through his veins like alcohol. He wanted more. He had completely torn through the boy''s body and retracted his bloody arm, leaving behind the boy, dead in his own blood.


    Finally, the leader moved.


    They were five of them, now only two remained. The leader''s face was ugly to behold and nothing could be said for the other disciple holding his dead sister apprentice and Meryl. Horror.


    Ed was too scary. It was as though he had not actual fighting pattern or style. Like he was usung them to gain experience. The thought of this made the leader angrier. There was nothing he wanted more than to kill Ed.


    "You killed three of the Tze sect''s disciples. Do you think you are going to get out of here alive?" the leader said. Ed did not want to talk. He wanted to fight. He picked up the halberd from the ground and threw at the in coming leader. With a wave of his hand, the leader blocked it.


    "Just because you have killed a little does not mean you are invincible." he said throwing a punch that Ed received with his hand. Of course, he did not forget to coat his palm with his energy. The leader''s fist met with an unmoveable palm. He had put a lot of his energy into that punch. The backlash caused him to vomit blood.


    "So you are strong, huh? Let''s see if you can handle a mental attack!" as the leader said this, Ed felt a pressure attack his mind. Huh? Mental attack? He had heard of mental cultivators before, but never had the chance to understand how this mental powers worked.


    Ed felt his mind shake and his vision blur. So this was the mental attack thing? He felt as though there was large leach stuck in his head. It seemed as though it was trying to devour his core. Ed frowned. He had no idea how to defend from this.


    The leader felt a well of energy in Ed and froze. How can a spirit picking martial artist have so much power? As he took a taste of the rich energy, his mind felt a live for only an instant. For just that second he felt as though he had gained insight into all things. The beginning and the end. Eternity.


    The next second, his mind felt as though on fire. He felt his core burn up from with, this caused him to turn red and start to burn from outside.


    Ed''s felt the hold on him come loose and his vision clear. He came to the sight of the boy burning. The boy had burned before he had the opportunity to scream. His burning body dropped to the ground. The smell of burning flesh filled Ed''s nose, causing him to be shocked. His vision blurred for a second and the next thing his opponent was on fire? What was going on? He wondered.


    He was not the only one. One one disciple remained and Meryl. They both did not understand what was going on. For a second, Ed stilled and the leading disciple was smiling. Then next, Ed moved and the boy was burning.


    As much as Ed wanted to know, there was still one person left. He looked at the boy at the corner and the boy paled. He took out a slab engraved with inscriptions quickly and crushed it. Thick qi warped around him and Ed frowned.


    "Spatial qi?" he wondered. It was the first time he had seen this, but it felt like the qi of space. This qi only stayed for a second. When it was gone, so was the boy. Ed frowned. This was bad. This boy must have used an escape talisman. He could be anywhere. Ed was sure that they were disciples of a large sect. Tze sect, was it? He had never heard of them. But he knew that such sects would have people much stronger than him. This was a grave mistake. He should have killed the boy before he escaped.


    He was yet to enter the demon lands yet he had already made enemies.


    "You won!" Meryl said. Ed walked towards her slowly till he stood above her paralysed form.


    "Help me up." she said.


    "We need to leave before the Tunsen bird returns and discovers that the fruits are gone." she said.


    "You must really think we are allies." Ed said and she paused. That is true. They were not. Just a while back she was going to join the group and kill Ed, but when her group turned on her, she thought to side with him. If she was in his place right now, she would kill him so that he does not tell any one anything. She immediately paled at the thought. If she thought that, so could he.


    "Sir... you are going to leave me here? Please, I know the demon lands. I can help you navigate this place. My people, the mermaid clan will be grateful if you...." she hurried started to plead. She did not get to finish when Ed picked up the sword lying by the captain and stabbed her. Regret filled her eyes as her words hung in her throat, never to be finished.


    Ed turned and walked out of the cave as though nothing had happened.


    In a large courtyard, a boy appeared suddenly causing those around to go alert. He started coughing blood the moment he appeared, alarming them all. This was the boy that had escaped from the cave. Before escaped, he had circulated the energy in his core in the opposite direction, causing him severe internal injury. He had wounded himself so that he would escape a punishment.


    Returning to the clan without their leader was a capital offence. No matter what happened, they would still prefer that he died there and they avenged him, than return alive without his young master.


    "Ah Fude! What happened? Where is the young master?" they asked.


    "Young... young... enemy." he struggled to say.


    "Inform the patriarch!" they called. Some moments later, a large man appeared at the scene. He was accompanied by two elders.


    "Where is Didia? Speak!" the large man bellowed.


    "His core is wounded. It is a miracle that he is alive." one of the elder said and placed his hand on Ah Fude''s back, injecting him with his energy. Only then was Ah Fude able to breathe.


    "Young master was killed. Everybody was killed." he said weakly after a few breaths. Every one gasped in shock. Their young master? The same young master, full of life and a bright future?


    The large man turned red in anger. His chin trembled as he asked, "Who did it?"


    "He never said his name. But,... he was a spirit picking junior." Ah Fude said and they air around them chilled.

 27 Etheric fruits 5

    Ed found found a place to sit and cultivate. He had found an uninhabited cave and sat down in lotus fashion. As far as he was concerned. He needed to find out better ways to fight. He was sure that the boy that had escaped would send back some elders of his sect or clan. Theses were people he could not fight at the moment. He needed more strength or techniques.


    He sat and took out the fruits from his bag. He wondered how he was supposed to absorb this? There were many ways to absorb energy from fruits such as his, but he wondered what was the best way to get the maximum result?


    He reached out at the etheric energy with his own energy to see what would happen. At then, he felt a rush of etheric energy fill him. He had split attention, allowing him to split contemplate. This helped him to be cultivating as he walked. If others cultivated every moment like he did, they would have levelled up faster than he. But his body was like a hollow space, sucking all the energy from the surrounding and disappearing like nothing.


    The etheric energy that filled him this time was much more significant than any other time. He felt a significant increase in his energy. Little, but significant. He went ahead and absorbed the other fruits. By the time he was done, he had significantly grown in cultivation.


    He took this time to look back into the technique the old pervert had given him. All he saw was the same images. He wondered if he would ever understand how to use this technique. Contemplation techniques were great because they could increase the rate a person absorbs the energy around him. this would increase his absorption rate significantly. Maybe to a point where he can absorb more energy in a day than he does in a month. That would be a miracle. But now, it was only a dream.


    He decided to concentrate on other things. The fight he just had did great for his experience. He hoped to class more with those in his generation. This would do great for his fighting experience. Since he could not contemplate higher than he usually does, he might as well learn a martial skill.


    He remembered his spirit picking. Spirit picking was really important for every cultivator. This was the time the leaned towards a particular energy. The properties of their powers and abilities are after all, connected to the kind of energy they can feel and cultivate.


    The picking of stars was also the picking of abilities. Some people would lean towards swords, others, alchemy, weapons refining, axe wielding spears and so on. During his own spirit picking, he did not pick out one star. Instead, all the stars hanging in his well of consciousness were all sucked into his core. Did this mean he could practise any skill? He wondered.


    He took out the spatial rings he had gotten from the bodies of those he had killed and looked into them one by one. Today, he had used a sword. Does he continue on this path? He noticed a sword skill inside the spatial ring of the leader. The name was eye catching. Slicing the sky, cutting the earth. He picked up this skill and stared a t it a while. After making up his mind, he started reading the jade slip.


    Inside, he learnt a lot about the creator of the technique. He was a hermit on a mountain trying to understand the way of the sword. He watched the hermit display the skill over and over again. Getting up, he followed the moves. After an hour he had mastered the first level.


    If those at the Tze sect knew of this, they would have vomited blood. To Ed this was just basic moves. He practised the secondand third level, before he stopped. He did not stop because he could no more go on, he just stopped because there were no more levels. He was happy with the technique. He just needed people to try it out on.


    Taking another look at the spatial rings he found the speed technique that the female disciple had used before. Shifting space. The words brought thought to his head. Was this a spatial technique? He looked into the jade slip and started to read.


    Oh, so that''s what really happened. When he had seen her move, he thought it looked like the blink technique, but now discovered it was not. The blink technique is also a spatial technique. But this was an ability every soul awakening master had. It was part of entering the soul awakening stage. The ability to move through space. Just like the soul realisation masters could fly when they reached that stage.

 28 Fighting His Way Out 1

    Oh, so that''s what really happened. When he had seen her move, he thought it looked like the blink technique, but now discovered it was not. The blink technique is also a spatial technique. But this was an ability every soul awakening master had. It was part of entering the soul awakening stage. The ability to move through space. Just like the soul realisation masters could fly when they reached that stage.


    This technique was even more attractive to him than blink. This was a technique for spatial masters. They did beyond travelling through space and getting to somewhere faster than a blink. The spatial cultivators were able to bend and stretch space. They had actual control over it so much that they could increase the distance of those pursuing them, making a 10 kilometres distance 1000 kilometres, keeping them running longer.


    Looking into the jade slip, he immersed him self in this technique. He was now very serious about becoming a spatial cultivator. With this, his speed would be greatly increased and by so doing, his swordsmanship. The faster he is, the better his sword would move. He took time and practised till content. He mastered the fourth level of the skill after one day. This took longer than the sword skill, but he though it worth it. By the second day, he had practised both skills so many times, he was itching fro a fight. And as if on cue, a fight came.


    "Is this him?" he heard someone say. Ed knew this person was much more powerful than him, because he did not feel him arrive. The large man was accompanied by two older men and a boy. Ed recognised the boy. He was the one that had escaped.


    "Yes." the boy nodded. Ed noticed he looked weaker than he had left him.


    "Good! If you were not stupid enough to take Didia"s ring with you, I would not have been able to find you." the large man looked at Ed as though he wanted nothing more than to cut him up in the worst way possible.


    "Who are you?" Ed asked.


    "Who am I? Good! When you killed my son, did you wonder who I am?" the man released a mountain of pressure on Ed, who stood and looked at him with blank eyes. When the man saw that Ed was unaffected, he nodded hi head.


    "You should at least have some substance to be able to kill my son." one could not tell if he was complimenting Ed or not.


    "I know that boy behind you, so I am assuming your son is one of those I killed back in the cave." Ed said.


    "Insolence! This wild child does not even care to repent!" one of the elders said. They all put pressure on Ed who did not feel it at all. This surprised them. Who was this child. Did he have some treasure on him to be able to do this? Greed crossed their eyes.


    "Hand over the Etheric fruit." one of the Elders said.


    "I have absorbed them all." Ed said, pointing at the now black fruit on the ground. All of them? How long ago did he get them, to have absorbed all by now?


    "It doesn''t matter. We will take it from your dead body." one of the elders said.


    The other elder was quite solemn. This boy before him did not seem at all scared. He had stared right at them and was able to take on their combined pressure. This boy that looked no older than twenty five was not simple. It is possible he was a great sect''s treasure child. This may not end well.


    "Your son and his team wanted to kill me." Ed said.


    "Then you should have given him your head!" the large man said. Ed circulated the energy in his core and took out a wooden sword. With a stance, he looked at the group before him.


    "Come." he said.

 29 Fighting his way out 2 warning: all chapters are unedited

    "Then you should have given him your head!" the large man said. Ed circulated the energy in his core and took out a wooden sword. With a stance, he looked at the group before him.


    "Come." he said.


    The elders and the large man had complicated looks on their faces. He intends to fight his way out of this? A spirit picking baby was challenging them like this? If any of their enemies saw this, would they even have any face left?


    Ah Fude at first felt glee over Ed''s situation and his impending doom, but looking at the situation, he felt a sense of deja-vu. A tiny speck of fear crept into his heart for a second. This surprised him. What was he afraid of? This boy would be killed by their clan head instantly.


    One of the elders moved immediately, not waiting for instructions and appeared before Ed in a second. He slapped towards Ed in one motion. This sent shock waves through the air, as a loud crack tore through one''s ears.


    Ed was already prepared for his actions. He rotated the shifting space technique. His form warped and the elder''s slap missed him. Ed was standing behind him just as the slap missed. He swung his wooden sword coated with his energy and the elder immediately felt a sense of danger. He turned abruptly, but Ed expanded the second level of shifting space to the elders turn. His speed slowed down dramatically.


    Seeing his movement stalled, the elder paled. That wooden sword was dangerous and should not touch him! He circulated his qi and activated a shield under his clothes. A crackle of lightening sprung up in between Ed''s sword and his back. The wooded sword could not cut through the shield, but bent the shield enough to still connect with the elders back. The elder was thrown away into the rock wall, causing it to crumble.


    Those watching paled. Who was this boy? The large man was cautious, because he knew of the elders powers, but he still rationalized what he saw. This boy may now some moves, but he can not take a direct hit from the elder. If he did, he would be squashed into a puddle of blood. All he needed to do was be careful of his speed.


    The other elder paused. His thought were right. This boy is surely a treasure child of some great power. Is it save to hurt him? Would the clan survive this? They had found out about young master Didia''s death through Ah Fude, but they would have still found out eventually. The young master had a life stone in the ancestral hall. If they a third rate power inside the demon lands could have it, what could be said about those great powers out side the demon lands? If they kill this boy, would their clan survive it? He looked at the clan head and sighed. The clan head was too angry to think straight.


    He relayed his thought to the clan head.


    "So, you say I should let my son''s death go unavenged?" the clan head scolded within their telepathic communication.


    "You must think of the clan first." the elder protested.


    Ed sighed at the outcome of his fight. He needed a sword. These wooden training sword were not enough. If he used too much of his energy, the wooden sword would crumble into dust. He needed a steel sword. It may not be enough for him to used a lot of his energy, but it should be enough to increase by a little. He turned to the large man, the other elder and the pale faced boy at the corner.


    "Do you have a sword you can borrow me?" Ed asked and they paused. They saw his wooden sword turn to dust, Even though they did not understand why. But, what kind of situation was this? Were they supposed to give him a sword to used and fight them? Was this a spar or a revenge kill?


    The clan head could no more care about what the elder had warned. This boy was looking down on them.


    "I know it''s odd, but I really need on right now." Ed said and the clan head turned red in rage.


    "You newborn! You seek death!" the clan head bellowed and attacked. He was faster than the elder and Ed could feel that he was much stronger. The two elders were at least on the spirit merging stage and the clan head was surely on the spirit awakening stage. It was weird that Ed could see this, but he just had a feeling. He could see people''s cultivation through their energies. Though he had not met many people to know the correct range of his sight, he knows of al the stage, and compared them to his adopted father, the tribe chiefs in the valley, old pervert and Madam Ge, who he had seen before.


    He knew for sure that these people were relatively weaker than any of those mentioned above. He could not use his sword, but he he could use his hands. Rotating the shifting space technique, he appeared before the incoming clan head and threw a punch. The clan head looked at the incoming fist and snorted. He looked at it like the fist of a little child and threw out a palm to block it.


    Ed was not stupid there was no way he could punch a spirit awareness master with the strength of a spirit picking junior. The physical strength of each cultivation levels were different. Even if he had been creating miracles since he entered this world, he was not stupid enough to do that.


    But, the clan head''s reaction, was what he was hoping for. He did not take Ed seriously at all, an decided to block with his bare palm. Ed circulated his energy and prepared for that second when he would touch the clan head''s skin. He knew that his fist was heading for a wall, so he reduced the strength of the fist. The clan head noticed this, but Ed was already too close. The next second, Ed''s fist with feather like strength touched the clan head''s palm.


    Fire! No, age! No, knives?


    The clan head felt his qi points sliced up and die off faster than he could scream. A strange energy tore through his body, and every qi cell started to rot at lightening speed. His eyes turned blank and he crumbled to the ground. Regret did not even get the chance to surface from his heart.

 30 We will not pursue this

    Fire! No, age! No, knives?


    The clan head felt his qi points sliced up and die off faster than he could scream. A strange energy tore through his body, and every qi cell started to rot at lightening speed. His eyes turned blank and he crumbled to the ground. Regret did not even get the chance to surface from his heart.


    The elder and Ah Fude paled. They did not understand what they had just seen. They looked at their clan head and the other elder unconscious under rocks. The elder could not feel the clan head''s life qi, but he was sure that the other elder was still alive. This was a bad situation. How can they go back like this? Who would he say killed the clan head and wounded the second elder?


    Ed sighed. He was really bad at fighting. The prospect of a good fight always excited him, but it never happened. He understood what Tie Nse was talking about. These people were at spirit merging and spirit awareness that is why he could fight them. In a true fight, he may kill his opponent, but he would loose. His energy which was a combination of all the energies was his greatest asset, but was it any good. He would just be good at killing. He had no idea how to really fight.


    He had to be in a life an death situation for his skills to develop. In the demon lands, he would have not energy. It will be a fight of brute strength. There, his fighting skills can be horned. When he learns how to truly fight he may be able to kill people above the soul seeking stage. Because he would have the skill to be able to go close enough to kill them. At this stage, he was only able to kill those no higher than the spirit awareness. This is only possible because of the pace shifting technique. He wanted to know how to really fight. His anticipation for the demon lands was high.


    He turned to the remaining two who paled further as they noticed his attention.


    "I do not wish to fight you." the elder said and Ed paused.


    "And if I''m right, you can not truly fight either. Your movements are very simple and inexperienced. You must have a technique with you that can kill someone higher than you." the elder said and Ed frowned. This man was very perceptive.


    "My guess id that you are really at the spirit picking stage and your sect sent you to the demon lands where energies don''t work to gain experience. So that you can truly learn how to fight without the help of that skill." Ed''s frown remained. The elder''s guess was spot on.


    "If you could have such a skill, that means you are some treasure child of a great sect. I have no intention to fight you. Even if I win, your sect will come for my head." Ed gave the elder a complicated look. He may not be from a big sect, but that old pervert was still the head of the heaven alliance. He was not sure how far the heaven alliances influence and strength goes, but it must be great because the old pervert is really strong. Still, he did not believe for one moment that if he died, the old pervert would come and avenge him.


    "Let me take my clan head''s body and the unconscious elder and leave and we will not pursue this matter." the elder said and Ed looked at him oddly.


    "If what you assume about me if correct, then does it matter if you pursue it or not?" Ed asked.


    "Even if you are some treasure child, you are still alone in the demon Lands. If my clan wishes it, we could still kill you and await the consequences. You are still a junior, give us some face and let me take them and leave." the elder warned coldly.


    Ed knew what he said was correct. If he did not let them go, their pride would be hurt and they could go mad and damn the consequences. The last thing he needed was some clan hunting him. Though, some part of him wondered if it would make for a good experience to face such danger?


    The thought passed through his head for a second. Was he mad? Had staying in this word so long made him go mad? He was now looking for more danger? He nodded to the man totake them away.


    As the man picked up the dead clan head, Ah fude freed the elder from under the rubble and carried him on his back. It dawned on Ed that they were just leaving the salt bed without waiting for the period of time when the door opened from the salt bed to the demon lands. Now that he thought about it, they just came into the salt bed when they wished. Did this mean that most powers in the demon land had this ability?


    The elder nodded to Ed once and they disappear. Ed nodded at the scene. So it is a teleportation key. Just like the old pervert said that he and other powers have keys to the Baju valley. They can just go and come as they like.


    The elder and Ah Fude appeared in their clan, clean. Clean as in, both those dead and alive had no blood or open wound. This was a shame. If one saw them, they would not even know they had just escaped with their lives.


    "First elder, who is...." a guard asked before a maid screamed. He knew she must have recognised the clan head.


    "Inform the elders, the clan head is dead." he said and the guard stood frozen.


    "What are you waiting for?!" he bellowed, waking the guard from his trance. The guard rushed away and he made his way to the clan head''s court yard. He entered a room and place the clan head down. Ah Fude did the same and placed the unconscious elder in one of the rooms. He returned to see the elder staring at the clan head''s dead form solemnly.


    On the other side of the clan, in the reception hall, celebrations were taking place. Inside sat an elderly man on he host seat and elders of the clan flanking his sides. The geniuses of the clan were present, so were guest from other clans who came to congratulate the clan ancestor for coming out of seclusion. He had successfully broken through to the peak of spirit awareness stage. This made him the second peak spirit awareness master in the entire city. This was an honour. Those who were at the same level as hey were before came to show god will and the other clan who had the other peak spirit awareness master came to congratulate them.


    The party was in full swing when a guard barged in. Ancestor Ah frowned as he looked at the guard.


    "Insolence! How dare you barge in?" he bellowed. If he was outside the demon realm, he would be able to release his new aura on this guard for the entire crowd to see. But he could not. The only thing that was beneficial about growing in cultivation in the demon lands, was the increase in physical strength.


    The guard fell to the floor and knelt.


    "Ancestor!" he cried, causing everyone to frown. The ancestor wondered if this guard had felt his now great presence to fall with just one look from him? He smiled, very please with the guard''s performance.


    "Clan head... clan head has died!" the guard cried an the hall paused.

 31 The face of the Ah Clan

    The guard fell to the floor and knelt.


    "Ancestor!" he cried, causing everyone to frown. The ancestor wondered if this guard had felt his now great presence to fall with just one look from him? He smiled, very please with the guard''s performance.


    "Clan head... clan head has died!" the guard cried an the hall paused.


    "What nonsense are you sprouting? My son? I thought you said he went to bring back Didia?" the ancestor said and the elders paused. They did not have the heart to tell the ancestor when he came out from seclusion that his grandson was dead. Especially when the ancestor''s first action was to inform the entire city about his advancement before the clan even knew. By the time they had arrived, he was surrounded by well wishers and outsiders. They gave a diplomatic answer especially when others were watching.


    "Third elder!" the ancestor bellowed, making the third elder sigh. This old man had forgotten that people are watching. He was shocked about the news, but could not do anything much as they had guests.


    "Ancestor, please let''s send off the guests first." the third elder pleaded. The fourth elder got up and bowed to the guests.


    "As you can see, we have a bit of an emergency, let''s gather again later." the fourth elder said and the guests nodded. They were returning to their clans to pass on the news anyway. They left in a hurry till only clans men remained.


    "Elders, please follow." the younger generation were forced to leave no matter how curious they were.


    The ancestor had long stormed off with the guard. By thetime the elders caught up, the ancestor had gotten to the clan head''s room and was staring at his son''s dead body in shock.


    "What happened?" he asked the first elder who was shocked to see the ancestor. He paled as he thought about his promise to not pursue the matter. This old man was even more irrational than his son.


    "I and the second elder went with clan head to kill a spirit picking sapling who had killed Didia...." the first elder started to explain.


    "Didia is dead!? Who is this little shit?" the ancestor exploded.


    "The sapling killed clan head and wounded the second elder." he said and everyone paused.


    "You are trying to tell me that my son, an early spirit awareness master was killed by a spirit picking brat?" the ancestor said so softly, one would have thought he had lost his voice.


    "Where is this little thing now?!" one of the elders asked.


    "I suggest we don''t pursue this." the first elder said and they all paused. Had the first elder gone mad? Was he wounded in the head during the fight?


    "Listen to my reason please. Listen to it first than make your decision." the first elder pleaded.


    "What reason? That little thing killed my son!" the ancestor was not interested in any thing else than to tear the little sapling apart.


    "This has something to do with the future of our clan! Ancestor, you have never been the best in making reasonable decisions! If you go off like this, we will all be killed!" the first elder got angry. He was already tired enough for the day, then this old man with out common tact had to show up.


    "What?! You call me unreasonable? You don''t want to live!" the ancestor was ready to kill this little elder. All he heard was being called unreasonable, he did not hear the future of the clan part. They had always known making this man a clan head before, and later the ancestor, was a bad decision. But he was the most powerful person their bloodline had ever produced.


    "Ancestor please wait. If he says something useless, then it could be okay to kill him. But he is the only one that knows who the boy is, his powers and where he is. Besides, he may have something important to say." one of the elders defended.


    "I''ll let you live one more second. Speak!" the ancestor agreed with the suggestion.


    "This boy not older than twenty six was able to wound second elder, in one move and kill the clan head in another..." the listening elders gasped. Was this possible? So doesn''t this mean that they would have been easily killed?


    "Now, from what I saw, this boy had a technique that could easily kill a spirit awareness master. He just does not have any fighting experience. His sect probably sent him to the demon lands to gain some. This is very common. From what is saw, this boy is probably a treasure child of a large sect outside. He did not seem scared of meeting spirit awareness or spirit merging masters. Almost as if he had seen higher. He killed Didia so, we went to kill him. Imagine what would happen if we kill him. It is too dangerous to take the risk." the first elder explained. All the elders saw his point. The ancestor on the other hand could care less.


    "You want us to avoid a spirit picking brat? Let him bully us because of the power behind him?have you lost your mind?!" the ancestor scolded.


    "Ancestor, you say you have travelled outside the demon lands to the outside world. You say you have seen different powers, well, so have I. I have yet to see any spirit picking junior that can kill a spirit awareness master. Such technique would need power to control. The boy did not break a sweat. Such a technique can only be passed down from great powers outside. Probably even one of the gates. Such a technique would not be passed to any one lower than a core disciple. That means there is someone out there watching his progress, wth an entire clan where spirit awareness masters are just cleaners. If one person from there comes for us, how do you intend to defend us? If you can convince us, we will back this idea of yours." the first elder said.


    All the elders looked at the ancestor as though waiting for him to defend his ability.


    "So you are saying I should let the person that killed my son and grandson go? What great power? If they come, I will kill them all! How dare he kill my son and grandson? I will handle this sapling my self!" the ancestor said and they paled. In this world, power was everything. If someone was more powerful than them, they had to bow their heads. This old man, has he gone mad?

 32 Entering the demon lands

    "So you are saying I should let the person that killed my son and grandson go? What great power? If they come, I will kill them all! How dare he kill my son and grandson? I will handle this sapling my self!" the ancestor said and they paled. In this world, power was everything. If someone was more powerful than them, they had to bow their heads. This old man, has he gone mad?


    Ed had waited for the right time, before he stepped foot into the demon lands. As he stepped out of the salt bed, he felt a pressure descend momentarily. When the pressure lifted, he could not feel energy pulsing his veins. This was a clear sign he had reached his goal. The demon lands.


    He looked forward and saw a high red wall and black gate far ahead. Taking in a deep breath, he walked towards it. The eyes were deceiving as he had been walking for two days and it was still far. Was this the first test? He wondered.


    Without the help of his energy, how was he going to keep walking? He did not feel despair, only tired. To Ed, there was nothing scarier than not being able to return home. Nothing could phase or scare him. He just kept walking till he stood right before the gate.


    At that time, he looked to be very tired and dusty. The guards at the gate looked down and saw a shadow of a person standing there.


    "Do you have a recommendation?" he asked. Ed was somewhat confused. A recommendation? That old pervert never said anything about needing one.


    "Then pay twenty spirit stone." the guard said, completely bored. In his eyes, someone who has to walk his way into the demon lands was not of a great power. Those with powerful backgrounds would have a recommendation. Still, even if they don''t have one, they would be able to pay twenty spirit stones.


    Ed had been given money by the old pervert. The old pervert even grumbled about it while he did. He took out twenty spirit stone and looked up a the guard. The guard snorted then called for the gates to open. Ed passed through it, confused as to why there was no one really entering or leaving through this gate. After paying the twenty spirit stones inside, he entered the city with caution. One look and he understood. This was a special gate.


    He had entered through a residential area. An area that was completely silent. He had entered cities before and knew that there was no way it would be this quiet. He understood that he had not used the main entrance.


    It took him time to find his way out of the rich dwelling to the bustling city. He just followed the noise. When he got to the city, he decided to understand more about this place and started searching for a map store. He was not there much for the map, but to pay for information.


    "What kind of map would you like to buy?" the attendant in the store asked.


    "One of the demon lands and one of the city." he said and the attendant nodded. He walked away and returned with two jade slips.


    "That will be five spirit stones." the attendant said, "you are not from here, are you?"


    "How do you know?" Ed asked before paying.


    "You don''t have a ranking mark." he answered.


    "What if I have it inside my sleeves?" Ed asked. He had heard a lot about the ranking mark from Meryl. This wasa mark tattooed to the skin of those here. It showed their cultivation rank. The mark usually appear when they break through. As cultivation is suppressed here, one can not easily tell someone''s level of strength.


    "Only women wear clothes with sleeves. Men like to show off their rank." the attendant said.


    "How do people here breakthrough with suppressed cultivation? Shouldn''t cultivation be impossible here?" Ed asked.


    "The lack of cultivation makes the demon lands weaker than other places, but also protects us. No one can just attack here without care. But there are places where energy exists. These places are called energy spills. Many gather there to cultivate. Some large clans build their clan around energy spills." the attendant said. Ed took out a spirit stone and gave it to the man.


    "Can you tell me about the powers in the demon lands?" he asked and the man raised a brow. Ed added one more stone before he nodded with a smile.


    "The demon lands is large but actually consist of three cities. The west side city, the east side and the south side. Each side has a city. There is a north side, but it is not classified a power. All three powers share the north side. There are basically training grounds for the younger generation. There is a north side council consisting of the city lords from the three cities. This is the south side city. There are two powers here. The Ah clan and the Fien clan. Both have a peak spirit awakening master. Apart from them, there is the city lord, who is an early stage soul seeking master. The city is letting people enter a large energy spill called the great spill in two days. To enter, you must pay fifty spirit stones for outsiders. I think that is all in a nut shell." the man said. Ed thanked him and left.

 33 The south side city

    "The demon lands is large but actually consist of three cities. The west side city, the east side and the south side. Each side has a city. There is a north side, but it is not classified a power. All three powers share the north side. There are basically training grounds for the younger generation. There is a north side council consisting of the city lords from the three cities. This is the south side city. There are two powers here. The Ah clan and the Fien clan. Both have a peak spirit awakening master. Apart from them, there is the city lord, who is an early stage soul seeking master. The city is letting people enter a large energy spill called the great spill in two days. To enter, you must pay fifty spirit stones for outsiders. I think that is all in a nut shell." the man said. Ed thanked him and left.


    Ed made his way to a nearby inn to find a place to eat and rest. He was very interested in this energy spill, but he also wanted to take a look at the map of the demon lands and find the hell tree. Something that important to the demon lands will be on a map. He did not ask the store attendant because he did not want people knowing his goal.


    He walked into an inn and bought a room. The old pervert had at least given him spirit stones so, he was not too worried about money to pay for things like a room and food. He received the key from the careless innkeeper, who did not spare Ed a glance.


    Ed took a seat and a little boy came to his side.


    "What would you like sir?" the boy asked.


    "A bowl of rice with some of your best side dishes." Ed said.


    "Would you like an energy infused dish?" the boy asked.


    "Spirit infused?" Ed asked.


    "Yes. It is made with high grade ingredients. The chef makes sure to retain the energy in the ingredients while cooking."


    "I will try it." Ed answered and the boy left.


    As he waited for his food, Ed picked up on some conversation from those sitting behind him.


    "What nonsense are you sprouting?!" one of the men exclaimed, inviting the attention of those around.


    "The Ah clan just became the second top power in the city. Why would they disown Ah Dise? Is he not their ancestor? His breakthrough in cultivation is what rose them to a top power!" the other exclaimed.


    "You don''t even now half of it. I hear that their clan leader who was at early spirit and his son, who was the genius of their clan got killed." the other said. Many in the inn were listening in, even though it looked like they were not. It was not news that the Ah clan head had died. But the son too?


    "You would think they would treasure Ah Dise at time like this, but they threw him away. You will never guess why?" the man was excited to share juicy news.


    "You know that my brother word at the city lord''s palace, right?" he asked and the other nodded.


    "He said that Ah Dise came to join the city lord. The city lord sent him away saying he does not want trouble."


    "Why? A power like Ah Dise would be a great addition to any power."


    "But no power in the city has the mind to accept him. I heard that he wants to kill the person that killed his son and grandson, but no one wants to be associated with him."


    "It is only natural that a man avenges his family. Who is this person? Even the city lord does not want to get involved?"


    "Haha! I heard he is a spirit picking junior." the man said and everyone in the in paused. After all, they were all listening in secret.


    "You must not say I am the one who told you this, but there is more to the story." the man said and his companion nodded. Ed did not know whether to laugh or cry. Is this how you tell someone a secret? these men, it is clear they are deliberately spreading the news. Why would they act as though everyone could not hear them? Was this still considered a secret?


    "I hear that young master Ah Didia was exploring the salt bed when he encountered a spirit picking sapling. He must have wanted to kill the sapling but was killed instead. Not just him, but those from the Tze sect that were with him. Only young master Ah Fude escaped and came to tell the story. The clan head rushed there to kill the boy with two elders. Word is that the boy was able to kill the clan head and wound one of the elders. The elder later died even after so many healer came to his aid." Ed felt as though this story was too coincidental with his battle in the salt bed. Was it the Ah clan head that he had killed? He sighed inwardly. He had not even step foot in the demon lands and he was already the centre of attention. He was happy that he had not told them his name. This would have been bad.


    "A spirit piking sapling? Do you think I am stupid? How can a spirit picking sapling do this?" his companion asked in disbelief.


    "I heard he is some treasure child of some great power outside. He was sent to gain fighting experience." the other man answered.


    "So? So what? Are the outside sects looking down on us? They think that there is no one that can fight their little sapling?" someone from another table who had been listening finally spoke. His words caused others to nodded their heads.


    Ed was very glad he had not given his name. As much as he was here to fight and gain experience, he would not have been able to move around freely and accomplish much with this many enemies. His food arrived and he quietly ate, ignoring the conversations that had broken out from al sides. He must level up fast! He thought to himself. After eating, he paid and went up to his room. He just had to wait till he could enter the large spill with everyone in a few days. He just needed to stay quietly.


    He knew his own strength. In truth, he understood that he was weak. His advantage was the multiple energies he cultivates. This makes him at least four time stronger than those in his realm. To his knowledge, the energies should allow him to be able to cultivate basically any kind of skill. If he could learn a heaven grade skill, that would be a great power boost for him. As he is going, he is bound to offend people and he must have a way to defend himself. Using his energy directly is something he would only use when he can not win in a fight. It was his hidden weapon.

 34 How to offend people 1

    Tie Nse had sent a secret message for Old Iba to meet him in Hammer city, the strong hold of the Hammer gate, a gate under the control of the jade phoenix alliance. Tie Nse sat in a small room drinking tea, when a familiar figure appeared inside. Seeing Old Iba''s form, Tie Nse locked the space to prevent any sound from getting out.


    "You sure took your time." Tie Nse said.


    "You sure know how to choose a place. The jade phoenix alliance are keeping an eye out for you." old Iba said, taking a seat before Tie Nse.


    "Yes, I heard you told them about the heavenly tribulation. You sure have guts. You still think you are qualified to see him? What if you give out his location to them again?"


    "Lady Mi appeared on her own when you left. I didn''t call her." Old Iba snorted.


    "But you called those old men from my alliance!" Tie Nse frowned.


    "Are you more angry that lady Mi knows about your disciple''s odd tribulation or that those old men from your alliance were close to catching you?" Old Iba guessed the latter. This old thing was more worried about getting caught and forced back to the heaven alliance than how popular his disciple has become.


    "Do you want to know about the ingredients for the pill or not?" Old Iba asked.


    "What do you need?" Tie Nse asked and Old In a handed him jade slip. Old Iba expected Tie Nse to gasp as he looked at the list, but was very disappointed when he maintained his calm.


    "The Taphen root. It will act as a net to triple the effects of the tribulation. I figured you would still think if a way to go all out." Tie Nse said.


    "You did say if possible. Let''s be clear. The success of this pill is only twenty percent. The ingredients are precious. Even if we are still able to find them, the success rate is still bellow twenty percent."


    "I see." Tie Nse said solemnly.


    "You want to use the fragment of a saint level artefact to cause an eternity effect. Even if the tribulation could not be held for eternity, it should be able to make it stay longer than it wants to." Tie Nse said.


    "You could just borrow your alliance''s saint level artefact. That would solve the problem." Old Iba said.


    "I have no intention of going to those old men. What about phoenix tears?" Tie Nse asked.


    "Well... I was not really thinking of phoenix tears, but... even though it is lower than a saint level artefact, the phoenix tears properties is better for this pill. Phoenix tears will have the property of eternity in it." Old Iba said. The phoenix was a great bird that burned in fire and was reborn again. The property of eternity is edged into the phoenix genes. But, isn''t his just wishful thinking? How will they get the tears?


    "The only people with phoenix tears are....." Old Iba started to say, then paused. His eyes rounded out into big globes as he stared at Tie Nse in shock.


    "Ya! Have you gone mad?!" Old Iba exclaimed.


    "Is phoenix tears better for this or not? Will it not increase the strength of this pill?" Tie Nse asked casually.


    "You planned this from the beginning, didn''t you? You already knew that an element of eternity would be necessary in this pill. You thought it through!" Old Iba exclaimed.


    "You are very smart." Tie Nse said as though complimenting a child.


    "Don''t.... don''t tell me, that is why we are here? I should have known. Why would you ask to meet in the hammer city? A strong hold of the hammer gate.... oh just in case I had forgotten, the same gate rule by the jade phoenix alliance!" Old Iba felt as though his brain had fried. This old think had finally lost his mind. Doing this is the same as declaring war upon the jade phoenix alliance.


    "Just out side this hammer city is the Hammer gate fort. At the gate tower in the centre of the fort is where the phoenix tears is kept. Where else do you expect us to get phoenix tears?" Tie Nse asked.


    "You are mad, you know that? You prefer to offend the entire jade phoenix alliance than go to your heaven alliance and talk to those old me. You prefer to cause a war than be caught by your alliance and forced to do your job as patriarch."


    "Are you coming or not?" Tie Nse asked casually.


    "Me? This is your disciple! Why would I help you bring trouble for my pill cottage?" Old Iba was no officially angry.


    "Are you afraid? If you don''t come, I will pay you fro your services and not allow you to see my disciple breakthrough." Tie Nse said in a sing song manner. This angered Old Iba further. But he wanted so badly to be part of trapping heavenly tribulation. It was a challenge. An adventure.


    "Fine. But, we must not get caught." Old Iba gave up.


    "Old wrinkle, cheer up. The ingredient list you just compile means we will have to offend a lot of people." Tie Nse got up and changed his appearance. Old Iba did the same.


    "An alliance patriarch and the cottage master, robbing like common thieves... after all my years of struggle to stand at the pinnacle, I am still robbing like a powerless sapling... all the face this old man had has been burnt off." Old Iba cried before they both vanished.

 35 How to offend people 2

    Tie Nse''s appearance changed to that of a man no older than thirty. Old Iba not only changed his appearance, he made sure to add some weight to his midsection, making him look sturdy, a good compliment to his now bald head. Even though they had changed their appearance, they still wore a mask. What kind of thief came with his face exposed. If they did not, it would be clear that they were just pretending to be thieves.


    "Let''s go." Tie Nse said in his new voice and they both disappeared.


    They reappeared just out side the hammer city at the hammer gate fort. Before them were large dark walls imposing upon the eyes of those who looked.


    "We must make this out as an attack on the gate. To deter suspicions." Old Iba said.


    "Hm... I''ve always thought that Gate Lady Fulren was disgusting to look at." Tie Nse said.


    "That son of hers has peculiar tastes in women. He likes them innocent and untouched. That way, he can use them to cultivate erotic qi." Old Iba said.


    "No... I mean, that she is really disgusting. But if that''s how you want to play with this,...she has always turned a blind eye to her son''s behaviour. We might as well be those coming to kill her son for revenge." Tie Nse said.


    "Good. She has a lot of enemies, so this attack is only natural. Let''s go." Old Iba said and they both vanished. They reappeared in plain sight just on the other side of the dark walls.


    "Halt!" their sudden appearance caused the guards and disciples passing by to go on alert. Without a word, they rotated they exploded in a burst of energy and attacked. They were careful to restrict their cultivation.


    Tie Nse turned and swung a fist an the wall. With a punch the wall shook and cracked. Tie Nse sighed. If he was serious about this, he could take down this wall. But there are only a few people in the entire world who could do this, it would be suspicious if he did.


    But the vibration rung through the entire hammer hate fort and was heard all the way to the hammer city. This caught their attention. They started the killing spree. Old Iba swung a palm and several guards and disciples turned into a pool of blood.


    They attacked the fort with full force. As they passed, the kicked and punched, bringing down buildings. The entire fort erupted into chaos. Without anyone capable of stopping them, they made their way tot he centre of the fort.


    "Call the elders!" they could hear a lot of the disciples start to shout. It had finally dawned on them that they were not the two invaders'' match.


    Tie Nse was hoping the elders came, but the immediate people before them were core disciples.


    "Who are you? State your purpose!" their leader asked.


    "Where is Gul Fulren?" Tie Nse asked.


    "I am Gul Fulren." the leader said and Tie Nse and Old Iba grimaced. This was bad. This boy was right before them. If they killed him here, there would be no purpose fort them to keep advancing into the fort. Their back story would be busted.


    "You will die today." Tie Nse said and attacked the nearest disciples. He took out a sword from his spatial ring and swung. A tear rang through the air as he sprung into to the crowd of disciples. His energy trailed after the sword as it moved at incomprehensible speed.


    That one swing had taken off ten heads as it passed. It had the desired effect they wished for. Gul Fulren paled.


    "Sung Sung! You again! Did you think that you covered your face I would not recognize you? That sword move is identifiable to you! Let''s see if you if you will leave this place alive!" Gul Fulren sneered before he quickly retreated deeper into the fort.


    His words caused Tie Nse and old Iba to pause. Tie Nse had just casually used a sword because he knew that washis worst skill. He had just done a casual swing and had implicated someone else in the process. This did not deter them, as they entered the deeper into the fort after Gul Furen.


    They were sure to destroy as much buildings as they passed on the way. This slowed down their pace, allowing Gul Fulren to run father into the fort. When they saw that he had gotten to the gate tower, Old Iba suddenly vanished and appeared right by the fleeing Gul Fulren and grabbed him in mid run. He threw Gul Fulren effortlessly at the tower.


    Gul Fulren felt as his body was grabbed and thrown, so he activated the armour under his clothes. Before he knew it, he had crashed through the walls of the gate tower. His armour saved him from getting killed, but his entire body was broken. He could not even stand up. He vomited blood and stared at the form of the two immediately appeared before him. Was this really Sung Sung?

 36 How To offend people 3

    Gul fulren felt as his body was grabbed and thrown, so he activated the armour under his clothes. Be for he knew it, he had crashed through the walls of the gate tower. His armour saved him from getting killed, but his entire body was shaken. He could not even stand up. He vomited blood and stared at the form of the two immediately appeared before him. Was this really Sung Sung


    One may not know, but, the walls of the gate tower was made from the same material as the hammer gate wall protecting the entire city-like forte. How had Sung Sung gotten that strong? Before he could react, he was grabbed by the collar again and kicked up through the roof to the second floor.


    Tie Nse looked round the second floor and saw disciples running away. Most stopped to see as Old Iba beat up Gul Fulren. With his spirit sense, he searched the second floor and discover there was nothing there. If he guessed right, the phoenix tears must be up on the last floor. He dashed towards Old Iba and grabbed a half dead Gul Fulren from the kicked up through the other floors.


    "Halt!"


    The Elders had finally arrived.


    Tie Nse almost snorted. He was now at the top of the tower, their goal was already in reach. Besides, non of the elders stood a chance. He nodded to Old Iba, who nodded and kicked Gul Fulren into the nearest wall. He was sure that Old Iba had felt the energy from the phoenix tears in the nextroom.


    The elders were beyond angry. These two were looking down on them, elders. When they saw that they had broken through the sacred room, they were beyond angry. They rotated their energy and attack. Tie Nse picked up the phoenix tears inside a crystal teal sitting in the stand at the centre and put it in his spatial ring.


    "You dare?" an Elder bellowed, but they could not really do anything. Old Iba held a half dead Gul Fulren in one hand and beat up the elders with this free hand. He sung his fist through the air and a drum-like sound could be heard pounding through the air. The echoes bounced through the the bodies of the elders and attacked their spirit bodies.


    They felt as though they had ran straight into a wall. What kind of technique is this? Their bodies refused to move, they were frozen in place. One of the elders vomited blood and fell to the ground. He pulled out an inscribed jade token and stamped into his puddle of blood. Old Iba frowned at this, so did Tie Nse.


    They got what they wanted. It was time for them to leave. For effect, tie Nse called to Old Iba.


    "That is a summoning token. We must leave. Drop the idiot. Even though I wish him dead, living as a cripple is what he deserves!" Old Iba dropped Gul Fulren and opened a portal instead of just disappearing. They had displayed the power of those in the soul seeking stage. As soul seeking master can not use the blink technique in the gate tower. Both of them stepped through to the other side. Before the portal closed, they saw an alluring woman in purple appear.


    Gate Lady Fulren had received an emergency summon to return to the fate fort and rushed back. As she appeared, she saw a portal wink shut. Her eyes showed complete horror as she looked at thescene before her. he son was mangled in an impossible posture, bleeding all over. From the look of it, he was forever crippled. The elders were semi unconscious as some of them coughed blood. She could tell they had internal injuries. The sacred room was smashed all over and the phoenix tears were gone.


    "Who did this?" she said through her teeth, but the elders were clueless. Disciples gathered and watched from afar.


    "Who is it?!" she shouted so angrily, red veins popped around her temple.


    "Lady Master... we heard young master call one of them Sung Sung." a disciple said timidly.


    "Who is this Sung Sung?" she asked.


    "We only know that he claims to be young master''s sworn enemy. Young master had taken his sister as a child and when he attacked young master, young master cleared his entire village." one disciple explained. This was after all,a rumour. They all knew of the young master''s behaviour, but no one had really ever said it out loud.


    "So he enters my hammer gate and does this? Crippling little Gul is one thing... but taking the phoenix tears too... this boy must die. Send out a message! One hundred thousand spirit stones for the person that bring me his head!" she ordered.

 37 How to offend people 4

    Tie Nse and Old Iba appeared back in the little room inside hammer city. Already, they could hear the chaos outside. Many people were running around trying to see what had happened in the forte. People gathered and discussed, they had been able to see the carnage from afar, while the forte was under attack.


    Old Iba looked out the window and saw the commotion out on the streets.


    "There is a message! The hammer gate is offering one hundred thousand spirit stones for the person who kills sung sung. He is said to be a soul seeking master. His portrait will soon arrive the city!" someone announced.


    "Oh? Sung Sung? Was he the one that did this? This person has courage!" some people started to discuss.


    "I know that name! This person keeps challenging young master Gul Fulren to fights. I heard young master killed his family and took his sister."


    "How can a soul seeking master be able to bring down an entire gate by himself? Is that eve possible?"


    "Look at you. The gates have peak soul seeking masters as elders. The Gate Lady her self is an an early soul awakening master. There are people that can jump stage and fight beyond their cultivation."


    "Even so, one against so many elders?" discussions outside were heard from inside. Tie Nse and Old Iba had changed back into their appearance.


    "Who would have thought that we have managed to implicate someone?" Old Iba said.


    "Well, he gets to be a legend." Tie Nse said.


    "Aren''t you worried at all? We should find this boy first and take him away before they catch him."


    "You heard the discussions. This boy has hoped to get his revenge for so long. We did him a favour."


    "Why did you even execute that skill anyway?" Old Iba asked.


    "You know I am bad with a sword. I just casually made up some skill. How could I have known that some little boy already uses this as his signature skill?" Tie Nse said and Old Iba did not know whether to slap him or not. He is bad with a sword? That is called being bad with a sword?


    Old Iba had always known that the other powers were wary of Tie Nse. His soul power was beyond strong, therefore his ability to understand martial skills and qi concepts were extraordinary. This old man may look old, but he has not yet hit hundred. He is still only eighty eight years old. He could keep his looks, but like to be known as an old man. Compared to powers like Lady Mi and the two clans whose leaders have lived no less than five hundred years, he was a one in a millennia power.


    The other powers all have chiefs at soul realization stage. But they all had at least one living ancestor. The two alliance and two clans both have a living ancestor and five protectors each. These people were basically hermits at this point. Living up to two thousand years, they had passed the soul realisation stage and were at peak first heaven seeking. They spend there lives cultivating and never really coming out in public.


    Tie Nse would probably enter early first heaven seeking soon. It would make him the strongest leader amongst the nine powers. How can he casually say he was bad with a sword. If he was bad with a sword, then swordsmen had wasted their time being born.


    "No matter the reason, this boy is in trouble." Old Iba said and Tie Nse sighed.


    "Fine. We need to let some time pass before we borrow the next ingredient so, we might as well find him. But... I don''t have the time to take care of him. He will be your problem." Tie Nse said.


    "What? You keep forgetting that I am only here because of the ingredient. You take responsibility for all the backlash from our actions. After all, it is your disciple we are making the pill for!"


    "You have a lot of disciples anyway, just take one more. I only have one and I have been reduced to a thief. I''m too stressed to handle another sapling." Tie Nse said tiredly. If one looked at him, one would think he was just in a great fight attacking the hammer gate. But they both know they had not been in a great fight in forever.


    "You said we are going to borrow the next ingredient. The amount of thunder lead we need for this pill and the purity level, where do you intend to borrow it?"


    "What do you mean? The Ku thunder forest has a thunder lead mine sitting at it''s edge. They should have some right? We will just borrow a few." Tie Nse''s words caused Old Iba''s eyes to shrink.


    "Borrow? Are you crazy? The Ku clan? One of the two great clans? You want to rob the Ku clan too?!" Old Iba exclaimed.


    "How do you intend to do get the thunder lead then?"


    "I wrote the ingredient list. That list has a bunch of rare materials on it. In fact, anyone that looked at it, would probably have his eyes burned from fear. How many of these ingredients are you going to buy, or ask for? Are we going to steal all?" Old Iba asked solemnly.


    "Probably. Raising a disciple is too expensive. I must save money where I can." Tie Nse said righteously.


    "You will be hunted down by all the clans if so! No! I cannot risk my life for your disciple!" Old Iba said and turned away. Tie Nse frowned. He could see that the old man was serious this time.


    "Do you want to know why I need tribulation lightening when he breaks through?" he asked and Old Iba paused.


    "He cultivates all four energies." Tie Nse said and old Iba turned sharply. The look in his eyes said it all.

 38 Entering The Great Spill

    Ed had kept a low profile the past few days. He only ordered food to his room and sat in wait. Today was the day he will enter the great spill. He prepared all that he needed into his spatial ring. He expected that he would be there a while.


    Stepping out of his room and went down to the restaurant. He could feel the excitement in the air from those who sat around. Many were young masters of their clans hoping to enter the great spill to gain experience. He ignored them and stepped out of the inn. The atmosphere outside said it all. It was an important day.


    He followed the many of the young masters till he stood at a large arena.


    "Those who wish to enter the great spill, come this way!" he saw that young elites and martial aspirants had formed a line. In front was a man handling registrations. Ed walked over and joined the line. Many were anxious and excited so, they did not look too much to those beside them.


    Ed waited till it was his turn.


    "Show me your registration slip!" the man barked.


    "Don''t have any." Ed answered.


    "Fifty spirit stones." Ed was prepared for this answer and handed fifty spirit stone to the man. The man handed him a token and Ed passed to the other side. Those that had done their registration were standing on a platform under the gaze of the audience. The audience were mainly family members and clan elders watching to support their young elites.


    After a while, three entourages made their entrance. Ed could tell that they were the powers of the south side city. A man from one of the entourages stood up.


    "You are the future elites do the south side city. The great spill is an opportunity to not only raise your cultivation, but to horn your skills. Use this wisely." he said and Ed could see the young elites take in a deep breath, anticipation coursing through their veins.


    He understood that they waited for to enter this place, but he did not understand their anticipation. What was it about this land that was beyond cultivation? He could tell they were slightly nervous.


    The man looked round them for a moment, then nodded to two men behind him. The two men stepped forward and swiped inscriptions out of thin air. The air seemed to burn as the symbols glowed bright red. The men merged their two symbols and a tear could be heard ripping through the air. Immediately, an empty hole appeared before those on the platform.


    "Step in." the man said and some hesitated for a second, before entering. Ed waited for his turn. Just before he entered, he felt a heavy killing intent directed his way. His perception and soul force was stronger than many in the soul seeking stage, he could pin point exactly where it came from. He turned and stared into the cold eyes of an elderly man. This man looked familiar, but Ed was sure he had not met him before. Without much of a thought, he stepped through to the other side.


    Ancestor Ah had been searching for the little brat that had killed his son. He was sure that when he killed the boy, those cowards in his clan would beg him to return. They risked loosing their status just to not anger this boy. Just a bunch of cowards.


    He had arrived at the gathering for those young elites entering the great spill, with not much of an expectation. But when he arrived, he felt the blood link from the life token he had given his son. This life token was inscribed with his blood. This would help his son summon him if in danger.


    His son never had the chance to use the token, after all, he had felt no summon. As his son was now dead, there was only one person that could be in possession of this. His killer.


    He trained his eyes at the form of a young boy no older than 25. the need to tear his skin and spill his blood filled his mind. He had only found this boy in a second, and the next, he was staring into the blank eyes of the boy. This caused him to pause. Did this boy find him from his heavy killing intent? Sure he had not hidden it, but how could he find him that fast?


    By the time he had come back from his shock, the boy was gone. He had entered the great spill. Fine. He will have to come out one day. On that day, he will pay for his sins of killing his son and grandson.

 39 Factions in the great spill

    Ed felt his head spin for a second. The next moment, he was standing before a large gate. Looking beside him, he saw the others who had entered before him. More were still arriving. In front of the gate were two giant men. They looked completely hairless and their skin looked like strong refined leather.


    "Wait until all of you have arrived." one of them said. This caused the rest to look behind them. They noticed that many were still arriving. After a while, the last person appeared, and the dark hole closed up.


    "You are now in the great spill. You may have been young lords were you came from, but here, you are the bottom of the food chain." one of the giants said.


    "We are gate keepers. Our job is to tell you the rules of the great spill. As long as you obey them, you will be fine." the second giant said. His voice was much softer, throwing people off for a second.


    "Rule one. All must register their token under a power or under their name. You can choose any of the factions on the list before you, or you can form your own." this caused the young elites to frown. They looked up to find ten factions and ten lone names on the large slate.


    "What is the purpose of the factions?" one of the elites asked.


    "Rule two. Every one on the list must fight every month." confusion was even greater now than ever.


    "What is the stakes of the fight?" someone asked.


    "Rule three. Every one one the list will be given a cultivation cave. The winner of the battles every month will take the cave of the looser."


    "Rule four. The first five names on the slate will receive a high grade cultivation cave."


    "Rule five. No fighting allowed unless during monthly battles. Rule six. The number one name can choose when to fight. The top five to top two must accept challenges every four months. Please come forward and place your name." the giant said and many paused. After a while some young masters of special clans stepped forward. One would have thought that they would choose to put down their name, but they wrote their name on top the letters of different factions. When they were done, their names vanished and the faction name remained.


    Many saw their actions and were confused.


    "It must be dangerous to be alone." a person said.


    "Of course it is. They said that the names on the list will battle it out every month. Doesn''t that mean that mean that if you are alone, there is a chance you will have to fight a faction? A faction has many members. You are bound to loose." another said.


    "But, those that stay alone are given one cultivation cave to them selves. In a faction, wouldn''t there be lack of resources?" another asked.


    "As if that matters! Will you be able to keep the resources at the end of the monthly battles?" many were confused.


    "Who is willing to join me? Let us form our own faction!" a person said. "If we stand together, we will be able to fight together during the monthly battles. We will be better off than those large factions, who have thousands of followers!" as he spoke, some joined him and stepped towards the standing slate.


    Ed felt that was a stupid move. A bunch of newcomers fighting against opponents that have been here for years, they were bound to loose. Those that chose to stand alone would suffer the same fate. He looked up at the stand alone names on the slate. They were the first ten names, making them top ten. After them came the factions. The top ten must be really strong.


    This only meant that the factions were second rate powers. They looked to be a group of weaklings trying to survive against the top ten. Think about this, there were also only ten factions. He heard that many people spent more than one year in the great spill. If so, there must be a lot of people in the great spill at the moment. How could only ten factions be there? That meant that these factions were also considerably strong.


    He saw as few had placed their names without joining a faction, others joined, and many created their own. He suspected that by the end of the month, the number of factions will return to ten. As for the number of lone names, he could only turn solemn. After all, he had no intention of joining any faction.

 40 Factions in the great spill 2

    "Hey, I''m Ku Nam." a boy walked over to Ed and said. Beside him was a girl. She glanced at Ed for only a moment and took in his attire. Ed was never one to wear expensive clothes, he just always made sure his clothes were clean and neat. He could tell this girl was looking down on him.


    "This is autumn bloom." the boy introduced the girl.


    "Ed."


    "I can see you are like us, not from the demon lands. How about we team up and form our own group?" the boy smiled amiably.


    "Sorry, I don''t wish to be part of any group." Ed said.


    "I told you not to bother with him. What can he even contribute?" autumn bloom said haughtily. Ed did not mind her words, as long as they left him alone.


    "It is better to stay as a group. That way, we can defend our resources." the boy tried to convince Ed.


    "I still wish to be alone." Ed said and walked away.


    "When he is in trouble, he will come running." Autumn bloom sneered at his leaving back.


    Ed wasted no time. He walked over to the slate and wrote his name. The registration sip he had been given before he arrived this word glowed. Ed stared at it as it edged unto his arm. He saw the writing that appeared a few seconds later.


    Ed


    Early spirit picking


    Unranked


    0 wins 0 losses


    1 cultivation cave.


    The giants laughed inwardly at the newcomers.


    "It''s always like this every year." one said to the other in a sound transmission.


    "How many do you think will last?" the other said.


    "After the coming monthly match, there will be twenty names on the slate again."


    "Who knows, there may be some hidden dragons in the mix this year."


    "As if." the other snorted.


    "The factions love those that don''t join them, than those that do. They are more useful to them." the other said.


    "There will be some hidden dragons this time. Do you dare to bet?"


    "Of course. After the first month battle, there will only be twenty names on the slate."


    "I bet that there will be additional names." this words made the other sigh.


    "You make this bet every year."


    Ed turned an entered through the gate. On the other side, was a bright dry world. He directly found him self in the middle of a town.


    "Newcomer, come with me to your assigned cultivation cave." a person walked up to Ed and said respectfully.


    "How do you know I chose to be alone?" Ed frowned.


    "No one that wishes to be part of a group walks alone. But, you should consider joining a group. That is the only way you will be safe here." the person said.


    "Lead the way." Ed said and the person sighed. It was like this every year.

 41 Factions in the great spill 3

    As Ed walked around the town, he noticed that there were people trading, checking into inns and so on. This made him frown. Was this normal? Most sat on the streets as though waiting.


    "Are there not enough cultivation caves?" he asked.


    "There are. Those you see here, have either lost their cultivation cave to others, or joined factions with limited resources. The factions will only favour those they find valuable to them. Most have to camp out side or sleep in an inn." the person leading the way said. He thought that his words would cause a reaction from Ed, but Ed just nodded in understanding.


    "The monthly battles, one could do it as a group? Factions with too many people. How does this work?" Ed asked.


    "The battles are not fought in an arena, but in a pocket world. People can only come out when they surrender, get a win, or die. If you win, you can decide to stay back longer and win a few more before leaving. The battles end up like a war. As the factions coordinative members tomove n troupes. The only law is that every one must participate. The battles last for one day. I hear that battling in a group is much better. It is said that there treasures in the battle ground. The factions would have better man power to be able to bring back as much resources as they can."


    Ed understood these word. Not only was it better to be in a group in the battle ground so that you may not get killed, it is better for lucky encounters. He bets that that is why most remain in the factions no matter if they don''t get cultivation caves or resources to cultivate. During the battles, they join up with their groups and go adventuring. It made sense.


    Ed arrived at his cave soon after. He did as the person said and touched the walls. The are opened and he stepped in. Ed understood that this person was a mortal. He was not sure how he got to the great spill, but he knew that he probably worked for the regulators for the great spill. These mortals would do menial jobs to get paid.


    He gave the boy a spirit stone and entered his cave. The boy bowed as the cave closed. He sighed in his heart. This newcomer was nice enough to give him a spirit stone. He felt guilty for what he was about to do.


    Leaving Ed behind in the cultivation cave, he rushed away in the direction of a another cave. The caves were well spaced and would take a bit of travelling to get another. After a while, the panting mortal got to a cave much larger than Ed''s. There were tents around the cave filed with cultivators. He walked over to a tent and bowed.


    "What is it?" a voice said from inside.


    "There is a newcomer with his own cave that just entered. He even has a lot of money on him." the boy said.


    "Is that so? Have you told him to join with us?"


    "He did not care about all the benefits of s group. He has entered his cave."


    "I see. You may go." the boy bowed and left.


    Inside the tent, two people sat.


    "Big brother, we should go and meet with him. Newcomers are al stupid. We tell him to let us practise with him a bit and we will fight with him in the battles." one of them said. He was completely muscular with a bald head.


    "If we do this, the faction will hear of it and say we are coveting resources. This boy will finally have to give up his cave anyway." the other answered. He looked like the one who had spoken before, only a bit larger.


    "When the faction gets his cave, there is no way they would give it to us."


    "There is no way we are getting a cave. We are not strong enough, or have enough spirit stones to pay to use it."


    "He said the boy had money." the other said and the older brother paused.


    "We will not report this to the faction yet. The great spill prohibits fighting except inside the battle ground. We will wait till then." the elder brother said after some time.


    "After we get his money then what? The faction will say we kept it to our selves."


    "We only need to kill him and take his money. We are part of the iron hand faction. When we kill him, the cave will go to the leader. He will only see the number of caves appear on his arm. He will not know who it is from. We can then keep all the money." the elder brother said.


    "Later, I will take that boy, to go show me the newcomer''s face."


    "We must track him well. It would be best if he does not come out of his cave till the battles. That way, not many people will know about his cave. If not, we will be competing with many people for his money. I don not wish to share on that day." they two planned for the coming battle in secret. Their target, Ed.

 42 Loosing an energy vein

    Ed walked into the cultivation cave and paused. The door closed behind him, leaving him inside a still surrounding. The cave was not much of a cave. It was more like a house. The walls of the room glowed a faint pink. Inside was a sitting area and deeper, one could find a bedroom. The bed glowed a faint pink. Ed had only seen this done once. When his adopted father took out his jade coffin and handed to Lu Guan, the coffin opened to reveal a bed glowing jade green. Though this one before him glowed pale pink, it still gave him that feeling. Inside the bed room is a small pond.


    The entire cave was filled with dense astral energy; the bedroom more than the sitting room. But this pond, Ed could feel thick astral energy from it. He put his hand into the water and confirmed his thought; this was very precious astral water. Where did it come from? Did all cultivation caves have this?


    He sat down in on the floor of the bedroom in lotus fashion and started to absorb the energy in the cave. His body was like ablack hole, sucking in all the energy in the cave, but the energy seemed to be ever flowing. After two days of direct contemplation, he stopped for a while. This energy that seemed to never stop, if he could increase his absorption rate, wouldn''t it be good?


    He took out the jade slip the Tie Nse had given to him and looked into it again. This was the special contemplation technique that the old pervert suspected would be the best for him. The scene inside was the same as before. He was not sure what to do. Other contemplation techniques, he would fuse it into this sea of consciousness and his absorption rate would increase.


    He tried to step out of the technique and into his sea of consciousness as would usually be done, but he instead, stepped out back into his bedroom. He decided to step into his sea of consciousness first, this time and open the contemplation technique from there.


    Pain like never before tore through his skull. The point between his two brows hurt so much, he felt s though it was tearing open. In panic, he stepped out of his sea of consciousness in a hurry.


    In his bedroom, he had collapsed to the floor, panting and coughing blood.


    This was a heaven grade contemplation technique. He understood how crazy his constitution ranked in the cultivation world, but he would have looked down on the heavens if he could actually use this technique at his stage.


    Of course, he had thought too soon. He tried to calm his breath. He took out a healing pill from his spatial ring and swallowed. He was not sure what kind of pill this was, but it helped his body calm down. After he had calmed down, he split contemplated as he healed. The energy he absorbed helped him heal faster. In a day, he was completely healed.


    Looking at the jade slip, he was too stubborn to not try again. After all, there was no need to look for outside help. He was the only one who could even see inside the jade slip. It was impossible for any one to teach him how to use this contemplation technique.


    He calmed his breath and returned into the jade slip. As the scene repeated it self, Ed tried to absorb energy while still inside the jade slip. A gush of astral energy rushed into him like a raging storm. For a second he was overwhelmed. One would think he would be happy about this, but Ed could not help but think back to his previous thought about looking down on the heavens and sighed. At this rate, he may completely disregard them, the heavens honestly can not afford him looking down any more than now.


    Taking in a deep breath, he absorbed rotated his sea of consciousness, making it into a vortex, sucking in every strand of astral energy. As this happened, he found himself sinking deeper into this contemplative state. He could feel the astral energy in the room depleting so quickly, and could not replenish at the same rate as he absorbed. Soon, before three breaths of time, there energy in the entire cave had been absorbed.


    From inside his contemplation, Ed could feel a strand of energy trying to fill up the room. He guessed that this must be the source from which all the energy in the cave was replenished from. He stretched out his hand in the direction of the strands and his hand touched water.


    The pond! This must be it. Understanding this, Ed begun absorbing once more. This time, directly from the pond. All hell broke loose.

 43 Loosing an energy vein

    The pond! This must be it. Understanding this, Ed begun absorbing once more. This time, directly from the pond. All hell broke loose.


    Ed did not understand that he had set in motion calamity in a section of the great spill.


    Inside a large cave, workers and guard moved round. They worked for the south side city. Their job was to secure, protect and help with distribution of energy to all caves. As one passed the long hall ways underground, one would see the pale pink veins running through the walls and the ground. These veins were filled with a pale pink liquid that flowed non-stop. These were veins of pure astral energy


    This cave was only one of the many caves in the great spill, and they were considered one of the smaller caves. Inside a great room, a man sat in lotus fashion, in deep contemplation. The pecks of working here meant, access to the direct energy from the veins.


    The man received an urgent sound transmission.


    "Lord Kan! The vein is dry up!" the man opened his eyes immediately.


    "Enter!" he said and a woman rushed in.


    "What happened?" he asked.


    "The vein is loosing it''s strength. You must have felt it right?" she said urgently.


    "Do you think I can feel such a thing? The energy we feel is only a one thousandth of a tiny fraction of that emerging from the vein!"


    "I''m sorry!" she cowed at his tone.


    "Where is it coming from?" he asked.


    "This way." she led him through a winding path. Through the hall way he could see that he was not the only one in panic. People were rushing all over the place. Most of them in the same direction. He arrived at the main vein. It was a as large as a small stream. The glow in the liquid was deeming.


    "How is this happening?" he asked in panic.


    "I don''t know. It just started." the woman answered.


    "Has there been any important activity to day? Did something big just happen?" he asked.


    "Lord Kan, did you forget? Yesterday, newcomers arrived the great spill. They have just been showed to their caves." someone answered.


    "That is the only big thing thing that has happened for a while. Even the great factions and the top tens have not moved at all." another said.


    "Are you saying that a new comer could...." the woman started to say.


    "Shut up! What new comer? Even a soul realization master can not mine this entire branch vein away! Is that what you are going to tell the council when they ask?!" Lord Kan scolded her shut. He was so angry, one could see veins pooping at the side of his head.


    "What do we.." the woman started to say before she stopped. It had only been three breaths of time, and the liquid was now barely pink.


    "Call the healers! Inform the council! Fast!" Lord Kan shouted at all the people standing around and everybody disperse quickly, looking for who to inform.


    An another three breaths and the entire liquid turned clear.


    The vein was dry of astral energy!


    Lord Kan felt his vision go dark as he coughed a mouthful of blood. The others may not have known why he was so dramatic, but he understood, his life here was over. It would be a miracle if he was not killed.

 44 Loosing an energy vein 3

    The great spill council sat almost immediately. When Lord Kan walked in and saw the gathering, he paled.


    "Lord Kan..." one of the councilmen started to say.


    "Please.. spare me... I have no idea how it happened!" Lord Kan fell on his knees and started to beg.


    "So, you mean to say, this was not some joke? The branch vein you are in charge of dried?" a woman seated amongst the council asked with a frown.


    "Yes..." Lord Kan answered.


    "Do you think we are children? Even a great sect outside the demon lands would be unable to dry a branch vein as quickly as you said!" another councilman said.


    "How long did it take for the branch vein to dry?" asked the the second of the only two woman on the council. She unlike the others, did not seem panicked at all. Instead, she looked completely calm.


    "Ten breaths of time..." Lord Kan bowed his head and said in a whisper.


    "What!" the first councilman raged.


    "Do you think we will take your word for it because you say so? Lady Aj. You said you sent your disciple to take a look. What was the result?" one of the councilmen asked the second woman.


    "She will return with the answer." Lady Aj said.


    "If what he said is true, then we have a big problem."


    "Do you really believe such a thing? It is not possible!" One could understand why most of the council did not want to believe what they were hearing. This was unheard of, both in the demon lands and outside.


    "Master." a young girl arrived before the council.


    "What did you see?" Lady Aj asked her. She took out a record stone and activated it. The stone glowed a dark orange. Soon everyone in the room sank into a picture. They were suddenly standing before the branch vein. They could see that the vein was completely clear. Not even a strand of astral energy remained.


    The whole room sunk into silence after. What could cause this? Were the other cities attacking the south side?


    Sitting in his bedroom, Ed was unaware of the commotion that was thundering through the great spill, nor did he know he was the culprit. He retracted from his contemplation. He could no more feel astral energy in the pond safe a few strands, but those strands seemed to far from him to reach. He sighed. He wondered where the pond leads to. Are there more of it? Without astral energy to contemplate, he decided to learn more sword skills.


    He looked through the spatial rings of those disciples again. It then dawned on him that he had not taken the rings of the elders that had come after them. There must have been great materials inside. Sighing, he looked through jade slip after jade slip. Non of these skills were as good as shifting space.


    He had seen everything in these rings before, so he was less expectant checking through them again. After a while, he noticed something in one of the rings. He had seen this before, but had paid no attention to it. It was a soft cloth with symbols drawn on it. Inscriptions? He wondered.


    Inscription masters were rarer than alchemists. This was a discipline hard learn. To be an inscription master, one must be able to perceive many energies. When someone reached the soul awakening stage, they can perceive all the energies, but can not feel it or absorb it. At this stage, one could distort the energy flow of someone of a lower cultivation because he can perceive the way it flows in him.


    With this ability, a soul awakened master would be able to send the right kind of vibrations to through a cultivator to cripple him instantly. The lower the cultivation was from the soul awakening stage, the more effective this skill could be.


    That is why it was so hard to be an inscription master. Because the average cultivator had to wait till he is at the soul awakening stage to start learning.

 45 The weapon of choice 1

    That is why it was so hard to be an inscription master. Because the average cultivator had to wait till he is at the soul awakening stage to start learning.


    Of course, Ed understood that there must be exceptions to this rule. There are geniuses out there that can perceive all the energies before they even reach the soul awakening stage. This was very true. There were many cultivators in this world, it was only normal that there would be such people.


    Ed was not sure how this worked, or what he could use it for, but he was very interested in inscriptions.


    Inscriptions could be used to aid different kinds of cultivators. An inscription could be drawn for almost every martial skill, as long as the inscription master is powerful enough. He could make martial skills stronger and more effective. He was very curious about inscriptions for weapons.


    If he could have his weapon inscribed, he it could help boost what ever skill he wished to use it for. Ed was not sure yet what kind of cultivator he was. Around this time. A lot of people knew what kind of cultivator they were.


    He had used a wooden sword for all his fights, he should probably concentrate on the sword. But the possibility of other weapons fascinated him. With a sigh, he made his mind. A sword. He would not concentrate on other things unless he had the time.


    The sword. This was a weapon he was already used to. This was the weapon he used a lot in his world. All the fights he had been through, all the training necessary, he had learnt it all. This was a weapon he could strongly say that he had covered the basics. With such a background and foundation, he should be able to practise higher sword skills with ease. This was his weapon of choice.


    He would first have to find a sword first. A sword that could handle his energy was rare as could be. He understood that his energy was a combined form of all the energies flowing in the world. It could corrode things real fast. He was not sure why it could not heal, but it was good at corroding anything it came to contact with.


    What kind of material would he used to make a sword? Using a wooden sword in the past meant he had to reduce the energy he passed through it. He was only at a fraction of one percent and it did not last. He wondered, if he uses a regular iron sword, would he be able to raise the percentage to two? What about a high grade human weapon? If he used a heaven grade weapon, would he be able to go up to fifty percent?


    He wondered though, was it even necessary to go up to fifty percent? If at that the stage he was in, he could kill a spirit awakening master, then was there even a need? He could not remember how much energy he had used to kill the tribal chief back at the valley, but thinking about the first elder he had fought back in the sand bed, his mind stirred.


    He the wooden sword could not cut through the man''s shield. He was sure that it had punctured and touched his skin, but it was a small hole. What kind of shield was that? What level was that shield? If he did not have a weapon which he could increase the percentage of energy he uses, he may meet someone with that kind of shield or higher.


    He got up and exited his cave. He wished to get as sword. He wondered if the town from before sold such things. Following the same route as he had coming to his cave, he made his way back to the town. Walking around a bit, he felt killing intents directed his way. There were a lot of people around, going about their business, so Ed did not turn. He remembered that fighting was prohibited in the great spill and ignored the killing intent direct his way.


    He found a small shop at the edge of the town and entered.


    "Welcome!" an attendant said. He looked at the lean man and nodded.


    "Oh, a newcomer?" the man asked.


    "How do you know?"


    "Newcomers don''t usually come out to town till their first battle. But it seems that something went wrong in the caves. A lot of them are out about this time." the attendant said.


    "What happened in the caves?" Ed frowned.


    "Couldn''t you tell? I hear that all the energy in a particular section had vanished. The caves lost thie energy." the attendant said. Ed knew that there was no energy in his cave. But this was because he had completely absorbed them dry. Wa sit possible for every one too?


    "Why?"


    "The council is not saying anything and it seems they will not be giving them new caves. Pity." the attendant said, "what would you like to buy?"


    "A sword. Show me your highest grade sword." Ed said and the attendant paused.


    "We only have a low grade earth sword. That is our highest."


    "How much?" He asked.


    "Twenty thousand spirit tokens." Ed was not fazed by this. If the old pervert had done anything right, he had given him ten thousand chest full of spirit stones. Each containing ten thousand spirit stones. Three thousand gold coins was the equivalent of 1 spirit token. One hundred spirit tokens was equivalent to one spirit stone.


    "How many do you have?" Ed asked.


    "We have ten of these."


    "What about human grade swords, who may do you have?"


    "About fifty... why...?" the attendant was slightly confused.


    "Bring them all" Ed said and the lean man paused.


    "What?" he did not seem to understand.


    "I will buy them all." Ed said.

 46 The Weapon of choice 2

    "I will buy them all." Ed said.


    "Wait a second... I need to ask my boss." the attendant said. Ed nodded and watched him leave. He saw that this man was only a mortal and it was normal for him to be selling these on behalf of someone.


    The attendant returned with a smile.


    "Sure... should I round them up?" he said and Ed nodded.


    "Who is your boss?" Ed asked and the attendant froze.


    It was just as he suspected. This man had gone to tell his boss that there was a big fish in his store. He wondered, if it mattered who he was, didn''t that mean it was a fellow cultivator and not one of the regulators who owns the shop?


    "Your boss is not one of the regulators." Ed said.


    "No. the regulators don''t sell. Training cultivators can. But they must pay a token to the regulators." the attendant answered and Ed nodded.


    The attendant put all the swords in a low grade spatial ring and handed it to Ed.


    "How much is all that?"


    "Four hundred and fifty thousand spirit tokens." he said. Ed produced a bag an dropped on the desk.


    "Count." he said. The attendant looked inside and saw spirit stones. Four thousand five hundred of them. He became more respectful of Ed and bowed deeper in thanks.


    Ed turned and left. He returned back to his cave and sat down in the sitting room. Taking out one low grade human sword, he saw that the quality was not too good. He passed the same percentage of energy as he would in a wooden sword and it was fine. He increased the energy little by little, gauging how long it would last. As it approached true one percent, the sword rusted and crumbled to the ground.


    He tried again with a mid grade human sword. It only lasted a little longer, but still crumbled at that level. Was the purity of the sword important? He understood that the demon lands did not have great sword smiths. So, where did all the swords come from? He looked through them and saw that they were all different in make and purity. This sword looked as though they were just picked from anywhere.


    Ed remembered the battles. The people died inside these battles. They were created to cause feuds. These could be swords from fallen cultivators. He looked at them and chose those with higher purity for his tests.


    After trying for a while, Ed came to a conclusion. The higher purity swords were much better. They still crumbled at the same percentage of energy, a little approaching one percent. But the swords with higher purity lasted longer. The better the purity, the longer it would take to crumble. Of course, there was an exception. Two of these words were made from a special material he could not recognise. It seems rare and powerful materials could help it last longer.


    He ha tested two low grade earth sword and they could handle one percent of his energy. He had to be gentle with these swords. Passing a percentage of his energy through them while in his cave was not the same as while in a fight. In a fight, one could loose control of use to much energy. He had to have great control over his energy as he fought. This was hard thing to do. He wondered if there was any sword that would not crumble? His mind wandered to his spatial ring.


    The yhenxia sword.


    This sword came with him from his world. This was given to him the moment he took up his quest. The oracle had said that quest takers would be given one of them. He knew this sword was special, because he understood that there were no quest taker any more. Even in this world, he had read the text Jian Ou had given him. They don''t exist any more. The were the only known Godeaters. According to the oracle, it was the last of it''s kind.


    Ed took out the sword from his spatial ring and stared at it. It was a sleek blade. It looked like liquid mercury as it shifted as though it was flowing from tip to hilt. The handle was tied with a black cloth. Ed touched the blade and words in a language he did not understand filled his mind.

 47 Opening the battle ground

    Ed had spent the entire month practising the sword techniques he had learned with the yhenxia sword. He had no intention of ever using this sword, but he still wanted this sword to be an extension of his body. He could pass forty percent of his energy through it. It was a wondrous object. He had hoped it would be able to take more, but this was still enough.


    The end of the month had arrived and he must participate in the battles. He prepared his swords, and walked out of his cave. When he walked out, he noticed that there were a lot of people coming out of theirs too. He followed their general direction till he was now moving within a crowd.


    The crowd moved in one direction towards a clear field. It did not take long before they arrived. Ed noticed that there were quite a lot of people band together in a group. Those that stood alone, started to feel nervous. They wondered whether they should have joined a faction. When the fight begins, they will be the first to be killed.


    Ed was standing by himself, making him a target for a lot of factions. Many had already gone round and gotten enough information about their target. Those from Ed''s section of caves were in a way, safe. News that the caves no more emitted astral energy was common news. But those who where known to possess a lot of wealth like Ed, were still in their radar.


    Ed glanced passed several killing intents without care. He was taking note of the factions around him. Most newcomers had formed their own factions, but Ed was more interested in the veteran factions. Then his eyes moved to the top ten. These were cultivators who stood alone, yet were still top ten on the slate. This only meant that they were powerful.


    Ed noticed were they stood. They were not in one position, but it was easy to spot who they were. The other faction leaders were wary of them, and this was a good indication of who they are. Ed glanced passed them, trying not to stare too long, yet trying to gauge their level of power. He could easily see through their cultivation, even to the kind of energy they absorbed.


    As his eyes glanced around, he felt the hair at the back of his neck rise. This feeling, this was not killing intent. This felt like being stared down by a wild predator. Ed turned to the direction of the stare and met very calm eyes.


    This boy, no older than eighteen looked back at him. His outer appearance looked sophisticated and calm, like a noble gentleman. But Ed trusted his senses. This boy was a wild animal disguised as a gentleman. He could tell that he worked hard to be perceived as gentle and almost relate-able. He noticed as many others tried to strike a conversation with him and how he answered with a soft gentle smile.


    Ed wondered why he was this boy''s target. Ed understood that his appearance was could confuse people. Ed himself had stepped into this world and spent fifteen years in the valley and ten years in the Baju valley. In this world he could be classified as twenty five years old. But he was twenty eight back in his world and entered this world looking exactly the same. He could be considered a fifty three year old man. But he looked the same since the day he came.


    His appearance was a good thing. One would look down on a fifty three year old man at spirit picking stage. This boy did not seem to be looking down on his cultivation, he saw Ed as food. Why? Then Ed remembered he had spent a lot of spirit tokens on the swords in that shop. Was he the boss the attendant went to report to?


    Ed could not bother about this. This battle field is a good training ground for his fighting skills. He did not care if others had lost interest in his cave because it had lost it''s energy, nor did he care about those that saw him as food. No matter their position, they were all his target. His goal was to kill as many people as possible, to fight as many battles as possible and get better at fighting in this world.


    "The battle field will soon open. The rules are simple, there are no rules." the instructor said and the space around them warped.

 48 The first round of killing 1

    "The battle field will soon open. The rules are simple, there are no rules." the instructor said and the space around them warped.


    The next moment, Ed found himself in a desolate dry land. He almost laughed at the scene. The great spill rules were vicious. They all appeared in the same place, there was no where for the afraid to run. Those who had been holding in their anger and blood thirst for their enemies in the great spill, suddenly had them right in front of them.


    There were no rules.


    It was the start of a blood bath. Enemy factions attacked themselves almost instantly. In a full breath of time, ten people had died. It started to dawn on the newcomers, this was not a fight they will survive. Most started to regret being alone. Those who had formed factions paled and dashed to make an escape. They were the prime targets of this battle.


    Ed paused to take in his environment. He noticed that his cultivation was suppressed here, just like outside the great spill, in the demon lands. This was good. He could fight on pure physical strength.


    A man charged and attacked him. Excitement pulsed through his veins as he turned to receive the man''s strike. He manifested a high grade human sword and blocked the incoming axe. This was the time to practise in real time all the foundation sword skills. He spun in the air and kicked the next man coming his way. It was not a powerful kick, but the man had flown back ten meters.


    Ed almost nodded at this outcome. Every time a cultivator levels up, his body gets better and stronger. Many do not pay attention to this, but other concentrate on fine tuning their body strength just as much as their cultivation. Ed could finally see how powerful his physical strength has grown in a real fight.


    His swordsmanship had grown too. He flipped his sword ans attacked the man with the axe. The sword connected with the man''s axe and the two weapons broke. The man paled. His axe was a low grade earth weapon. How could a high grade human sword break it? Ed understood. He had used too much strength. He did not bother to manifest another sword, he punched out with his bare fist. His fist connected with the man''s face and his head mangled into a lump of tattered meat and bones sagging from his neck.


    This chilled a lot of people''s bones.


    "Brother!" a man shouted in shock and attacked Ed. Ed could feel the anger pulsing through the man''s veins. His eyes moved quickly, it was as though he could see things with much better detail. Sometimes having your cultivation, makes you forget the skill of your physical bodies. Ed could see his weakness in a second. He swayed out of the way of the coming spear and kicked the man''s hip.


    The man collapsed to the floor almost immediately. It was as if all the strength in his body disappeared. Ed did not pause for a second. He put more strength into his arm as he sent out a slap. His palm reached the man''s cheek and his head spun 180 degrees to the back. The incoming people paused, then made to escape. But it did not matter any more, Ed did not intend to leave anyone alive. Seeing him attack, most decided to run away faster, other angrily decided to face him together. Ed loved that decision. The more the better.


    As he fought, his fighting skills were getting better. He could better predict and understand the movements of the human body as he killed one after the other.Those who had been targeting Ed decided to retreat. Some had completely given up on this idea. Others had not at all.


    By the time Ed turned to them, he only saw them retreating. He had taken note of every killing intent before entering the battle field, there was no way he was going to let them escape.

 49 The first round of killing 2

    By the time Ed turned to them, he only saw them retreating. He had taken note of every killing intent before entering the battle field, there was no way he was going to let them escape.


    But of course, his arrogance was only so great. Those he handled were spirit picking and early spirit awaken stage cultivator. He had not attacked any of the factions or even the top ten. He was content with walking his way to the top. This battle would last for one day. But from what he heard people say, time inside the battle field was much slower than outside.


    He could see that the top ten had all left and the faction leaders too. He too, did not waste time. He had fought many people, and there were non willing to fight any more. Seeing that many of the newcomers around him were scared stiff, he left too.


    He decided to travel east. Where he was going, he was not sure. The dry land had a few hill-like structures around. He found himself travelling for the entire day, without seeing any body. As the sun started set, he found a spot between two hills and carved a cave with his sword and closed himself in.


    Sitting in the dark, he could still see quite well. This was nothing compared to the total darkness of his first night in the Baju Valley. He analysed his fights so far. As far as he was concerned, those he had killed could not be considered veteran fighters. They did not fight with their head, they just swung their weapons. He wished to meet a fighter that he could fight for a long period of time.


    But he knew he was not ready for them yet. He had confidence in his ability to kill them. With his heightened senses, he could see their weakness very quickly. But he did not wish to kill them. When he meets such a fighter, he wants to savour every moment and learn as he fights them. He wishes to fight them for as long as possible.


    He understood that with the he was a long way from being able to draw out the fight. He had not learnt to control hos physical strength yet. When he fought, he found himself exerting too much force and killing the opponent instantly. At this rate, he would really not learn anything.


    But he understood even more that the only way he could learn to precisely control his strength was to fight day and night. He felt he would come to do it with instinct.


    Cultivator were here not only because it was compulsory to participate every month, but the battle field is rumoured to have treasures. He had heard many talk about this. It was also a place to gain more resources. The top ten would just kill a few people to get their cultivation caves. But the factions would kill to get more resources. There were many people in their faction so they loved the new comers. Ed sat still till morning came, only then did he step outside. He came out of his make shift cave and came face to face with familiar faces.


    "You." the girl before him hissed while he boy beside her smiled at Ed. They were Autumn bloom and Ku Nam. He had met them at the gates of the great spill.


    "Nice spot! Would you like to join us?" Ku Nam asked with a smile. Ed noticed that there were three more people with them. Two boys and a girl. They all looked to be around the same age.


    "No. why should we take him with us?" Autumn bloom refused as though Ed had begged to join them.


    "Be nice. We are all from outside the demon lands. We should be nicer." the boy said. He was probably a little older than autumn bloom, but looked younger than Ed, so it was odd seeing him act like an old man.


    "I''m sorry, I like to walk alone." Ed answered. He had no intention of staying to talk.


    "We are even being nice and you still have the mind to reject?" autumn bloom said and Ed looked at her curiously. This girl must have some personality problems. Was she not the one that said she did not want him to join? He ignored her and turned to Ku Nam.


    "It seems people are trying to stay out of the way, do you know where people would generally be?" Ed asked. He was hunting people. He wanted a good fight. And only people could give it to him.


    "What? You want to go looking for people?" Autumn bloom asked in shock.

 50 Hunting down people

    "What? You want to go looking for people?" Autumn bloom asked in shock.


    "Why?" the other girl asked. She had a much softer voice, a complete opposite of Autumn bloom''s sharp voice.


    "Oh? You want to find cultivators? Well, I heard that the eagle faction is somewhere south of here." Ku Nam said.


    "How strong are they?" Ed asked. He had a good impression of Ku Nam.


    "What, are you thinking of joining them?" the other girl asked.


    "The eagle faction is fifth strongest. After them is the wild devils faction. Their leaders are both in the spirit merging stages. Last I heard, the eagle faction has ten more spirit merging masters." Ku Nam answered.


    "Thank you." Ed said. This was a word he barely used. His disregard for the two girls made them frown. Who did he think he was?


    "Unless you wish to join them, it is better you hide till the battles end. That is the only way to survive." one of the other men said. Ed did not acknowledge his words and walked away. They watched him leave with cold looks.


    "Who does he think he is?" Autumn bloom asked in anger.


    "You must not underestimate people, you may never know who they are." Ku Nam said.


    "Who could he possibly be? Can his identity surpass you?" the other girl said.


    "Who knows, his goal could be the same as us. After all, we are going to where the heaven''s hammer faction is" Ku Nam said with a chuckle.


    "We are going to kill them all and take their position on the slate. Are you saying that he has the same intention? Just him alone?" one of the boys scuffed. As far as they were concerned, Ed was no body. Especially in Autumn bloom''s eyes. After all, she had met him outside the battle field and knows that his cultivation is only at spirit picking. This was nothing before her eyes.


    "There is something odd about him." Ku Nam said mildly, his eyes looking in the direction Ed just left towards. His words caused the others to scuff.


    Ed left them and followed the direction Ku Nam had told him. Thinking about it now, there was something odd about that boy, Ku Nam. Ed had ignored it the first time, when he could not see into his cultivation, but now, he was sure that there was something odd about him.


    At the gates of the great spill this boy had invited him to join him. Even though Ed was also not from the demon lands as they were, it was beyond odd for him to invite him to join them. After all, Ed''s cultivation was just at the spirit picking stage. There was no way he believed that he was just being nice. He could tell that every single one of the people with him were really powerful.


    Their line up was odd. What was their goal he was sure that they would soon take over from one of the group and climb up the slate. But Ed was sure of the feeling he got from them. They were strong.


    He ignored this feeling. After all, he could careless why people come to the great spill. After walking for half the day, he understood how big this battle field was. He could have increased his pace, but he was not in a hurry. He wondered when he will finally see Eagle faction members.


    "Halt!" he heard someone say and he sighed a relief. Finally, someone to kill.

 51 Bloody Eagle 1

    Ed made no sound. He immediately turned the person''s direction and attacked. The person was too shocked to react as Ed threw a punch. One could hear bones cracking in the person''s midsection just before he fell to the ground.


    "Too much strength." Ed commented. The other cultivators guarding the area were shocked at how fast things turned. But their shocked cleared into anger. Anger reckless enough to make them come at him together. Just the kind Ed wanted.


    "Attacking the eagle faction? You are looking for death!"


    "Attack him together!"


    Ed was surrounded in seconds. He took out a low grade earth sword and waited for them to attack. They did just so. A wave of spears came in his direction. Waving his sword, he cut them in a half. He turned to the nearest person and grabbed him into the air. He threw him at the second wave of spears, then turned to handle those on ground.


    He swiped his sword and one half of the group stepped back. The other half were just enough for now. He swayed away from the incoming axe and threw a punch two sideways punches as he slide down between them. Not waiting to see the out come, he chopped at the neck of the axe cultivator and his head rolled to the ground.


    "Too much strength." he sighed at the scene for a second. He saw as two ropes came at him and did not move. The ropes tied his hands sideways, away from each other.


    "Brothers, gather. Hold him in place!" on both sides, a wave of cultivators drew the ropes. With his hands tied away, others attacked him standing in the middle. Ignoring the incoming cultivators, he calmed his breath and consciously pulled the ropes with little strength. His action caused those holding the rope to be drawn a step forward.


    "Does he think he can actually pull himself free?" the cultivators were angry, and pulled the ropes tighter. Ed added more strength and the wave of them were sent threw the air. Their direction the same, a collision was destined. Most were wise enough to let go. Ed did not wait to see their outcome and he picked his fallen sword and swiped at the incoming cultivators.


    At this time, most were too scared to come close. He was too strong. Not letting them time to decide if to run or not, he waved his sword and it returned to his spatial ring, and attacked them bare fisted. His action caused the cultivators to pause.


    "He intends to fight us bare handed?"


    "What an insult!"


    "Are you looking down on the eagle faction?!" their reaction caused excitement to pulse through Ed''s veins.


    "Come!" he said and the fight continued. On the other side, other members of the eagle squad were watching as their members were killed. They rushed inside the canyon to tell their leaders.


    "Master Usung! Master Ntie!" many of the leaders in cultivation were annoyed by the interference.


    "Who dares!" one bald cultivator bellowed.


    "Forgive me sirs! We are under attack!" the cultivator announced.


    "Who would dare?" one of them seemed completely calm.


    "The devil''s faction was rumour to be coming our way. They dared?"


    "Did their leader really breakthrough into early spirit merging?" one asked.


    "That would make him at the same level with our leader." another said.


    "They are really bold! A new spirit merging master thinks he can compete with our leader?" another said. The conversation was moving without the lowly junior who had brought the news.


    "No, sirs... it was not them." he managed to say.


    "Who?"


    "A lone cultivator." the junior said and they all paused.

 52 Bloody Eagle 2

    "A lone cultivator." the junior said and they all paused.


    "He is covered from head to toe, no one can see his cultivation mark. But he is strong. He looks as if he is playing with us." he said and they all paused.


    "One of the top ten?"


    "No sirs. It does not look like any of them." the junior answered.


    "You say he is playing with us?" another asked in anger.


    "A casual chop of his hand can take off a head, yet he stays and fights every one." the junior said.


    "He is making his way here?" one of them asked.


    "He has entered the canyon! Run!" some cultivator were seen running away. This caused the high ranked members to pause.


    Ed had killed his way inside. He made sure to fight ever single person in his way. He did not just walk pass them, he attacked, even if they made way for him to pass. They thought he was here to challenge the high ranked members, but they were wrong. He wanted to fight his way inside. The more he fought, the more experience he got. He had gotten to the level of knowing the right amount of strength to put in a punch that a spirit picking junior could handle. And knew when to raise it to kill them instantly. He was still learning about his strength with it came to the spirit awakening masters.


    "Halt! Why have you attacked the eagle faction? State your purpose!"


    "I am horning my fighting style." Ed answered and the speaker''s face turned ugly. Horning his fighting stye? With the blood of their eagle faction members? The high ranked members were angry.


    "Fight us, then!" they showed themselves. They were fifteen of them. To Ed, it did not matter who came. He was going to fight every one before he leaves.


    "Come." he said and they attacked. Ed accepted the incoming punch with his palm, and squeezed. Cracking of bones could be heard followed by a scream. He punched the neck of the screamer to silence him, but another bone could be heard cracking. He let go of the broken hand and the cultivator fell to the ground, paralysed.


    "Too much strength." Ed said softly. These words, the other high ranked leaders heard it. Their faces were drained of blood at those words. He was really using them to horn his fighting style. The lower cultivators may have stupid enough to keep fighting, but they were not.


    They got a better understanding of the situation, and it was dangerous. This man could not control his strength. He was this man did not know how to control his strength in a fight. He is trying to understand it by instinct.


    "Please senior, stay your hands." one of them pleaded, causing Ed to pause.


    "We have many junior and even know where the night-hound faction is. They had a lot of people to help horn your skills." another bargained. The sight, caused a lot of juniors to go pale. They were sacrificing them? Many turned and started to escape. There was no hope.


    "Where are they?" Ed asked.


    "Ten miles south of here."


    "What is their rank?"


    "They are number eight on the factions rank." Ed raised a brow at this. He just attacked them, and they were number five on the faction list, but they tell him about a faction on the number eight spot? The speaker understood this and immediately explained,


    "You are not looking to climb the ranks, you are looking for people to fight. The lower ranks on the faction list have more members than normal. To keep their ranks and be able to face those on the higher ranks, they have about five times our numbers. Just like we have about three time the numbers of most of the higher ranks." Ed nodded at this logic. The speaker was right. He needed more people to fight. If so, those lower ranked factions were the best. Even so.....


    "Good information. But, you are still right in front of me." Ed said and they all paled.

 53 The stench of death

    "Good information. But you are still right in front of me." Ed said and they all paled.


    Ed did not care about this. He still wanted to fight. As far as he was concern, they were still capable of training him a little. Screams could be heard from far away and blood soaked the dry grounds.


    By the time Ed left, one could tell that a fight had taken place. He did not waste time. He knew that a lot of eagle faction members had escaped, most to tell their leader who was not around during his attack, and others to spread news. He was sure that most that escaped beyond his reach did not hear the last words he had spoken to the high ranked members of the eagle faction. They did not know he was just training, neither did they know his next destination.


    Still, information about his appearance and his strength would spread fast, making people run at the sight of him this would not do him well if he wanted them to stop and fight.


    He made his way in the direction of the night-hound faction. He wasted not time getting there, like he did in the case of the eagle faction. When he arrived, their fate was sealed. Their leader was unlucky enough to be there when he arrived. Before the sun started to go down, he had stained the grounds with their blood.


    He was right. Word had started to spread. The eagle faction is gone. The night-hound faction is gone. Those who recounted these tales, may not have suspected the same person, but those who listened did. The style of fighting, it must be the same person. After all, the night-hound faction were south of the eagle faction''s location. These incidence happened after the other. It only meant that the person just moved to the next faction and killed.


    People now heard that he was not one of the top ten. A new lone power? Many shivered. Many of them were not around when most of the top ten got their rank. After all, the great spill allows for people to stay in it for up to five years and many of them were had not stayed that long. But, they could guess, that this is probably how the top ten cam to get that rank; climbing on skulls.


    News that the heaven''s hammer faction were destroyed also circulated. But this was done by a new faction. A faction of five newcomers. People were shaken. When were newcomers this strong? The silent faction, they were called. Many wanted to know about these two new powers.


    The silent faction were of course, Ku Nam and his group. After they had killed off the heaven''s hammer faction, they heard news of the other two faction''s demise.


    "Oh? It''s him." Ku Nam said.


    "That man? How is that possible? I met him at the great spill gates and saw his cultivation level. He is only at the spirit picking stage." autumn bloom said.


    "Why are you calling him a man? He is probably only a few years older than you." the other girl said to autumn bloom.


    "I told you not to underestimate people." Ku Nam smiled lightly.


    "He killed off two factions. One on the fifth rank and the other on the eighth rank. The difference is to much. Why?" one of the men asked.


    "He went to the eagle faction because I told him where they were. The other faction is said to have been close by. He does not seem like a blood thirsty person. What ever the reason, he does not care about ranks." Ku Nam said.


    "But he did not kill the leader of the eagle faction. I hear that when he heard of the destruction of his faction, he joined the gentle winds faction. They are number two on the list." the other man said.


    "Still, that boy has planted a target on his back. The leader of the night-hound faction is the younger brother of one of the top ten. He will be killed soon." Autumn bloom with a scuff.


    "You are not powerful at all amongst your peers, autumn bloom, yet you continue to underestimate people." Ku Nam said with a small laugh.


    "Are you looking down on me now?" Autumn bloom fumed, but Ku Nam only ruffled her hair.


    "No matter what, we are never to clash with him." he said and the others nodded.

 54 Forgive this lowly author

    @@


    To whom it may concern,


    I have not been posting regularly. I apologise. Last six chapters you received was from *******. I had my laptop away for a while and it returned yesterday. So, usually I''d type through the night and post a few hours from now, but I''m looking at my laptop and trying. The keys stopped working... Please accept my bow of apology.


    I am basically typing this from my phone. Just wanted to get the message out there. We will soon return to our 2 chapters a day releases soon. Fingers crossed. By this time tomorrow, you should get your daily Dose.


    Thanks for understanding. Don''t forget to share, reccomend, rate and leave a review for this book. This helps our community grow.If you have questions, catch me on my socials,@mfonemanae on Twitter and mfonemana_uduak on instagram. There, I actually get notifications when some one posts a comment.


    See you tomorrow,


    Your completely stressed author,


    Mfonemana Uduak@@

 55 Changes on the slate

    By the end of the second day, space warped and the battlefield was gone. The cultivators inside found themselves where they had been standing before they entered the battlefield. Looking around they noticed that they were much fewer of them. People died in the battlefield, this was normal. But this was the first time this many people had died inside. It was very visible that they were much fewer than when they entered.


    The familiar instructor stood before them with a lot of assistants. He looked round the entire group of cultivators and sighed. This time, it was bloody beyond compare. He placed his hand on the slate beside him and everyone tensed.


    They gazed upon the slate and could only sigh. When the newcomers came, they created their own factions and some of them opted to be completely alone. Now, the original factions had absorbed them all and the twenty names were back in place.


    They looked again. No. there was something different this time.


    "Look. There is one more name on the top ten list." someone said and everyone strained their eyes on the name.


    "Ed? Who?" many started to wonder.


    "Could he be the one that took out the eagle and the night-hound faction?" many asked.


    "Should be. But he only took out a leaderless eagle faction and the night hound faction. How could he be number three?" someone asked.


    "Instructor, this is not right! How can this person be higher than I am?" every one turned the one who spoke. It was Disang Enang. He used to be number three. Every one knew him as a heartless brute. In fact, he was more evil than a brute, he was wild like an animal. He kept those powerful cultivators he killed and ate their bodies later. Many say that he cultivates an evil contemplation, but no one can say.


    "Who is this Ed? Come out!" Disang Enang said and they all started looking around. Ed did not bother to respond.


    "Is the Ed person, scared?"


    "I would be if I was against Disang Enang."


    "If I were him, I would never come out."


    All these discussions did not faze Ed. He did not care enough to come out. If they wish to find him, they should come to him. He did not care about any one, whether it was their opinion or their anger. The rank means nothing to him.


    "Instructor you should tell us the basis for his rank." the instructor said.


    "He killed five hundred cultivators. All between spirit picking and spirit awakening. The council decided to raise him on the rank on the platform of opportunity. He may understand this basis." the instructor said, looking right at Ed. Everyone just had to follow his eyes to know who Ed was.


    Ed almost nodded at his words. Climbing up the ranks must have a lot of perks. The council must have watched him fight to know that he just wanted an opportunity to horn his skills. What ever the perk is, it would help him fight more.


    "The first section Elder wishes to meet you. After which I will lead you to your cave. The accumulated amount of caves you have gained from both factions belong to you. You will be given a map and key access to all the caves you have taken. Most of them are in the second section, others are distributed across other sections. If you would please come with me." on of the assistants said and Ed nodded and followed.


    Ed could feel the murderous intent following him as he walked away. He did not care about those on the top ten that had been pushed down by him or their anger. He as going to gain as much experience from this place as possible then he would leave.


    Many could not keep their eyes off him. They wanted to cram his face in their mind. Ku Nam stared at Ed blank expression and smiled. One could not tell what he was thinking. They too had climbed into top ten.


    "There is someone else on the top nine spot!" someone finally noticed.


    "A faction?"

 56 Disciple 1

    Ed had been led by the beautiful looking assistant towards the first section. He had never bee in this part of the great spill before, but then again, he had never been in much of the great spill since his arrival. He looked at the greatly spaced caves.


    The first section must be the elite section. The astral energy Ed felt here, was as thick as back in his old cave. Then one could only imagine how thick it would be in these caves.


    The assistant glanced back at Ed to see his reaction, but she was disappointed when he did not have any expression at all. She could tell he was only at spirit picking. At this stage, a normal cultivator would be shocked by the purity of the energy in the area. But he was not. Even though she had heard that Ed killed so many people in the battlefield, she did not think him anything great. After all. Those killed were mostly spirit picking and he himself was just a spirit picking junior.


    He looked to be no older than twenty five. Still a spirit picking junior at this age, his future was limited. She knew that most on the top ten were all young and had not hit twenty yet. Yet they were at least on the spirit merging stage. Still, they could be seen as the lowest of geniuses. She had travelled the world with the first elder and knew that such people on the top ten were very many in the world. Those classified as geniuses here, are nothing but ordinary outside.


    Compared to Ed walking behind her, there was nothing special about him. He could be classified to be the lowest in this world just after the mortals.


    Ed did not know that this girl was analysing and already looking down on him. He just followed behind her quietly till they reach a dark building. Well, it used to be dark, as the red and almost white sands of the grounds have coloured it over the years. The great spill was also a desert plane, so this was normal.


    He was led into the inner most room. The astral energy in her, was pure and strong. It was as though the buliding was constructed upon the main astral vein it self.


    Inside was a woman seated in lotus fashion. He had expected the first elder to be a man, but this did not at all shock him. This worlds was not ruled by men. There were women just as scary as men. Like Madam Ge he had met before. This woman before him did not give out half the aura he perceived from Madam Ge, but he was strong. She was at the mid spirit awareness stage.


    He almost nodded at this. He had heard about the clans outside and knew that even the Ah clan ancestor was at peak of spirit awareness. For the south side to control the great spill, they did not need someone that is more powerful than their city lord.


    "You are Ed?" the woman''s calm voice entered his ears. This voice could calm even the wildest of men. It did not help that she was stunning either, but this did not work on Ed. Calm? He had heard calm. Beauty? Nothing in the world is as beautiful as the sister in white. After one looks upon her, it is impossible to see anyone as truly beautiful. She was his quest. He had to return to her. all the women in this world could never compare.


    Seeing Ed completely unfazed by her charm, she smiled. Very few men in the world would be unfazed in the presence of a beautiful woman.


    "Come. Sit." she offered him a seat. Ed sat before her in silence. She too, said not a word.


    "Is there a reason you called me?" Ed asked after a while.


    "Insolence!" the assistant bellowed at Ed. It is okay if this man was not fazed by master''s beauty, but to talk to her that casually? He was asking for death! Ed completely ignored her.


    "That''s okay, Ntia . You may leave." the first elder said. She calmed her self, before leaving after a bow.


    "Ignore her. she is not used to people talking to me casually." the fist elder said, but Ed did not answer.


    "You want to know why I called you? Your actions are commendable."


    "Is that it?" Ed did not believe she called him here because his actions were commendable.


    "Because of this, I am making an exception. I will accept you as my disciple." she said and he paused.

 57 Disciple 2

    "Because of this, I am making an exception. I will accept you as my disciple." she said and Ed paused.


    "No need to be shocked. You may be just a spirit picking junior, but with me on your side, you may get lucky enough to reach the spirit merging stage." she said calmly.


    "I have a master." those words from Ed''s mouth were more burning for his ears than for the first elder. A master? He never even took the one he had seriously and this was a should realization grandmaster. Talk more of she who was merely a spirit awareness master.


    "You don''t think me worthy?" she asked.


    "Worthy or not, I cannot have two masters." Ed said.


    "Your master, if he truly cares about your well being, would understand why you should not let go of this opportunity." she said.


    "When you meet him, you two are welcome to talk it out." Ed said and she frowned.


    "What level of cultivation is your master?" she asked.


    "Why does it matter?" Ed had no intention of telling her such a thing. There were very few soul realization grandmasters. She may not believe it now, but if someone came looking for him, they would know exactly who he was. He had not intention of getting mixed up in politics for power.


    "It does." she said.


    "Is this all you wished to say? If so, I will take my leave." Ed said and turned away.


    "I don''t make this kind of offer twice! You walk out that door and your chance goes with you." she said.


    As far as she was concerned, there was no way Ed could walk away from such an opportunity, master or no master. But Ed could care less about her pride, as he opened the door and walked out.


    Her calm face fell into a frown. This boy was far too arrogant. A mere spirit picking sapling dares to look down on her?


    Ntia walked in and stared at her master''s frowning face.


    "Master, why did he leave so soon?" she asked.


    "That little thing thinks himself great." she answered.


    "He did not agree to bring back the cold beads when they enter the astral roots?" Ntia asked.


    "He thinks himself too great to be my student."


    "Master wanted to accept him as a disciple? He is just a spirit picking junior. What right does he have to become master''s disciple?" she was very dissatisfied. Why would master be interested in the likes of him? He still dared to reject?


    "Enough! Take him to his cave and keep an eye on him." the first elder waved Ntia away.


    Ed had left without care. He waited outside for Ntia to take him to his cave, knowing well that she will come find him. If nothing, at least to fume over his disrespect for her master.


    As if on cue, she approached him in fury.


    "You dare look down on my master?"


    "I don''t remember looking down on anyone." Ed said casually.


    "Even though I feel you don''t deserve to be master''s disciple, you have the guts to reject her? Do you know how many people would beg to....." she started to rant.


    "Take me to my cave." Ed said. He was not interested in the stories of her master''s value. He could see hot flames in her eyes at his words.


    "Or does your master wish to strip me of this privilege for rejecting her offer?" he asked. This caused her anger to rise to a different level.


    "You will regret this!" she promised. Ed could care less about this master-disciple duo. He followed her to a cave on the very edge of the first section.

 58 Trouble in the first section

    Ed was led to his cave at the edge of the first section. Seeing this, he glanced at Ntia.


    "like I thought, very predictable action." he said and walked in. as the door closed before Ntia''s face, she snorted. Even if this thing told anyone of her master''s bias, no one would care, she thought and walked away.


    Ed was sure that this cave must have less astral energy that is why it was given to him, but he did not care. The energy he felt in here was five times stronger than in his last cave and with his contemplation technique, he was beyond the average cultivator.


    Someone else might feel wronged by the first elder''s actions, but not him. He could absorb this energy must faster than any other cultivator could, so this action of theirs made no impact on him. Not only was the energy stronger in this cave, the quality of the cave was better. The walls looked as though they were polished stone.


    Ed entered the bedroom and sat in lotus fashion on the ground. He did not immediately begin to cultivate. He first sat and replayed all his fights in the battle ground in his mind and gauged his level of control. He was very satisfied with the results he had gotten.


    He understood that, though the great spill was just like the outside world for the demon lands, the battle ground held the same level of restrictions to the cultivation as the demon lands outside the great spill. The laws of the great spill only allows for fighting in the battle field and not in the great spill. He wondered why.


    Thinking about it, a lot of those who came to the lands below the spirit awareness stage are allowed inside the great spill. Most of those here are from the outside world. As far as he was concerned, there was no real benefit of coming to the demon lands except for gaining battle experience like himself. But why do cultivators troupe here? Why do they stay? Was there more to the demon lands than he had been told?


    He understood that these cultivation caves filled with astral energy was very hard to find outside the demon lands, except for those from large clans and sects, still the power struggle inside the great spill makes it hard for people to really use this resource. Besides, this astral energy may not be good enough for most people. Those with low cultivation can not tell that at this stage, they can cultivate with all the energies, even though not at ones like him, they can use any. But some energies are better for them. This is because they have only one of the energies flowing through them.


    No matter how much they absorb the other energies, it will be transformed to their core energy to use. If one absorbed the same energy as the ones in their core, they would grow fast. Different masters would help the young cultivator absorb the right energy to level up faster. So, the great spill which was just a land filled with astral energy would be beneficial to some, not all. Why are all these people here?


    There must be something that old pervert did not tell him. When he had time, he would investigate this. He cleared his mind of all these thoughts and entered his contemplation technique. Sitting under the tree just on the surface of the water inside the heaven grade contemplation technique, he started to absorbe the energy in the cave.


    The action was much easier since he had done it before. His body became a massive hole, sucking in all the energy in the cave greedily. In a few breaths of time, the energy coming from the pond into the cave could not keep up. Like before, he places his hand in the pond and absorbed greedily.


    The energy this time, was richer, stronger and purer than his first cave. He was now sure that this cave was supplied by the main vein of the great spill. All the other veins must be flowing from the one in the first section.


    He was not reserved at all. Like he had done the last time, he took in all the energy in the pond and tarted absorbing straight from the source. It did not take time before he could feel the energy depleting to almost nothing.


    All hell broke loose in the great spill.


    "Next chapters : secrets of the demon lands (1)


    Secrets of the demon lands (2)


    These chapters are already available on patreonhttp://www.patreon.com/towalkthemist"

 59 Secrets of the demon lands 1

    Ed had absorbed all the astral energy dry. But for some reason, he could still feel a far away core astral well he could not reach. The well seemed to be filling the dry vein up. He stopped absorbing the energy. Even though he could not feel much of a change to his cultivation after that much energy, he understood why and knew it was best that he absorbed all the energies at rather the same pace. He was not in a hurry. He got up and walked out of his cave.


    He had completely destroyed all his swords in the battle field, but he had gained many more. He had taken time to search for treasures on the bodies of those he had killed in the battle field. He gained himself many weapons and spatial rings filled with wealth.


    He wanted to explore the spatial rings he had taken, but he understood that most of these cultivators were from large sects and clans. Their elders would have protected the spatial rings from entering unknown hands. Afterall, he had felt a sliver of the old pervert''s will in his ring. If something happened to him, he was sure the old thing, would know. His ring would be protected. Anyone who wished to look inside would have to suffer a lot and may get killed by the will of a soul realization grandmaster like the old pervert. This was the same for him. He was not arrogant enough to forget that no matter his special constitution, he was still a spirit picking junior.


    If he opened a spatial ring protected by the killing intent of a powerful grandmaster, he would be in mortal danger. He had heard of body inscriptions. These were activated unto one''s body to protect him from a mind attack. He needed something like that. Or even a shield to help handle a bit of the unleashed will.


    He stepped out of his cave and was met with chaos. People were everywhere, many of them looking in the same direction. He was sure that the first section was occupied by the top ten, and the top ten were individual cultivators, not factions with a lot of members. There is no way the first section would be this crowded.


    "Another energy vein dried?" someone asked.


    "Of course they tried to keep the first one silent but, it has happened again."


    "Do you think we are under attack?"


    "By who? Even great sects outside the demon lands cannot dry an energy vein that fast. And a major vein at that. This seems like a natural phenomenon."


    "I agree."


    "It seem like the great spill it running out of juice. Even so, it should not be this fast."


    "A major vein, doesn''t this mean that other veins are in danger?"


    "This could be bad."


    "If this continues we will be left with no energy to absorb."


    "As if that is even the issue," another snorted, "if the veins are drying, doesn''t that mean something is happening there?"


    "That will be bad."


    "Loosing an astral vein is one thing. If if something happens there, we will all loose out!"


    "The demon lands must already be considering this. If they loose that place, they become insignificant."


    "They will be nothing more than a barren land."


    "Who cares about the demon lands? That place is important for my cultivation!"


    Ed picked up on this discussion and turned solemn. He was right. There must be more to the demon lands. The reason people come here. That cursed old pervert did not say anything about this.

 60 Secrets of the demon lands 2

    Ed picked up on this discussion and turned solemn. He was right. There must be more to the demon lands. The reason people come here. That cursed old pervert did not say anything about this.


    As Ed walked through the town, he could see a lot of people gathered over this same topic. It was not as though he did not suspect that this was his fault, he just found it hard to believe. Sure, he used a heaven grade contemplation technique, sure, his absorption rate was higher than the average cultivator, but it had only taken him a few breaths of time. He did not believe that he could absorb an entire energy vein.


    What was an energy vein? Many clans and sects treasured this. It could be absorbed by five hundred thousand disciples over a hundred years. This was possible for a medium size energy vein. If he was right, the vein in the great spill was an extra large vein, with different branches. That was the only reason why there would be different sections in the great spill and with each section, a different level of astral energy. The first section should be the main vein. This main vein should be as large as a large sized vein. Even though he was odd, he still had a level of modesty. At least enough to doubt that he was capable of drying this main vein. This was classic denial.


    Ed looked for a pill store. It was much more difficult to find than a weapons store. This made perfect sense. Weapons were many, but people only need one or two. They chose weapons according to their affinity or preference. Pills on the other hand, all cultivators needed it. Even though one had not reached a level of cultivation where he could use the skill, he just had to cultivate longer till he succeeds, then he uses it.


    This meant that no one would willingly sell a pill. Even if it was possible, this was rare. Therefore, pill shops were bound to be hard to come by, unless there was an alchemist in the great spill.


    Giving up on it, he looked for an inscription shop. He needed more protection pills than healing pills. If one was truthful, he had a lot of healing pills given to him by the old pervert in his spatial ring. Finding a pill store would have been good to find out the exact properties of the pills he had been given.


    But on the other hand, this was also good. No matter the temptation to understand the quality of his pills, he was being closely watched. The last thing he needed was more attention. He was sure the old pervert''s pills would be one of a kind. If he took out such pills, news of it would spread and even elders would come to find trouble with him.


    An inscription store, though rarer than a weapon store, was still to find. He slowly walked into one. As he entered he took note of how many people watched him closely.


    "What would you like?" an attendant asked. This attendant had recognized Ed as the new number three on the slate and rushed over. The top ten were like godly existences within the great spill. They were higher than he, an attendant could ever reach. It was good to be on their good sides.


    "Body shield inscriptions. Also,... something for mental protection." Ed answered.


    "Give me a moment." the attendant dashed away.


    Ed noticed he was not the only in the store. Other cultivator were secretly watching him. He sighed. He was too noticeable these days. Being number three on the slate was enough noise, but the way he got to that number was even more dashing.


    A familiar figure walked into the store a moment later. This was Ku Nam. He smiled at Ed and walked towards his direction.


    "Congrats on making top ten." he said.


    "You too." Ed returned. Even though he felt no ill will from this boy before him, he was still not the smiling type, so his response came out very cold. Ku Nam did not seem to mind this.


    "Protection" Ku Nam commented on the inscriptions the attendant had brought to Ed, "You are preparing for your entrance into the astral roots?"


    "Astral roots?" Ed asked.


    "Let us find somewhere better to talk." Ku Nam suggested and Ed nodded.

 61 Secrets of the demon lands 3

    "Let us find somewhere better to talk." Ku Nam suggested and Ed nodded.


    Ed picked out a lot of his desired inscriptions then paid before leaving. He stepped out of the store and waited outside for Ku Nam. When Ku Nam step out, he smiled and joined Ed. The two walked towards and in. Ku Nam seemed familiar with the place, as he asked for a private room. The attendant bowed and led them to one. They both sat and Ku Nam ordered for both of them. The food arrived sometime after and was placed before them.


    Now read carefully, this is the important part.


    As the door closed, Ku Nam took out a small knife from his spatial ring. His action caught Ed''s attention. He dropped the blade at a perfect ninety degree. Te blade fell an inch down and paused in mid air. Ed looked closer and noticed that the knife was still moving towards the ground, inching on much too slowly for one''s eyes.


    "Words we say will not leave this room." Ku Nam said.


    "You said something about astral roots?" Ed asked.


    "The astral veins in this great spill and the great spills in the other two cities, are all sections of one root system. It is like a large river, the roots." Ku Nam answered.


    "Where did the roots come from?" Ed asked.


    "Legend says it is the site of an expert''s transcendence into a Godeater. But, we all know Godeaters don''t exist."


    "Don''t exist? Even if they did, is there any one alive who would know?" Ed asked with a slight scuff. This did not amuse Ku Nam. He thought that Ed made a solid point. Godeaters were such mysterious beings even in myths. Such beings, even if they existed, the most powerful of cultivators would only be able to perceive such a power as a myth.


    "True. True." Ku Nam agreed to Ed''s point.


    "The astral roots, you say it is like a large river of astral energy, but this is not enough to bring all these people here." Ed pointed out.


    "Of course not. It holds treasures. Only something of that magnitude would bring people here. There are things that that been brought out of the roots that has rocked the entire cultivation world."


    "If what you say is true, then even elders here, can join the cultivator and enter the roots. Such a place should attract those above the spirit awareness stage." Ed said.


    "They can not enter the astral roots. This law has protected the demon lands." Ku Nam nibbled his food.


    "So much energy in one place, could it be why there is none in the demon lands?" Ed asked.


    "Many speculate so. The law of the astral roots only allow those below late spirit merging to enter and search for treasures. Even peak spirit merging masters would be kicked out." Ku Nam said


    "That is why so many outside sects send their disciples here." Ed nodded in understanding.


    "As long as the demon lands allow every one to enter all three great spills and try out for these treasures, the outside powers could care less about this barren land."


    "But disciples from the outside word would always be stronger than those from the demon lands. The demon lands are at a disadvantage."


    "Yes, but many powers in the demon lands send their geniuses to join powers utside. This is so thatthey can hold their own here."


    "When does this astral roots open?" Ed asked.


    "In a few weeks."


    "The rules in there, what are they like?"


    "It opens every five years. After five years, everyone must enter, and every one must leave the great spills when they come out." if one wishes to stay longer, he must leave and re-enter."


    "All must leave at the same time?" Ed frowned.


    "Three months is the time limit to stay after one comes out of the roots. After coming out of the great spill, many do not participate in the battles any more."


    "Why?"


    "These battles are not set by the elders. Many don''t know that the slate is not arranged by the elders. To be an elder, one must sign to stay and oversee the great spill for ten years. This contract is between the elders and the great spill and not the powers of the demon lands. After one comes out of the roots, if one finds a treasure, he could inform their sect or clan outside and would only leave when they arrive. For safety." Ku Nam explained.


    "What about the elders? Can they also enter? What happens when one must leave? Do the elders leave too?" Ed asked.


    "It depends if their ten years is up. If not, they can keep their disciples with them too."


    "I see." Ed seemed to understand why many agreed to be disciples. They can stay longer in the great spill while others outside fight for the treasures brought out of the roots.


    "You have already been contacted by an elder? They like to catch spirit picking juniors for their disciples. There is a reason for that." Ku Nam said.


    "What?" Ed frowned


    "There are special sections within the astral roots. These majorly allow spirit picking juniors in. No one is sure where these sections are, but most of the greatest treasures brought out of the roots were inheritances gotten by spirit picking juniors." Ku Nam said and Ed turned solemn.

 62 Secrets of the demon lands 4

    "There are special sections within the astral roots. These majorly allow spirit picking juniors in. No one is sure where these sections are, but most of the greatest treasures brought out of the roots were inheritances gotten by spirit picking juniors." Ku Nam said and Ed turned solemn.


    "So, elders hope to rope in as much spirit picking cultivators as possible."


    "But this also does not help, it is a matter of talent." Ku Nam said and Ed raised a brow.


    "Few, but a significant number of cultivators above the spirit merging stages have entered these special sections before. They too have been pulled in." he explained.


    "If it is a thing of innate talent, why are all spirit picking juniors dragged into this section?" Ed asked.


    "My master once told me that an ordinary spirit picking junior can be molded into what ever the master wishes. After the spirit picking stage, many have burned potential bridges to pursue one martial path." Ku Nam explained.


    "The potential. Then the treasures in those special sections are inheritance treasures then."


    "Yes. That means that the other sections are good as well. Even better, it has nothing to do with luck. It has more to do with strength. If one is powerful enough, he can take anything away. And none of the treasure there are to be looked down on." Ku Nam said and Ed nodded at his words.


    "How do people leave?" Ed asked and Ku Nam broke into a laughter.


    "You are probably the only person who can see the full picture." Ku Nam said.


    "It is not that hard to enter as it is hard to leave, is it?" Ed asked.


    "Yes, and this is not mostly the work of the roots." Ku Nam agreed.


    "How?" Ed frowned.


    "Sure, people are tested in the roots. There are dangerous things in there, people are bound to die. Only the worthy can leave with what they have taken, but...." he said and Ed''s frown deepened.


    "When everyone leaves the sections they return to a central region."


    "Everyone in the same place, many will loose their treasures. Many would loose their lives." Ed said. He recognized that the law of the jungle was the only recognized here.


    "Taking inheritance treasures is harder than getting a normal treasure, but people still try. Most inheritance, when the host is dead, it would return to the astral roots special sections, but some can be taken out. But a majority of those taken out are demon treasures."


    "Demon treasures?"


    "It is as though the treasures hoped to be let loose on the world. These treasures pass from hand to hand, land to land, leaving a trail of blood in it''s path. They bring down empires and cause deaths, when they are done, they just disappear." Ku Nam explained.


    "Even with this kind of reputation many still try to take it out?" Ed asked.


    "Greed. This is a fatal human flaw. Besides, there is not much to show that a treasure is a demon treasure."


    "I see."


    "Nevertheless, other hosts are killed just for killing sake. How can they allow such potential geniuses to step out into the world and step on their heads?"


    "Jealousy. This seems more like the astral roots have no intention of letting these treasures out into the world." Ed commented.


    "You are right. Disciples turn on each other and blood of promising geniuses are spilled. Normal treasures aside, do you know how many great treasures come out of the great spill every five years?" Ku Nam asked.


    "None." Ed answered solemnly and Ku Nam laughed.


    "Yes. All those variables mean that, in the past hundred years, only two known special treasures leave the astral roots and every five years, more than ten thousand cultivators die inside."

 63 Devils cage 1

    Ed had returned to his cave after talking with Ku Nam for long. He felt that even though he was here to gain fighting experience and saw the astral roots as a good training ground, he still wanted to explore the astral roots. He could care less for a contemplation technique, but a high grade martial skill, better, a heaven grade one would be good for him. Even though he knew this was impossible, he still hoped. Also, the possibility of getting a good weapon was high. He needed something so that he could use more of his special energy flowing through him.


    "Let''s look into these rings first."


    Ed turned his attention to the spatial rings he had taken from those he had killed back at the battle field. Ed took out the body inscriptions he had bought and activated them. The symbols glowed hot, sealing into his blood before cooling into a dark tattoo on his arm.


    After doing this several times, he started looking through the spatial rings. Most of them caused not problem allowing him access to the wealth, weapons, healing pills and martial skills of it''s former owners. But every now and then, he stumbled upon spatial rings that were protected by killing intents of masters. These intents would attack him, trying to harm his body and sometimes mind.


    The inscriptions did their jobs well, after which they faded off his skin. This was possible because these masters were not considered strong, if they were masters at all. Most were just in the peak spirit awakening or early spirit merging.


    But, Ed''s luck halted upon one spatial ring. The moment he opened it, a mental power struck him. Ed determined that the owner of this power must be at least a peak spirit awareness master. This was rare. Most that cultivated mental strength were even rarer than those that cultivated physical strength. Mental strength was key for those who wished to become alchemists, inscription masters or spatial cultivators. All these things were hard paths, many avoided them. For one to have such mental strength at the level of a spirit awareness master, the person must be much stronger. Ed did not have the time to wonder how such a spatial ring could have gotten into his hands or the hands of those he had killed. He was in mortal danger!


    The consequences of looking into this ring was not a kind of thing Ed was prepared for. He did not know how to protect his mind from such an attack!


    Pain.


    He felt a tear speed through his skull and a ringing peirce his ears and crash into his blood. He fell to the floor holding his head steady. He felt as though his brain was being wrung like a sponge.


    Fear.


    Images flashed through his head, continuing so long he thought it went on for years when it was no more than a few breaths since he looked into the spatial ring. The blood coursing through his veins paused for a second and flowed in the opposite direction, causing him to bleed from all pores on his skin. His mind stood on the edge of getting lost in those images. He saw a cycle of war, death, and more death. The images of wars were accompanied by gushing stenches of blood. It was numbing. When he started getting used to it, images changed to that of his family back in his world. His father who had returned home after so long and his mother die of worry, waiting for him to come home.


    Gone. Everybody is gone. The pain increased a thousand fold, causing him to let loose a raw scream. Time seemed to loose meaning. Slowly, he forgot all faces. His master, his parents, his home. He was lost. He looked around and all he saw was mist. Fear pulsed through his veins. The mist was strong. He could not see left from right. This to hi, was much worse than watching his parents die.


    Despair.


    Energy, strength, the will to go on, drained from his being. He felt the need to slip into the mist forever. Outside, back in his cave, he had almost bled out. At that moment, he felt strands of hair between his fingers. He looked up into beautiful brown eyes. A familiar gentle smile graced his eyes.


    "Your highness, wake up." a soft soothing voice left her lips. This sent a jolt through him, cracking through the illusion and his eyes opened in his cave. He found himself sprawled in his own blood, weak on his cave floor. His breathing was shallow, he felt himself close to death''s door.


    At the same time, outside the demon lands, far into the large sect locked out from the rest of the world, in a cave on top a mountain, an old man''s eyes sprang open.


    "Who? Someone actually broke through my mental cage?" the man asked in wonder.


    "Has one of my disciples been killed?" he frowned.


    Outside his cave, a cultivator stood guard. He suddenly received a mental message from the old man.


    "Enter." the message said and he immediately froze. Elder is out of his seclusion? He wondered. He bowed as the cave opened allowing him to enter.


    "Elder Oyong." the cultivator greeted with a bow.


    "Has any of my disciples'' life stone broken?" Elder Oyong asked.


    "No. I would have been notified. Is something the matter?"


    "What about those that died during the revolt? Has all their spatial rings been retrieved?"


    "All but Senior disciple Inung." the cultivator answered, completely confused. Elder Oyong frowned.


    "My mental cage was broken from the demon lands. Who is it? That person is now in possession of our sect''s high grade spatial martial skill, devil''s cage." Elder Oyong said dangerously.


    "Should I report to the sect?" the cultivator asked.


    "No. I will go to the demon lands and bring it back my self." Elder Oyong said.

 64 I am back! But first ground rules.

    Guys,let''s lay down the law, shall we?


    This book in what ever shape, form, language and art form of storytelling; whether electronic or mechanical engineered form, is copyrighted to me.Period. I will not condone anyone translating,or distributing this book in any form possible, without my formal consent. My other book got translated without my consent and I shut them down. The culprit had the guts to be rude enough to send me a message saying; he is the translator and the highest he can do is split the money he earned.I should allow him continue translating because someone else will just do it anyway.


    Guys, you may have ignored this,but I have said once that this book is a side book from a main series published on Amazon. The main character,Ed enters the mist in book One of my book; The Sister In White and I never explained what happened in the mist. Thus, this is the story. (I mean, the title is literally;To Walk The Mist) Sure it is written with an asian flair,but that is because it is written in honor of the asian genre I can''t stop reading.


    Anyone who attempts to translate this book without my express permission will have to face the wrath of the publishing company (Squarehouse Books), who have bought rights to the publication of all stories related to that series. Your funeral.


    Honestly, guys. Just ask. Who knows,if that translator who had started translating Lucy Wickshire to Russian had asked me before starting,I would have said yes.


    Maybe you don''t know,but there is something called the google alert. The moment I add a new title to my name,google suggest to have those titles and all my copyrighted works alerted to me whenever it is mentioned in any language in country on the net. Yeah.You can''t get away with something''s these days,so thread carefully.


    I intend to start posting chapters of this book by December. I know,it''s far,but,I just finished publishing a book and I''m stressed from the sleepless nights. At the moment I am under care, as I have mentioned about my failing health before. As long as I don''t stay on the computer too long till December, I will be allowed to go back to work full force. Get ready.


    But of course, like those who read Lucy Wickshire know,I sometimes sneak you chapters from the hospital. Hehe¡­ this author can''t stay still. You may get unexpected chapters before December.


    Thanks for reading my rants,guys. See you soon.

 65 Devils cage 2

    Ed pulled out a pill form his spatial ring and swallowed. It did not take long before he started to feel the effects of the pill. He could suddenly breath better, his skin that had turned white from blood lost, started to regain it''s colour. He got up and entered the spirit pond in his room fully clothed, to wash off his blood that had started to stick to him. Inside the pond. He pondered upon the skill he had taken out of the ring. It was a jade slip, and he was yet to look into it.


    Settling in the pond, he looked into the jade slip.


    "Devil''s cage?" he found himself in a scene that he suspected was a memory. The name; devil''s cage rushed into his mind, as he saw a man in black execute a skill. Space distorted around the man as everything in a twenty kilometres radius of him was locked in a space. Everything paused, as though frozen in time. Locked inside withhim, were enemy cultivators spanning far as the eyes could see. Ed looked closely, he noticed that it was not that they had paused, their movements had slowed down. Those with higher cultivations could still move somewhat freely.


    The man in black went on a killing spree. No spirit energy leaked into this space. Everyone was it his mercy. Only pure physical combat could be used in the fight. The man in black, being the only one able to use sense his spirit energy and manipulate it, killed them all. It was a blood bath.


    After the image finished, Ed found himself in a dark room. Black walls to all sides, locking him in. The man in black appeared before him.


    "Who are you?" Ed asked.


    "You wish to learn the devil''s cage? You must break out of this room." the man said mechanically and disappeared. Ed almost sighed. He had not decided to learn this skill, yet he was already stuck inside. He could withdraw his mind from the jade slip, but he was suddenly interested in getting this skill.


    Folding his hand into a fist, he pounded at the walls from all directions, hoping to find a loophole.


    In the great spill, many were preparing for their entrance into the astral roots. People had already formed groups and pledged allegiance to different elders.


    There were three great spills in the demon lands. They too were preparing to enter. All the great spills were connected to the astral roots. They were sure they would meet other cultivators from different great spills.


    In the south side city, many powers from outside the demon lands had started arriving. They all came with high ranking martial artists preparing to get their young ones back to their sect in one piece. The hostile feeling in the air was strong. In the city lord''s residence, a large banquet for great powers from outside the demon lands was taking place, but not all powers showed up. Many did not want to let others know they were around.


    The Tze sect had arrived the demon lands and went straight to the Ah clan. Seeing their form, the entire clan froze. Someone rushed over to call the new clan head. The Tze sect on the other hand, frowned at the nature at which the clan behaved. They had arrived the demon lands, not only for their young master who was in the great spill, but because disciples had died here. Other disciples, it would have been ignored. But amongst those that had died, was Elder Diye''s god-daughter, who he gave a sect skill; shifting space.


    "Ah Dise! Get out here!" Elder Diye ordered. The new clan head was seen rushing towards them in haste.


    "Welcome, honoured guests. I..." he started to say.


    "Shut up and tell Ah Dise to roll out here!" Elder Diye ordered.


    "Ancestor Ah has been banished from the clan, honoured guests. If there is any issue, please tell me. I am the new clan head, I will be enough." his words caused the Tze clan members to pause.


    "Banished? What about his son and grandson?" another elder asked.


    "They died in the salt bed." the clan head said.


    "My god-daughter was with his grandson. Was it the same person that killed her?" Elder Diye fumed.


    "Yes." the clan head had a bad feeling about this. All the Tze clan disciples that were with Ah Didia were killed with him. He did not know that the elder''s god-daughter was amongst them. His entire being froze.


    "And you did nothing?!" Elder Diye raged.


    "Our clan head and two elders went up there to kill him. He killed clan head, one elder came back an invalid and died a few days later, the other is myself." the clan head immediately explained.


    "Then what about Ah Dise? Did he just sit and do nothing?" the elder''s words caused the Ah clan members to cower in shame. What do they tell them? That they banished their ancestor because he insisted on going after the culprit? That they refused to do anything?


    "Speak!"


    "Ancestor Ah is out there looking for the culprit." he hurriedly said. "There was a survivor; Ah Fude. He was with your niece when it happened and was the only one who escaped. Someone! Call Ah Fude here!"


    A little while later, Ah Fude was led out to meet them. From the look on his face, one could see that he was really scared.


    "You are Ah Fude?" Elder Diye asked.


    "Greetings, Elder Diye." the elder looked at the slightly flustered boy and frowned.


    "You are an outer sect disciple correct?" the elder asked.


    "Yes."


    "Tell me about this person that killed my niece and you better think carefully about your words." the elder warned.


    "We heard of an etheric tree in the salt bed and adventured there. When we got there, some people had already arrived before us. We asked that they hand it to us, but they refused. Young master Didia led us to kill them all. It was easy, except for one. He did not seem at all interested in the fight nor bothered with it. He took all the fruit and when we attacked, he killed everyone. I only escaped because of the talisman the clan had given me." Ah Fude explained.


    "And this person killed my niece?" the elder asked.


    "Yes. It was a massacre. He was too strong."


    "The clan went to kill him and he killed your clan head? How strong was he?" the elder turned to new clan head and asked.


    "Ah fude and I were there when he killed the clan head. He was a spirit picking junior." the new clan head said and the Tze sect frowned at his words.


    "You said that you had banished the ancestor, yet you claim that he is out there looking for the culprit. Do you think me a fool?" Elder Diye said with a hair raising laugh.


    "We could not fight him. I am ashamed to say that we refused to hunt him down. This boy could kill the clan head by just touching him. One of our elders felt the backlash of his technique and was brought back crippled. He started to rot while alive, so we had to kill him. We were too scared. A spirit picking junior that can do this, we are not his match." the new clan head said and saw the look on Elder Diye''s face and hurriedly continued.


    "You have met Ancestor Ah before. He is not a rational person that can be reasoned with, so we banished him. It was all a plan to better the clan while getting our revenge. Ancestor Ah, who is the strongest of us all will be hunting him down. If he fails, the clan would be spared."


    "Am I supposed to be happy you used such despicable means to avenge my niece? You wish to be sparred? That will never happen!" Elder Diye said and took a threatening step forward.


    "We respect you, Tze sect, but you must not break the laws of the demon lands." the new clan head said tensely. It was taking all his strength to remain brave right now. The Tze sect were not happy with his words, but they could not go on a killing spree in the demon lands. The demon land treaty with the two clans and two alliances is clear. No power above grade two could enter the demon lands and establish dominance. Below the nine powers, there were nine grades and their Tze sect was a grade three power. They could not kill off an entire clan in the demon lands, they could only kill those who have done them wrong. The only way they could kill off the entire Ah clan was if they had all contributed to kill their sect members. Pinning such a crime on them was easy. After all, power is everything. But this was a bad time. Many powers were arriving the demon lands, awaiting their young geniuses to emerge from the astral roots with treasures.


    Elder Diye scuffed and turned away. It matters not. They could come back after those powers have gone to kill their entire clan. The Ah clan members sighed a relieve as the Tze sect left. They all turned to their clan head in fear.


    "Prepare to leave the demon lands." he instructed and they all sighed in despair and dispersed. The clan head was suddenly surrounded by the elders, who looked as worried as he was.


    "Are we really leaving?" one of them asked.


    "We still have a hand to play. My grandson as well as most of yours, are in the great spill. They will enter the astral roots. If they come out with a treasure, we can offer it to powers greater or on par with the Tze sect in return for their protection." he said and they all nodded in agreement.

 66 Entering the Astral roots

    By the time Ed emerged from his cave, the entire great spill was in chaos. He was alerted to come out from training as all will be entering the astral roots today. Looking at the rushed nature of cultivators, Ed frowned. According to Ku Nam, they still had some time before the Astral roots opened. They would at least enter the battleground once more before astral roots open. Why was it opening ahead of schedule?


    He was not the only one worried, out the great spills in the cities, the guests from outside the demon lands were frowning too. How could the roots open before schedule? The doorway to the great spill was not crowded before time, as many made camp outside, sat and waited for the cultivators to emerge from the astral roots. The inns near the entrance were filled too. In one of the rooms in an inn with a direct view of the great spill door way, sat Tie Nse, Old Iba and a young man. The young man sat by the corner quietly while, the other two watched the crowd by the great spill doorway from their window.


    "What are the odds that the astral roots open ahead of time time while your disciple is inside?" Old Iba asked.


    "It may not be his fault." Tie Nse picked on his nails leisurely.


    "Do you really believe that? With his capabilities, you should expect everything."


    "True. But that place is not simple either. All that is known of that place is the myth." Tie Nse said.


    "Godeaters? Is it even possible?" Old Iba asked.


    "Who knows?"


    "Still, your disciple could still be responsible for this. After all, he too is basically a myth." Old Iba said.


    "Still, we have to wait till he comes out to find out. Using that pill you made will have to wait till he comes out." Tie Nse said.


    "Who would have thought he would join the fight for treasures too." Old Iba asked.


    "Him? That boy does not care for treasures. Now that I think about it, I don''tknow what he wants." Tie Nse said thoughtfully.


    "What kind of master are you? If you don''t even know what he wants, how can you help him reach his goal?" Old Iba mocked.


    "The boy barely talks. When he comes, you ask him yourself." Tie Nse scuffed.


    Back in the great spill, Ed joined the rest of the cultivators as they moved towards the same direction. It took a while of running before they entered a large pavilion. Ed entered and noticed that the pavilion seemed as though it was endlessly long. Many continued to run yet the pavilion continued. He noticed that the floor tilted slightly, almost as though they were slowly running underground.Soon, they all stood before a large pond. He was now sure they were underground, as they air smelled of earth and the light from outside did not reach them. On the other side of the pond stood seven people. This must be the elusive council, as he recognized the first section elder at the middle. They waited as many continued to arrive. They all looked down at the pale pink liquid in the pond.


    "The astral roots have opened. You step into a world completely different from our own. The rules you must comply, different to ours. You go for glory, you go alone." the first elder said, looking round the crowd. Determination filled their eyes as they heard her say, "Enter." some hesitated, but other jumped in immediately. Soon, many were jumping into the pond.


    Ed decided to wait till many had entered, before going through. He was not sure what was beyond the pink liquid, so he took his time. After he jumped in, he was first worried about breathing, but discovered that there was no liquid on the other side. He had passed through the pink liquid as though it was a barrier. On the other side was a large round hall. He noticed that there were more people than were inside the great spill. He figured they were from the other great spills. Ignoring the people around him, he looked round the hall.


    The walls of the hall were not walls at all; they had round passage ways and Ed was not the only to notice it. The thought of trying out a passage way crossed his mind, before an energy swept by like a wave and picked up spirit picking cultivators. Ed suddenly found himself elevated into the air then drawn into a passage way. It happened so quickly, he suddenly found himself as well as other spirit picking cultivators in another hall. This hall was much different from the first. The walls had not passage way and it seemed to sing a hum that vibrated through his body.


    "You came." he heard in his heard and spun round looking for the person who spoke.


    "Who?.." he started to ask.


    "Come." the voice said and Ed immediately felt disoriented. The hall seemed to spin and his vision went dark.


    "Wake up." the voice came again.


    "Who are you?" Ed asked.


    "Quest taker, you are a long way from home." the voice said.


    "How do you know that name?"


    "The Yhenxia sword sings through the blood of a quest taker. Your blood found it''s way here from one of my ponds."


    "Your ponds? You are the Godeater of myth?" Ed felt his heart rate increase.


    "He has long been gone. I am the spirit of the astral roots. The residual energy he left behind here over years formed me."


    "You know I am a quest taker. Then you know I must return home. Do you know the way?"


    "I am beyond time, beyond space. I am." his words did nothing to clear Ed''s anxiety.


    "Then you know how I can leave the mist?"


    "Some millennia from now, when Ifurther transcend to have a form. When is protect the Emperor''s shed. A certain young boy leaves me a request; a message for you."


    "What?" Ed frowned. He had always known that The Mist was woven between many time lines and places, but had never found a time that intersected with his original home. Is it possible this spirit knew how to cross it?


    "He said; ''boy, I have found the pods of being. I have left it for you in the Valley of memory.''" the way these words were said were quite familiar.


    "Who was he? This valley of memories, is it my way home?" Ed asked.


    "The valley of memory is back home." the voice said and Ed sent out a growl in frustration.


    "So you bring be here for something that makes no sense."


    "This boy went to a lot of trouble to bring you this message. I am told it will be of use to you in the future."


    "Your message aside, you must pay your dues."


    "What?"


    "He paid to have the message sent to you. You must pay for receiving it." Ed had a bad feeling about this.


    "A quest taker can upgrade my consciousness beyond my years. Since you have come, don''t leave." Ed suddenly felt a wave descend on him. This was a trap. Who ever sent that message knew he would enter the astral roots at this time. Therefore, this spirit also knew he was coming. An opportunity to absorb Ed, a quest taker, was one the spirit could not pass up.


    Ed crashed to the ground, spiting out a mouthful of blood. This spirit was far more powerful than he was. Dread coursed through his veins. He was going to die here. He pried open his eye to see a black and white face imprinted in the second wave crashing down. It felt like he had just been hit by ten thousand seas.


    "A young inexperienced quest taker, is a quest taker never the less." the spirit said. Ed pulled the Yhenxia sword swiftly out of his space the moment the pressure lifted slightly.


    He coursed some of his energy through the sword, and it hummed through the air, then sent out a screech, which sounded excited to Ed''s ears. This was the first time the sword had reacted since he had received it from that oracle.


    "You... why do you have that?" the spirit retreated rapidly.


    "What kind of quest taker goes around without his Yhenxia sword?" Ed sneered. He was angry now. There was no way he was letting this spirit free.


    The spirit felt Ed''s energy through the sword as Ed readied to swing and screamed. "What are you?!" the spirit could feel darkness like no other envelope him from Ed''s sword. If that energy touched him, he would seize to exist! Pulling all his strength, the spirit winked away. It was fast, but Ed sword still grazed him before he could vanish. Ed heard his baleful scream before it vanished and anger took over him. That thing escaped after wanting to make him food? His anger seemed to resonate through the Yhenxia sword, causing it to screech louder. Ed looked up at it and noticed it''s soft blue glow; the writings on the sword glowing brighter than the rest of the sword.


    He could feel that the sword was excited and refused to be put back in. it''s screeching resonated through the astral roots, it was almost as though it was calling out to something. Ed was too curious to put it back in. the sword responded for the first time, he wanted to know what it was up to. He wanted to understand it.


    Unknown to him, this screeching was heard through out the astral roots, causing all the treasures to misbehave. All hell had broken loose in the astral roots.

 67 Chaos in the astral roots

    Ku Nam led his team through dark wet corridors hurriedly. Strings of man eating vines whipped at them hungrily. He held a formidable sword in hand as he slashed at any vine that crawled near.


    "Brother Nam, looking at how restless they are; we should be really near." Autumn bloom said


    "Let''s move faster." Ku Nam said, rushing forward.


    They reached the doorway soon enough, panting and slightly wounded. Except Ku Nam, who looked completely clean in his white robes. When they stepped through the doorway into a long stone hall, the man eating vines retreated. As fast as they had moved, they were not the only ones to have entered the stone hall. Opposite the long walkway at the middle of the hall, a team of four stepped in almost the same time as they did.


    Tension could be felt through the dusty air as the two teams locked gazes. As though a whistle had been blown, the two teams immediately started racing through the walkway towards the platform at the end of the hall.


    Ku Nam slowed down, letting his team rush past him. He pulled a lot of his physical strength to his palms and slapped two of them on the back, shooting them passed everyone, towards platform. He spun around so fast, the other team could not tell how he had moved. He faced them with his fingers already making the last of complicated hand seals.


    Crackle!


    Lightening crashed from the ceilings into the hall, striking everything within a twenty foot radius around him. Everyone, including his remaining team mates were struck stiff. They felt a slicing pain through their bodies. Their muscles to their cells hurt so bad, they screamed in pain. This was definitely grade five lightening.


    Regardless, Ku Nam did not stop moving. He manoeuvred through the streaks of lightening and grabbed his remaining two team mates and threw them out of the walkway and thereby, out of the lightening radius. They landed on dirt with aching bones, allowing Ku Nam to turn to the other team. The other team''s leader bit his lips as Ku Nam was throwing away his companions, allowing a drop blood to slide down his neck. As the blood touched his skin, Ku Nam turned to his form, shrouded in blood red light.


    "A blood shield? Not good enough!" he snorted and made more hand seals. It only took a second for him to speed through all the seals, and another bolt of lightening descended. It struck the other leader, but the blood shield held.


    "Hmph! You over estimate yourself." the leader said and disappeared. He was half way to the platform the next second.


    "I see." Ku Nam appeared before him the next second and kicked him twenty metres back. The leader''s body slid back past Ku Nam''s companions running towards the platform at full speed.


    "A technique that imitates the blink skill, an authentic blood shield; you are from the Heaven Alliance." Ku Nam said, "It would be a waste for me to let you live."


    "The Ku Clan. No wonder you could use lightening even with the energy restriction in the astral roots. The Ku Clan''s lightening is still one of a kind. Thank you for letting me experience it. You can go to hell now!" the other leader said and charged for Ku Nam.


    Ku Nam knew he was right. His lightening was not enough to break the blood shield.


    "So, a physical fight it is." he said and appeared before the other leader instantly. As his form broke out into the leader''s vision, Ku Nam''s fist was descending.


    Crack.


    The other leader had made to defend, but felt his hand bones crack. His eyes rounded out in shock. What kind of physical strength was this? Grinding his teeth, he bore the weight of Ku Nam''s fist. He used the momentum of the fist to escape back, then made to blink away.


    "When it comes to the blink imitation, you are still far from being my equal." Ku Name muttered, then blinked behind him. The leader felt Ku Nam''s heavy fist crash into his back, before his body could blink away. He could swear his spine cracked. He spat a mouthful of blood as he crashed into the stone paved walkway, a long way away from his unconscious companions.


    "They let you learn the blood shield; you must be important." Ku Nam said, appearing above the leader and descending on his exposed neck.


    Crack.


    The leader stopped moving.


    Ku Nam looked towards his companions almost reaching the platform, and blinked thrice to reach it. They arrived to meet him standing before the elevated platform. There was nothing on the plater, but Ku Nam still raised his hand and reached for the empty space. He felt his hand grab unto a slim slightly curved object and pulled it out. A lone bow made of polished white wood was exposed.


    "We should leave before more people arrive." Autumn bloom said.


    "Yes." the other agreed. Hey turned to where the other two companions were and saw them struggling to get on their feet.


    "Can they still move like this?" Autumn Bloom asked Ku Nam. He glanced at her for second, before pulling out a bottle of pills from his space and threw it at her.


    "Feed it to them." he said and she nodded and ran in their direction. They may be useless to him, but they made good distractions. To get out of this astral roots with this white bow, he needed such distractions.


    Just then, a screech ran through the air, almost tearing through his skull. The bow in his hand seemed to hum in response. Something about it''s hum, made Ku Nam feel it was scared. The bow glowed bright white and the light sipped into his pores and hit his blood. This only made the pain increase. A bone tattoo appeared on the wrist of his dominant hand, hot as coal. It felt as though someone had taken a red hot stylus and carved the tattoo into his wrist. As they tattoo sealed, he could feel the bow much clearly. It was a though he could tell what it felt. As the bow''s feelings rushed into his mind, he cursed out loud and tumbled to the ground. The bow had physically disappeared, but he could feel it hiding inside him.


    This stupid bow was afraid of the screeching that it forced a life contract unto him and hid inside his body. His companions all heard the screeching, but only Ku Nam fell, writhing in pain.


    "Brother Nam!" the companion closest to him reached for his falling form in panic. Autumn Bloom paused as she heard the panicked shout and looked back to see Ku Nam fall. The companion tried to touch him, but hot lightening repelled him, flinging him to the other side of the room.


    As Ku Nam felt his consciousness start to slip into the ethers, a seal unlocked in his body and thick lightening surrounded him.

 68 Chaos in the astral roots 2

    WARNING: this author has been power typing all day, in fact all week. This is so that I can get to a point where I can comfortably increase our daily release to two chapters. I have yet to read through the chapters already written,as I am too busy creating more. You read at risk of your brain melting from grammatical errors.


    Time in the astral roots was slower than the outside world. Those sitting outside the great spills in the various demon lands cities had been waiting for a week since the astral roots opened.


    At this moment, the demon lands felt large tremors. As many could not use their energies because of the restrictions of the demon lands, many found it hard to stay on their feet. Panic broke loose in the demon lands, as many were confused by this phenomenon. A few metres away from the great spill entrance were different powers had gathered, the tremors had reached the inns and restaurants nearest to the great spill entrance. The buildings made with ordinary substances did not escape this calamity. They collapsed so fast, one would thought they had been descended upon by a giant hammer.


    The city lord''s residence felt the hit. Though a lot of clans had congregated around the great spill entrance, they were but smaller powers. Most higher clans and sects up the power chain were hosted in the mayor''s residence, while others remained in the shadows, unconcerned with the happenings, and only watching. When the tremors hit the mayor''s residence, they all tensed in confusion.


    "City lord, what is going on?" someone asked.


    A guard appeared from a transport talisman immediately and knelt tot he city lord.


    "The tremors are coming from the astral roots." he informed. Other informants from other clans appeared and confirmed this news. At this stage, most did not stay back at the residence any more, as they moved towards the core of the tremors. On the roof of one of the buildings still standing, Tie Nse and Old Iba sat, watching the proceedings with a young man standing behind them.


    "So, you still think this is not your disciple''s fault ey?" Old Iba asked.


    "It could be anything. Who knows, someone must have found a great treasure." Tie Nse said.


    "These powers gathered here thinking so would be understandable. But you? Who are you trying to fool?" Old Iba said. They two seemed completely at ease as they talked leisurely and watched the chaos below.


    "That boy... it is best to wait till he comes before we make any conclusions." Tie Nse said.


    Just at that moment, an elder from the great spill transmitted information to those outside through the city lord.


    "Maybe someone found a special treasure." someone speculated.


    "This phenomenon, I have a bad feeling about it." another said. The city lord''s eyes rounded out when he heard the contents of the transmission.


    "No. this can''t be happening." disbelief filled his eyes.


    "City Lord, you know what is happening?" an elder from one of the powers asked.


    "No..nothing." the city lord stammered. If he could, he would hide this information forever, the demon lands will be doomed if this gets out.


    "Speak! You know of what is happening right?" the elder accused with a frown. His voice was loud enough for many to turn their attention to the city Lord. The city lord started to tremble at the attention, he wondered how he could hide this information. At that moment, someone said out loud; "The astral roots are drying up."


    Everyone turned their attention to the person who spoke. "An elder from the great spill just sent out this information." the person explained solemnly. With this, many understood why the city lord was afraid to speak. The demon lands is nothing without the astral roots. This could signal the end of the demon lands.


    "Those who entered the roots are getting ejected. They should be out soon." the person continued.


    "When they come out, we must make them explain." someone said and the others agreed.


    Old Iba glanced at Tie Nse as the news broke. "Have you thought of how you will get your disciple out of the demon lands with this crowd?" he asked.


    "And they must not know who he is. We can not show ourselves." Tie Nse sighed.


    "You know what usually happens when they come out of the roots right? This crowd is waiting to eat a big meal. Smaller powers sent their strongest members so that they could escape. Those without backing will be swallowed by the big fish. If your disciple walks out of there and we do not show ourselves, he will have to submit what ever he found. What will you do in that situation?" Old Iba asked solemnly.


    "Yes... what will he do, I also want to see." Tie Nse said thoughtfully. His words caused Old Iba to sigh; this disciple is just unlucky to have this kind of master.


    Somewhere in the crowd, someone sneaked back to the Ah clan and relayed this news. The Ah clan head looked at the elders and gave out his order, "Start evacuating people. We will escape to our ancestral land first. From there, we will leave the roots." he ordered. The other elders frowned.


    "What about our young ones in the roots? Are we to leave them there?"


    "They are as good as dead. At this point, if they know what is good for them, some of them will offer up what ever they have managed to find in the roots in return for safety. If the roots have dried, no power would even care to save us, now that the demon lands have no use." he said and looks of despair shrouded their faces.


    In the great spill, the elders were choosing sides. Most that had never been with any outside factions were regretting this. Being an elder in the great spill was great, but now that the astral roots are drying, and at an alarming speed, where will they go. Most frowned because, with this development, their deals with some of the independent cultivators will be off. They had promised to let them stay longer and protect their treasure if they become part of their faction, but does that even could any more? They themselves will have no where to go. They would have to leave the spill. It was a gloomy situation.


    Ed sat and watched his screeching Yhenxia sword hovering in mid air. He had started to noticed that many unknown things were appearing in the room where he sat and were hovering around the sword. They would hover a bit, then vanish. He was confused, but had no intention of stopping his sword. He waited a bit and the number of treasures appearing had increased to an alarming rate.


    This astral roots was said to be where a cultivator ascended to the state of Godeater. This was why there were many treasures here. Treasures, they were called, but the only things valuable to a cultivator to be called a treasure, were things that bestowed power. These treasures were said to be from the cultivator''s private collection. Things he did not need any more as he was now a Godeater.


    But all these were nothing more than myths. Still, seeing the amount of treasures appearing in this room, Ed was sure of his suspicion. Godeaters were real. This was probably the only way he could leave this land. He had to become one. Soon, the screeching stopped. The fog in the room dissipated, revealing piles of spirit stones, inscriptions, armour and pills. It was so much, it filled the entire large room, forming a few small mountains. Without thinking, Ed swiped his hand through the air and all everything in the room disappeared into his spatial ring. He was now sure that this was the core of the astral roots. Not only was the spirit of the astral roots here, there was this much treasure in this room. He grabbed his Yhenxia sword from mid air and could suddenly feel so so many treasures in the sword. He almost felt as though if he reached out he could take out anyone. Suddenly, an idea formed in his head. The Yhenxia sword was given to him by the Oracle of Deranox. It was said to be the last of it''s kind. A relic from the time of Quest takers. Sine he had gotten this sword, it had not reacted at all, no matter what he tried. He knows for sure that the last Quest takers to travel across planes had to reach the stage of Godeater to do so. The cultivator ascended to become a god eater, was he a quest taker?

 69 To kill or not to kill.

    Space warped and Ed found himself in a large hall. Inside, he could see all the cultivators from all other great spills. Looking closer, he noticed that they were much less than when they had entered the astral roots. Most looked at those around them with caution. It was clear, a fight was going to break out. But just then, space warped again and they were standing in their respective great spills. Those from the south side city''s great spill returned to where they had stood before entering the astral roots; around the underground pond. They looked at the elders before them in confusion.


    "What''s going on?" someone asked.


    "I didn''t even get the chance to find a treasure." another said.


    "Not just you, me too."


    "The experience in the astral roots was shorter than I expected."


    "My master once said that it would sometimes take up to a month out here before people start coming out. What is going on?"


    "What day is it, now?"


    "Elders, why are you saying nothing?" many were worried that as they have been removed from the spill ahead of time, they will not have the opportunity to enter again.


    "The pond is dry!" someone had finally noticed the empty pond and exclaimed.


    "What does this mean?"


    "Elders!!" someone called them in anger. The first elder cleared her throat and looked at the crowd.


    "The astral roots have dried." she said. Silence hunted the grounds at that moment, before someone in the crowd sneered.


    "That means my deal with you is off" he said and she sighed in response. They all somewhat understood what he meant. A lot of them had made deals with the elders so that they could keep their treasures.


    "The great spill is no more. Then, you have no use." another said and her eyes narrowed.


    "You would not even try to offer me what you have found?" she sneered, "No matter what, I am still a cultivator of the...."


    "No matter what realm you are on, you don''t compare to the host of powers waiting outside." another cut her off.


    "Would you even dare collect anything I offer? With your little power, will you be able to escape the powers outside?" someone said.


    "Even though we stayed there for a short time, I don''t believe there are not some who have benefited. This great spill will soon disappear. How do you intend to protect yourself?" the first elder clenched her fists in anger. She could not retort to their words. They were right. Even if someone offered her a treasure, she would not dare collect it.


    "Hurry up and open the gates! Send us outside!" many started to order. Ed watched the helpless faces of the elders and turned away. He had lost all interest now, he could not fight with others to horn his skills. He made his way back to his cave. Though he had nothing in cave, he wanted to sit down and analyse all that he had gotten from the astral roots.


    He sat on the floor of his room and took out the Yhenxia sword. This sword was made of some special material that looked like liquid silver. It was engraved words with a foreign language on it''s hilt. For some reason, this sword could handle a good percentage of his energy. He had always ignored the sword when given. When it came to this world with him, he had wondered about it. This was the first time he had gotten close to an information about it.


    Like before, he could feel a lot of treasures inside the sword. Was it possible this sword had a storage space of it''s own? If it did, then it probably stored weapons alone. But it had not responded even once since he had entered this world. He was sure that the weapons and treasures in the astral roots were of the highest grade. Was the sword picky? He tried reaching for an axe inside the sword and the next moment it was in his hand. The axe felt right in his hands; it had the right weight and proportion. He tried putting his energy through it. It started to tremble when it reached a certain....


    Wait.. energy?


    He had used his energy in the astral roots. Wasn''t it said that there was a restriction on energy there? One could use their inner energy in the great spill, but could not in the monthly battleground. Could not outside in the demon lands, but could use in the salt bed. It was obvious that this restriction on energy was not for every place.


    He was sure that it was not the spirit of the astral roots that lifted this restriction for him. How is he able to use his energy? How could he be so distracted that he did not notice? He knew he had felt completely normal, regardless of the restrictions after a little while in the south side city, but he did not think it anything. That means it had nothing to do with entering the astral roots. He was always able to use his energy in the demon lands. Maybe because one could use their energy in the great spill, he completely forgot this detail. How could he not tell at all? Was there even a restriction on his energy at all? He tried to think back to when he stepped out of the salt bed. He remembered that he had felt the restriction and removed his attention from it later on. How long did the restriction on his energy hold? It is said that only when one reached the soul realisation stage can one use their internal energy regardless of the restrictions.


    He immediately got up. He needed to know. He stepped out of his cave and saw no one. The great spill looked much smaller than he remembered. He could see the entrance to the battleground from where he stood. The town was even nearer. This was not always so. Could it be as they had predicted? The great spill was collapsing into nothing? He decided he will not be waiting to find out. He had to leave the great spill. By now, everyone should have made their way to the gates. He wasted no time and did so too.


    When he arrived the gates, he saw cultivators walking through one by one.


    "We are leaving soon after we get out. Would you like to come with us?" Ed suddenly heard Ku Nam say beside him.


    "No. I have somewhere to be." Ed answered. He had not forgotten that he was supposed to find the Hell tree. He wanted to ask Ku Nam, but something told him he did not want this boy knowing where he was going.


    "Okay then. If you one day need to come to the Ku Clan, make sure to ask for me." he said and entered the gateway. Only after he had arrived at the other side, did he realized he had not asked for Ed''s name.


    Ed just looked at his leaving back and waited his turn. Soon, he stepped through the gate and left the great spill.

 70 To kill or not to kill 2

    Ed stared at the crowd before him, with a frown. He could see clan powers appearing and taking away their young ones, while other cultivator and even Elders waited on one side. He only needed look to understand what was happening. Those without clans no more had the luxury of staying back in the great spill with the elders and thereby, avoiding this hungry crowd. They will be questioned and have what ever treasure they had taken out of the astral roots taken from them. Ed sighed at this and turned away. He had no interest in this struggle and was no sure how he was going to handle this bunch of hungry wolves.


    Just as he turned away, he heard someone say, "That''s him." he looked toward the speaker and recognized this man. He had been watching him the moment he walked into the spill. The person e was talking to was an elderly man in grey robes. The man glared at Ed in anger.


    "Boy, did you kill my niece?" the man asked and Ed looked at him incredulously.


    "Does every one know who your niece is?" Ed asked and others snickered. Ku Nam saw the situation before he heard his name.


    "Young master Nam. Please come with us." he was called. A woman by the side looked at Ku Nam with care, before speaking up.


    "Do you wish to come with me, boy, I know you have a treasure bound to you. I can smell it''s anger in the air." the woman said. Everyone turned their attention to Ku Nam, who but glanced at her and continued walking towards his clansmen.


    "Do you know who I am boy, I am a messenger from the Jade phoenix alliance. You should just come with me." she said with a smile. Others that wanted to call out to Ku Nam to come to them, paused. The Jade phoenix alliance is here?


    "That is the only reason why I have not had you killed." Ku Nam said with his usual smile, but this sent a chill down her spine. She looked at the elders beside Ku Nam and his crew an d her eyes shrunk. She immediately calmed her heart and chuckled.


    "The Ku Clan. Forgive me for not noticing." she said and Ku Nam walked away, not before glancing at Ed, who had used the shift of attention from him, to walk away.


    "Young master, do you know that boy?" one of his clan elders asked.


    "Yes, why?" Ku Nam asked.


    "He is the one Lady Jian is interested in. the one she wants to kill Elder Hu for." he answered and Ku Nam smiled.


    "What a coincidence." he said and they all entered a portal and vanished.


    The Tze clan, who had turned away for a second to see the conversation between the Jade Phoenix alliance and the Ku Clan, looked back to find Ed no more stand where he was.


    "Boy, stop!" it was not the Tze clan elder that had spoken. Ed turned to see someone he did not recognize come out from the crowd.


    "Who are you?" Ed asked.


    "Hand over the Devil''s cage technique." the old man said dangerously. Ed almost sighed. Did he have a target on his back, that everyone wanted to harm him?


    "No." Ed said, and rotated his energy and activated the shifting space technique, appearing behind the crowd. People were confused at first, before they spotted him behind them.


    "How did he move?"


    "Blink? No it''s slower than blink."


    "He is one of those who came out of the astral roots, he should not be that high in cultivation."


    "How can someone use his energy inside the demon lands?"


    "Has the restriction lifted?" as these questions passed round, Ed was walking away. Seeing his calm back move further away, the Tze sect and the other elder grew angry.


    "I accept that you may be an anomaly, but you are still a youngster. Energy or not, you are not leaving this place alive." the Tze sect elder said and dashed towards Ed. Ed did not try to evade of blink away, he continued walking. As the Elder was about to touch him, he spun around with a sword in hand and descended upon the elder.


    At this moment, many were thinking that Ed had gone mad. Did he think he could fight the Tze sect elder?


    Ed''s sword could not be clearly seen. The elder could feel there was a sword coming towards him, but could not see it. His eyes shrunk at this. This skill, slicing the sky, cutting the earth! He retreated immediately, but Ed had no intention of letting him go. He rotated the shifting space technique and matched the elder''s retreating form.


    The Tze sect members panicked at the sight and rushed in to help the elder. Ed had taken them into consideration. As they hurriedly surrounded him, he increased his speed. The elder felt the sword enter him and a foreign energy rush into him. Panic. One could not describe the feeling that rushed through him.


    Ed did not wait to see his out come, as he lowered backwards, allowing the axes coming at him to slide above him. He immediately manifested two daggers from the Yhenxia sword, allowing the other sword to return into it, and slashed at the thighs of those whose axes had glided above him. All he needed was his energy to touch theirs.


    On the roof, Old Iba and Tie Nse were watching the fight.


    "Oh, he has improved." Tie Nse commended.


    "That''s him?" Old Iba said, "I thought you said he was a boy? He looks no older than twenty five." Old Iba said.


    "Still a boy in my eyes." Tie Nse said. He saw as Ed easily disposed of the Tze sect and frowned, "This is too easy for him, he is not gaining any experience with this little fight. Maybe I should help him out."


    "Huh? Why do you need to help him out if it''s too..." before Old Iba had finished speaking, Tie Nse had disappeared from his spot and now hovered in the air.


    Many were preoccupied with Ed, looking at him with incredulity. The other elder was just the same. Even though he was not as weak as those Tze sect, nor could they be compared to him; an elder of the Falcon sect, oneof the five great sects below the alliance, he could see that this boy was special.


    "Boy, how would you like to join my Falcon alliance as my disciple?" he asked Ed.


    "You are not worthy." Ed said so slowly, it struck the elder were it hurt.


    "You have the clan''s devil''s cage with you. Your only way out, is to become my disciple." the elder narrowed his eyes.


    "He already has a master. Boy, come." Tie Nse said, hovering in mid air. Many looked up at the person who had spoken. A soul realization being. This boy, using his energy in the demon lands is odd enough. They could not believe that there would be another person. If he was just using his energy, it would be a different thing. But he was also hovering in the air. There was no doubt, this was a soul realisation being!


    Ed glanced at Tie Nse for a second and turned to follow him. Everyone was stuck in place, especially the falcon sect elder who had just threatened Ed. Seeing Ed walking away, he hurriedly explained himself.


    "Senior, I was wrong, forgive me." he said and Tie Nse glanced at him coldly and turned away.


    "It''s patriarch Tie Nse of the heaven alliance." someone recognised him. Tie Nse continued moving, but Ed paused.


    "Doesn''t that mean this is his new disciple?" another said.


    "Using his energy in the demon lands, he is really as they say." Ed turned to the crowd coldly. His entire being suddenly turned dark releasing dark energy into the air. They all shivered at the look in his eyes. He rotated his energy and started making rapid hand signs.


    "Those hand signs." the falcon sect elder frowned, "He is activating the devil''s cage!"


    Tie Nse noticed the dangerous energy expanding and rushed out of the city with Old Iba and a boy.


    "Why are we leaving so fast?" Old Iba asked as Tie Nse grabbed him and left through the air. Just as they got outside the city, a shield expanded like a dome around the south side city.


    "What are you doing?" the falcon sect elder asked cautiously as the light of the sun was cut off from the city. This devil''s cage was really as one would imagine. It was a cage. How could this by learn this technique that even he had not truly understood to this extent? He practised this technique so he could somewhat see in the darkness. He could tell that Ed had executed it far beyond what he could ever do. If he knew that Ed had surrounded the entire city. He would have died on the spot


    "What is going on?"


    "Why can''t I see anything?"


    Tie Nse looked at the dark dome and could not see anything through it and sighed.


    "Where did he learn such a dark skill, taking the entire city even? Well, this level of fighting should give him some experience." Tie Nse said to Old Iba''s horror.


    Inside the city, Ed could see them all clearly.


    "You have seen my face. You can not leave." his voice echoed through the city, into their hearts and silence descended with fear as a friend.

 71 Ghost city

    Ed had long mastered the devil''s cage. This was a spatial technique that could bind people in a certain space, allowing only the user to move around at will. The first thing he did was to divide the cage into different levels. The first level only commoners were locked in. the second level held cultivators. He contemplated dividing the cultivators into groups, but felt he would not get a good fight by doing so. Leaving the commoners stuck in the dark, he allowed the light of the sun to enter the second level. It would not be much of a fight if those he was fighting could not see him.


    Outside the city, Tie Nse and Old Iba looked at the section of the city that suddenly had light. They could see through the dome into that side of the city.


    "He is crazy. You are crazy." Old Iba said solemnly.


    "He at least knows not to waste this opportunity I gave him. This is a chance for him to fight to his heart''s content." Tie Nse said.


    "Why did you go out there? You knew that it was necessary he kept his identity a secret, yet you still went out there." old Iba said.


    "Seeing how fast the astral roots competition ended, he probably had not fought to his fill. This is me helping him." Tie Nse said casually.


    "And if they kill him? He is still only a spirit picking sapling. Ability to use energy or not, they can kill him easily."


    "He must learn with his life on the line." Ti Nse said and Old Iba sighed, "This boy had done you wrong in a past life."


    Inside the city, Ed stared at the angry cultivators with a calm look in his eyes. He manifested a rope and a sword form the Yhenxia sword and faced them.


    "What do you intend to do?" someone from the Jade Phoenix alliance asked.


    "This skill is the devil''s cage from the falcon sect. He has learnt it to such a degree?" someone commented.


    "No one can leave the devil''s cage unless the owner of the cage dies. What do you mean by doing this?" the falcon sect elder asked.


    Ed did not bother to reply him. He immediately attacked the nearest person. He swung the leather rope , lashing unto the person''s neck and pulling towards him with force.


    Crack.


    One could hear the person''s neck break.


    "That rope and sword. It''s from the astral roots. It''s a divine level treasure. How could he get that much?" an elder almost at the soul realisation stage said in horror. Divine level treasures such as these were hard to counter, especially when they could not use their energy. Ed did not stop moving. He moved to the next person and attacked. By now, it had dawned on them, Ed wanted to kill them all.


    "You overestimate yourself." someone sneered and attacked.


    Ed countered him easily, blocking his incoming punch with his palm.


    Crack! Every one heard the sound of bones breaking.


    "Impossible! Elder brother is at the soul seeking stage!" someone said in disbelief.


    Ed did not stop moving. He swung the rope through the air and it moved with out a definite direction.


    Whak!


    The rope crackled through the air. As it hit someone, they lost an arm. Panic had started to break out.


    "Don''t let it touch you!" this was a divine treasure. Usually it would take long for one to train to handle this rope, but this devil before them, seemed to have mastered the rope and the sword with ease. Was this even fair?


    "This boy intends that we all die in here."


    "We must not fight him alone."


    "he is just a sapling, but this sapling defies reason."


    "without our energies, we must fight him together." they all seemed to understand that t was them against Ed and there was no way out of this cage without killing him.


    One of the elders looked up at the sky in the direction Tie Nse had gone and asked loudly, "Lord Nse, you do nothing when your disciple acts brazenly, continue to do nothing after we kill him." he declared.


    Tie Nse snorted at those words and kept silent. As if it was easy to kill this disciple of his. The heavens tried and fail, you know? Talk more of a little mortal like you.


    When the elder did not get a reply, the phoenix jade alliance elder narrowed her eyes at Ed''s form.


    "After he is dead, the jade phoenix alliance will come for compensation." she said to no one in particular.


    "Disciples, hear me! Attack together. Kill this little brat!" she ordered and the disciples attacked in a formation.


    Ed''s calm form glanced at them attacking, "Now you get the picture." he said as they reached him.


    He spun the rope through the air. He had not coated these weapons with his energy since he started. He had to kill them with pure might alone. He wished to fight till he could not move. He blinked before them, appearing as his fist descended unto their middle. They were fast enough to evade his incoming fist, letting it strike the earth.


    Boom.


    The earth gave way as a crater formed at it''s middle. No matter how fast they had escaped, they could not keep standing straight with the earth giving way beneath their feet. Ed ignored those lying inside the crater and attacked those outside it. His body moved swiftly lurching through the air and spinning right on time to deliver a kick to the jade phoenix elder. She blocked with her arm, and immediately regretted it.


    At the soul seeking stage, her bones had hardened beyond the hardness of Xuan Gold. Yet,...


    Crack!


    "Impossible!" she bellowed as she was flung a meter back.


    "You did not use any energy, how?" she asked after landing in a pile of earth. Her green robes now dirtied with dust.


    "Only an arm broke? your physical body is not the same at those in the great spill." Ed commented, "Fine. More powered then. Stand still; this next punch of mine will kill you."

 72 Ghost city 2

    "Only an arm broke? your physical body is not the same at those in the great spill." Ed commented, "Fine. More powered then. Stand still; this next punch of mine will kill you."


    The Jade Phoenix alliance elder almost vomited blood at his words. She should stand still? This boy was too infuriating.


    "Little Fu, hand over the turtle shell!" she ordered her disciple. The little girl saw her master''s sorry form and did not hesitate. She threw her a spatial ring, which the elder wore immediately. Ed blinked before her, just when she manifested a gold shield in front of her. Ed''s fist descended upon the shield and his bones cracked and muscles tore.


    He immediately retreated at this.


    "A divine treasure. I see I was not the only one to get something from the astral roots." Ed said. They all narrowed their eyes at his arm.


    "He is wounded! Good. Elder Ban, let us cooperate together." an elder suggested. He was the only one amongst them that was at the soul awakening stage.


    "How?" she asked.


    "Shield me. When he is close enough, I will attack with a divine weapon." he said.


    "Good. He will be coming at me again. Just time to when he strikes again." she said.


    "Okay."


    "He is healing fast." she said and he turned his attention to Ed''s arm that was healing so fast, many trembled.


    "Impossible." he said.


    "Every thing about this boy defies reason. If we had our energy, I''m not even sure we would win." she said.


    "Get ready, he is coming." he instructed.


    "Are you done planing your next move?" Ed asked the two who had been talking softly to each other. They would have used the mental communication to talk, but the devil''s cage cuts off all these.


    "Can you hold?" the elder asked Elder Ban.


    "No." she said. One of her arm was broken, and the other was numb from Ed hitting the shield. She used her remaining good arm to hook unto the shield. Several elders appeared behind her, including the falcon sect elder.


    "All I need is one opening. I will kill him." the elder said and the others nodded and supported Elder ban.


    It was a pitiable state. They had to go this far, just to handle a simple junior. Their actions made the younger generation understand that this was dangerous. This person calmly standing before them was dangerous.


    "We will help!" many took out their shields and blocked the Jade Phoenix alliance elder. They somewhat understood, they were only acting as human shield. But to them, they had to kill Ed. This was the only way that these elders could escape this situation and warn other powers of the kind of Devil Lord Nse was training.


    The number of shields cocooned around the elder made one sigh. All except Ed.


    Out side the city, Old Iba looked down at the scene with pity.


    "Your disciple has caused them to give up and put all hope on one final strike." he sighed.


    "He still may not get to fight to his heart content. They should just come at him together. Who will he gain any experience if they give up so soon?" Tie Nse said.


    "That is all you can say?" Old Iba looked at him incredulously.


    "What?" Tie Nse asked.


    "Great cultivators and elders of great powers are pushed to this pitiful state and you are only worried about how much experience he can gain?" Old Iba could not believe him.


    "Tsk it''s his fault for being to strong. This boy, he can not even drag out a fight so he can enjoy it more?" Tie Nse looked completely disappointed in his disciple.


    "He needs to learn to be less domineering. He should have used less strength so that the fight continues. I thought you did not have to teach such basic things." Tie Nse complained.


    "Only you would think of teaching his disciple to be shameless." Old Iba fumed.


    "He wasted all my good intentions." Tie Nse said.


    "I pity the powers down there. They were unlucky enough to meet you and your unreasonable disciple." Old Iba said, "The entire cultivation world has been shamed by you two master and disciple."


    "What shame? They should be honoured! Look down there. All powers working together for one cause; something that has never been seen in millennia. Even while people he is teaching them unity. This, I must learn from him." Tie Nse said.


    Ed calmly looked at the group before him.


    "Good. Stay perfectly still." he said and blinked backwards a few meters. Letting go of the rope, it disappeared back into the Yhenxia sword. He pulled all of his strength as he clenched his hand.


    They brazed themselves.


    He pulled back and blinked before the first layer of shields.

 73 Ghost city 3

    Using all his strength, Ed punched the first layer of human shields. They only felt as their body went up into the air. Their bones hurt and muscles torn from their place. Blood flowed.


    Retreating back, Ed prepared for the second punch.


    Ed Attacked again and this time, a clear path to elder ban was made. He retreated a second time. It looked to them as though he was mimicking a wild bull gaining momentum.


    "It is not the blink skill he is using to move." someone said.


    "His speed is purely from physical movement alone." another said.


    "This guy, is he human?"


    "He is mocking us by not using his energy."


    Ed retreated and prepared to attack again.


    This time, he was not stupid enough to rely on his physical strength alone. He felt his energy pulse in him. His knuckles cracked as his hand gripped into a fist and circulated a little of his energy to his fist. The elders tensed as though they knew what was coming. Elder Ban felt her form steadied by the elders behind her, while the elder beside her prepared to strike Ed the moment he is close enough.


    Ed stepped back, aimed and shot forward with incomprehensible speed.


    Crack!


    The sound of his form breaking through the air could not keep up with is body that had already crossed meters to appear before turtle shield.


    Grip!


    His muscles stretched and his body tensed.


    Bang!


    As Ed''s fist touched the turtle shell, a sonorous bang rang through the air. Pressure so hard, it pushed a wave forth descended from his fist. This wave flattened them so fast and strong, the elder could not break through to stab Ed.


    Blood.


    One could feel skin melt and bones crush to powder. It was like being hit by a falling star. There was no escape for any, even the mortals on the first level. His destructive and corrosive energy sipped into the air, stinging ones nose, eating through the barriers of the devil''s cage, exposing all to the destruction of Ed''s fist.


    Boom!


    The entire city caved into a deep crater.


    Outside the city, Old Iba almost swallowed his teeth.


    "How?" he asked.


    Tie Nse laughed at the scene. One could not tell if he was happy of sad. Black lines appeared on his face.


    "Why bother trying to teach him combat? This boy is too dangerous." he said.


    "You only just discovered now?!" Old Iba scolded, "Where did you find this boy?!"


    "Old Iba, I worry for my life....keke... is this boy even trainable?" Tie Nse said with a solemn laugh.


    "He is still not strong enough to fight you. Don''t forget, these guys all had their energy sealed." Old Iba said.


    "That''s beside the point. He must have used his energy with this last punch. Is this what all the combined energies can do? Is it safe to keep raising this boy?" Tie Nse asked. His expression held a hint of melancholy.


    "Oh? You suddenly care about the world? You allowed him to kill innocent people. You, yourself are not so good. If he turns evil. It will be because of the kind of teacher he got!" Tie Nse almost believed his words. But in the future, he came to understand the teacher had nothing to do with at all.


    "Not about the world, about me. Can I really be called his teacher in the future?" Tie Nse said.


    "It will get to a point when you will not be able to train him yes. He just has to survive till then." Old Iba aid solemnly.


    "I still don''t know his name." Tie Nse sighed and Old Iba frowned.


    "You still hold no shame."


    Tie Nse put down Old Iba and looked down at the city as the dust cleared. The city was silent. The dome was gone. Inside the large crater, the ruins of a once beautiful city lay around Ed. His calm eyes held no feeling as it looked round the destruction looking for survivors. He could tell no one survived. The silence was deafening.


    His heart did not even skip. His mind was blank. He held no regrets, no fear, no pain, no remorse. He was not sure when he begun to loose these bits of humanity, but it mattered not. It mattered not who died or lived. He looked up at Tie Nse in the sky. He felt nothing.


    After the group had left the city, visitors who came after saw ruins. Many could not fathom what had happened. Soon, news spread through out the demon lands of the city and many cultivators rushed over to see. Some had tried to enter the city. When they stepped foot into the city, a corrosive smell stung their nose. As they breathed in the air, it entered their body and caused havoc. They felt as their energy veins snap around their body and screams rang out through the city. Soon, they just fell dead.


    The ghost city, it was now called. You enter the city and leave as a ghost.

 74 To stand at the top 1

    Jia Lin stood at the top of the mountain, bathing in the sunlight. He could feel the worshipping gaze of the girl just by the corner. He loved this.


    "Brother Lin, congratulations on completely learning the thousand swords skill." she said.


    He did not bother to glance at her, much less respond.


    At early spirit merging, he had represented the sage empire in the Godhand meet, fighting his way to fifth place. Being only the only spirit merging cultivator in top ten, he had impressed the crowd and Godhand gate elders. It has only been one year since that day. Since then, he had entered the Godhand gate as a core disciple and gained the recognition of the gate master, who took him in as his disciple.


    Ten years had passed since he stood in the valley and told Ed that he was too old to join the emperor sage academy and in those ten years, he had long forgotten who Ed was.


    Jia Lin was no more a young boy of thirteen. He was now twenty-three and looked it too. His tall frame and broad shoulders looked elegant in his white garbs, with his long black hair tied back. It was no wonder the girl behind him stared so much infatuation. This was a common look on the female disciples in the gate. No matter how much they yearned for him, they were not as beautiful as lady Jian. And he knew that with her background, she would be just as powerful today.


    He turned from the beautiful scene before him, and started to descend the mountain.


    "Let''s go." he said.


    The girl nodded and followed him to descend, not minding his cold attitude. He had always been like this since he entered the gate, this only made him more mysterious and appealing in the eyes of the female disciples.


    She had been here to help him train for the past two months. Being an expert in a high level energy stabilizing skill, the gate master had her follow him into seclusion. As he practised the thousand swords technique, she was to help his energy stay stable, so as not to be drawn in to the skill too long. This job, she took happily, because it meant spending long days and nights with him.


    Jia Lin made his way to the gate master''s residence and was let in without identification. The girl behind him stay back as he made his way into the inner courtyard. Walking before door, he knelt and kowtowed to someone inside.


    "Master, I have returned." he said.


    "Come in." a cold voice said from inside the room.


    He did as told, and entered to meet an old man whose entire hair on his face, till his beards and long goatee were white.


    "Master I have completely mastered the thousand sword skill." he knelt before the old man.


    "Don''t kneel on ceremony, sit." the gate master said and he complied, sitting in lotus fashion.


    "You have done me proud. Learning any high level technique in two months is something to brag about. Learning the alliance patriarch''s technique in two months is even more outstanding. You broke the record of learning it in six months." the gate master said.


    "Thank you master." Jia Lin answered.


    "You must immediately enter the Fire tower to increase your strength. You will be leading the team to the heaven alliance meet." the gate master said.


    "Why did you change your mind? You had said it would be years till I can qualify to join." Jia Lin asked.


    "The bar of qualification has been lifted. Usually only those from the late spirit awareness can join, but there has been some changes in the alliance. Those below can now have a pre competition battle. Those with most potential can join the alliance meet." the gate master said.


    "Why is this so? Hat happened in the alliance?"


    "The patriarch got a disciple." the gate master said, and watched Jia Lin''s expression.


    "I see." Jia Lin always heard stories of this alliance patriarch. The youngest in history. He is not even hundred and is at spirit realization. Many have yearn to be his disciple. To learn under such a legend. Even he is not immune to such yearning. Hearing that someone got lucky, he was not phased. It was just luck. If he too met the patriarch, he would get picked. He was confident in his ability.


    "I know what you are thinking, it is not so." the gate master said, as though he saw right through him.


    "The patriarch has not taken in a disciple since he became the patriarch forty years ago. Many said it was normal as he was still young and had time to train a successor, but it appears, it is not so. All the young geniuses were probably not worthy in his eyes." the gate master said and Jia Lin was skeptical.


    "Rumour that he got a disciple surfaced not long ago. It is said he had gotten this disciple ten years ago. He chuck the boy in the Baju Valley and the boy came out." seeing as Jia Lin was not moved, the gate master explained.


    "The Baju Valley has a special atmosphere. No one, even the great leaders of the nine powers and their protectors can survive in that place for more than a day. Because of this, it has been used as an execution ground for as long as I know." the gate master''s words caused Jia Lin to frown.


    "It was said that the patriarch put him inside and he stayed there for ten years and walked out of the valley unscratched. It is said that he is only at the spirit picking stage. Because of his existence, the other powers are afraid of the alliance. Our patriarch is already and oddity. Now, they hear that he is training another odd one. Many are cautious." the gate master said. Jia Lin became solemn at this. Just mastering this technique in two months is special, but the patriarch only likes oddities.


    "I did not tell you this to break your spirit. I told you this to raise it. Now that the patriarch has made it clear how special one has to be to be his disciple, many want to send up their odd balls to measure up with his disciple, maybe, catch his attention." the gate master advised.


    "That is why the bar for participating in the alliance meet has fallen." Jia Lin said in realisation.


    "Yes. Since the beginning of the alliance, the alliance meet has been a place were young ones gain the patriarch''s attention. But since the patriarch took power, he only came and watched like a game and left without care for the potential displayed on the stage. Now, many think he worries not about your cultivation level, but how odd you are. You need to work hard. You may be outstanding here, but al powers under the heaven alliance are eligible to participate in the alliance meet. With the bar lifted, many will bring out their hidden cards." the gate master said.


    "I will work hard." Jia Lin bowed

 75 To stand at the top 2

    In a hidden realm accessible only from the Ku mountain, the Ku clan chief and his elders sat in a humid hall. The hall looked something like a cave. The ceiling was high and the walls were wet. If one listened over the occasional crackle of lightening as it run down the walls from the ceiling, one could hear the slight sound of water dripping from the walls.


    "The Demon race are becoming more active as of recent." an elder said.


    "We have found several properties in the south under their influence. This is twice as much in one month than has been in eight decades." another said.


    "I did not call this meeting for the troubles of the Demon race. In the past month, several of the nine powers have been attacked." the clan chief said, his muscular frame flexing as he talked.


    "As for that matter, the Jade phoenix alliance seems to be the first to have been attacked. Even our Ku lightening forest was not spared." an elder said.


    "Who would have such courage? Who would dare anger the entire cultivation world?" an elder asked.


    "You know who." someone said. This caused the old men to go silent for a while.


    "He would not dare!" an elder fumed.


    "Is there anything Tie Nse would not dare do?" the clan chief asked.


    "Even his Heaven alliance was hit too. It may not be him." someone said.


    "He completely ignores his alliance most of the time. It is possible he just walked in an took what he wanted without asking." another countered.


    "That is not why I called you all here." the clan chief spoke at last, "We need to know exactly what was taken from each of the powers and what he plans to do with them."


    "He just got a new disciple and is now doing this. If it is him, we need to be careful."


    "All these things he has stolen, could it be a weapon, an inscription ingredient or a pill?" one asked.


    "The greatest inscriptionist is one of our own. The forge has not made any move to bring Mae Nim from exile. This kind of ingredient, only he could handle it. The only loose end is the cottage. The cottage master is the greatest alchemist and he is an enemy of Patriarch Tie Nse. Is it possible he would work for him?" someone asked.


    "No one has seen the cottage master the past month." another said.


    "The Jade phoenix alliance may have once thought that it was a personal attack to Gate Lady Fulren''s son, but seeing how other powers have been attacked too, there is no way they would believe it now."


    "They probably think as we do. This will make them more interested in Tie Nse and his disciple." the clan chief said.


    "His disciple, we can probably get more information about him soon." someone said.


    "The Heaven alliance meet." another muttered.


    "Many eyes will be watching the meet."


    "The Heaven alliance usually invites the nine powers to come watch, but this has always been just a cutesy. With recent development, even if they fail to invite other powers, they will come." the clan chief said.


    "This kind of situation, we cannot send just some ground''s keeper." one of them suggested.


    "True." they all nodded to this.


    "I will go." the clan chief said and they all froze.


    "Clan chief, this level of matter does not need you making an appearance yourself. Just one of us is okay." someone protested. They all thought like this. How high was their clan chief, a little Heaven alliance meet does not warrant his attention.


    "Tie Nse will come. This event is one he has never missed, no matter how much he ignores his alliance. This is why the leaders of the nine powers will come as well. A confrontation is inevitable. Non of you will be able to handle him." the clan head said.


    He was right. Thinking about it, they understood this point. If the leaders of the nine powers will be coming themselves, sending them, will be putting them in an odd position. They will be unable to talk in the midst of such powers. If a fight breaks, they will be unable to stand their ground with the rest.


    "Clan chief, there is something else." a skinny bald man broke the silence, "There is word that the south side city in the Demon lands has become like the Baju Valley."


    His words caused those around to look at him in horror.


    "How is this possible?" someone asked.


    "Young master Ku Nam just returned from the Demon lands with an artifact. He said that the astral roots have died. Could this be a side effect of that?" someone asked.


    "If so, why did it not affect all three cities." another countered.


    "A subordinate of mine that went there to confirm this, said it was just like the Baju valley and kills even faster than the famed valley." the bald elder said.


    "Tie Nse gets a new disciple, he puts the boy in the Baju valley, the boy stays for ten years and comes out unscratched. Since then, no one is capable of entering there. All our criminals can no more be sent there since our keys have become useless. Now, another Baju valley has been created in the south side city. Even if that little boy, Tie Nse, swears that this is not related to him and that disciple of his, I will not believe it. And I dare say none of the nine powers will too. It will be an interesting Heaven alliance meet." the clan chief said.

 76 Heaven alliance meet 1

    Ed stood in a misty forest.


    The ground was soft and dark. The trees were dead and black as sooth. The mist caused a tide of fear to rush into his mind. He hated mist. He would not be here if he had not decided to walk the mist. If not for that oracle, if not for those rippers, if not for the mist, he would still be a prince back home with his mother and father. His father, yes. If he had not found his father, if he did not owe her. Her. The quest. His mind shook. Tension filled his bones.


    Behind him, Tie Nse frowned. He and the rest and not stepped through the threshold into the dome of mist. The mist was caused by the hell tree. It had the same effect on cultivators as the Baju Valley. It was only Ed that could walk in there. He saw and Ed froze and felt that something was off with the boy. This boy never showed any expression when faced with different situations. What could possibly break his calm?


    "Boy, what is wrong?" he asked.


    The quest, yes. A bit of sanity returned to Ed at the thought of his quest. At the thought of her. he must leave this place and go back to save her. She needs him; he convinced himself. With this, his emotions stabilized and his eyes steeled as he looked back at the group.


    "Why are we here?" he asked.


    Tie Nse, who sighed a relief when he noticed that Ed''s calm had returned, answered; "This place is like the Baju Valley, thick with energy, absorb-able energy."


    "Absorb-able?" Ed asked.


    "Boy, you had turned the south side city into another Baju Valley. Unlike the valley that is filled with energies that raises ones cultivation, the south side city''s air is filled with remnants of your attack power. Your last punch is still hanging in the air, killing any that enters the city." Old Iba replied.


    "I can fee the thick energy here, but old pervert, it is nothing on the scale of the Baju Valley." Ed said.


    "Ha! He even calls you old pervert!" Old Iba laughed, "Boy, I like you."


    "When you rise in cultivation, the energy you need becomes less of the wild and chaotic kind, but the pure and steady kind. You have been in the spirit picking stage too long, I need you to level up." Tie Nse ignored the laughing Old Iba and explained to Ed.


    "Didn''t you say he had just entered the spirit picking stage?" Old Iba frowned.


    "I have never worried about you levelling up. You must understand, as long as the energy you need is there, you can level up fast, unlike normal cultivators that take time to gain a certain level of power. The problem I have is getting the kind of energy you need to level up fast, and training you with enough skills to match your power. You can not have power and be unable to fight with it." Tie Nse explained.


    "You need the Hell tree to break through. The energies here are purer than in the Baju Valley. It should help you reach the spirit awakening stage. I just worry we may run out of places to get such energies to help you breakthrough." Tie Nse said.


    "This Hell tree can help me break though?" Ed asked.


    "This mist is a sharp 360 radius around with the Hell tree at it''s center. You must cultivate under it." Tie Nse nodded.


    "What is he here for?" Ed pointed at Old Iba.


    "Remember when you were attacked by tribulation lightening and it helped stabilize your cultivation? We intend to re-enact it." Tie Nse said.


    "I am an alchemist, boy. Your pervert master contracted me to make you a pill to force tribulation lightening to stay as much as we want, not receding no matter how it tries." Old Iba''s words caused Sung Sung standing a bit away from the group, freeze.


    He is aware that this man in the mist is the legendary disciple of the patriarch that everyone has been talking about. Patriarch Tie Nse had appeared out of no where and taken him away. All he knows is that the patriarch had attacked the Jade Phoenix alliance and everyone thought it was him. Sung Sung did not really mind this, as he had gotten his revenge and was given the opportunity to join the Heaven Alliance.


    Since following the patriarch and Cottage master Iba, he had seen a lot of things. What he saw at the south side city the little time the patriarch was holding him up, was too much to comprehend. Now, he was hearing about holding back tribulation lightening? What kind of training was this?


    "The Hell tree is not far from here. Go and begin." Tie Nse said.


    "And the pill?" Ed asked.


    "He will make it while you cultivate. When you are about to breakthrough, I will return." Tie Nse said.


    "Return?" Ed asked, "Where are you going?"


    "The Heaven Alliance. This is an obligation I must keep." Tie Nse said.


    "And if I breakthrough before you return?" he asked.


    "You took ten years to break into the spirit picking stage. Though with the contemplation technique I gave you, it will be much shorter. The Heaven Alliance meet will at most last two weeks. I will be back before you breakthrough." Tie Nse said.


    "Which one is the Hell tree?" Ed asked.


    "The Hell tree is said to be the only thing that blooms in the mist. You will know it when you see it." Old Iba answered and Ed turned away from the group and walked deeper into the mist.


    Tie Nse glanced at Old Iba meaningfully, "Start making the pill. I suspect he will breakthrough the moment I return." he said.


    "You be careful. All nine powers know you are going to be at the meet. Things are bound to get complicated." Old Iba said and Tie Nse sighed. He blinked in front of Sung Sung and grabbed his shoulder before vanishing with him.

 77 Heaven alliance meet 2

    Tie Nse appeared in the Heaven alliance city. The city stood at the base of a mountain, at the entrance to a mountain range. He did not immediately make his way to the alliance, he instead melted into the crowd with Sung Sung at his side.


    The Heaven alliance meet was a competition open to public viewing, this was why it was not a shock that the city was flooded with people. Not only does the alliance make profit from the show, they can showcase their younger generation to the world; allowing them to gain fame and standing in the cultivation community, and allowing the other eight powers to see the potential of their younger generation.


    Tie Nse entered a reserved room in an inn unnoticed. The owner was a friend that always kept this room empty for him. The heaven alliance meet was officially beginning the next morning, so he decided to wait till then to make his appearance.


    Inwardly, he sighed. This was the consequence of having a disciple like his. He needed to be careful, even in his own territory. He did not believe for one moment, that the other powers were not looking out for him.


    He turned to Sung Sung, who he had ignored all this time, "Boy." he called.


    "Patriarch." Sung Sung immediately went on his knees.


    "Already calling me Patriarch, you have accepted to enter the Heaven alliance then." Tie Nse said, taking a seat before the boy.


    "Then you must also understand that I take the safety and privacy of my disciple seriously." he said gravely, causing Sung Sung to freeze.


    "I would not dare tell anyone!" Sung Sung swore.


    "You would not have a choice in the matter. Someone of the soul seeking stage can search your memory easily and see what you saw." Tie Nse said and Sung Sung tensed.


    "Come closer." Tie Nse said and the boy gulped.


    "I will not hurt you. Your special constitution is one that would be a shame to go to waste." Tie Nse said and Sung Sung visibly relaxed. He hurriedly crawled before Tie Nse with more courage. Tie Nse placed a hand on his head and began to lock his memories. A flash of pain tore through Sung Sung''s skull.


    Crying out in pain, he doubled back and fell. It took a few seconds for his vision to return. Searching his memory, he could still remember his encounter with the patriarch''s disciple.


    "What happened?" he asked in confusion. He had thought the patriarch meant to wipe his memory. Seeing that it was intact, he was confused.


    "Wiping your memory will not work well. The Ke Clan have a way to recreate lost memories. I have tied your memory to your life strings. If anyone tries to get it, two of you will join the dead together." Tie Nse said and Sung Sung froze. Still, he could not find a reason to complain. He had seen what happened to those at the south side city. He already understood that they had shown him mercy by letting him live.


    "Thank you for sparing my life, Patriarch." he bowed.


    "I gave you a token with my emblem. Take it to council head Si. Tell him I wish that he take you in as his disciple." Tie Nse said and Sung Sung kowtowed and left.


    He walked out into the crowded street, melting into the crowd and making his way towards the Heaven alliance grounds. He stepped out of the crowded city into a restricted section. People seemed to avoid this area, no one daring to pass.


    "Halt!" he heard a guard say. He looked up to find two of them on the guard post.


    "The Heaven alliance meet is tomorrow. Come back then." one of them said.


    "I have come by order of the patriarch." Sung Sung flashed the token at the guards and they glanced at each other briefly.


    "Do you think anyone can just make such a claim?" Sung Sung could tell that they could not recognize the token in his hand. This made him sigh in frustration. Did the patriarch use this emblem at all?


    "it is better that you report this before sending me away. You already know the patriarch will make an appearance soon. Why would I lie. Patriarch told me to come find council head Si. If I am telling the truth, have you thought of the consequences of sending me away?" Sung Sung said and they glanced at each other again, before giving him a deep look. One of the guards nodded and the other rushed inside to make a report.


    Sung Sung waited a while before the guard returned with a grey haired man in tow.


    "Show me the token." Council head Si said and Sung Sung flashed it again.


    Council Head Si smiled and looked at him deeply, "Where is the Patriarch?"


    "Are you Council head Si?" Sung Sung asked and the man nodded hurriedly. At his confirmation, Sung Sung fell to his knee and bowed deeply.


    "Master." he said and Council head Si paled. He felt a rush of anger overwhelm him. The Patriarch had done it again! His mind fumed and he felt the need to cry, ''Patriarch, can you stop sending me disciples? If not that I cunningly distribute them to the other elders, my mountain would have been crowded!''

 78 Heaven alliance meet 3

    The sun had yet to truly settle in the sky, yet one could see a sea of people moving in one direction. The gates of the Heaven Alliance arena was wide open, allowing a stream of people to enter after showing their bought tickets or invitations. At the middle of the arena, five large stages had been built for the event. All seemed to not care about the stages. Their voices did not sing the praise of anticipation for the young hoping to show their skills on the stage. All eyes instead looked to one spot on the stands. This spot was where Tie Nse was expected to sit.


    At the moment, only few elders had made an appearance. Special seats for the other expected eight powers were already filled. Several Heaven alliance outer elders took on the job of showing theses guests their seats. After fulfilling their jobs, they ran back to report that the leaders of the nine powers themselves, had arrived. There was tension as this information spread.


    A heavy gong sounded and five elders accompanied Council head Si to take their seats. Amongst them, was Elder Di, whose hawk eyes scanned the stands before sitting. The council head greeted most people with a nod before sitting. He was too tensed to make proper conversations as he looked at the patriarch''s seat.


    It was normal for Tie Nse to arrive late to this event. It was so normal, they would usually start without him, then he would make an appearance half way. It was the patriarch''s way and no one truly feared if he would stay back one of the events. He always came. But this time, the heaven alliance truly feared he would skip this meet.


    With the leaders of the other eight powers present, the Heaven alliance would be at a disadvantage if their patriarch decided not to come.


    "Begin." The elders heard a familiar voice echo through the arena. With excited eyes, the Heaven alliance trained their eyes on the form of their patriarch. No one was sure when he appeared, he just did. Taking a seat after speaking, Tie Nse eyes scanned the arena. The entire filled arena was silent as many looked around the patriarch as though looking for something, or better yet, someone.


    Tie Nse''s eyes narrowed at this, knowing very well who they were looking for. They had hoped he would come with his disciple.


    "If the meet is not taking place, say. This old man has things to do." he scolded the dazed elders. His words woke a lot of people up, causing somewhat of a wave of disappointment through the crowd.


    Council head Si cleared his throat in embarrassment and stood to address the crowd.


    "Welcome to the heaven alliance meet. We welcome, all guests." as he said those words, he could not help but look at the VIP section of the stands.


    "This meet is unlike the rest held in past years. Changes have been made to it''s structure. Like announced, late spirit awareness cultivators can participate in the meet by passing the preliminary stage. In this meet, talent can trump strength. Those who wish to participate in the preliminaries, step on the stage." Council head si said, then sat back down. He turned his head to meet Tie Nse''s cold eyes.


    "What preliminaries?" he asked.


    "It was agreed upon by the council." was all Council head Si could answer.


    "They wish to see if their little disciples will please me? How did they come up with this idea?" Tie Nse asked and he gulped. The elders listening looked away as though this did not concern them.


    "It is said that your disciple is only a spirit picking junior but his special constitution caught your attention." Council Head Si answered.


    Tie Nse looked at all who got on the five stages and frowned.


    "So, that is why." he said.


    The officiating Elder for the meet got a nod from the council head and went ahead to introduce the judges for the competition. The five elders were equal judges, the council head had the power to pick independently and the patriarch could choose at will. With that, the competition started.


    On the VIP stands, sat the Ku clan. The Ku clan chief had come with four elders and his nephew, Ku Nam. Amongst the elders was a very pale Elder Hu. When he saw Tie Nse appear, he immediately recognized him. His blood froze causing him to immediately pale.


    "Impossible!" he exclaimed. This caused his clansmen and some of the Jade phoenix alliance sitting close to look at him. Lowering his voice, he blocked with his energy, prying ears.


    "Elder Hu?" the clan chief raised a brow. Seeing that the sound was locked in, he knew the man had something to say.


    "That person who just came, he is the Heaven alliance Patriarch?" Elder Hu asked and one of his clansmen nodded.


    "I know who the Heaven Alliance Patriarch''s disciple is. If it is that boy, it was I that handed him to the patriarch." his words caused the Ku clansmen to pale.

 79 Heaven alliance meet 4

    "I know who the Heaven Alliance Patriarch''s disciple is. If it is that boy, it was I that handed him to the patriarch." his words caused the Ku clansmen to pale.


    The clan chief''s expression turned dark.


    "Speak!" he ordered.


    With this, Elder Hu switched to mental communication to explain.


    "If my thoughts are correct, this disciple of his, is the boy Lady Jian followed around in the Ou clan valley, refusing to come home for fear of leaving his side." he said and the elders glanced at each other.


    "I had once reported to the clan that the Lady refused to return because she wanted to remain at some boy''s side. To get her to return, I thought it would be best if he just left without her. I had met the alliance patriarch at an inn. He was drunkenly complaining about how disciples were hard to find." they could all tell where this story was going. Seeing their dark look, Elder Hu hurriedly explained.


    "I looked at his cultivation and could only see that he was at the spirit awareness stage! I just told him of the competition going on in the valley and if he was interested in finding disciples, he should go and watch. He took interest in the boy and took him away, allowing Lady Jian to return back to the clan." he explained.


    "That is why cousin wants to kill you. You took away her love interest." Ku Nam chuckled. He was the only one at the moment that seemed to have the heart to smile. The rest of them looked as through they had picked up a rock and dropped on their own foot.


    Such a good youngster. The kind that made them much more weary of the Heaven alliance. The kind that added to the monster Tie Nse, to raise the Heaven alliance till they had to think twice before acting against them. It was only a matter of time before the two clans fall under the Heaven alliance. And this young genius was handed to the opposition by them.


    The clan chief was so angry, he could not breathe. The look on the Ku clan members'' faces caused the Jade Phoenix alliance beside them to frown. They had heard when Elder Hu exclaimed. The rest that was said was spoken in secrecy and mental communication. Seeing their reaction, Lady Mi frowned at this, but looked away. It was not her place to ask. The clans and the alliance were on different levels.


    "Young master Nam, you have met the boy." Elder Hu said and Ku Nam frowned.


    "He was the one you were speaking with when we came to pick you up a the south side city."


    a cold face flashed passed Ku Nam''s mind.


    "Him." he said thoughtfully.


    The rest of the clansmen waited for him to continue, but he did not.


    "Uncle, you must never make it known that we know who he is, especially to the Heaven alliance." Ku Nam said seriously.


    "Why? This information gives us an upper hand." the clan chief''s frown deepened.


    "If his disciple is who I am thinking about, there is a high chance he is the one that caused the south side city to descend to such a state." his words caused them to tense up.


    "I''m thinking, no one has ever seen him, or seen him and known it was him. Even in the great spill, no one alive truly saw how he fought. Those that were there, were too busy running away. Yet, he had killed thousands of cultivators. If Elder Hu coming to pick me, revealed that we were from the Ku clan, there is a high chance those that died in the city recognized the Heaven alliance patriarch and in turn, him." Ku Nam explained.


    "You are saying that to keep his disciple a secret, Tie Nse turned that place into a ghost city and could the same to us?" the clan chief saw Ku Nam''s point.


    "Think about it, Uncle. Since this person appeared in the cultivation world, he did something to the Baju valley, an don''t forget the rumours of his intense spirit picking. He appeared in the great spill and the astral roots dried up. It is highly possible that he caused the matter in the south side city." Ku Name explained.


    "You think he caused the drying of the astral roots too?" the clan chief''s face turned worse. What kind of entity was this boy? It would have been fine if he was theirs, but he is not!


    "It did not occur to me before that all that happened in the astral roots could have been related to him. Now that I know who he is, I am eighty percent sure that he caused the astral roots to dry." he said and they all sucked in a breath.


    "When he was living in a certain section of the great spill, the astral veins will suddenly dry up in that section. If my guess is right, not only did he dry up the astral roots, he got the most benefit from there. If so, his master must have come to pick him up, to prevent these benefits from falling into the hands of others. If so, some people must have recognized the patriarch. With all this in mind, his disciple caused the ghost city incident with his own hands." he explained. His words convinced all of them thoroughly. Especially since he is the only one that had met the boy after Tie Nse took him as his disciple.


    "Before we understand this boy and what he is capable of, we must not let him find out that we know of him!" the clan chief had made his decision, "Elder Hu, leave at once! If you could recognise that Tie Nse boy, he could recognize you too!"


    Elder Hu complied and vanished at once using a teleportation talisman.


    Just as he vanished, Tie Nse''s eyes found it''s way to where the Ku clan sat and they all tensed.

 80 Heaven alliance meet 5

    The five stages on the ground shook as it rose up into the sky. As it elevated, one could see small chains dragged up from the earth from all it''s sides of the stages into the sky.


    "You have one burning incense stick on time to stand on the ground again." the officiating elder said, "How you reach the ground is completely up to you. The winners and those who will be eligible to participate in the meet will be pulled from those on the ground."


    most of the contestants immediately understood what the elder''s words meant. One of them was Jia Lin. By his side stood Heavenly Rain, his master''s daughter. He glanced at her to see if she understood the elder''s words, but her cold face held no change.


    "You must not hurry to get down." he advised and she sent him a sidelong glance.


    She had always held herself above all others. Even though her father wished that she marry Jia Lin and dual cultivate with him, she felt he was beneath her. someone like her could only truly be compatible with a true dragon like the young master of the Heaven alliance, Di Wong.


    Her anger towards Jia Lin was more hooked on the fact that he did not see her as anything. Not a true power or true beauty. Rumour has it that met someone more beautiful than she was. While he defiled female disciples of the gate, he dared to say such words.


    Looking away from him, she saw that some had directly jumped down. For some reason, the stage that was not much higher than fifty feet, felt much higher when falling. Many panicked at the sudden change, they felt and broke a few bones.


    Some tried to use the chains to climb down, but the chains were a trap too. The chains that seemed harmless had strong lightening coursing through it. If one listened well, they could hear the chains slightly buzz.


    She suddenly had an understanding. Jumping down normally was impossible. The gravity around the stage was much stronger, making a fifty foot jump more dangerous.


    Deciding on her next actions, she gathered her energy on her feet and stepped off the stage. Unlike those that tried this, she did not fall. Her feet settled in the air as though she had walked unto steady ground, allowing her to descend as though walking down a staircase.


    The Godhand gate master smiled at this.


    "She is combining mental energy with strong mental strength. A mental energy cultivator able to make such stable qi waves to this level, she is wasted on the Heaven alliance." the person that spoke was the Ke clan chief. Everyone knew that the Ke clan were mostly a clan of mental energy cultivators, so his words, no one could dispute.


    Seeing her go down that way, someone had an idea to use his flying sword. He stepped on the sword and flew down with ease. Seeing him succeed, many followed suit.


    Seeing them, Jia Lin snorted. It was not reaching the ground that mattered, it was how you reached the ground. Taking one last glance at Heavenly Raine, stepping down gracefully, looking like an immortal fairy and causing many to stare, he decided to descend.


    Placing his hand behind his back, he stepped off the stage. His body seemed as though a feather in the wind and descended with careless grace. He did not sink to the ground under the gravity as one thought he would, but glided down.


    "One with the world!" someone exclaimed.


    This was someone from the sword sect. They held great pride in their sword techniques and were unrivalled in the cultivation world for a long time. One day, Tie Nse appeared and created a sword technique that if one practised till the last form, would be able to attain ''one with the world''.


    This technique is closely guarded in the heaven alliance sect that the sword sect could only grind their teeth in anger. They trained their eyes on his form descending, not wanting to miss one moment.


    Jia Lin expected the eyes of everyone to be one him, bathing him with admiration. He had completely learned the patriarch''s own technique. The arena was silent. Making him wonder if they had been shocked too much.


    When he looked up at the crowd, he noticed that no one was looking at him any more. Not even his master was giving him a look of approval. His master''s face was odd as it looked to be stuck in a shocked expression.


    He frowned at this. Who could be possibly more outstanding than him at this moment?


    He followed the eyes of the crowd and looked in the direction of their attention. His face could not help to distort, changing to one of utter shock.

 81 Heaven alliance meet 6

    Seeing his disciple and daughter descend with ease, showcasing their skills, the Godhand gate master smiled with pride. He could not help looking in the patriarch''s direction to see his reaction.


    "Don''t be proud too soon, Gate master Ma." the person who spoke was seated beside the Godhand gate master, his eyes filled with scorn. He was the Earthbound gate master.


    "Speak when you can lift you little head with pride as well, Gate master Nti" he replied to the words easily. Even though they were all the heaven alliance, everyone knew that the Godhand gate and the Earthbound gate always competed against each other. This started a long time ago, when the last heaven alliance patriarch was at his prime of five hundred years of age. He was an odd old man with an odd sense of humour. He believed that the earth and the heavens don''t mix, one was always trying to show his superiority, so he replicated this with the Godhand gate and the Earthbound gate by making two enemies gate masters of the two gates. Since then, the two had never seen eye to eye.


    Instead of replying to Gate master Ma''s words, Gate master Nti smirked and nodded at the first stage. Just that moment, silence took over the arena.


    Gate master Ma looked in that direction and his face froze.


    "Impossible!" he exclaimed.


    At this time, a young boy hovered in mid air. There was a buzz in the air that made ones hair stand in the wrong direction. Not only hairs were moving in the wrong direction, everything else too. Drinks spilling from cups flowed the wrong way; up instead of down.


    Crack!


    The stages started to descend slowly, cracking as though trying to resit the power causing it''s descent.


    "Magic?" someone said.


    "Idiot! Magic are things of little children in villages." another countered.


    "Then what? This is not cultivation."


    "Yes," another said, " I have seen many cultivators, what he is doing can not be it!"


    Despite the whispering and confusion, the more experienced eyes had a better explanation. One they never thought they would have the opportunity to see in their life.


    "Energy manipulator!" one said.


    "Impossible, they are said to be extinct!" another exclaimed.


    Since long known, cultivators used the energy around them by absorbing it into their cores but never using them directly from the atmosphere. The higher the cultivation level, the higher the martial skill one could execute. Of course, with high enough cultivation, the body could break limitations like that of flight. But like the legends of Godeaters, energy manipulators were believed to be myth, until a few centuries ago when an extensive document about them emerged. People finally understood that it was not that they were myths, they had just gone extinct.


    The other eight powers were amazed at first, but the meaning of this finally sank into their brains. The heaven alliance has another monster to add to it''s collection. As though having Tie Nse was not enough, Toe Nse went out and got a monster disciple. Now, before their eyes another had emerged. This was bad!


    Those that felt the pressure most, were the Jade Phoenix alliance. Many without understanding may think that both alliances were on the same level, but Lady Mi knew that others knew that they could not compare to the Heaven alliance. She knew that Tie Nse''s appearance in the cultivation world as the successor of the heaven alliance had pushed the Jade phoenix alliance back a step.


    This man that had reached soul realization before striking hundred was the first to do it in all known history. As if that was not enough, they were blind-sided by his monster of a disciple, putting a lot of pressure on them toproduce a young genius of their own. But now, could they keep up with the level at which the Heaven alliance was acquiring geniuses?


    The contestants saw the stages descend and hurried to jump down before it touched the ground. Many thought that as long as they descended on their own, they had passed this test.


    One incense stick of time was officially done. The Judges tried to calm their excited minds and pick out those who were entering the meet. They whispered and glanced at Tie Nse, hoping to see his reaction. They did not understand that Tie Nse was already a lazy man who had picked up a disciple to expensive to train. He pretended to not see how special the boy was, keeping a blank face and looking ahead. One troublesome disciple is enough for his life time. He officially swore within him, that he had retired being a master after taking up his disciple. Other people can train him.


    If the elders knew what he was thinking at this moment, they would have fainted. They would have wondered how they got such a lazy Patriarch.


    Elder Di felt threatened by this new development. He had agreed to allowing those of the younger generation join the meet because he wanted the patriarch to see that his son was the true dragon even amongst the wealth of talents. He was happy his son was not here. He was afraid that such a person appearing before him would cause to much damage to his mental state.


    The Judges made their decision and handed a list to the officiating elder. The elder handed the list to an attendant who read out the names. The list revealed that the boy was called Nti Anem, when he stepped out from the crowd to join the winners. Many eyes followed him as he moved, looking at him as though he was a strange animal. There were some who were unhappy that their names had not been called.


    "We reached the ground too. Why were we not called. Those who reach the ground pass, is what was said." one of them asked.


    When those words were said, many sighed and shook their heads at this. Even his master in the crowd felt ashamed to have such a student.


    "I never said that reaching the ground means you have passed. I said, the winners will be picked from those who reached the ground. How you reach the ground is important." the officiating elder said, his cold eyes piercing into the boy''s being, causing him to tremble.


    "Are there any other who wish to lay their complaints?" he asked, scanning the contestants.


    "Yes. I wish to withdraw from this competition." Nti Anem said the silence in the arena, couldn''t be more loud.


    ...Guys, I forgot to add before, one incense sticks of time is fifteen minutes. A full incense stick burns for roughly fifteen minutes. Just a little fact to add to your reading experience.

 82 Nti Anem

    "Are there any other who wish to lay their complaints?" he asked, scanning the contestants.


    "Yes. I wish to withdraw from this competition." Nti Anem said the silence in the arena, couldn''t be more loud.


    someone who had passed wanted to withdraw? This was ridiculous, many started to whisper amongst themselves.


    "Nti Anem, right? Why do you wish to withdraw? Those that enter top three can join the Hell''s squad, gaining the right to study skills left by all the past and present patriarchs." the person who spoke, was Council head Si. He understood how powerful energy manipulators could be. Such a precious person did not wish to stand at the top of the heaven alliance? Was this not giving other people the opportunity to take this boy away?


    "Haha! This is new. Boy, if the Heaven alliance is not enough for you, my Jade phoenix alliance is there." Lady Mi spoke. Her having talked, those from the sects could not say a word. Compared to the alliances and the clans, they were nothing.


    "Lady Mi, what do you mean by this? Little Anem, listen to father and continue with the competition." Gate master Nti panicked. This adopted son of his, he could not really control!


    "Boy, Listen to your father." Gate master Ma supported. Though they were usually enemies, when it came to standing against other powers, they were both from the alliance. Even though this boy''s existence will overshadow his own daughter and disciple, there was no way he was okay with another power possessing him. Isn''t that allowing another person to have the opportunity to step on your head?


    "Patriarch, I wish to meet your disciple." Nti Anem finally spoke, causing others to pause. What was he saying?


    Many turned to look at the patriarch and realized, the patriarch was here! That''s right, no one could give up on the opportunity to be the patriarch''s disciple. For some reason, the Heaven alliance sighed a relief when he spoke.


    Tie Nse looked at the boy deeply.


    "I only revealed my powers today because, even if you refuse me, your disciple will come looking for me himself." Nti Anem said.


    "Is that so?" Tie Nse raised a brow.


    "he does not know who I am, no but he knows where I''m from. It is because of where I am from, that I know who he is. I am probably the only person in this world that knows him most. The things you never understood about him, the words that come out of his mouth. I know his name in know his father''s name, I know it all." his words caused Tie Nse to frown.


    The crowd listened attentively. The patriarch''s disciple was a mystery to all. Someone claiming to know him most in the world, more than his own master.


    "Some wild claims you make." Tie Nse said darkly.


    "If I could speak with him, he will want to meet me."


    "Tell me, why do you wish to meet him?" Tie Nse asked.


    "I mean him no harm. Even if I did, I could not kill him, even if I tried. You know I am right." his words caused the patriarch to tense up. How much did this boy know? How did he know this?


    "Relax. I will never reveal what I know to any other then him. Even the famous Ke clan are not capable of ripping this knowledge from my head." Nti Anem smiled, making the Ke clan frown. They were the experts at such things. Yet this boy made such a claim without care. Was he looking down on them?


    "Speak! Why do you wish to meet him?" Tie Nse bellowed. One could feel the sharp killing intent leak from his dark form into the air. It made many shudder. His reaction caused many to speculate that this boy must really know something. Many started to calculate how they would get the information out of him.


    "Power! Only he has the power in this world to help me." Nti Anem''s answer caused the air around Tie Nse to disappear. He could feel that this boy was speaking the truth. He truly seeked his disciple to help him. Still, his words caused Tie Nse to laugh.


    "Then you must not truly know him. He is only a spirit picking cultivator." Everyone listening agreed with Tie Nse''s words. How can he say that a little spirit picking boy is more powerful than the powers sitting in this arena alone?


    "Really? Could you survive if he wished to kill you?" Nti Anem''s words rang through Tie Nse''s head. Even though this boy was a novice at fighting, it would still be risky for him to fight the boy. The energy the boy emits, everyday he was learning more about how to use it. He may not survive.


    Many waited for Tie Nse to refute Nti Anem, but no answer came. Was it possible? Many frowned this boy needed to be investigated!


    "If I take you to him, you may die." Tie Nse warned.


    "I believe you have a way of passing him a message. Tell him, when he walked through the mist, I was mistakenly dragged in with him. Let him decide." Nti Anem said.


    Tie Nse paused for a while. How long he stood, made people sure he was relaying the message. The next moment, he blinked before Nti Anem and handed him a teleportation talisman. Nti Anem did not stand to wonder or thank him. He used it the moment it entered his hand and vanished from the arena.


    People could not stop talking. Some even had a little courage to shout questions at Tie Nse, now and then. They wanted an explanation. But were they worthy? Tie Nse did not even look at them as he coldly announced, "The proper meet begins tomorrow" and vanished before the other powers had the chance to throw questions at him.

 83 The mass elimination battles 1

    The next day, a lot of people trooped to the arena like the day before. Amongst them was Lu Guan, who used to be Jia Lin''s master. He had not arrived yesterday to see his former student stand at the top of the arena, but when he arrived, he heard no words of praise about his student, he only heard talk about some boy, Nti Anem. An energy manipulator? Were they not myths? Now he has come to watch for himself. Even though the patriarch took away the boy, the heaven alliance meet was not a small event. There was more to come. It was said that what held yesterday was only the preliminaries.


    Today, like him, many came to see the popular young masters of the heaven alliance. Many of them came to see young master Di Wong.


    The heaven alliance, like it''s name, was an alliance of multiple strong forces into one power that can rival the legendary two clans. As such, there were many divisions and arms of the alliance and all were eligible to send their young geniuses to participate in the meet.


    For those participating, this meet was their life. If one hoped to make it in the alliance someday, it started by making a name in this meet.


    Many know that those who made it to the top thirty had the right to compete for a spot in Heaven''s list. Those on the list were considered the future of the alliance and were given mush attention and resources to grow. But this came with a big if. One had to have the ability to stay on the list. The top fifty would join the sky mountain. This was basically a school inside the alliance mountain range.


    Even if one could not make it to any of the mentioned above, displaying your skill could lead to open doors. th e determined faces of the participants were on full display for all to see.


    Tie Nse finally made his appearance in the arena. This time, he did not just appear suddenly, he strolled in, to the surprise of everybody.


    After taking his seat, the officiating elder stood to begin. His eyes scanned the crowd before he cleared his throat to speak.


    "Welcome to the mass elimination stage." he said and the crowd was silenced.


    "Strength is the core of the Heaven alliance and only absolute strength will gain recognition. This principle is the foundation of the Heaven alliance meet. To reach the top, only one thing will be recognized in this arena; Strength!" as the words left his mouth, Tie Nse sighed. You only recognise strength during the meet, yet you put a bunch of young cultivators on display to enter the meet using talent alone, the day before. Are you not ashamed to speak those words? Just yesterday, you talked about how talent can top strength in the meet, and now you say strength is all that is recognized. Are you not afraid of getting struck lightening?


    He was not the only that thought so. The crowd had a weird expression on their faces. Many of the powers had an amused expression. They could see the politics in the Heaven alliance. The Heaven alliance elders understoodthat the officiating elder was someone from Elder Di''s faction. His words showed clearly, that the show of talents yesterday scared Elder Di greatly.


    Some group in the audience saw the Heaven alliance leaders give one person amongst them a look, many trained their eyes on this person. This was Elder Di.


    "Ah, it seems some people did not think that so much talent will pop up yesterday." someone said.


    "Is that not Elder Di? Are you saying he is pulling strings from behind the shadows?" another asked.


    "Hasn''t his son been going by the title, Heaven alliance young master? Now that the patriarch has a disciple, where does he stand?"


    "Trying to capture the patriarch''s eye, but another monster popped up yesterday." another said with pity. They had spoken amongst them selves, but for some reason, others around them heard and conversations started popping up in the crowd.


    Elder Di''s face soured at this. He had only told the officiating elder to leave hints through out the competition that strength was a big factor. He wanted to give his son some opportunities to shine. Who knew that this tactless man would open his mouth and the first thing his said, made him out as shameless? Among the participants, Di Wong frowned.


    He had heard of the energy manipulator that had popped up all of a sudden in the preliminaries. He had not attended yesterday because he knew people will notice. It was his way of showing that he looked down on the preliminaries and did not care for some young talents. But the competition ended with no one speaking about his absence. Instead, a monster had appeared in the meet. Someone that claimed to know the patriarch''s disciple and was thereby taken away by the patriarch. He had not even had the chance to meet this monster face to face and he was already under the patriarch''s wing.


    Many said that the patriarch only cared about talent. If one monster appeared again with a weird constitution, only then will he have the ability to be taken in a the patriarch''s disciple. He did not like the sound of those words. It was as though they were saying that the reason he had not caught the patriarch''s eye was because he was not talented.


    Hearing many talk about his threatened position in the alliance, he frowned.

 84 The mass elimination battles 2

    His eyes scanned the crowd as though threatening them to say another word. The crowd complied and went silent immediately, allowing the officiating elder to speak. He had said those words hoping to help the young master, yet he had ended up embarrassing them.


    With a red face, he coughed and continued.


    "Those that wish to participate, step unto the stages. The stage you pick does not matter. At least one hundred people on one stage."


    The contestants complied and stepped unto the stage. Many started to whisper, wondering how the meet intended to carry out the mass elimination this time. The last time, they had put the contestants in a pocket world and sent them to bring back tokens laid around. They had to fight both each other for the tokens and the spirit beasts. The irony was that they were told that the tokens were important in the next level of the competition. Since they were not told how many tokens they were supposed to pick, people thought it better to be safe and pick more. Only to return and were told to look behind the token. They were supposed to fight any one with the same number as the one under their token. Some were forced to fight three to four times and ended up getting eliminated from exhaustion.


    Seeing all the contestants on the stage, they waited for the officiating elder to speak.


    "There are more than five hundred of you, we only need a hundred for the next stage. The match will end when only twenty of you remain on one stage. How you intend to remain, is up to you. When there are exactly twenty people on a stage, all conflict must stop." Many looked at each other as he spoke. Isn''t this just putting them all on five stages and saying fight till only twenty of you remain on a stage? Why did it sound like there was more to this?


    "When the time is up, you must be standing on the stage to be eligible for the next round. If not, the last persons to be removed on from the stage will return to fill your spot." many frowned even more, as they did not understand. Many contestants knew that they had to read in between the lines. The alliance liked to do this say something and leave meanings in it. If one did not truly listen, you would be eliminated. It was not about strength alone. You must also show your wit.


    The officiating elder looked at those on the stages and spoke, "Begin."


    As these words were said, a battle started on all stages. Those that were in the most disadvantage were those who had passed the preliminaries. But this was to be expected. After all, they were the least powerful amongst the contestants. If they make it pass this stage, it would be a miracle.


    No one noticed five people on different stages vanish. At least, non on the stage. This technique, those who saw this could not help but look at a man sitting in the crowd.


    Tie Nse smiled at this. That division had always been amongst the smartest people in the alliance. Now they had five people that can execute that skill. Even though it was still rough, it worked against the other contestants.


    On the second stage, Jia Lin was a dominant figure. He had completely learned the thousand swords skill. With this came the ability to reach one with the world. As a swordsman, he took great pride in this. That energy manipulator may have stolen his limelight, but he was going to display his technique today. Moving like a feather in the wind, the cultivators around him could not really touch him. Their fists and weapons could only graze is clothes. As they attacked, he swayed out of the way, then sliced them with his sword. He had started to feel that this competition was too easy.


    Being one of those that had passed the preliminaries, attention found it''s way towards him from the chaos.


    "One with the word. He is the one who performed the skill yesterday." Many remembered this dashing young man who had managed to learn the patriarch''s skill. Even though his limelight was stolen, this was still an amazing feat.


    Seeing him move so swiftly, their eyes trained on his form. They understood that his cultivation level of early spirit merging was a big attraction to some who wanted to kick someone off the stage fast.


    "But, this boy is too brutal." someone commented.


    Many nodded at this. Though the officiating elder did not say anything about killing on the stage, it was already understood that they were all from the same alliance. There was no need to be too brutal. Even though Jia Lin was not killing them, he was definitely leaving serious injuries on them.


    Soon, Jia Lin paused and looked around. The fight was still going on, but the numbers had thinned. Though no one came after him any more, the fighting spirit had already been ignited in him. Without thinking twice, he entered the crowd and attacked.


    He picked his opponent carefully. This girl was only at the late spirit awareness, this was several levels above him, yet he had confidence in himself. She was using a sword just like him, so he was sure the one with the upper hand would be him.


    The girl saw him attack her suddenly and turned to defend frantically.


    "Shameless." she said. She understood that it was his superiority in the art of swords that sent him her way. Still, her panic only stayed for a second. The next, she noticed his cultivation level and confidence filled her.


    "Since your level in the thousand swords skill makes you so arrogant, I will crush it today." she said and attacked him with the full might of her cultivation level.

 85 The mass elimination battles 3

    Tie Nse''s eyes grazed past Jia Lin and moved to another stage. There, someone was lounged at the edge of the stage, completely bothered. Many understood why. This was Di Wong. He completely looked down on the mass elimination stage of the meet.


    "Why would he bother with the small fries? He is waiting till the strong remain." someone said.


    "True."


    "But standing around like this, isn''t this just showing arrogance?" another asked.


    "When you are as strong as him, you too can show yours."


    "Someone who had done his spirit picking at the age of seven and entered spirit awakening at fifteen and spirit merging before he struck eighteen. Entered spirit awareness at twenty-five and I hear he just broke through to the mid soul seeking before the meet, making him the strongest person participating in the meet. And he is only fifty five. He is the youngest person at soul seeking at the moment." someone said.


    "So what? If I had a father that was a council elder in the alliance, I too would have gotten that far." someone said.


    "He is not even the strongest person in the meet. There is still Eh Nam. He just struck hundred. He entered soul seeking five years ago. His cultivation at that stage will be much more stable than Di Wong." another concurred.


    Many people hearing this argument thought the same. It was said that Elder Di spared no effort to make his son another Tie Nse. Sure he could level up fast, but it was harder to cultivate the higher one went. And it showed. So what he was the youngest soul seeker in the continent? Tie Nse reached that stage at twenty, becoming patriarch at mid soul awakening at the age of forty. Even though it was because he the old patriarch was dying and the alliance needed a leader fast, it did not go unnoticed that Tie Nse could fight far above his level. He reached soul realization at sixty, shaking the entire cultivation world. It is speculated that he would enter the legendary Heaven seeking stage at hundred and thirty. How could a small Di Wong be compared to him?


    Di Wong did not like how fast the conversation turned. First he was too great to fight, then he could not be compared to the patriarch. Many knew that the patriarch was just a wild child from the mountain. The old patriarch met him when coming back from the mountain one day and picked up an orphan boy chewing sugar canes of twelve who was at late soul merging at the time.


    The patriarch forced the boy to come back and cultivate but the boy kept running away from the alliance to go relax. When caught, one would notice his cultivation had grown. His wild behaviour of wanting to relax instead of study made the then sick former patriarch so angry, he would resort to tricks to get Tie Nse to do something. It was even said that the patriarch tricked Tie Nse to come for his coronation.


    When Tie Nse found out and wanted to escape, he was held down while the ceremony took place. The old man tricked Tie Nse by telling him that he could do anything he liked once he becomes patriarch, allowing Tie Nse to finally willing sit down on the patriarch seat. Still, the old man did not trust him and went as far as tying him to the patriarch chair till the guest left. His attitude today is allowed by the alliance because he is too strong and those old Heaven alliance protectors that could hold him down don''t really mind his attitude. Tie Nse is still a child in cultivation years, as such, they keep saying that he will learn responsibility when he grows up. No one could dispute this fact.


    Di Wong understood that with the patriarch''s legendary figure, the only way he would be seen as anyone was to be recognized by the legend himself. Still, he could not bring himself to join the battle and fight these small fries. He looked at Eh Nam fighting away. True, Eh Nam was the only person he was weary of in this alliance meet. He could not disdain Eh Nam, this guy loved fighting. He was someone that was scouted by the Hell squadthemselves. Even if an ant asked him for a fight, he would attack with full strength. Looking at how much he was enjoying the fight, he saw the number of contestants getting smaller.


    The shout of awe caused him to look in that direction. The crowd seemed to be following closely the battle between two people. This was Jia Lin and his opponent. The girl had thought that her cultivation level was enough to crush Jia Lin, but did not expect such a ferocious fight.


    Fast!


    He was too fast!


    Jia Lin moved like the wind, his sword moved even faster. But that was not what bothered the girl. Even though she could barely keep up with him with her eyes, she could at least react in time. He was a much more experienced fighter and a better swordsman, so she was in a clear disadvantage. Still, with her cultivation, she should still be able to handle. Many thought this way at first, and they were right. But they were not the ones who received those sword strikes.


    He was strong!


    Every strike felt as though she was being hit by a mighty hammer. As expected, her sword did not last long under his continuous attacks.


    Clink! The sword broke into two. She did not have the time to worry about her master''s sword as she hurriedly escaped for her life. But without a sword, what could she really do? Jia Lin''s sword made to stab her chest and she swayed out of the way. But not in time to escape completely. She felt the cool metal stab through her shoulder and come out the other side. Pulling out his sword, Jia Lin kicked her out of the stage. He could not seem to calm his breath. This fight was too hard. If his strikes were not powerful and his opponent a novice at fighting, he would have long died. Many saw this too, but they were too impressed by the fact that he fought someone several levels above his cultivation.


    Taking in deep breaths, he looked around. On his stage, the numbers had greatly dwindled. There were twenty one people on his stage. They all looked at each other. He could tell that these people were powerful. He would be crazy to take on any one of them. They too looked at him and someone else behind him. They all felt that since he and that person were the weakest on the stage, they should decide for themselves who will be the final twenty.


    Jia Lin turned to look at the person and his eyes met, Heavenly Rain.

 86 The mass elimination battles 4

    Jia Lin turned to look at the person and his eyes met, Heavenly Rain.


    Heavenly rain saw the look in his eyes and frowned.


    "What are you thinking of doing?" her voice lowered dangerously.


    "Step down." he said to her. she had already expected these words, but when he said it, she still could not help but pale.


    "You can''t fight me. You will loose." he stated. This only made her angrier.


    "You dare say such words? You care not for my father''s anger?" she asked.


    "You are wasting time. Step down. Nothing you say will make me change my mind. If you feel you are worthy to stay, pick an opponent and earn your place. If not, step down!" her face turned green at this. Looking around at those remaining on the stage, she noticed they did not even bother to look her way. It was as though they had decided that it was either her or Jia Lin.


    Seeing her stall, he knew she did not want to be eliminated the early in the competition. He saw her look back at him with arrogant eyes. For some reason, it angered him more than it usually did. Without thinking twice, he raised his leg and kicked her out of the stage.


    Heavenly Raine felt a sharp kick and felt her body in the air the next moment. Till she touched the ground, she could not believe that Jia Lin kicked her out. Some in the audience wanted to sympathize with the beauty, but this was a competition. It was only natural for this to happen.


    Gate master Ma looked at his daughter''s sorry state and sighed. He had petted her since she was born. This had caused her head to never leave the clouds. Her attitude towards others never bothered him, but he had always hoped she would put down her pride for Jia Lin since the day he took in this disciple. Looking at his cold disciple on the stage, Gate master Ma understood that even if she had lowered her pride to be his woman, the result would still be the same. This disciple of his was ambitious.


    "Stage two complete." the officiating elder said. Many trained their eyes on the second stage, as if to cram the faces of those who stood on it. Soon, their eyes moved to stage five, where Di Wong stood leisurely. On the stage, Eh Nam had gotten too emersed in fighting, he had beaten two people off the stage.


    "Stop! We are complete!" someone said, but the two epople had already been thrown out the stage.


    "Stage five, complete!" the officiating elder announced. Those two on the floor spat blood when they heard those words. Why did he not speak up sooner? Now that they had been beaten this badly, would they be able to fight at full strength in the next competition?


    "Stage one complete!" the officiating elder could not even be bothered about their thoughts. Many looked round all the stages and frowned.


    What was going on?


    Stages three and five have been complete for a long time, yet the officiating elder has not announced it. Yet, the other stages were irregular. Stage one had nineteen people on the stage and one hovering in the sky above the stage with divine armament wings. Naturally, they were complete. Stage two had twenty people on the stage and stage five have eighteen.


    Many looked at the officiating elder with a frown, why were stages three and four not called complete by now? They had twenty people on each stage.


    Those on the stages that were not called were confused. But one of them laughed subtly.


    "It seems we are not complete." he said, lifting his leg and kicking someone out of the stage without hesitation. The person he kicked was in a daze. Not as to being kicked off the stage, but how it happened. Many could not understand how the man from before moved.


    "It''s him." someone said in awe.


    "Arm of the west. Young master Nai Ika."


    "Impossible. I thought it was said that he could no more cultivate?" many started to whisper, they had not evenrealized that a person had been kicked off the stage.


    "Stage three, complete!" the officiating elder announced and many went confused. They immediately forgot about this young master that had resurfaced and looked to the elder for an explanation.


    "The top hundred has stood out from the rest. The team stage will begin immediately." was all the officiating elder said.


    "The contestant in the air, those not part of the top hundred are to clear the centre." he said and they al paused.


    Many turned to look at person the elder spoke off. He was the one hovering above the stage on his divine armament wings, away from the fight.


    The person in question, frowned.


    "You never specified how we intend to remain on the stage." he countered the elder. Though he had not fought, he still did not wish to be taken out of the competition for this.


    "You are not on the stage." the officiating elder said coldly.


    At that moment, people seemed to gain a realization. The rules said you must be the last twenty standing on the stage and he was not. It took the contestant a while to figure this out. When he did, he paled.


    "If I get kicked out, the numbers will be reduced."


    "The top hundred has been set. Step away!" the elder had lost his patience. The contestant and the rest looked down at the stages and counted one hundred people. Leaving the arena centre, he moved away.


    Many started to whisper. There were clearly not complete before, how did they level up? Many looked around, trying to recognize if there s a new face amongst the top hundred. Before they could lament, Tie Nse''s voice sounded out.


    "Boring."

 87 Notice: please read.

    @@


    TO WHOM IT MAY CONCERN,


    Hi guys,it''s your author here. This is both a notice and advance information for future reference.


    I did this when I was writing Lucy Wickshire. Those that know my other work understand what I''m about to say.


    Your author is pretty ill, guys. I spend most times under care and you will sometimes hear me say my laptop or phone got banned and taken away. I have been so for five years now. The first three years was so bad,I had to be withdrawn from school. While writing Lucy Wickshire, one always heard me say that I am a full time author. This is the reason why.


    Sometimes I will disappear for a few days... I am usually not gone more than a week. This is usually because of medical emergencies.


    I sometimes go to sleep and wake up a few days later in the hospital. Some days are worse than some.


    I tell you this so that when I disappear, you do not panic and assume this book has been paused or is no more running. Not true. Although I have plans to publish this book in the future, it was written for the web novel world.I will be writing quite long.


    I had an incident this morning,that is why I decided to make this post.


    Now,moving to the notice;I will be away for two to three days. Nothing alarming, just some routine test.... Please bear with this unworthy author''s issues and stick with To Walk The Mist.


    I promise,you will not be disappointed.


    Sincerely,


    Mfonemana Uduak (Author)@@

 88 The challenge

    Many turned to look at Tie Nse, waiting for him to elaborate. Tie Nse looked at the bunch and yawned.


    "I am proud that the Ukon clan have gotten five good descendants, but this patriarch is too busy for this drama. The top winner will be decided in the next battle." he said and many paused.


    The Ukon Clan? That odd clan famed to be the brains of the heaven alliance? Their descendants were participating? Many looked round, trying to recognize them.


    "The Ukon clan''s famous invisibility skill is truly admirable." Council head Si said.


    Many recognized faces they had not seen fight on the stage and looked at them in awe.


    "We thank patriarch and council head for your compliment. Grandfather said that the patriarch was attending the meet. Since his time, the skill has not inheritors. He asked that we show you that the clan still holds strong. He will be happy when he hears of your praise." one of the clansmen spoke.


    The other powers sighed at this. The heaven alliance has a lot of hidden factions that people have forgotten exist for so long. Lady Mi reminded her self, that this alliance has stood longer than her own and their power is deeper than one might think.


    Who did not hear of the might of the Ukon clan. They were the smartest people in the entire alliance. They did not create weapons or big alchemy support for the alliance. They were the brains of every thing. During the demon wars, the former heaven alliance patriarch made all troupes, teams and the entire army, under the control of the Ukon clan. Even to the smallest squad. With all the leaders being members of that clan, the heaven alliance did not eat much loss during the war as compared to the other powers.


    Many attribute the level of power the heaven alliance had at the moment to the miraculous success in that war. While other powers lost a lot of their disciple and geniuses to the war, making them weaker after it, The heaven alliance did not loose much. As powers like the clans were trying to rebuild, the heaven alliance was growing.


    This clan had a host of skills, but the most kept secret was the invisibility skill.


    "The patriarch intends to end the meet?" someone finally realized the words Tie Nse had said.


    Many turned to look at Tie Nse, especially the elders of the alliance.


    "Patriarch, what do you mean?" Council head Si asked.


    "I cannot wait to see if you all reach the top. The winners will be decided today." Tie Nse said. No one understood that he had received a message from Old Iba that his disciple will probably breakthrough in a week. Even though Old Iba had said a week, he could not trust that odd boy he took up as a disciple. It may happen much sooner than anticipated.


    "I will set the stage." Tie Nse said and a loud clap of his hands rand through the arena.


    Just at that moment, the ground trembled. Many looked around in confusion. As though pulled by a big hand, the ground on which the contestants stood. The five stages were lifted into the air. The sky seemed to crack in two, pulling the stages into it.


    Some trained their eyes on Tie Nse, the others trained them on the spectacle before their eyes.


    Of course, those that watched Tie Nse speedily wave through several hand signs, were leaders of strong powers present, especially the other eight powers.


    "Impossible!" Lady Mi exclaimed.


    "We can not keep quite again, can we?" the person who spoke was the Ke clan chief, Ke Nti.


    They were all thinking the same thing. Tie Nse had already gotten to this stage of soul realisation? This was the final stage and he was not even hundred!


    They could not let him train another him. If this was allowed to happen. The Heaven alliance will become unrivalled amongst the nine powers.


    The stages and earth taken with them had formed one centre stage in the sky. To different side of the stage, stair cases in the sky appeared. All leading to ten doors. Tie Nse manifested Ten swords and threw them into the sky. They all found their way behind each door and hung right behind it.


    "All those sword have grades. They are a ten sword set. The top ten will be decided upon which sword chooses you. Climb!" Tie Nse''s words rang through the arena.


    Many were still flustered and did not know what to do. The crowd was in uproar. What was happening? The meet will be decided just like this? The other powers frowned at Tie Nse''s form that had taken his seat immediately after speaking. What could be so urgent that he would shorten the meet? It must have something to do with that student of his!


    The contestants were mostly confused. The more determined ones immediately started to ascend the stairs. As their feet touched the stairs, their bodies froze.


    What nonsense was this?

 89 The challenge 2

    What nonsense was this?


    The contestants felt as though their body was pressed down by a mountain.


    They should have known that the patriarch wanting to end things quickly did not mean the challenge will be easy. On the contrary, who is the patriarch? A legend such as this would never make things easy on them.


    Jia Lin and one other person immediately coughed up blood. This caused uproar in the crowd. They did not understand that to Jia Lin, a weight of ten mountains had descended on his energy core. The other boy immediately fainted on the first step causing confusion every where.


    "On the first step?" someone said.


    "Is it not just to climb the steps?"


    "Are the top hundred this weak?" another asked.


    "What do you know? If it was easy, why did others stop?"


    "Yes! Go and join them if you think you can do it." another defended.


    "I don''t believe the patriarch''s challenge will be easy. This goes to show that!"


    If the contestants heard the conversation of the crowd, they would have doubled over and died. Challenge? More like murder! It was as though the patriarch was angry with them and wished them to die.


    "Patriarch, mercy!" one of them shouted. Many wondered why he sounded so panicked. The next second, he dropped to the floor after coughing up blood.


    Now many were curious. What was happening?


    "Patriarch, mercy!" another said.


    "Patriarch, I don''t want to die!"


    their words caused confusion in the crowd. Many looked to Tie Nse who had not spoken. Seeing as he said nothing, they wondered if the contestants were just exaggerating.


    "Patriarch, instead of killing us in this challenge, bring out your disciple to face me. That would be a true test of strength!" Di Wong said. When his words came out, another round of uproar went up in the crowd. If Di Wong had not spoken up, many would have just said they are too weak to handle the patriarch''s challenge. But as he has spoken, many are sure that the patriarch was intending to kill them.


    "Patriarch." Council head Si said. He was really worried the patriarch would really kill them. Not only him, the entire elders including Elder Di and others whose children and disciples were participants. This patriarch was a person no one truly understood. His temperament was odd. One was not sure if he would really get angry and kill the participants.


    "I wish to challenge your disciple! That was the only reason why I joined the meet. If you are not afraid of his defeat, bring him out!" Di Wong sent out a challenge. A challenge between the younger generation was very normal, but doing this during the meet and while participating in a level was unheard of.


    Many thought that this Di Wong was too arrogant.


    "Talking to the patriarch like this, does he want to die?"


    "When you are the one facing death''s scepter, you can do as you like."


    "But will the patriarch really bring out his disciple for Di Wong to test his strength?"


    "Test his strength? Is he taking the patriarch''s disciple for a training figure?"


    Tie Nse looked at the angry form of Di Wong and felt a head ache coming. He agrees that this is his fault. No, this was that disciple of his'' fault. If he had not been training that little monster so long, how would he have forgotten that that is not a normal standard of strength? In his rush to leave this meet, he mistakenly made the challenge too hard!


    Though his face was blank as he looked at Di Wong, his brain was actively looking for a way to get out of this situation without looking uncool.


    Waving his hand, he took away all the swords and reduced the steps to only ten.


    "Those standing on the tenth step will the decided as top ten, the ninth and above, top twenty and so on. Climb. It is no more as hard as before." Tie Nse said calmly and the entire arena descended into silence.


    Many powers felt their brows twitch at this. He was just reducing the challenge like that?


    "Shameless." Lady Mi muttered. They had always known that this young child pretending to be an old man was odd and most times quite shameless. Still, they did not expect him to be this shameless.


    It was not just them that thought so. The crowd did not believe what he had just said. He was just going to step back like that?


    Di Wong saw that he did not respond to his challenge and frowned.


    "Patriarch, has not replied to my challenge." he said and Tie Nse frowned.

 90 The challenge 3

    Di Wong saw that he did not respond to his challenge and frowned.


    "Patriarch, has not replied to my challenge." he said and Tie Nse frowned.


    This little thing was pissing him off.


    "You could not even climb those steps yet you wish to meet him? You are unworthy!" he said and many paused.


    "Forgetting that you all did not have the same ability as he did, is set a challenge lower than his level, yet you could not even handle it." Tie Nse said. Many knew that the patriarch''s disciple was a no go area. The patriarch never spoke about him. Still, many frowned at this, especially Elder Di.


    "Patriarch need not exaggerate." he said. Di Wong did not like the patriarch''s reply either.


    "You think I am a monster? You have never seen a monster before." Tie Nse answered and Di Wong paled. Even though he had heard that this boy had entered the Baju Valley for ten years and come out completely fine, he felt it was just because of his special constitution and nothing else. He did not for one moment believe that this boy was better than he was.


    Seeing as the topic had moved to Tie Nse''s disciple, the other powers were quick to jump in.


    "You speak so oddly about this boy, are you sure you are raising a cultivator or a demon?" Lady Mi said. Many were thinking this at the back of their minds, but her saying this out loud made many frown. The thought was now deep seated in them.


    Tie Nse may look calm at this moment, but he was actually sighing within. Hey did he come for this meet? Ignoring Lady Mi, he looked at the contestant.


    "Will you climb the stairs or step down?" he asked. Many of them looked at each other and nodded to the patriarch. They understood that even though they climbed those steps, the patriarch having made the steps lower than the ability of his disciple, they would be mocking themselves to climb it. Even if they got to the top, there would be no glory. At this moment, they had completely forgotten about the prizes and wanted to step down.


    Di Wong was more unwilling. He wanted to walk those steps and see how hard it would be, but he had already felt the first step and knew he would die up there. But stepping down right now, wasn''t he saying that he was inferior to the patriarch''s disciple?


    Seeing them all agree, Tie Nse returned them to the ground and the sky cleared.


    The silence in the arena was deafening. What was going to happen now? The participants had decided to not take part in a challenge.


    "The meet ends here. Try harder next time." Tie Nse said, getting up. The elders could not utter a word, nor could they form an argument. The patriarch had spoken. There was no changing his mind. He gave out a challenge for the first time in the history of the meet and the participants decided not to take it.


    It was as though it had dawned on the participants that the prize will not be handed out if the top ten have not been decided.


    The crowd were confused. Is that all?


    Seeing Tie Nse get up to leave, Lady Mi got up.


    "You are yet to answer our question, Patriarch Tie. How can you leave?" as she said those words, many geared up for another stage of the meet. Who did not know that all nine powers gathered here for the purpose of getting information on the patriarch''s disciple?


    "I never ask you how your disciples are trained Lady Mi. have some shame." Tie Nse said ruthlessly. He did not bother saving her some face.


    True. Who amongst them reveals things about their disciple? Was she expecting that the Heaven alliance will surrender to their Jade Phoenix alliance? Was this not being shameless?


    To this, Lady Mi did not care. She knew she was not the only one who wished to know. As such, the other powers would speak up.


    "Why are you skating past the question, Tie Nse?" the sword sect leader asked.


    To this, Tie Nse frowned.


    "One thought you all came here to grace our Heaven alliance meet with your presence. One accepts he is wrong." many thought that Tie Nse''s words were shameless. How could he say he thought the leaders of all nine powers gathered here to honour the Heaven alliance meet? How could he say such words without blinking?


    "It matters not what you thought we came to do? Tie Nse, a lot of things has happened around your disciple that involves the entire cultivation world. Until you answer our questions, you can not leave!" the Ke clan chief, Ke Nti, declared as the jade Alliance locked down the entire arena.

 91 A turn of events 1

    Tie Nse''s calm eyes scanned the leaders of the other powers.


    "You dare?" he asked.


    "Why wouldn''t we dare?" Lady Mi answered.


    "As far as we know, that boy you are training could be from the demon tribe." the Ke clan chief said. Yes, he was reaching. Still, there was no way they were going to let this opportunity go. Tie Nse had done a good job avoiding them this long, they could not allow him leave without getting as much information on this boy as possible.


    "You claim my disciple from the demon tribe because you can not understand him? You might as well name me a demon too. After all, before I came, you all looked upon yourselves as great!" Tie Nse did not mind tearing off their face before this audience.


    To his words, the other leaders frowned. All of them knew that this was Tie Nse''s pride. But never had he said it so blatantly.


    "Pervert!" Lady Asin of the spirit lantern sect spat.


    "I have never understood why people call me pervert. Lady Asin, did you see me in a perverted act?" Tie Nse said and she frowned at his innocent expression.


    "Your righteous looking face looks like that of a pervert. Everyone knows this. You must not make such faces for others to feel disgusted." she answered with a snort. Tie Nse was about to respond when he saw that the entire audience were nodding to her words.


    "Besides the point!" the sword sect''s leader, Se Tibe reminded them that they were straying from the topic.


    "Patriarch Tie, your disciple entered the Baju valley without notification to the rest of us..." before the smiling boy''s words could land, Tie Nse rebuked.


    "Since when did one have to inform the other powers to send someone into the valley, A''yong?" he frowned.


    "He walked out unharmed after ten years, making one wonder if the security of the valley has slacked." the boy continued with a smile.


    "Forget walking out, the entire Baju Valley has been locked since then. Tie Nse, since when was the Baju valley a possession of your Heaven alliance?" the Ku clan chief asked. Even if he wanted to stay out of this argument, he had kept quiet so long, the Ke clan chief had started frowning his way. Though he did not wish to be involved in this, as he understood that if Tie Nse noticed that he knows his disciple''s identity, his clan may end up like the south side city. Besides, there was still a possibility Tie Nse did not know that they knew his disciple, so it was best to act like every other power. This new power they could not understand, they had to be careful.


    "The Baju Valley is locked?" Tie Nse was genuinely surprised. He understood what his disciple had explained to him. But he had not expected that this would be the result.


    "If it was your disciple being a monster like his master, it would be okay. After all, how you raise your disciple is not the business of outsiders. But things like the Baju Valley is a different case. You must explain clearly!" Lady Mi said righteously. To this, no one believed a word. This was just an excuse to covert the patriarch''s disciple. Everyone knows that. Yet she is saying it so righteously.


    "Be careful with your righteous expression, Lady Asin is sensitive." Tie Nse said and Lady Mi almost choked. She was about to rebuke when she saw the crowd nod to Tie Nse''s words.


    "Are you trying to avoid this, Patriarch Tie? You can''t deny that your disciple is involved in this." Sect master Aya of the ten thousand word sect asked gravely.


    "You have pinned a crime, can this patriarch even resist?" Tie Nse said.


    To this, they all frowned.


    "No matter how special your disciple is, you must not take the safety of the Jade continent as a joke. The Baju valley is amongst the six holy locks, they keep the four gates locked and the Jade continent safe from the demon race. This matter concerns all!" Lady Asin said and many finally saw this in a different light. She was right. Even though her motives for challenging the patriarch was less than noble, her point can not be ignored. What if the patriarch''s disciple had messed with the Baju valley and opened a lock?


    "Be careful Lady Asin, your sensitive eyes may not be able to stand your face right now." Tie Nse said dangerously. Though it may sound as though he was mocking lightly, everyone felt the temperature of the arena drop.


    The patriarch was serious.


    Even the other powers tensed. Was he going to resort to fighting his way out? Tie Nse was not a usual character that could be rated by usual standards. It has been long since one had seen him fight. Still, they did not expect it to be easy. As he is at the edge of the soul realization stage and has always been known to display powers far above his level, if he insisted to fight them, they may need the protectors they brought with them to lend a hand. Embarrassingly, none of them were confident that they could all fight him and win. To an draw, yes. But to win, they were not sure.


    This heave alliance patriarch had stood alone and fought two first stage heaven seeking protectors when he was at the soul awakening stage to a draw. They were not sure how much stronger he was now, but they were sure it would not end well.


    Just when they thought Tie Nse would go on a rampage, his pressure lifted and the air around him returned to normal.


    "Ask what you wish." he said and the entire arena froze.

 92 A turn of events 2

    He was serious? He was really going to tell them about his disciple?


    They all looked at Tie Nse suspiciously.


    "Tie Nse this is no time to joke!" the Ke clan chief said and Tie Nse was at a loss. Were they not the ones who wanted to ask questions? Now he has given them an opportunity to ask what they wish, yet they are rebuking him?


    "Patriarch Tie seems to be serious, we might as well hear him out." Lady Mi said.


    To this, many raised their brows, tie Nse being the leader of this.


    "You wish that I offer all information about my disciple to you? Don''t stretch beyond your arm''s length!" Tie Nse rebuked.


    "Fine. Since patriarch Tie is ready to answer questions, I will be first to ask. How did your disciple stay in the Baju valley that long?" A''yong of the ancient land sect asked. Many trained their eyes on Tie Nse waiting for an answer.


    "My disciple''s special constitution allows him to stay in the valley. He is not affected by the energy there. To him, it is just a normal land." Tie Nse answered and they all frowned.


    "What kind of special constitution?" sect leader A''yong asked gravely.


    "A''yong loves the body of a child, despite being the oldest amongst all here. You must not forget the length of a child''s arm." Tie Nse warned gravely.


    "Did he get anything from the valley?" the Ke clan head asked.


    "How would I know? The boy does as he likes." Tie Nse said, looking away childishly. This made the others frown.


    "It seems Patriarch Tie has no intention of speaking to us openly." Lady Mi smiled coldly.


    "You expect secrets? No one knew Lady Mi''s soft looking face and be so thick." Tie Nse answered with a sneer.


    "That boy that claimed to know your disciple, the energy manipulator, he said your disciple could kill you. What does that mean?" sword sect leader, Se Tibe asked gravely. Many wanted to know the answer to this too so they trained their eyes on Tie Nse''s form.


    "Se Tibe, even if you wish me dead, you should try to be more subtle." Tie Nse saying this, of course knew that they were only worried for themselves. If his disciple had the ability to kill him, then they were not safe either. Nevertheless, Tie Nse did not care for their concerns.


    "Tie Nse, your disciple was the last known to enter the Baju valley, the first to come out. Since then the Baju valley has been locked. This crime can not be ignored. Hand him over for investigation. If he is innocent, then he will be fine. This is your responsibility too, as Heaven alliance patriarch. The significance of the Baju valley can not be understated." a voice rang through the arena. Many turned to look at who had spoken. All except Tie Nse.


    "The Ke clan came prepared. I was wondering how long you intended to hide for." Tie Nse said, not caring to look at the man floating in the sky.


    When the man in question heard these words, his eyes narrowed. How could Tie Nse had found him out? Had he gotten that strong that he could no more hide from his eyes? Tie Nse did not give him a chance to contemplate if he had found him out and confirmed his worries.


    "Since the Ke clan left protector has showed himself, why don''t the rest of you come out?" Tie Nse said and the arena tensed.


    "Left protector? What''s that?" someone in the audience asked his colleague.


    "You don''t know? Each power has at least two protectors. But the alliances and the clans have more. The two most powerful protectors are usually divided into left and right." someone explained.


    "What protectors? What have I never heard of them?" another asked.


    "What do you know, they are very old and before our time. How would we ever hear of them?" another answered.


    With discussions popping out around the crowd, two more protectors floated into the arena.


    "You have no fear." one of them said.


    "No." Tie Nse did not bother to mince words.


    "Will you willingly hand the boy over or not?" the other asked, a dangerous air slipping from him into the air. Many suddenly found it hard to breathe. Apart from the tension and excitement in their bones that a fight is about to break out, and they would have a front row seat to it, the aura those above were releasing, was very suffocating.


    "When did you have the right to request a disciple from me?" Tie Nse asked, his old face smiling dangerously.

 93 The stench of Betrayal

    The three protectors were the Ke clan protector, the Ku clan protector and the Jade phoenix alliance protector. They looked at Tie Nse''s form and laughed.


    "Do you really think it will end the way you want?" the Ke clan protector asked.


    "All of you coming here today, do you think this your territory? You come with this much arsenal, are your trying to start a war?" Tie Nse asked.


    "Don''t beat around the bush, boy. Your clan knows that it is in our right to ask for explanations. You refuse to give up information about your disciple yet he may have messed with the Baju valley. Do you think that place is a play ground for your alliance? Is this the heaven alliance''s stand?" the Ku clan protector asked. His words caused the Ku clan members to pale.


    "Protector Tang!" the Ku clan head scolded in panic. As his words rang through the arena, everyone turned to look at him in confusion. Protector Tang frowned at the clan head''s expression. Speaking through mental communication, the Ku clan chief told him to say no more.


    "Why?" Protector Tang asked.


    "You must not put the clan in danger. We will speak of this later! Withdraw!" the Ku clan chief said. This caused the protector to frown.


    "When did you loose your courage? You must not forget who you are!"


    "Protector Tang! This is an order!" the Ku clan chief felt panicked by his refusal to obey. The Ku clan like many other powers had internal strive. To think that the protector standing before him was from the second branch, making him very bold to disobey. But this was not the time to fight. Before he could say a word, Protector Tang cut their mental connection and returned his eyes to Tie Nse''s form.


    "Does the Heaven alliance stand against the nine powers?" with his question, everybody in the Heaven alliance tensed as silence descended upon the arena. This was becoming a big issue. If the nine powers place this crime on the alliance, the nine powers will probably join hands and fight the heaven alliance.


    "Patriarch!" the first person to speak was Elder Di. Tie Nse did not bother glancing at him.


    "You will not be seeing my disciple until he wishes to be seen." Tie Nse said and the Heaven alliance members turned gloomy. There were many who thought that the patriarch should give up the boy. After all, one life in exchange for the entire alliance.


    "Good!" the Ke clan protector said and there was suddenly crack through the air. The next moment, he was standing before Tie Nse. Tie Nse''s expression did not change as he watched the hand descending on his head. He made a waving-away-a-fly motion and the Ke clan protector, felt a strong pressure slap him away.


    Without bothering for the protector slapped away, Tie Nse stepped into the air, his grey robes waving with the wind. Flipping his palm, he manifested a sword and blinked before Protector Tang. Protector Tang produced a lightening shield at Tie Nse''s descending sword.


    Bang!


    A wave of lightening pushed through the crowd as Tie Nse''s sword clashed with protector Tang''s shield. Tie Nse did not stay to see the effect, as he made sift hand seals and a wave of earth erupted between him and the Jade phoenix alliance''s protector''s spear tearing right for him.


    Flipping out of the way, he ascended into the sky and descended just as fast on Protector Tang. With him, a large hand flashed through the air in pale orange light. Looking at the hand alone, one could tell the pressure it was coming with.


    Everything was happening too fast, the audience could not keep up. To counter Tie Nse''s phantom hand, the Ke clan protector''s voice rang through the arena.


    "God''s Back!" at this, an expansive pink shield covered the air. To this, Tie Nse did not care. His phantom hand descended.


    Boom!


    "Phoenix wings!" Lady Mi bellowed.


    Light waves crashed through the arena. Dust and screams filled the air. Many escaped as fast as they could, but did not manage to escape fast enough.Though injured, many kept their lives. Looking up, they found that light in shape of phoenix wings protected them.


    In the distance, Lady Mi coughed up blood. This fight was too dangerous. In a panic to protect the audience, she hand put out all her strength. Seeing her own blood, she smiled with self mockery. A mere wave from Tie Nse''s attack and she could not handle it. This Tie Nse was too strong.


    "Tie Nse, stop!" and old voice emerged from the dust.


    "So, you finally decided to come out. Outsiders appear in the alliance territory and act brazenly, yet you, the alliance protectors did not feel the need to appear." Tie Nse laughed at the man who spoke. Many looked up to see two old men and a woman float in.


    "You are the patriarch, Tie Nse, do you know that? All this fuss for what? Do as they say, hand over the boy." the woman said.

 94 The stench of betrayal 2

    "You are the patriarch, Tie Nse, do you know that? All this fuss for what? Do as they say, hand over the boy." the woman said.


    To this, Tie Nse laughed.


    "So you know that I am the patriarch. My disciple is coveted by outsiders, they stand in heaven alliance territory and arrogantly cause trouble, yet as the alliance protectors you do not side with me?" Tie Nse said.


    Even with their arrival, he did not seem panicked. Even though he laughed, his eyes fixed a cold stare on the body of the woman that had spoken.


    "You understand that this is a big issue that concerns the entire cultivation world. You should not act without reason!" one of the heaven alliance protectors rebuked.


    "You have always been a strange one, Tie Nse. Always selfish and unconcerned for serious things. Yet I had not thought you would be one to ignore the entire cultivation world." protector Tang accused.


    "Even if I ignore the cultivation world, they refuse to ignore me." Tie Nse said solemnly. His words caused many to have a bad feeling.


    "Speak! Where is the boy?!" the female protector ordered.


    "It seems as though staying in your mountain so long has melted your brain, Protector A''miem. Since when did the protectors have the right to order the patriarch. Until the alliance is in danger, you are not to interfere with the affairs of the clan!" Tie Nse may have spoken harshly, yet one could only hear his leisurely tone. One could not even see anger in his eyes.


    At this moment the had retreated several meters back. The arena was already destroyed, and looking at the stand off, another fight might break out. Even though they would not leave as they wanted to witness a once in a life time fight amongst such giants, they would not stupidly stay nearby so as not to get caught in the cross fire.


    "Your actions have brought trouble to the alliance''s doorstep, yet you think we will still remain silent?" Protector A''miem said righteously. He looked at her face and chuckled.


    "You have been observing long, so you already know of Lady Asin''s sensitivities. Please try to have our guest in mind as you make that face." Tie Nse said.


    To this, she was slightly startled. Not because of his insult, but because he had noticed that they had been watching for long. Her astonishment only lasted a second, before it faded into a frown.


    This little boy. She had never liked him. For a long time, she had groomed Elder Di to become Patriarch, only awaiting the old patriarch to make him his disciple. But the old man ever did. She herself was his disciple, yet he had not considered her for the post. She had thought it was because she was a woman that was why he opted to make her a protector than hand the patriarch seat to her, so she groomed Elder Di. Who would know that the old man would go on a trip and come back with a village boy as his disciple. Even though she had frowned at this, she could not voice her thoughts as she was the weakest protector in the alliance at only the first heaven seeking, while the others were at the second heaven seeking and the head protector, at the third heaven seeking. Apart from the two who stood behind her, the other six protectors including the head protector, loved Tie Nse.


    But it did not mean they could always protect him. This decade was her shift while the others were in seclusion. There was no way she was going to let him get his way. Who cares if that boy of his is a once in a life time genius? He had to develop first, doesn''t he? Tie Nse having such a disciple was not good for her disciple''s son, Di Wong. It will be another two years before her decade shift is over. She must handle the successor-ship before the other three come out of seclusion. As long as Tie Nse agrees to take in Di Wong as his disciple, she would help him repel these outsiders. If not, then she would let him fight till his last breath before saving him. Hmph! Maybe by then, he would learn his place and curb that arrogant nature of his!


    Her phoenix eyes stared coldly at Tie Nse as she asked, "Are you going to obey this old woman or not?"


    "You don''t look old at all! Why do you put yourself down, you look young enough to be my little daughter, why would this old man obey you?" Tie Nse joked.


    "Since Tie Nse cares not for the cultivation world and insist on harbouring a criminal, I ask that the Heaven alliance protectors stand back as we extract the location of the criminal from him!" the jade phoenix alliance protector said. To this, the entire area drowned in silence.


    Were they joking? Even if the protectors wanted to have Tie Nse hand over his disciple, there was no way they would stand aside as their patriarch fights.


    "Allowed!" Protector A''miem said and everyone was struck dumb. They looked at the leisure looking Tie Nse and felt pity. Was the alliance betraying him?


    "Protector Tang! Stand down!" the Ku clan chief ordered fiercely.


    Protector Tang looked at him with a frown. Was he really going to stand against him here? Looking at the serious Ku clan chief, he felt the need to rush over and give him a slap.


    "Unlike the Heaven alliance protectors that hold not respect for the patriarch seat, those who disobey the Ku clan chief will be punished! I hold the power to banish you. We are not lacking those of your calibre. Do not let me repeat myself." the Ku clan chief''s voice lowered dangerously.

 95 The stench of betrayal 3

    "Unlike the Heaven alliance protectors that hold not respect for the patriarch seat, those who disobey the Ku clan chief will be punished! I hold the power to banish you. We are not lacking those of your calibre. Do not let me repeat myself." the Ku clan chief''s voice lowered dangerously.


    Protector Tang froze as he heard those words. Yes. The Ku clan was a bigger existence than the Heaven alliance. Their leaders can only be from the direct bloodline''s first branch. The ability to operate lightening was a bloodline skill that is stronger with how close a person''s linage is to the direct bloodline. Though the clan had protectors that had the same name and shared the same Ku blood, they had outsiders who join the clan and take up responsibilities like protectors. Even though he was of the Ku bloodline, he knew that anyone who betrayed the first branch would be punished severely. Even though the second branch fought for more power, they did not dare to openly stand against the second branch. This was not allowed.


    Still, he did not understand why the clan chief would go as far as to threaten him here. At first, he thought that the clan chief was being careful of the alliance''s new strength, but looking at his dead serious eyes, he wondered if something more was going on. Right now, the alliance protectors have betrayed their patriarch, yet the clan chief refuses to act?


    Embarrassed at the clan chief''s threat in the presence of all these people, yet confused and slightly scared, he bowed his head and stepped back till he now floated right behind the clan chief.


    Seeing the Ku clan retreat, the Ke clan frowned. They suddenly had a bad feeling. The Ke clan was always the the cautious one and not the Ku clan. Something more was going on!


    At the Ku clan chief''s insult to the heaven alliance protectors as he scolded Protector Tang, the alliance protectors frowned.


    "Ku clan chief, your words are uncalled for!" Protector A''miem rebuked.


    "He is not wrong though." Tie Nse chuckled. The crowd seemed to angry with him as they nodded too. But Tie Nse could not be bothered about Protector A''miem after he had spoken. He turned to give the Ku clan chief a deep look.


    "I knew that old man from before was familiar." he said and the Ku clan chief''s eyes contracted as he froze.


    "He must have told you,then. You know, yet you remain cautious." Tie Nse said as though thinking. His words confused all of them, especially the other powers. What did the Ku clan chief know?


    Seeing the Ku clan chief''s frozen state, they started to have a bad feeling. The other protectors started to withdraw their hostility.


    Seeing the way things turned around so fast, Protector A''miem panicked. This was a good opportunity for her to force Tie Nse to take her grand disciple as his disciple.


    "You still try to act mysterious?" she glared at Tie Nse, "There are so many other great juniors you can take in as your disciple. Give up the boy, this woman will give you another one! Di Wong, come here and bow to your master!" she ordered and Di Wong felt a little unwilling, as he did not like that he had to be forced upon the Patriarch, but he still went a head and knelt,


    "Master." He said, but Tie Nse kept his eyes trained at those from the Ku clan. His eyes scanned them, till they landed at Ku Nam. Realisation flashed in his eyes.


    "So, that''s it." he said, "it is understandable that you be cautious." Tie Nse said.


    "Because of Jian, we hold no grudge." the Ku clan chief said.


    "Jian?" Tie Nse raised a brow, "That little girl? ah..." Tie Nse finally understood. The moment he saw Elder Hu just before he vanished he thought him familiar. He remembered that it was him who led him to the valley to get Ed. Even though he had recognized Tie Nse and told his clan chief who his disciple was, Tie Nse did not understand why they would still e cautious. Knowing who his disciple is, most would have tried to use this against him.


    When his eyes landed at Ku Nam''s form, he recognized the boy that had been taken from the south side city by the Ku clan elders before his disciple turned the place to a ghost city. As his disciple was in the astral roots the same time this boy, he must have met him. These two things, the Ku clan chief must have put the two together. He probably figured that his disciple had something to do with the south side city matter.


    Jian; that girl that insisted to follow his disciple everywhere. They must have thought that they could use this relation someday.


    "Relax. I don''t find your caution cowardice. You have been in the Baju valley before. It is natural that you remember how scary it is. As long as you don''t move, he will do nothing." Tie Nse''s words caused the Ku clan chief to let out a sigh of relief. Tie Nse was right. He truly remembered how horrific the Baju valley is. He had stayed there for thirty minutes, the longest anyone ever has, before Tie Nse''s disciple appeared out of no where. People say that the leaders of the nine powers can not survive there for more than a day, but this was even an exaggeration.


    Seeing Tie Nse ignore her, Protector A''miem''s eyes burned with fury as she glared at Tie Nse''s form.


    "since you do not wish to listen, this old woman will take up the responsibility of the elder and teach you a lesson! Guest, be patient, since this is a house issue, we will settle it ourselves. As the Head Protector''s representative, I will extract the location of that boy for you myself!" she bellowed and dashed towards Tie Nse.


    Many were shocked stiff. She was taking the initiative to attack the patriarch? Was she rebelling?


    Tie Nse did not bother with this loud woman. He saw that no one stepped up to defend him. He glanced at the elders who were looking away and the two protectors standing aside and sighed. He flipped through hand signs swiftly and a large hand appeared, blocking Protector A''miem''s attack.


    "It matters not, I am stepping down as patriarch and leaving the Heaven alliance." Tie Nse had not spoken loudly, yet everyone heard him.

 96 The heaven alliance goes to sleep

    The heaven alliance members paled.


    They could not believe their ears. Of all the outcomes, they had never thought of this. Protector A''miem was also the same. She never thought he would take such a decision.


    Many looked at the still kneeling Di Wong. No one could utter a word.


    "Patriarch..." the elders suddenly stood in panic.


    "Even if you don''t want Di Wong as your disciple, you don''t need to go as far as leaving the alliance." Protector A''miem said with a frown.


    They did not understand how Tie Nse thought. Non of them understood that he had always wanted to leave the alliance. If not for his relationship with the old patriarch, he would have long left. Still, all these years, no matter how he had ignored the alliance, he always came out to help them when there was a crisis. This was why all the powers stayed away. They knew that no matter how Tie Nse ran from his patriarch seat, he would not abandon the alliance.


    But today really disappointed him. It showed how little the protectors thought of him. He was not their chosen patriarch and they only let this matter go because he had the power to back up his position, and the alliance gained from being under him. But he never thought they would go as far as what they did today.


    Right now, he had a disciple. He may have taken this boy in because he was forced to have one by the alliance but, now that he had him, he was too curious about this boy to let go.


    If he allowed himself to be saddled with the alliance while training this boy in the midst of all their disloyal tendencies, he was willing to bet his disciple will take the hit one day. His master was dead. He respected him by staying put. But only an idiot would stay where he isn''t wanted.


    Protector Amiem saw his silence as a bluff. She did not believe that Tie Nse would leave this position many fought to sit on. He was using his importance to the alliance to threaten her not to cross his bottom line. To this, she snorted. She too can bluff.


    "You have brought problems to the alliance and at least know your place to step down. If so, Elder Di will be taking up your position in your stead! Hand over the Patriarch seal!" she said. The crowd started to curse at this. This woman was going too far! Did she understand the consequence of her actions?


    Most of those angered were disciples of the alliance. The prestige of Tie Nse had made them very proud to lift their heads and say they were from the Heaven alliance. If Tie Nse left, doesn''t it mean that the alliance will fall?


    Seeing Tie Nse not move, Protector A''miem thought that she had succeeded.


    "Elder Di, come kneel before your predecessor and take the patriarch seal!" to her words, angry eyes turned to Elder Di''s form. Elder Di needed not look to know what they were thinking. They thought that since Protector Amiem was his master, she had plotted to take the patriarch seat from Tie Nse for her disciple. The pressure of their angry eyes kept Elder Di in his seat. He finally understood why the former patriarch did not leave the seat for his master. She may be strong, but she was utter stupid!


    He completely believed that the patriarch was serious about leaving the Alliance. If you were openly opposed and insulted by the very clan you protect, you would leave too. When the head protector woke up and hears of this matter, he would be implicated! He had to distance himself from this!


    "Patriarch please do not make rash decisions. No one has the right to take away the patriarch seat that was legitimately given! Only the disciple of the former patriarch can be patriarch! If you leave, the Heaven alliance is dead!" he immediately knelt and begged.


    Many of the Elders finally realized that they should have spoken up. They all joined him on their knees and begged, "Patriarch please don''t be rash!"


    Their words caused many to realize, the line of patriarch has remained unbroken for centuries. If it is broken now what happens to the alliance?


    Protector A''miem was greatly angered. Were they making her out as the devil of this situation? The other Heaven alliance protectors finally realized that things were getting bad. They hurriedly informed the other protectors in seclusion to hurry out.


    "Do you really intend to oppose me?!" Protector A''miem asked the elders.


    Just as Tie Nse was about to open his mouth to speak, a deep laugh rang though the air. After the laughter came a tear in the sky. The clouds seemed to darken and the sunlight suddenly had a hue of red in it''s rays. Many frowned as the crack got larger. Soon, Three people stepped out of it. There were two men and a woman. They wore black monk robes that accentuated their pale and almost bloodless skin.


    "Now, this is a lively gathering." the leader in front said as the three walked through the air. No one needed telling to know who these were.


    "The Demon race!" someone exclaimed.

 97 The heaven alliance goes to sleep 2

    "The Demon race!" someone exclaimed.


    Tension rippled through the crowd. The demon race had all been pursued from the cultivation world. How could they resurface?


    "The Demon race are not of the human world. It is forbidden for them to enter the human world." The Ke clan chief said dangerously. To his words, the demon lady laughed. Her pale and slightly dark lips made her out as ghostly as she laughed.


    "The demon race is not here." she said and they all frowned. You are basically standing right there! Have some shame! All were thinking the same.


    "It matters not if you are here or not. You will Die!" the Ku clan head realise a mountain of pressure on them. To this, the demon woman snorted and released hers. The two pressures collided in the sky and the crowd held their breath. The hair on their skin stood as a zinging ran across their skin. No one needed to be told that it was the Ku clan''s lightening they were feeling. But with the lightening, came a smell of burnt hair in the air.


    "Ah!" someone exclaimed. He was a lower level cultivator. The heat wave touching his skin felt as though he was standing in a burning room.


    "The demon race fire!" another exclaimed.


    "You claim to not be of the demon race yet you can use the demon race fire." Se Tibesnorted and released his sword qi on them and the sharp pressure threatened to cut on in half.


    "Is this how the nine powers welcome outsiders?" the leader of the three finally spoke.


    "You should not have come then." Lady Asin snorted.


    "I am Ndong, leader of the demon people. Humans with demon blood through our veins. As such we are allowed into the human world." the leader said. His voice seemed leisurely, as though he did not feel the pressure released from the other two. To his words, many people felt their brows twitch. How can he proudly say he is called Ndong?


    "Demon people? Never heard of them." Lady Mi said.


    "You were the once that took that girl the other time? You have been in the human world for long." Tie Nse said. To this, the leader glanced at Tie Nse for a second.


    "I have no idea what you speak of." he said and Tie Nse laughed.


    "What took you so long to show your self. If you could not show yourself last time, why did you do so, now?" Tie Nse asked.


    "So they have been here long." Sect master A''yong said.


    "That girl, the one blessed by the Demon god. They took her." Lu Guan said loudly.


    "What girl?" many started to ask.


    "I see, Elder Hu once said that a girl blessed by the demon god was taken away by some mysterious people. You are them. If you hid before, why did you show yourself now?" the Ku clan chief asked.


    "Why couldn''t we come? All powers have gathered here. Honestly, I was quite offended that we did not get an invitation." to Ndong''s words, everyone raised a brow.


    "All powers?" Sect master Aya asked.


    "We have come to declare; the demon people now have the right to enter the light realm with all of you. We must be given appropriate tokens." Ndong said solemnly. A rush of silence passed through the crowd, before anger followed behind it.


    "What?!"


    "Who do they think they are?"


    "Rubbish!"


    "I want to know why you came out. Why did you refuse to hide no more?" Tie Nse''s voice rang out of the angry crowd. The demon people leader finally gave Tie Nse a deep look.


    "I have heard of you, Patriarch of the Heaven alliance, now seeing you, I don''t understand the praise." he said.


    "You have not answered." Ti Nse seemed to not take his words to heart.


    "We were not always demon people. But with our new successor, we now classify as human. We have a right to enter the light realm." he answered.


    "I see. You did not hide out of fear for us. You hid to prepare yourself to be eligible to enter the light realm. Though the human world had the law banning all demon race people, only humans can enter the light realm. Demons can not survive inside. Now that you have the right to enter and stand in the human world as a great power, you show up." Tie Nse analysed.


    Many seemed to understand this fact. It was not hat all demons were removed from the human world, it is that those that remained were not truly demons or truly demons. When the demon race returned to the fifteen levels of hell, those that were not true demons could not go with them, nor were they accepted in the human world, so they stayed hidden all this time. Now that they have a right to be called human, they came out of hiding just in time to receive tokens to enter the light realm.


    "Do you think we will just give it to you because you asked?" the Heaven alliance head protector had arrived.


    This Author just had to put this out there.


    The names in my book are basically words from my language (Ibibio and Anang) and I used them in this book because my people are always told that our language sounds like Japanese. Someone even claimed it sounded Korean. So basically, our words could be spelt out to look Asian.. hehe.(at least I am hoping it is.) Because of this, I used these words as names so that you would not cringe while reading an Asian genre with all the characters names in English. Sorry, I assumed you would cringe because I would. To give your guys the ultimate reading experience, I went with this route. I explained this because of the meaning of Ndong not explained in the story.


    Ndong means maggot... ha. Can you guess what Iba means from Old Iba''s name? I forget if I have ever said Old Iba''s full name but, the next chapter you see Old Iba, Tie Nse will call his full name. ...hehe.. probably I will tell you the meaning then.

 98 Guys, we are doomed!

    @@


    Readers, we''ve got a problem...


    I stopped crying for a while to type this. (I and to stop to post this before they take away my phone!)


    Let''s get scientific a little. I tell u I''m sick a lot and that is a story for another day,but yesterday, I had a doctors appointment and was diagnosed with stage 4 carpel tunnel syndrome (you are going to have to google this). Honestly,I think I kinda knew. Usually apart from my illness, it was usually hard for me to sit and type for long. That was why your chapters were short and not regular.


    It did not help that I would have spasms of sciatica every now and then, but now I finally understand why my hands go numb and hurt after typing for a little bit.


    Honestly, you would think that is the issue here and the reason why I''m crying but it''s not. I''m in serious pain that is why. Ignoring the pain, guys,we''ve got a problem. I have to wear a wrist guard for at least twenty hours a day for one week!


    We''re doomed!


    What are we going to do this week?I can''t type with a wrist guard.


    So,the only solution is for you to suffer this week. I will put in the four hours I have free to use my hands to type. This way I will accumulate chapters to release daily Next Week.


    Your vexed right?


    Allow this lowly author to kowtow in apology through cyberspace.


    I''m sorry. I have no choice. Being ill this long,my power of attorney has been firmly in the hands of my parents...


    This author promises to sneak away to give you chapters!!Believe in me!!@@

 99 The heaven alliance goes to sleep 3

    Many turned to the protector that had just arrived. Behind him were the other five protectors. No one needed telling that this was the head protector, Nkong.


    Seeing them arrive, Tie Nse only glanced at the old man before looking away. While Protector A''miem paled. She wondered how they knew to come and looked at her colleagues, who looked away. They betrayed her?


    "The treaty says as long as a power is strong enough to demand a token, they can. The light realm tokens can only be given to those who complete the one-three-six tree. We have." to Ndong''s words, many sucked in a breath.


    The one-six-three tree was the basis for one to be given a light realm token to allow their disciples to participate. One peak soul awakening cultivator, three soul realisation cultivator, six heaven seeking cultivators. As long a a power; clan, sect or alliance, had these in their ranks, they are to be given a token.


    These laws have kept order in the cultivation world. Breaking it now, would mean giving the demon people the right to revolt. Even though they said they now had these in their ranks, many were sure that they probably had more than this. This meant that they were a threat. Now that they were technically human, they could participate in the cultivation world. Many frowned at this. Were they supposed to just accept this?


    Still, what could they do? The demon people appeared before so many and demanded what they were due. Even though they had demon to their name, they were people. How to deal with this. It was known that the cultivation world was controlled by the nine powers. But ordinary cultivators did not know was that the world they were in was only one in many worlds. All these worlds had fought away the demon race together. To this, there are people higher than their world. Those that truly made sure the pacts were obeyed. If they refused now, they will be unable to explain themselves to the other worlds.


    Still, why did the demon people choose their world to do this? They obviously knew that the nine powers will have no choice, yet of all worlds, they chose theirs. What was the motive? They all smelled something fishy with their actions. The other powers glanced at each other as though coming to an understanding.


    "Usually when this happens, an auditor is sent to the power involved to verify their claim. Only after will the token be issued. If you have made yourself clear, step back. The heaven alliance has thing to discuss." Protector Nkong said. To this, Ndong bowed and stepped back.


    At this moment, Protector Nkong''s eyes landed on Tie Nse. He had heard a little bit about what happened and could see as Tie Nse was refusing to look at him that the patriarch was serious. Moving forward, he led the other six protectors in front of Tie Nse to bow.


    "Patriarch." he greeted respectfully.


    "Not any more." Tie Nse answered him.


    "Are you sure?" he asked Tie Nse solemnly.


    "The heaven alliance has lost it''s way. I do not have need for you any more. I will keep the patriarch seal. Maybe one day, you will have a chance to redeem yourself." Tie Nse said and faded into the sky, leaving the crowd speechless.


    "It has been an honour, Patriarch. The alliance will wait for the day it can redeem it''s honour." the six protectors immediately descended and kowtowed three times in the direction Tie Nse had faded.


    Is that it? Many started to wonder. What did their words mean?


    "If he is really going to leave, he should leave back the seal!" Protector Amiem said. To her words, Protector Nkong sent her a cold stare.


    "From this day, the Heaven alliance is disbanded." as his words landed, everybody froze.


    "What?" some of the elders paled.


    "The heaven alliance was created as a private army of the patriarch and his disciples. When we are no more needed by him, we loose meaning." Protector Nkong let his words sink in. Many started to discuss.


    "The heaven alliance has no time, ambition or purpose. It exists when the patriarch wishes it." Protector Nkong said.


    The other two protectors behind protector Amiem paled at this. They had always known this. But never has a patriarch had no need for them.


    "The alliance can exist for eternity if needed. It can transverse time. It is not just any power. It is the patriarch''s power. As we have been abandoned, we must sleep till a patriarch exists who wishes us awake. Those who wish to leave the alliance, this is your chance." many could not process what was going on. Things were moving too fast. How did it get to this?


    Dear readers, our new schedule is 1 chapter a day to compensate for the new development in my life. If you wish to read ahead of feel you can invest more in my story,head on to patreon. Http://www.patreon.com/towalkthemist

 100 The heaven alliance goes to sleep 4

    "And if we stay?" Elder Di said through his teeth. He could not believe this was happening. If they left the alliance, there was no power that would take them. His son''s glory will never come to pass!


    "Then you will sleep." Protector Nkong said.


    "For how long?" Elder Di asked.


    "Till another patriarch in the line of patriarchs needs you to wake." his answer caused discussions amongst the crowd.


    "I will not stay. How can I exist only to serve someone else?" one said and left he area in haste.


    "Me neither."


    "Let''s leave!"


    As all these happened, Protector A''miem paled. What was this? How did it get to this? She only wished to force her grand disciple on the patriarch. Why had she ever heard of this law? She had always known that the alliance could only be lead by the patriarch, but never understood the basis for this law. Was this it? A personal army?


    "Call the factions over." Protector Nkong said to the old man beside him. Nodding, the protector turned around and returned to the heaven alliance mountain range.


    "Where is he going?" Protector A''miem panicked.


    "To call together all factions of the alliance." Protector Nkong answered.


    "To do what?" she asked.


    "They know their duty. The patriarch has no need for us. They must all come back." he answered.


    "And they will agree? To give up everything to go to sleep? What kind of sleep?" her eyes narrowed. She had though that even though the alliance disbands, she could rally other factions to form a new power. Even though it would not be a great power, but it will be something. If all the six great factions are called to go to sleep, she would be left with nothing!


    "The six factions have sworn their bloodlines to the patriarch. They have not forgotten their oath. If they have, we will hunt them down and kill them all." Protector Nkong coldly declared. One could clearly see he was serious. He turned his cold eyes towards those behind Protector A''miem.


    "The protectors have sworn their lives to the patriarch. Are you breaking this oath?" he asked them. They only grimaced. They felt shame that they had allowed Protector A''miem to go too far, causing the patriarch to deem them unworthy of walking behind him. They had been protectors for five hundred years. They understood their purpose much more than Protector Amiem, who has only been for a little over a hundred years. Still, how could they allow the years to muddle their mind? They understood their existence. This was a choice they took.


    "We will never break our oath." both of them said, startling Protector A''miem stiff.


    Why was this happen? Why was everyone suddenly loyal to the patriarch? Sure she had taken an oath to serve all patriarchs of the alliance and was given the protector''s code, but she had not cared to read it. She had not cared to understand the purpose of the alliance, the ties of the alliance to the patriarch. Why would she? When she gave her all to the alliance, the former patriarch still refused to take her disciple as his successor. Instead, brought in some little mountain boy.


    "What choice will the elders take?" Protector Nkong asked.


    To this, the elders looked away. One did not even need to think deeply to understand their choice. Without bothering to waste his time, Protector Nkong turned to the young ones. His eyes trained at Eh Nam and the young man frowned at this.


    "I have been watching your progress, boy. I know that you are only interested in the development of your battle skill. The alliance is the best place for you." the moment these words were spoken, Eh Nam looked at the protector deeply.


    "Why?" he asked.


    "The alliance is a never dying fighting force. It is for those with loyalty. Not just to the patriarch but to the love of battle and growth through battle. Loyalty to transcend glory and time. It sounds like you." one of the protectors answered.


    Protector Nkong turned to the other powers and produced a case. In the case were two feathers the size of an arm. "


    "That''s..." Lady Mi started to say.


    "You can not return that, Nkong." the Ke clan chief frowned deeply.

 101 The heaven alliance goes to sleep 5

    At first he was just enjoying the drama in the Heaven alliance. But seeing him hand over the keys to the Godhand and Earthbound gate, he realized how serious this was.


    When the protector had said they were disbanding, yet retaining all six great factions, they had just thought going to sleep meant going into seclusion. Now seeing as they gave back the gate keys, they were worried. The Demon race have just made a show of force, now calling themselves, demon people. This was not the time to loose a power like the Heaven alliance. Giving back the keys was impossible. The heaven alliance was specifically given the keys. When those keys were distributed, they were told that the Heaven alliance will be their last line of defence. They understood that this alliance had deeper roots than one would think.


    "We can not take that. That key must remain with the alliance!" The Ku clan head insisted. Many raised their brows at the attitude of the nine powers. Didn''t factions and powers fight for possession of the gate keys? Wasn''t it said that the gate keys could help increase ones overall strength? Why was one before their eyes, yet no one dared to collect?


    What they did not know was that no one ever tried to gain possession of the gates under the Heaven alliance. Apart from ownership of gate keys symbolizing ones power and helping to raise cultivation, it was more importantly the key to the gates that kept locked the demon worlds from the human worlds. Every human world had they own gates. As long as one kept it locked, no demon can cross over. The Heaven alliance is a power that must stay! That was those particular gates were given to them.


    "Hand it to the patriarch, then. We can no more keep it." Protector Nkong let go of the box and it remained floating in mid-air. With all said, he turned away with the other protectors except Protector A''miem, leaving behind he words; "All those who wish to remain, return to the alliance mountain range."


    The drama was over. A innocent Heaven alliance meet ended solemnly. The demon people have made themselves known. The heaven alliance have made their intention to disband clear. But retaining all six great factions, many were skeptic as to the truth of their disbandment. Slowly everyone that came for the meet dispersed. They made sure to rush back to their clan to report the results of the meet. Many had forgotten the true reason they had gathered, which was to find out more about Tie Nse''s disciple.


    The very next day, news hit the cultivation world like a bomb. The Heaven alliance has disappeared!


    "What do you mean they have disappeared?" people from a tavern discussed heatedly.


    "Someone flew passed their mountain range today, and saw no mountain range!" someone said.


    "Rubbish!" another exclaimed.


    "Do you think a mountain range can just up and vanish?" another asked.


    "Hehe... until you see a god, before you know there is are gods? Go look for yourself then." the person defended.


    Discussions were hot. May wondered. When they said they were going to sleep, they really meant leaving the cultivation world. Many recounted what Protector Nkong had said that day and sighed. A battle force that transcends time. What did that mean?


    When news of this hit, one could see former Heaven alliance members rushing towards the mountain range to see if the rumours were true. Amongst them were Elder Di and his faction of elders, Di Wong and some other disciples including Jia Lin. As they stood on their flying swords, they looked at the former mountain range below, that was now a flat field of grass. Many could not believe it. Only when they descended and their feet touched the ground did they believe their eyes.


    "It''s gone." Jia Lin paled. Without the alliance, what was he?


    "Only the alliance mountain range disappeared. The two gate towers are reported to still be standing." one of the elders reported to Elder Di.


    "What now?" someone asked.


    "The two clans have sent someone to tell the gate members to evacuate. They are joining hands to maintain the gate in the alliance''s absence. It seems they are really keeping the gate keys for the patriarch." another elder said.


    "What patriarch? He is no more our patriarch!" another rebuked.


    "The Patriarch! He is still around right? He went to train his disciple!" someone said enthusiastically.


    "So what? He has abandoned our alliance." someone else said.


    "Where do we go? The light realm will open in Ten years. Are we qualified to join now?" someone asked sourly.


    Got to http://www.patreon.com/towalkthemist to read more than one week ahead.

 102 How to anger the heavens 1

    "Yes. We can complete the one-three-six tree." the person who just arrived was Protector A''miem. Many looked at her celestial form and frowned. They were still really angry with her. if not for her, they would still be a Heaven alliance now.


    Sensing their angry stares, she snorted.


    "This protector intends to join you all into the Heaven Sect!" she said.


    They frowned at this. Sect? With their potential, they only ended up as a sect?


    "We may not be considered as one of the nine powers, but we are still a top force that is eligible for a token." she said.


    "We are? How?" many were sceptical.


    "Sure we have more than one soul awakening cultivator left, four soul realisation, but you are the only Heaven seeking cultivator left." Elder Di countered.


    "Listen to me. I have arranged to have the sect techniques, skills and others hidden away from the world." she had spoken in to their minds directly, instead of saying it out loud. That''s true. They may not have the precious skills taken away by the other when they disappeared, but the remaining are still rare!


    "Move to the Ino twin mountains. We will be settling there." she said out loud. Many nodded and dispersed.


    Protector A''miem turned to the elders who stayed back and spoke into their minds.


    "I will be going to find my old friends to see if they are interested in becoming protectors. I am sure of two joining me. The remaining three will be hard to entice. Go to the Ino twin mountain. Patriarch Di, lead them well. While I am not around, make sure they don''t go out as much. It is better if we enter seclusion and only appear to enter the light realm. When we gain from the light realm, we will be able to really stabilize ourselves in the cultivation world." to her words, they all nodded and she vanished.


    They glanced at each other and dispersed. His was a good plan. This was still a way to redeem themselves.


    Word that the Heaven alliance members left behind had formed the Heaven sect spread fast. But where they were, no one knew. Many tried to intercept the heaven sect member on the road to try and get information on where they were going, but the sect was careful. They made sure to protect as many members as possible. If one was about to be captured, they killed him instantly, to keep the sect location secret. This alone showed people that they were no more heaven alliance disciples. Their ruthless actions already gave them a new reputation in the cultivation world.


    The gates were evacuated by the heaven sect members and the eight powers sent joint members to maintain it. This stopped looters from rushing over to take what they could. Still, some that had been quicker than the eight powers, left empty handed, as they could not find any skill, artifact of any kind.


    Many wondered if it had disappeared with the mountain range. Others did not believe it. They were sure that the new Heaven sect had taken it all away.


    In the demon Lands, in an odd forest, Old Iba and Nti Anem looked at the veil of misty ahead. Nti Anem was standing while Old Iba sat in front of an alchemy pot. He was holding firm the pot lid as alchemy fire spread from his hand unto the pot bottom, from under the iron base tripod. The pot brewed almost as dangerously as the dark clouds in the sky.


    Tie Nse appeared a moment later and glanced at the two before training his eyes at the veil of fog.


    "You are back alive. Good. Send him this pill." Old Iba said.


    "Is he about to break through or his is just tribulation lightening to destroy what you are brewing?" Tie Nse asked.


    "How are my supposed to know? I informed when the clouds started forming. I was yet to begin brewing then. The pill is ready. Maybe the tribulation lightening for the pill and his breakthrough have combined. Regardless, I am keeping it contained in the pot because I am not ready to find out!" old Iba said.


    Tie Nse was glad he had kept a mental window to Ed open. If not, he would not have been able to communicate Nti Anem''s message to him, and now, inform him that the pill is ready.


    "Get ready, I''m sending in the pill." he communicated to Ed.


    "Ok." was the only reply he got.


    Taking out a jade box from inside his space, he turned to Old Iba and opened the box before him.


    "Put the pill in here." he said and Old Iba froze.


    "What?"


    "Mbad Iba, this is not the time for you to cower!" Tie Nse scolded.


    Please go and check out advance chapters on patreon. Http://www.patreon.com/towalkthemist.

 103 How to anger the heavens 2

    "If I open this lid, there is no guaranty that I will not be struck by lightening!" Old Iba protested.


    "No choice! Do it!" Tie Nse ordered fiercely. Breaking out in cold sweat, Old Iba steeled his heart, his old face crunching up into stone, he flexed his muscles and pulled together his energy. With one swift motion, he opened the lid and swiped the pill from the pot, throwing it into the jade box.


    But the heavenly lightening in the sky had long retained a mind of it''s own. As though remembering the insult of Ed''s last breakthrough it had come prepared. It struck out at the pill the moment the lid of the alchemy pot opened. As the pill flew towards the jade box in the air, it was right on time to catch it with it''s electric figer and destroy the abomination. Just as it''s crackling streak almost touched the pill, it connected with an invisible shield. This was enough time for Tie Nse to close the box.


    Tie Nse needed not ask to know who made the shield. He glanced at the boy leaning on a tree behind them and looked away, training his eyes at the veil of fog. He took out a paper slip from his space and released it into the air. The strip burned away to reveal an array, glowing in the sky, before Tie Nse.


    "The box is coming in!" Tie Nse communicated to Ed threw the box into a teleportation array. The next moment, it appeared on Ed''s lap.


    As though challenging the sky, Ed glanced at the crackling clouds with indifference. The next moment, he opened the box and turned it into his open mouth. As the pill settled into his stomach, Ed heard something pop in his head.


    Crack!


    He felt his bones complain as they hardened, his consciousness lifted into a different hight. It was as through he was floating in a sea of energy. His head felt light for a second. Was this the spirit awakening stage? If so, then what came next was....


    Crackle. Boom!


    Adeadly bolt of lightening descended upon Ed without delay. He felt the electricity tear through his being, into his core. The moment it touched his sea of consciousness, the dark water within, got darker. He could feel his cultivation stabilize.


    Boom!


    Another bolt struck directly unto his crown-chakra at the top of his head. He felt light headed even more as he felt his cultivation rise.


    At that moment, when the lightening saw that it had no destructive effect on Ed, instead, his cultivation seemed to be rising, it wished to retreat into the heavens. It was as though it had noticed it was helping Ed, so it tried to leave. As the clouds tried to clear, something held it back. It''s lightening kept on hitting on Ed''s head regardless of it''s desire to leave.


    Bolt upon bolt descended unto Ed, but Tie Nse was not impressed.


    "It had done nothing and it wanted to leave? This lightening being released now is nothing compared to his first break through." Tie Nse said.


    "At this rate, it would take forever for him to rise in cultivation. The lightening is not strong enough." Old Iba said.


    "It will be. When it notices that it is being held back because of the one breaking through it will get angry." Nti Anem said.


    As though the heavens had heard his words, the clouds no more tried to retreat. It returned, darker than it had come.


    "We need to leave!" Tie Nse said and grabbed the other two and blinked far away.


    Crackle, Boom!


    A bolt stronger than any that had ever come descended. It was so large, it created a small crater in it''s wake. After the first bolt came down, the rest followed rhythmically.


    Perched on a tree a few meters away from the strike zone, they could hear the lightening descending in a rhythm.


    "What is it doing?" Old Iba asked.


    "Let me send you to go ask it."


    "I''m serious!"


    "It doesn''t matter it is good for the boy." Tie Nse said.


    "Is he still alive in there?" Old Iba asked.


    Please check out advanced chapters on patreon http://www.patreon.com/towalkthemist

 104 How To anger the heavens 3

    "You can go in and find out if you are that curious." Tie Nse said.


    "Look!" Nti Anem said pointing at the sky.


    At this moment, large figure could be seen in the sky forming. With every strike on Ed, the figure''s form became clearer. One could see it holding a sledge hammer, looking down at Ed''s form.


    "Oh no. let''s leave!" without thinking twice, Tie Nse pulled a long distance teleportation array from his space and it activated almost instantly, and the three jumped in without care.


    At that moment, the form in the sky had taken up his hammer and pounded down with heavy force. The lightening that descended this time, had a radius of ten metres.


    It struck Ed so hard, his bones quaked, making him spit out blood. With this strike, the pill in his system wore off, allowing the tribulation lightening to recede into the sky.


    All Ed smelled was his burning skin. He laid there for a while and a figure approached cautiously some moments later.


    Ed looked up at the person who approached, weakly. The sky had cleared and the sun was shining directly into his eyes.


    "You are still alive?" A woman said in horror. The next moment, his eyes stilled dangerously.


    "Don''t even think about it." Ed said weakly. No one needed to tell him that this woman immediately wanted to kill him.


    "You have seen my face, you have to die." she said and Ed raised a brow. Seeing his relaxed face and mocking eyes, she blushed. She understood why he looked at her that way. She is the one who could not mind her business and approached to see if he was dead, yet she wanted to kill him for opening his eyes and seeing her face.


    "Do you want to die?" he asked and she paused.


    "What?"


    "Walk away while I am in a good mood." he said and her anger intensified.


    "Do you know who I am?" she asked and Ed stared blankly. Suddenly, cold sipped into her bones at his stare. She felt as though he had just seen the king of death. This caused her to take a step back in fright.


    "My Lady, we must leave." one could hear the caution in the voice of the man who spoke. She turned to glare at him resentfully, but saw the fear in his eyes and paused. She nodded cautiously and glanced at Ed who had looked away.


    "Let''s meet again if you survive." she said, but Ed did not spare her a glance. Harrumphing, she turned and left with the elderly man.


    After they had gone quite away, the man grabbed her and jumped into a teleportation array.


    "What are you so afraid of, Elder?" she asked with indignation at being grabbed like that.


    "You have been in seclusion for twenty years so you don''t know, there are now people in this world who can kill us and the holy saint will be unable to avenge us. It is best to be careful and not mistakenly cause our own deaths." the elder said and she frowned.


    "What nonsense are you speaking, do you know whoo mother is?" she scolded the elder.


    "There is only one person that is known to have survived such a lightening storm. If that person is who we just met, then we had to be careful." seeing her frown remain, he explained a little about Tie Nse''s new disciple, the rumours around him, the energy manipulator that showed up, the heaven alliance meet and the disappearance of the entire heaven alliance.


    After listening, he face turned solemn.


    "Hurry then, I must meet mother." she ordered and they increased their speed.


    A while later, a teleportation array burned into life back inside the forest by the hell tree. Old Iba stepped out of the with his toe first and his eyes closed. He moved his toe to feel if there was any lightening crackling. The next moment, he fell through the array, face first on the floor, with his backside in the air. He spun and Glared at the at the other two coming out of the array.


    "How can you push me through? What if I died?" he scolded Tie Nse.


    "You were wasting time. Besides, you were the one that said the effects of the pill should have worn off by now. Why so cautious?" Tie Nse said innocently.


    "What if the heavens were still angrily descending lightening?" Old Iba complained.


    "Why would they stay and risk us have something else up our sleeves?" Tie Nse asked with a scoff.


    Please check out advanced chapters on patreon


    www.patreon.com/towalkthemist

 105 Nti Anems identity

    Ed had long was now leaning on the hell tree, staring at the pair arguing. His eyes moved past them to the boy behind them.


    "You claim to know me." he said. And the other two stopped arguing.


    "That''s true, you never told me why you sent this boy here? It you had not informed my before time, I would have killed him." Old Iba raised the issue.


    "He is an energy manipulator." Tie Nse said.


    "What? They are extinct!" Old Iba could not believe it no matter what.


    "It matters not if you think they are. He show cased his powers in the heaven alliance meet. The entire cultivation world knows he exists." Tie Nse said.


    "The why is he here?" Old Iba asked, "don''t tell me you want to add another monster to you other monster disciple you can''t even afford to train!"


    "He claimed to know my disciple more than anyone in the world." Tie Nse said.


    "More than anyone in this world. After all, I walked through the mist with you, Prince Edward Oric Desecar of Jurazel and Emerald." Nti Anem said and Edward gave him a piercing stare. To his words, Tie Nse and Old Iba frowned. They had not heard of these places before. What was this boy sprouting?


    "You know me?" Ed asked, "You are from back home."


    "Not quite. My name is Helix Apteil, I an the first Monerus brother." Nti Anem said.


    "Monerous brother, those invited to emerald, yet stabbed us in the back." Ed''s expression remained the same.


    "I heard of that. I always thought you would be angry when we met. Time really does wash away feeling." as he said those words, Ed''s face darkened.


    "I was not really amongst them. They caused all that havoc and killed that many people because they were trying to resurrect me. They did not finish the spell to raise my body as wee, but my spirit was free, and had no host. No one capable of housing me. All except you." Tie Nse frowned and prepared to attack.


    "You wish to to posses me? Aren''t you too bold?" Ed asked as though it was not him that was under threat.


    "No. I wanted to. That is how I followed you and got dragged into the Mist with you. Oh, the mist. I always heard that this place was different for every one. No time, no space, nothing, yet everything. When I was alive, I had always wanted to come here. But Mother Slah refused me to venture in." Nti Anem said as he gazed up at the clear sky.


    "Mother slah? You dare say you have met the creator?" Old Iba snorted.


    "She gave me the power to create the Monerus brothers, while she gave Gryith the power to create the Sisters Of Slah, then she blessed our two orders. Tell me, your highness, do you believe I have met her?" Nti Anem said and Ed sighed. He did not know much about the Monerus brothers, but the Sisters Of Slah are said to be as old as them and were blessed by the creator. Yes, he believed it was possible.


    "Why did yo wait this long to find me then?" Ed asked.


    "Like I said, there is no time, nor space, everything is mixed into one big soup. That means, even though I had entered with you, we came out indifferent places and times." he answered.


    "What about the body, how did you get it?" Ed asked.


    "Apparently, a cultivators body is just barely as good as yours.


    "You entered the mist, to save a sister. Though I do not agree with this, I am stuck here with you and need your help." he said. To this, Ed raised a brow.


    "Why would I help you?"


    "Because, I can get you home."


    "I become a god eater, I can get home." Ed said.


    "Not enough. To you even know where you are?" Nti anem laughed.


    "Home? Boy, what are you talking about?" Tie Nse had long been lost since their conversation started.


    "This is the astral plane. In it, there are many realms, many worlds and many universes. You are from the physical plane." Nti Anem said.


    "How?" Tie Nse asked, but Ed couldn''t be bothered to answer.


    "He went on a quest and entered the mist. The mist took him here." Nti Anem answered.


    "You talk too much." Ed said to him and he raised his hand in surrender.


    "The physical plane? Many books have said that there are many planes. One that has never been entered is the physical. How can you be here, if you are from there?" Tie Nse asked.


    There are somethings in this book I will never explain. This chapter will always remain vague for some. This is because I have published a whole book about most of these things already and the second book of thatseries is due for release in a year or so... I have long said that this web novel is a spin off of that book. Want to understand more, read that one. One day I will edit this one and publish it as a side series. But guys,this goal is impossible without you. Support me on patreon and get the perk of advance chapters


    www.patreon.com/towalkthemist


    See Ya...

 106 Ten years holding up a feather 1

    "He mist is part of a place known as the unknown lands. It is a doorway or better yet, path with different roads to many and all worlds. But no one has ever known how to navigate at will." Nti Anem said.


    "He must return, or he will die. The moment you get sucked up into this world, and forget where you are from, or give up trying to go back, you will die. Seeing that you are still alive, I believe you are still trying to get back." Nti Anem said.


    "You said know know a way?" Ed asked. Just thinking that he could return home, Ed was tensed.


    "When you reach soul realization, I will tell you. I will even help you get there. But you must take me to the tail of reality." Nti Anem said.


    "What?" Old Iba asked.


    "It is just a place." Nti Anem shrugged.


    "What do you want to do there?" Ed asked.


    "I will make a body for myself. One that will be stronger than this." Nti Anem said.


    "Are you sure you know a way out?" Ed asked and he nodded.


    "Why should I trust you?"


    "Because I want to get out too." he said and Ed looked away.


    "Boy, let''s talk. All of you, give us a moment." Tie Nse said, coming forward and sitting before Ed. The other two complied ad walked away. For a while neither Ed nor Tie Nse spoke.


    "The physical world huh?" Tie Nse asked, but Ed still stared at the sky.


    "This is your goal, to return? Why?" he asked and Ed gave him a lazy look.


    "Because your family is back there; sorry, nonsense question." Tie Nse said.


    "Them... oh..." Ed seemed to drift off into a memory.


    "How did you enter? As your master, I need to understand your goals!" Tie Nse became indignant, seeing as Ed did not reply him.


    "You just want to see if you can come too." Ed said and Tie Nse looked away with a cough.


    "As your master, I need to help you grow till death!" he said righteously. Only then did Ed give him a piercing look.


    "Then help me get to the stage of Godeater." Ed said.


    "But didn''t the boy say you only need to get to soul realization?" Tie Nse asked.


    "My goal is still the same. He can''t be trusted." Ed said. Tie Nse wanted to ask more about Nti Anem, this boy that claims to have met the creator, but the words remained stuck in his throat.


    "You must enter the light realm in ten years." Tie Nse said and Ed raised a brow.


    "The light realm is a desolate place left behind after the heavenly calamity, they used to be the mining ground for ethereal ores. It is situated at the centre of the realms. After being destroyed in the heavenly calamity, it became a training ground for powers to send their young cultivators. Not just in our word. All worlds enter this fray, searching for ethereal ores. From the soul seeking stage, ethereal ores are necessary to level up in cultivation. That is why many join factions. Because only factions will have these amount to distribute. At soul seeking stage, it is only important when one wants to break through, but at soul realisation, it is important in cultivation."


    "So you want this." Ed said.


    "Sure, if your come across this in the light realm, don''t be reserved. You too will need it. But, this is not the true reason you are going. When I was there, there was a burial chamber littered with bones. The energy emitted in that chamber was purer and heavier than the Baju Valley. The moment the energy touches your skin, you melt."


    "How did you survive?" Ed asked. Being someone that could see people''s energy flow at their cores at one glance, since he could do this, he had been startled by this Old pervert''s core. He knew that there was something odd about him. He knew that this man was dangerous. If he could survive that, could this old pervert survive the touch of his energy?


    Even though he had not said his suspicion out loud, Tie Nse could guess where his mind was going.


    "I''m not that strong, boy. Bones that fell out of the tomb reeked of that heavy energy. I am not quite sure you will survive this, but you are the only one I know that can even dare to enter there. Time is different in that place. That is why many are sent there and return much stronger. Out here, one might have only spent five years, but each year out here, is a thousand in there." Tie Nse said and Ed frowned. Five thousand years, he might loose himself. Already, he could feel himself become unstable. Could he spend five thousand years in the mist?

 107 Ten years holding up a feather 2

    Taking in a deep breath, Ed looked at the serious Tie Nse.


    "What will I be doing till then?" Ed asked.


    "Edward, is there any side effect from staying in this world this long?" Tie Nse asked. It seemed that he had read Ed''s mind. He had seen into Ed''s fear of staying here this long.


    "You claim to be capable of seeing into my mind now?" Ed asked.


    "Now I know you are not from here, and from what that boy said, it seems you did not really came here by choice, seeing you react that way to hearing you will stay in the light realm for five thousand years, it seems there is more to this than you have said." Tie Nse said. Ed sighed a little, before looking away from Tie Nse''s inquiring eyes.


    "I feel my mind become hazy. It it is not strong, but I can feel it." Ed said.


    "It is the effect of the mist. It will start to seem as though you can not see where you came from. Then where you are going. Then, It will get t a point where you can not see your own legs as you walk through it." The person who spoke was Nti Anem. He was perched on top of the tree Ed was sitting under. Tie Nse looked up to see him and an embarrassed Old Iba on the tree.


    "It seems I can not even feel when an energy manipulator is spying on me." Tie Nse said dangerously and Nti Anem shrugged.


    "He convinced me to come listen." he pointed at Old Iba who went into a coughing fit.


    "But, I am right. I have been in the mist for six thousand years. I have been dragged here and there. I do feel the haze. But it is not as strong as it would be for you. After all, I am dead. I have walked the land of the dead. It is hard for me to get lost. A simple goal in mind can keep my mind clear for a long time. But it will not be the same for you. You will feel the mist penetrate your mind. The longer you stay in it, the stronger it takes over. And like I said before, if you loose yourself in here, you will die." Nti Anem said.


    "Then you must train your mind. I know ten years is not enough, but it is necessary. Come, we are going to the the sinking mountain." Tie Nse said, getting up from the ground.


    "What? No! I have a cottage to run. I will go back and run it. We will meet ten years from now at the desolate city. Bye." Old Iba hurriedly said, stepping into a teleportation array and vanishing.


    "Coward." Tie Nse scoffed.


    "What is this sinking mountain?" Ed asked.


    "I have heard of it in my travels, but I''m not sure how this will help him." Nti Anem said.


    "That is because no one understands why the mountain is called sinking mountain. It is...a mountain... sinking!" Tie Nse said solemnly, his position still as he tried to portray a sense of gloom and Nti Anem raised a brow.


    "You are usually called Old Pervert. I can see why." Nti Anem said and Tie Nse almost choked on his teeth.


    "This is even a better look on him." Ed said without interest and Tie Nse coughed awkwardly.


    "That mountain was a glorious training ground. But is now cursed to be as heavy as ten worlds. One man is holding the mountain up not allowing it to touch the ground. You will replace him for ten years." Tie Nse said and they all paused.


    "Will I die there?" Ed asked.


    "Probably..." Tie Nse said innocently, looking away.


    "How does this help me?" Ed asked.


    "It is not the weight of the mountain that is the trial. It is holding it up that long. Your mental strength is what is being trained here." Nti Anem said.


    "I see." Ed said.


    "What will you do while he is holding up the mountain?" Tie Nse asked Nti Anem.


    "I will stand guard." he answered. Tie Nse only frowned lightly at this.


    "You expect me to leave the person trying to posses my disciple with him?" Tie Nse asked dangerously.


    "Possessing him was a thing of the past. The him now, no one could possess. The moment I perceived his energy I knew. If I enter that body, I would burn away." Nti Anem said and they all descended into silence.


    "And this friend of yours will give him the mountain to hold?" Nti Anem asked Tie Nse.


    "Of course, I have prepared a gift to give him for his help." Tie Nse said righteously.


    "What gift?" Ed frowned.


    "You."

 108 Ten years holding up a feather 3

    Tie Nse opened a portal and they all stepped through. When the lights crackled open on the other side, they found themselves at the base of a rocky mountain. The mountain was so tall into the sky, one could not see it''s peak hidden in the clouds. Tie Nse did not stop to take in the view. He led them around the base through a forest path. It seemed to them, that they were going down as they walked. They soon saw a changed scene behind a wall of vines. It was as though a veil was lifted from their eyes and they realised the mountain was hovering in mid air. The height of the mountain base from the was tall enoughfor a person to sit under. They bent down to look under the mountain. There at it''s middle, a middle aged dark skinned man in a toga sat with the weight of the entire mountain resting on his hands raised above his head.


    On arrival, the man looked at them. At first his face was cold and dark, with beads of sweat dripping from his head on to it. When his eyes met Tie Nse''s, an eerie smile bloomed on his face.


    "Boy!" he called.


    "You''re still carrying this rock?" Tie Nse asked.


    "Ha-ha! You coming here means you must have found someone to take my place right?" At this, Tie Nse sighed and gestured to Ed. The man''s hawk eyes moved to Ed, staring at him as though to look into his soul.


    "Boy, come over. This great mountain must never be dropped." the man said.


    "Why?" Ed asked.


    "You have not spoken to him about this?" the man asked Tie Nse.


    "No one cares about the stupid rock, Afia Nta." Tie Nse said.


    "Why not?" Afia Nta asked.


    "What''s so special about the rock?" Ed asked.


    "That''s what I said." Tie Nse said and an angry wind slapped his way.


    "What?! It''s true!" Tie Nse insisted like a child.


    "This great mountain signifies the sacrifice and selflessness of mankind..." Afia Nta started to say.


    "Just give him the stupid rock." Tie Nse said.


    "Why?! Why should I give him my precious mountain?!" Afia Nta asked.


    "You begged me to bring you someone so that you can go on a holiday, that''s why." Tie Nse said, "Say, you can only holiday for a little under ten years. You must not go longer."


    "You promised me someone that will hold it for five hundred years!"


    "Well, he won''t care to hold it longer. So find someone while you are on your vacation." Tie Nse said.


    "Come boy." Afia Nta said and Ed wanted to move, but Tie Nse''s voice stopped him.


    "Ya! Get up! Are you expecting him to crawl down there? He is doing you a favour, you know?" he ordered Afia Nta.


    "Stupid boy, don''t you know that one must hold it stable? If this rock is out of balance one moment...." he started to say.


    "So you finally accept that it is just a stupid rock." Tie Nse said snidely.


    "Ya!" one could feel Afia Nta''s anger roll through the air. Ed sighed and crawled under the mountain till he reached the man. Upon reaching him, Ed looked right at him, but could not feel his presence. To this he frowned. The man shifted aside to let Ed sit at the centre, with his hand still holding the mountain base. Even though he moved, his toga did not rustle, talk more of the mountain he was holding; that did not tremble one moment.


    At a closer look at Ed Afia Nta frowned, "You are only a spirit awakening junior." he said.


    "Yes." Ed answered.


    "You may die if I hand over this mountain. The mountain is..." he started to say.


    "Just hand over the stupid rock." Tie Nse said.


    "You must really hate this boy, to send him here to die." Afia Nta said.


    "I am actually looking for something that can kill him, but it is not your mountain. So, hand it over!" Tie Nse ordered.


    "Fine!" Afia Nta let loose a creepy smile, "Braze yourself, boy. Sitting here can help your cultivation. I can only help you a little, so listen. Loyalty transcends illusion, begets strength and triumphs eternity. Keep that in mind" he said and Ed raised his hand to touch the rock. It felt like polished wood. No, bone,... What was this feeling? Ed wondered. Before he could figure out what the feeling was, he felt a weight strike his being, causing him to look up abruptly at the mountain base. When he looked up, he realized he was holding a giant feather.


    "Beautiful isn''t it?" Afia Nta asked.


    Guys, it''s been long. Had a near death experience... Anyway, I am informing you that I will pay more attention to posting on patr??n than I do here. If you wish to read at least five chapters ahead, go to patr??n. For those true readers who will,I thank you in advance. Http://www.patr??n.com/towalkthemist ( Forgive the ?? situation. Just use normal letters when typing out the link. Webnovel has blocked that word so I have to write it out like that.)

 109 Preparations

    Ed stared at the giant feather he was holding with both hands, then he turned to look at the man beside him, but he was gone. He looked back at the feather and was met with it''s sharp pointy end. The sharp point released a kind of feeling in him. As though it would kill him. At that moment, he felt the feather double in weight as though threatening to fall. His head buzzed at this feeling. The weight was nothing, but why was he slightly scared? As he wondered about this, the weight continued to fluctuate.


    Tie Nse and the rest watched Ed get sucked into the illusion of the rock.


    "What kind of spirit awakening cultivator is this? He can handle the weight of the mountain?" Afia Nta said and Tie Nse sighed,


    "I''m not sure what method he is using to hold your rock up at this moment. You rock risks possible damage if not destruction." he mumbled.


    "What?" Afia Nta could not quite catch his words.


    "Just come back ten years from now." Tie Nse said.


    "You promised me someone to hold it up for five hundred years. I will see you then."


    "Okay, that boy will just drop your stupid rock when we are ready to leave." Tie Nse said without care.


    "You would not dare."


    "You really think others care about this stupid rock, don''t you?" Tie Nse asked.


    "The way you talk reminds me of someone." Afia Nta said.


    "Yes, yes... that is why you almost killed me. You''ve said it before."


    "I will be back in Ten years." he said and vanished with the wind.


    "That man, what is he?" Nti Anem asked.


    "You have good eyes, energy manipulator. That is not a human being. This is the first holiday he has had in forever. His master got slain on this same rock and he held it up till this day. Why he holds it up, I couldn''t be bothered to know." Tie Nse said.


    "Will, Ed be okay?" Nti Anem asked.


    "If he is not careful, he will die. That old thing said that the rock is sinking into something called the river of testing. That means he must be sitting inside it at this moment." Tie Nse said.


    "I have never heard of this place." Nti Anem said.


    "Stay and protect him. I will be back in ten years." Tie Nse said and threw a slip into the air and it crackled into a teleportation array, he stepped through it and vanished with a wink.


    Ten years passed silently. Many hoping to enter the light realm were busy cultivating. Before the ten yearswas up, Ku Jian stepped out of seclusion. As she stepped out of aunty Iyan''s mountain, her father and mother stood before her.


    "Stinking girl! We have to wait so long just to see you!" her mother scolded, but Ku Jian only threw them a cold look and walked past them.


    "Ku Jian, stop right there!" her mother fumed.


    "My family name is Ou. I''m Jian Ou." she corrected, "Where is Elder Hu?" to this, everyone froze, except her parents.


    "Ou? I thought she said her family name was Ou... how...?" her mother started to ask the Ku clan chief, who sighed at his wife''s slow nature.


    "In the valley, the first name comes before the last." he explained.


    "Oh.." as she finally got it, she turned her attention back to her daughter whose eyes had just landed on Elder Hu behind them. Elder Hu saw Ku Jian''s eyes focus on him, and stiffened.


    "You dare leave home for so long and what is this about killing Elder Hu? Where did you learn this nonsense? Hurry up apologize to him, how can you behave like this when he was only following orders? Elder Hu, come forward and stand like a man, she can do nothing to you while I am here!" she scolded, but Ku Jian blinked before the hiding elder and struck immediately. Elder Hu was shocked but managed to block her attack in time.


    "Oh?! You are now at soul awakening? At fifty five? Jian, you are only fifteen years behind Tie Nse!" her mother said excitedly.


    Elder Hu did not know whether to laugh or cry. How can one trust the lady to protect them, when her attention span is so short?


    "I have information on your Brother Ed!" Elder Hu hurriedly said and Ku Jian paused. Her angry eyes turned excited.


    "Where? Where? Where is he?" she asked and the Elder sighed. How could he forget that the young miss'' one track mind is only a step higher than her mother''s attention span?


    "He is now a disciple of the Heaven alliance patriarch. That old pervert that day, he was the heaven alliance patriarch. The man has tried his best to hide your Brother Ed from you. But I suspect you will be able to meet him soon." Elder Hu hurriedly explained.


    "Really? Where?" Ku Jian asked excitedly.


    "Ed? Who is this?" Lady Ku asked in confusion?


    "I told you about this before.." the Ku clan chief sighed.


    "So what are you saying, that I don''t have good memory?" he regretted it the moment he said it. Seeing her turn around and scold him, he could only sigh.


    "Ed is Heaven alliance patriarch Tie Nse''s disciple." he explained, distracting her again.


    "Oh? Is he strong? Why is Jian so excited?" she asked.


    "The light realm. Word has it, he will also enter the light realm. As long as you go, you will meet him." Elder Hu explained to an excited Ku Jian.


    "Really? Really?" her excitement only heightened. Elder Hu sighed a relief. He had survived again.


    Just at that moment, a ringing tore through the sky with an orange glow not too far behind. Everyone froze.


    "Someone is breaking through to the heaven seeking stage. A glow that reached this far into our mountain range from where ever the person is, it can only be one person." the Ku clan chief speculated.


    "Who?" Lady Ku asked.


    "Tie Nse." he answered.


    "Who is that?" she asked and he sighed.


    Please, this is to inform all readers that due to health reasons, free chapters on all platforms has been suspended. I am currently trying to move to a site that offers paid platforms but for now all new chapters will be available on patr?on.com/towalkthemist.

 110 Preparations

    Ed stared at the giant feather he was holding with both hands, then he turned to look at the man beside him, but he was gone. He looked back at the feather and was met with it''s sharp pointy end. The sharp point released a kind of feeling in him. As though it would kill him. At that moment, he felt the feather double in weight as though threatening to fall. His head buzzed at this feeling. The weight was nothing, but why was he slightly scared? As he wondered about this, the weight continued to fluctuate.


    Tie Nse and the rest watched Ed get sucked into the illusion of the rock.


    "What kind of spirit awakening cultivator is this? He can handle the weight of the mountain?" Afia Nta said and Tie Nse sighed,


    "I''m not sure what method he is using to hold your rock up at this moment. Your rock risks possible damage if not destruction." he mumbled.


    "What?" Afia Nta could not quite catch his words.


    "Just come back ten years from now." Tie Nse said.


    "You promised me someone to hold it up for five hundred years. I will see you then."


    "Okay, that boy will just drop your stupid rock when we are ready to leave." Tie Nse said without care.


    "You would not dare."


    "You really think others care about this stupid rock, don''t you?" Tie Nse asked.


    "The way you talk reminds me of someone." Afia Nta said.


    "Yes, yes... that is why you almost killed me. You''ve said it before."


    "I will be back in Ten years." he said and vanished with the wind.


    "That man, what is he?" Nti Anem asked.


    "You have good eyes, energy manipulator. That is not a human being. This is the first holiday he has had in forever. His master got slain on this same rock and he held it up till this day. Why he holds it up, I couldn''t be bothered to know." Tie Nse said.


    "Will, Ed be okay?" Nti Anem asked.


    "If he is not careful, he will die. That old thing said that the rock is sinking into something called the river of testing. That means he must be sitting inside it at this moment." Tie Nse said.


    "I have never heard of this place." Nti Anem said.


    "Stay and protect him. I will be back in ten years." Tie Nse said and threw a slip into the air and it crackled into a teleportation array, he stepped through it and vanished with a wink.


    Ten years passed silently. Many hoping to enter the light realm were busy cultivating. Before the ten yearswas up, Ku Jian stepped out of seclusion. As she stepped out of aunty Iyan''s mountain, her father and mother stood before her.


    "Stinking girl! We have to wait so long just to see you!" her mother scolded, but Ku Jian only threw them a cold look and walked past them.


    "Ku Jian, stop right there!" her mother fumed.


    "My family name is Ou. I''m Jian Ou." she corrected, "Where is Elder Hu?" to this, everyone froze, except her parents.


    "Ou? I thought she said her family name was Ou... how...?" her mother started to ask the Ku clan chief, who sighed at his wife''s slow nature.


    "In the valley, the first name comes before the last." he explained.


    "Oh.." as she finally got it, she turned her attention back to her daughter whose eyes had just landed on Elder Hu behind them. Elder Hu saw Ku Jian''s eyes focus on him, and stiffened.


    "You dare leave home for so long and what is this about killing Elder Hu? Where did you learn this nonsense? Hurry up apologize to him, how can you behave like this when he was only following orders? Elder Hu, come forward and stand like a man, she can do nothing to you while I am here!" she scolded, but Ku Jian blinked before the hiding elder and struck immediately. Elder Hu was shocked but managed to block her attack in time.


    "Oh?! You are now at soul awakening? At fifty five? Jian, you are only fifteen years behind Tie Nse!" her mother said excitedly.


    Elder Hu did not know whether to laugh or cry. How can one trust the lady to protect them, when her attention span is so short?


    "I have information on your Brother Ed!" Elder Hu hurriedly said and Ku Jian paused. Her angry eyes turned excited.


    "Where? Where? Where is he?" she asked and the Elder sighed. How could he forget that the young miss'' one track mind is only a step higher than her mother''s attention span?


    "He is now a disciple of the Heaven alliance patriarch. That old pervert that day, he was the heaven alliance patriarch. The man has tried his best to hide your Brother Ed from you. But I suspect you will be able to meet him soon." Elder Hu hurriedly explained.


    "Really? Where?" Ku Jian asked excitedly.


    "Ed? Who is this?" Lady Ku asked in confusion?


    "I told you about this before.." the Ku clan chief sighed.


    "So what are you saying, that I don''t have good memory?" he regretted it the moment he said it. Seeing her turn around and scold him, he could only sigh.


    "Ed is Heaven alliance patriarch Tie Nse''s disciple." he explained, distracting her again.


    "Oh? Is he strong? Why is Jian so excited?" she asked.


    "The light realm. Word has it, he will also enter the light realm. As long as you go, you will meet him." Elder Hu explained to an excited Ku Jian.


    "Really? Really?" her excitement only heightened. Elder Hu sighed a relief. He had survived again.


    Just at that moment, a ringing tore through the sky with an orange glow not too far behind. Everyone froze.


    "Someone is breaking through to the heaven seeking stage. A glow that reached this far into our mountain range from where ever the person is, it can only be one person." the Ku clan chief speculated.


    "Who?" Lady Ku asked.


    "Tie Nse." he answered.


    "Who is that?" she asked and he sighed.

 110 The light realm opens 1

    They were right. Tie Nse had long known that disbanding the heaven alliance meant he could not use the light realm token in his hand for Ed. The only way the token becomes valid is if he becomes a heaven seeker. After he had left Ed under the sinking mountain, he went into seclusion under the frozen sea.


    Opening his eyes, he familiarized himself with the new feeling. He did not know how must time had passed. He had only told Old Iba to take Ed with him to enter the light realm with his disciples if he does not make it in time. At the state of heaven seeking, he did not need to walk out of the cave like he had entered. He could just faze out.


    He fazed out to the surface of the frozen sea to the shock of those walking above. They stared at his form in wonder as he vanished from their sight. He did not need a teleportation array for a distance that short as to the sinking mountain. When he arrived, Afia Nta was waiting at the base.


    "I thought you were not coming anymore. A pity." he said.


    "For you, that is." Tie Nse answered.


    "The boy lasted long. I see he is still alive."


    "I would have been shocked if your stupid rock could kill him." Tie Nse said casually, but Afia Nta did not answer. He continued to stare at Tie Nse with a complicated gaze.


    "Your power is greater now than before. You look even more like that boy around the eyes. You feel even more like him, even though just a little bit." Afia Nta said.


    "I''ve told you, I am not the boy you are looking for." Tie Nse said.


    "I don''t know what time or reality this is. So I cannot say for sure. But you should not be or you would have died by my hands." Afia Nta said.


    "Yes.. yes.." Tie Nse did not seem to mind his words.


    "You talk like him, you behave like him; when you are not acting like a pervert, you feel like him, you look like him, but I can kill you. So, you are not him." Afia Nta said solemnly, before vanishing from Tie Nse''s side and appearing in place of Ed under the mountain.


    Ed suddenly found himself standing next to Tie Nse. He was pulled too quickly from the illusion, his head spun and he could not stand straight. Nti Anem hurriedly held him up, so he does not fall.


    "How can you react this badly to coming out?" he said and Ed tried to steady his breathing. After a while, he looked up at Tie Nse who was staring fixed at Afia Nta''s form.


    "How can someone else be me?" Tie Nse scoffed.


    "Or you could be that person, at a different time." Nti Anem said and Tie Nse looked at him coldly.


    "You are walking with two people who are not really here, but are here nevertheless. Two people walking the mist. Thus, you have a high chance of experiencing it too. You meeting him, could just be that." Nti Anem said.


    "I met him before I met Ed, as a young man." Tie Nse said.


    "Still, the mist changes your existence in reality. Who knows, when you met Ed, you reality changed, even the you that met him at the time, had been changed. Besides, according to what I hear, you are still a child. How can you be a young man then?" Nti Anem mocked, but Tie Nse remained solemn.


    "It does not matter if my reality has changed or not. I will never be the man he describes." Tie Nse said and threw a slip into the air and a teleportation array crackled into life.


    They appeared inside a courtyard at the edge of a loud city. Ed was still disoriented and needed Nti Anem to help him into a room by the side to lay down. It did not take long before he fell into sleep. The moment he fell into deep sleep, Nti Anem stepped out of the room to meet Tie Nse sitting under a tree with a guard of wine in hand.


    "This must be desolate city. The light realm is about to open, the city is now filled with people from the sound of it." Nti Anem said and Tie Nse nodded, taking another swing of his wine. Nti Anem joined him under the tree and Tie Nse offered him some wine, but he refused.


    "I thought only those who have completed the one-three-six tree can participate in this, why is the city this full?" Nti Anem asked.


    "One-three-six? Those are for organizations. Those who have gotten to the stage of heaven seeking, can send in their disciples." Tie Nse said.


    "True. There are always hidden powers out there." Nti Anem nodded.


    "The light realm is a place those from the heaven seeking stage hope to enter. It holds the most amount of ethereal ores on any world, and the purest too. Even though those from the soul seeking stage can start using this to cultivate, it is very important for those of the heaven seeking above. It helps one survive a breakthrough to the next realm." Tie Nse said.


    "Yes, I heard that when one breaks through at that stage, one is essentially erupting one''s soul." Nti Anem said.


    "But there is no soul is there? One is truly only exploding in soul energy, only to absorb it back to the other bodies. But doing this, one''s physical body and other bodies may not survive. The ethereal ores help reattach what is left of the body and heal. It keeps one alive. The purer the ores, the better. Yet, the place with the purest ores, is the most dangerous for any from the soul realization stage upwards to enter." Tie Nse said.


    "It''s right there, yet you can not take it."

 111 The light realm opens 2

    "Yes, plus the age restriction of one being under hundred years, it is better to raise a disciple who has a stronger chance of surviving there to go bring back ores for their masters. Because of this, it is better to be an organization. Because they send in more people, and bring out more ores. It is now the greatest training ground for the young." Tie Nse said.


    "You will have to tell me all you know about that place since you have been there before." Nti Anem said.


    "What do you mean? I have only spent ten days in that place, why do you think those idiots think I am still a child?!" Tie Nse said begrudgingly and Nti Anem raised a brow.


    "When the light realm opens, it closes after four hours and opens again in not lesser than five years. People don''t age in there, it may seem like no time has passed, but it has. Though you grow at the pace outside and one''s cultivation grows slower there, it is not truly slow. It would take many a few decades to level up out here, but in there, you could level up in three to four thousand years."


    "Only three to four years out here. That is fast."


    "Yes. So, like others I went too. I was the youngest then, only fifty or so. During my time, this tomb I want to send Ed to was popular. You see, many that had gone the last time came back with maps. The did not understand what kind of energy this was and were planing to go back, hoping to retrieve treasures. So, by the time the light realm opened for me to enter, everyone was aiming to be the first to reach there. Many powers made strong arrays to send their disciples there first. When the light realm opened, everyone was rushing for it''s centre; where the tomb was hidden. I too was one of them. Many soon discovered that the tomb was dangerous. When one came too close, they would die horribly. So, we sat around for ten days, then I made my move. When I came close enough, the energy wrapped around me and ejected me from the light realm." to Tie Nse''s words, Nti Anem frowned.


    "How did the energy feel? Is this energy rampant in the light realm?" he asked.


    "Feel? I slightly felt the boy''s energy once when I first talked to him about being my disciple. I did not dare touch it, but it was familiar." Tie Nse said, and Nti Anem fell silent.


    "Tell me more about the boy. I am his master, I need to know." Tie Nse said.


    "I know very little. He is a prince, only son of his parents, heir to two kingdoms, someone sent him here to die." he said and Tie Nse frowned.


    "While I followed him as a roaming soul, I saw when he received his quest, I was waiting for a moment of vulnerability to posses him. That woman; the oracle, something about her seemed familiar, from the time I was alive, fighting with Mother Slah. Something about her seemed ancient. I felt that she had seen me perched around him, but she did nothing to make me suspicious. Still, I felt she saw me even though she did nothing. She definitely sent him there to die. Why? I don''t know." Nti Anem said.


    "Where?"


    "The Mist. She said he needed fortification on his quest. This was normal. Many took such trials to fortify them on their quest. It kept them alive and made sure they survived. But no one ever sends one to the rippers. The only test they can administer, is the trial of the mist. She definitely wants him to die in here." he said.


    "What quest was he on?" Tie Nse frowned.


    "I don''t claim to understand the way his mind works. I only followed him around later on. He went to save her. I am not sure why he took the quest. But he followed her around for a while. I can not tell you about that because I could not follow him while she was there. There is something wrong with that sister in white. That girl...." he started to say.


    "Shut up!" Ed''s voice sounded from inside, startling the two to look his way, but the door to the room was firmly shut.


    "You are awake?" Tie Nse asked, "What''s so bad about talking about your darling eh? I can''t believe you are so young, yet already following girls. Even a brooding boy like you knows how to follow girls?"


    Nti Anem walked over and open the room door when he heard no response from Ed and found that Ed was still lying down in deep sleep.


    "He is sleeping?" he asked with a frown.


    "Sleeping?" Tie Nse asked coming closer. Seeing Ed''s dead-like sleeping form, he paused.


    "He is reacting to someone talking about her in such deep sleep?" Nti Anem asked.

 112 The light realm opens 3

    "Are you sure he was talking to us? Bad dreams? Oh? This boy is getting more normal as the days pass. A girl waiting for him back home to go save, now bad dreams..hoho..." Tie Nse chuckled.


    "True. Could be bad dreams. Or he just does not like one speaking about the sister in white...." Nti Anem said and the air around Edward dropped to freezing temperatures..."


    "Aya! He is actually responding in his sleep?" Tie Nse and Nti Anem retreated quickly to a safe distance.


    "I see..." Nti Anem said solemnly.


    "What?.. What do you see?" Tie Nse asked.


    "He is your disciple, figure it out." he responded and left quickly.


    "Disciple? This boy never cared to bow to me!" Tie Nse complained.


    Ed slept for five days, only waking up the day the light realm was to open. This worried Tie Nse, that he may not wake up in time to enter the light realm. His worry disappeared when Ed''s door opened and he stepped out into courtyard as the sun peaked from the horizon.


    "Good, you are awake. If you slept any longer, I would have taken you there and thrown you into the light realm to sleep more." Tie Nse said.


    "What day is today?" Ed asked.


    "The day you enter the light realm. It opens in a few hours. No matter, relax. We will be leaving soon." Tie Nse said.


    "I slept that long?" Ed asked, then looked at himself carefully. He rotated the energy in his core only to find out it no more felt the same.


    "That stupid rock is heavy, it''s understandable." Tie Nse said.


    "You broke threw into a new stage." Nti Anem said, emerging from his room. To this, Tie Nse paused, but no look of surprise entered his eyes.


    "How does it feel?" he asked Ed.


    "This is the spirit merging stage?" Ed asked, "How?"


    "That is a strange rock." was all Tie Nse said, "We must leave. The light realm table is a while away. One can only teleport there at close range. When we are thirty minutes away, only then can we use an array. We will meet up with Old Iba on the way."


    The Light realm table is a large slab of black iron stone suspended fifty thousand feet above the pine plains, thousands of kilometres from desolate city. If one looked in the direction of the light realm table as the sun rose, or see high into the clouds, one could see the crackling of light one after the other and think it a display of tiny streaks of lightening on the table. But it was in fact, teleportation arrays crackling to life.


    From each array, stepped out thousands of cultivators, all with their heads held high as they stepped unto the light realm table. But these were just smaller sects and factions. The nine powers were yet to arrive, nor the hidden powers of the realms. One would think it was not easy for small powers to gain entrance into the light realm, but it was easy. They just needed to have the ability to employ high ranking cultivators to fill up their one-three-six tree. Many smaller powers would come together for the opportunity to send their disciples into the light realm. The table was bustling with cultivators of different calibres. All those representing their one-three-six tree had to be present with their disciples.


    Soon, larger powers started arriving, causing those around to jump into excited discussions.


    "Old man Ubue and Madam Ge teamed up to send people in?" someone said.


    "Isn''t that Me Tie behind them? I heard he has been training with Old Man Ubue for a while now."


    "The dark Valley is here!" someone said. At this, hooded people stepped out of an array, faces hidden under their cloaks.


    One by one, different powers arrived. Many looked upon their idols in wonder, their enemies in anger and their rivals, with scorn. This was normal, as many disciples would clash with one another on the way to the top.


    "The five great sects!" someone exclaimed at the new groups that just stepped out of their portal. No matter how powerful one was, distinguished one seemed or proud one was of their different clans, groups and sects, they knew they were nothing compared to the nine powers... or better yet, eight powers.


    "It''s the spirit lantern''s veiled ones." a young man drooled at the veiled girls behind the spirit lantern''s lady Asin. Though there were many beautiful disciples and elders behind the sect leader, these mysteriously veiled girls held the attention of drooling men and anger of envious girls. It was said that one look at the veiled ones and a man would be trapped, tied to their will for a thousand years. This knowledge did nothing to stop the men from wondering at what could be under the veil.


    "The Heaven sect has arrived!" someone exclaimed and all attention moved to those stepping out of an array.

 113 The light realm opens 4

    Those from the Heaven sect were considered fallen gods. They may have been great beings before, but now, they were not even great enough to be classified one of the great sects. They were now human, thus, humans could scorn them.


    Those from the heaven sect lead by Protector A''miem, stepped out from the crackling array into an awkward atmosphere.


    "They actually came?"


    "Do they even have tokens?"


    "How were they given tokens?"


    "Looking at their group, they must have employed some hidden giants to fill up their one-three-six tree."


    "I don''t recognize some of those behind them." the discussions were hot.


    Those from the heaven sect felt awkward standing there, but kept a blank face to it all. They may not be one of the great powers anymore, but they can hold their own. Sect leader Di Tietie and Protector A''miem had not failed. Immediately they had settled into the sect, a selection was held to decide those going into the light realm ten years later. After picking about a hundred of them, the sect pulled all their resources and concentrated on raising these hundred within ten years. They gained access to secret texts Protector A''miem had collected and were personally helped with their cultivation. Within the hundred, four groups were formed with each, it''s own leader. They cultivated together, trained together, so that they could survive inside the light realm. They were ready.


    Just when many were discussing them, the Jade Phoenix alliance arrived. And again, the audience were hit with another array of beautiful ladies. Although the Jade Phoenix alliance was a mixed alliance, it was known that Lady Mi had a thing for accepting beautiful girls. Over time, those who rose in rank in the alliance, ended up those who she agreed with their looks, or were just too talented, she could overlook their lacking appearance. As such, there was another wave of drooling young men and envious girls as the group made their appearance. They completely ignored the crowd of lower sects and clans and looked towards the five great sects.


    "You are early." Lady Mi said.


    "You like to make an appearance." Lady Asin answered. It was not known if the different powers had made an alliance for this light realm journey and one did not dare to ask. At this moment, two arrays crackled to life.


    "And here comes the true kings of appearances. Arriving late just to make a scene." Lady Asin said.


    The Ke and Ku clan arrived almost at the same time. They did not bother with the assessing crowd and made their way to the front of the table, where other six powers stood. Many could not help but stare at the girl walking behind the Ku clan head. She was followed by a group of two girls and six young men and behind them, about three hundred young cultivators.


    "Who is that?"


    "I heard the Ku clan had a young miss."


    "Another beauty has appeared!" someone said excitedly.


    The light realm was an opportunity for the young to level up really fast, so as many slots powers had to send in their disciples, the better. The number of slots one could secure for their disciples depended on their ability. It is not known who gives the tokens. It only known that if the one-three-six tree is completed, an auditor from the nine powers will arrive to confirm this and enter their information into the light realm pull. After that, one only knows that a token with the number of accepted slots appears in the power''s possession. Till this day, it is still a mystery. Many say that the light realm is still a live and makes the decision it''s self. The true story, only the two clans and alliances knew.


    When Jia Lin, who is a leader of the four groups in the heaven sect team saw Ku Jian, his heart quickened. It''s her. She is from the Ku clan? His reaction was clearly seen by the girl beside him.


    "Lady Jian, it''s been long." the Ke clan young master, Ke Kong stared at Ku Jian with a small smile, but she was too busy looking around. Her calm and cold demure couples with her soft soft blue dress floating in the wind made her out as ethereal. Seeing her ignore him, he did not frown, but chuckled instead.


    An array crackled to life when many were not paying attention, and Old Iba and his disciples stepped out. After them, another array followed and Tie Nse walked out.


    "It''s Patriarch Nse!" someone exclaimed. This caused Old Iba to pout. He came and no one noticed, but this old pervert just put out a foot and it caught someone''s eye.


    Attention turned, as they looked behind Tie Nse in anticipation, hoping to see for the first time. The person who has been causing much storm in the cultivation world.

 114 The light realm opens 5

    Three people stepped out of the array. One they knew as the energy manipulator Nti Anem, the other; they had never seen before.


    "It''s him, isn''t it?" someone whispered.


    "Patriarch Tie''s disciple? It has got to be." another said.


    "He looks a bit over twenty."


    "I thought he would be younger."


    "I thought he would be more handsome."


    Many quickly assessed Ed, but he did not respond. It was either he did not care, or he looked down on them. Nevertheless, Ed maintained a blank face as he followed Tie Nse to the front of the light realm table. At this moment, His appearance shocked people that had seen him before.


    "It''s him." Lady Mi heard her daughter say and raised a brow at this.


    "You know him?" she asked.


    "I met him while travelling back to the alliance, mother." she answered.


    "Impossible!" Jia Lin''s eyes rounded out into disbelief.


    "Brother Lin?" the girl beside him asked.


    "How can it be him?" Jia Lin did not spare her a look. The crowd gave way for Ed to pass. As they walked past the Heaven sect, they were stared down by the heaven sect disciples who felt their patriarch left them because of this disciple of his. To this, neither Ed, not Tie Nse paid them any mind. As people parted way for them, Ed''s figure finally entered Ku Jian''s eyes. The next second, she flashed before him, making many gasp.


    Confusion turned to more confusion as she grabbed his arm instantly and called like a little child, "Brother Ed!" to this, many froze; Tie Nse and Ku clan chief, more than others. He was worried for his daughter and Tie Nse was worried Ed would kill her. This boy was unpredictable, why would you just act without thought?!


    "Mn" was all Ed answered, giving her a blank look.


    "How could you have left without me? This old pervert is not a good person, be very careful!" she stared daggers at Tie Nse.


    "Mn." Ed answered and Tie Nse turned indignant.


    "This boy, whose disciple are you?!" Tie Nse asked but Ed just walked ahead, leaving him behind to fume. To this, Ku Jian scoffed and followed Ed. Nti Anem did not bother with Tie Nse and followed after Ed.


    "Old Tie, you still can''t control this your boy. Ha ha.." Old Iba broke into a loud laugh.


    "You come try if you want."


    "No thank you. I want to live." Old Iba said.


    " Ya! are you intending to have your disciples follow him?" Tie Nse asked.


    "I want my disciples to live!" Old Iba said and escaped with his disciples.


    This scene caused many to raise their brows. What kind of situation was this? The disciple does not care about the master, Old Iba would not dare have his disciples follow the boy, the cold and celestial Lady Jian turns into an adorable little girl so fast. Many were confused.


    "Tie Nse, you came." Lady Asin said, but her eyes followed Ed who had Ku Jian gripping to his arm.


    "Of course! Offloading this disciple for five years, I could not miss this opportunity." Tie Nse said. Many could see he was serious. Did this man think the light realm was a holiday spot?


    "So, this is your disciple." Lady Mi said, "A bit disappointing."


    "Boy, come closer!" Sect leader A''yong said to Ed.


    "Why are you shouting at Brother Ed? This old thing, you do not have anything more to do with life?" Ku Jian scolded him.


    "Jian! Come back here!" Ku clan head ordered.


    "no!" Ku Jian answered back.


    "When will this realm be open?" Ed finally spoke. To this, many froze. Was he just going to ignore the ancient land sect leader. This made the entire ancient land sect angry.


    "You train your disciple well, Tie Nse. He thinks himself a god." Sect master Aya chuckled, his childish face not taking the situation seriously.


    "I will reprimand my disciple the way I want when he is wrong." Tie Nse snorted and Sect master Aya smiled.


    "It''s not like you can reprimand him if he does something wrong anyway, scoff!.. acting all cool." Old Iba mumbled, but was still heard.


    "Ya!" Tie Nse frowned, then looked to Ed, only to find him looking him dead in the eye, causing him to choke.

 115 The light realm opens 6

    "You have not answered me." Ed said to Tie Nse blankly. His actions were already seen in the eyes of everyone as arrogance. Many were fuming at his total disregard, especially theancient sect disciples.


    "You...!" they fumed.


    "Soon." Tie Nse answered, "Let''s wait over there..." he led Ed away to the other side of the light realm table. He knew that his disciple''s temper was unpredictable. His complete disregard for people is not an act of arrogance. He just does not feel he is part of this world. He was almost too one track minded. But he also understood the temperament of the eight powers. Ed would not interact well with them because of his aloof attitude. Looking at him standing quite away, Tie Nse sighed.


    "He was not always like this, you know." Nti Anem said and Tie Nse raised a brow.


    "The mist breaks you." he continued solemnly.


    At that moment, there was a whipping sound crashing though the air. The light realm table hummed a subtle Hu sound under their feet.


    "It''s happening." someone said.


    Just then, the whipping sound could not only be heard, but seen in form of a vertical whirl pool whipping at the front of the light realm table.


    "There are people wish to enter in secret?" Ed asked and Tie Nse raised a brow. To this, Nti Anem laughed and asked, "Are you sure those are actually people?"


    Tie Nse heard this and frowned.


    Many powers looked at each other for a second, before signalling their disciples to enter the whirl pool. No one needed telling. Many jumped in groups at a time. Ed was not in a hurry. He cared not for any treasures. His goal was the burial chamber.


    While many were excited to jump in, Ku Jian was being a child.


    "Brother Ed, where have you been?"


    "Brother Ed, I''m also going into the light realm. Jian Jian is going to follow you!"


    "Brother Ed, did the old pervert do something bad to you?"


    "Brother Ed, he may be powerful, but this old pervert is of questionable character!" to her words, Ed said nothing, but Tie Nse was about to explode in anger,as he glared at her chirpy form.


    Nti Anem watched Ed''s interaction with Ku Jian curiously. He may not have known Ed long since entering the mist, but he could not understand why Ed seemed to ignore her, but did not chase her away. It was almost as though he tolerated her. This in it''s self was odd for him to wrap his head around. So what could be the reason for his indulgence for her behavior?


    "We should join." Nti Anem said seeing that most of those participating had jumped in.


    "Go on boy, I have edged the directions to Nti Anem''s mind." Tie Nse said and Ed glanced at him, before dashing forward with Nti Anem in tow. Nti Anem glanced at Ku Jian still grabbing onto Ed''s hand and frowned. Was this girl intending to follow them? He was not the only one thinking this. The Ku clansmen were doing just the same. She was supposed to lead their group. But she is sticking to this boy like a fly following a dead body. And flies without advisers follow corpses into the grave. But could they admit they were flies? She was after all, the adviser. If she herself has become a fly, then what were they? Ed dashed into the whirl pool and the Ku clan followed suit.


    After they dashed in, a group of ghastly pale people appeared on the light realm table.


    "Hoho... I was wondering how long you intended to hide before making your move." Tie Nse said to those that just appeared and everyone paused.


    "Demon people."


    "They were actually here all this time?"


    "Why were they hiding?"


    "No one actually sensed them?"


    Tie Nse exposing that they had been all this time watching in secret, the Demon people leader looked his way.


    "The legendary Tie Nse, it seems the rumors of your unparallelled strength and wisdom are true." the demon leader said.


    "Not really, my disciple saw you and made an off statement that caused me to suspect he was talking about you." Tie Nse said.


    "Oh? That boy? My disciples will have to keep an eye out for him in the light realm." the demon leader said and Tie Nse nodded, "Please do."


    The demon people rushed into the whirl pool and the demon leader and his entourage remaining only nodded to the other powers and vanished.


    "You have no fear, Tie Nse" the Ke clan head said.


    "Sometimes I wonder if you wish to kill your disciple." Lady Mi said.


    "Even if he really was the one who found them out, telling them so out-rightly, you are painting a target on his back! Do what you wish with your disciple, but my daughter is with him!" the Ku clan chief scolded Tie Nse.


    "I would be shocked if they could. If I did not succeed in killing him, no one can." Tie Nse said coldly and vanished.

 116 City of desire 1

    Ed stepped out to the other side and looked round at grey rocks and grey grass. Even the sky stood grey and the blue hue of the two suns above it were, defeated by the blandness all around, as it''s light reaches the ground already filtered grey. Everything looked grey, no matter what colour of garment one wore, it looked grey. Only Ed''s robes remained ink black.


    "Where are we?" Ed asked Nti Anem


    "Afiong plains." Ed heard Ku Nam say as he approached them. Ed had long seen him since the light realm table but did not acknowledge him.


    "We meet again." Ku Nam said.


    "Afiong plains?" Ed asked in answer.


    "Those suns up there are but four moons spinning around each other at such speed, they look like two moons standing still." Ku Jian answered. She frowned at this cousin of hers that had just walked up.


    "How do you know brother Ed?" she asked.


    "We met a few times." Ku Nam answered, "Are you intending that we follow his lead?"


    To this question, Ku Jian''s frown only deepened. More than anything, she wanted to follow her brother Ed even though she knew she was in charge of leading the Ku clan through the light realm. Taking them along with her would be a big inconvenience for brother Ed and leaving them behind was allowing this cousin of hers to do as he liked. Even though he was still of low cultivation, she did not underestimate him one bit. She glanced at Ed for a moment, but he was staring at the blue moons.


    "Time for us to leave." Ed said to Nti Anem and he nodded in return. At his words, she made her choice.


    "Ku Fre!" she called and a muscular man appeared before her.


    "You will lead the team in my absence. You know the plan my father talked about. You can execute in my stead." she said and the man glanced at Ku Nam, who was staring at Ed, before nodding. Nti Anem threw a slip into the air and a portal crackled into life, then stepped through. Ed followed with Ku Jian still grasping tight his sleeve.


    As they stepped into the portal they discovered that they did not appear a distance away. Instead, they stood in a dark space with many doors.


    "Ah, I see... this is a web point." Nti Anem said.


    "Father said that all portals lead to the web point. The heart of all doors. If you can figure out which door leads to where you wish to go, you can enter through, no matter how far." Ku Jian explained.


    "Which door, huh? Ed?" he asked.


    "It''s not behind any of these doors." Ed answered.


    "I see, these doors do not lead to everywhere then. They must lead to nearby places." Nti Anem said, and Ku Jian blinked in confusion. He brought out a compass and whispered to it. The compass''s pin spun for a while, then landed on a door.


    "Energy manipulator." Ku Jian said in disbelief.


    "Let''s go." Nti Anem urged and they opened the door and stepped through. The moment they came out the other way, they all frowned, but for different reasons. They were standing on a busy street in a large city, at least they thought it was a city. Traders were selling grey food, clothes and weapons, people were arguing on the street with spectators surrounding them, the street was bustling with people. People who were born and raised in the light realm.


    "This is where you wished to go?" Ku Jian looked round the street filled with women dressed in revealing outfits and frowned. She clutched unto Ed''s sleeve even harder.


    Nti Anem looked down on his compass and frowned. He could not understand how this light realm could break his enchantment.


    Ed felt a familiar energy in the air. In the past, he could only translate this energy as a soft flowery smell, but the him now, could feel it as it truly is, a dominant energy.


    "This place can break the power of Slah?" Nti Anem asked in disbelief.


    "Slah? It has been long since any has called her by that name. Who are you?" a voice asked. They all turned to see a dark skinned bald man in maroon robes standing behind them; at least Ed saw him in color.


    "You are the first person I have met that knew that name. I should be the one asking." Nti Anem responded.


    "I am just a traveller." the man said.


    "Quite a colourful traveller in a grey world." Ed commented.


    "I could say the same for you." the man responded, all through, a soft smile never leaving his face. To he and Ed''s words, Nti Anem and Ku Jian frowned.


    "See? Only you think I am colourful." the man said and Ed frowned. He had suspected that no one could see that his pasty skin, dark hair and black robes had not turned grey like every other person. The only other person that was wearing colour in this world was this bald man. Even his dark skin was clear as day.


    "Why is this so?" Ed asked.


    "Let''s go inside and have a chat. Standing outside the arena is dangerous." the man said and walked inside a store with engraved sign board saying Library.

 117 City of desire 2

    When they walked in, they discovered this was no library at all. There were no books or parchments. Instead people sat around drinking.


    "A drinking parlor?" Nti Anem asked, but the man said nothing. Only continued leading them past tables till they got to a secluded room. They sat as he served tea.


    "You are a traveller your self." the man said.


    "Isn''t everyone?" Nti Anem asked.


    "Many in the light realm were born here." he answered.


    "But if so, then what happens when the light realm closes? How can people still remain?" Nti Anem asked.


    "The light realm only closes to outsiders. It does not close at all. It is just inaccessible for those born outside the light realm. Yet those born here can not leave. Unless they become an outsider."


    "How?" Ku Jian asked curiously.


    "Where are we?" Ed asked. He couldn''t careless about the workings of the light realm.


    "The city of desire."


    "How do we get to the three paths crossing?" Nti Anem asked.


    "How do you know of that name?" the man asked.


    "What name?" Nti Anem asked.


    "Slah. No one has spoken that name for millennia." he answered.


    "Where I come from, this is a household name." Nti Anem answered.


    "Ah, so far away then?" the man nodded vaguely.


    "You seem as though you know this place." Nti Anem asked.


    "The highest level of the tower." the man said.


    "What?" Nti Anem asked.


    "Climb to the highest level of the tower. At the top, you can leave the city of desire." he answered.


    "What tower?" Ed asked.


    "At thecentre of the city. But, before you can gain access to the tower, you have to be acknowledged by the library." the man explained.


    "Here?" Ku Jian asked, "Isn''t this just a restaurant?"


    "What restaurant? Many here are waiting to hear their results." he explained.


    "How do we take this test. Ed asked.


    To this question, the man stood up. His flowing robe fluttering as though getting dusted. "Come." he said and they followed him. He did not walk out the room. He instead knocked twice on the wall behind him and the wall slid open. He took them through a corridor that seemed to lead downwards under the building.


    "What does this test comprise of?" Nti Anem asked.


    "No one really knows. It is different for everyone." the man answered.


    They soon stood before a row of identical doors. "Each person, a door." he said.


    "Where does it lead?" Ku Jian asked, "can''t I just go with brother Ed?"


    "One must take this test alone." he answered.


    Ed glanced at the reluctant Ku Jian, "Let go." he said and she did as asked, allowing him to step before a door, open it and enter. Ku Jian took the door next to Ed, leaving only Nti Anem and the man outside.


    Seeing them enter, Nti Anem finally turned to the man, "Everything may look black and white, but I know your face." he said and the man raised a brow.


    "Do you actually believe I will enter the room knowing who you are, Baskii?" he asked.


    "Who are you to have such keen eyes?... No, odd memories?" the man asked.


    "I''m older than I look. Besides, even in my original body, you would not have recognized me." Nti Anem said.


    "Knowing who you are, god of desires, do you think I will take your test?" Nti Anem asked.


    "Since you know, you still let them take it?" Baskii asked in amusement.


    "I could care less about the girl. As for the other, if you made things difficult for him, or the test even border trying to kill him, you will be doing his master a great service." he answered.


    "What an odd boy, he is. Something about him makes me uncomfortable. But you, the test is the best way to transverse the tower. You must take it." Baskii said.


    "Do you think Iam stupid? If possible, this entire city is one of your creation. I am sure I can just walk through the tower. Besides, seeing how well you have hidden so long, it would not be good if someone found out where you are."


    "Or you could just die here, the secret with you." Baskii said and Nti Anem snorted.


    "The way you are now, you do not have the ability. Besides, I fought in the war, I know how you fall." Nti Anem said and Baskii frowned deeply.


    "Who are you?" he asked.


    "Fear not. I was her left hand, I mean you no harm. But I will not play your games."


    "Apteil... you have not died? What do you want?" Baskii asked.


    "Just do as you will with the boy. It will be good for him to gain some experience. I would be shocked if you could subdue him."


    "Even though I am not as strong as I used to be, I can still kill a little boy." Baskii said, "When he enters the tower, it will be hard keep his life."


    "Then a bet then, for old time sake. Kill him if you can." Nti Anem said with a smile.

 118 City of desire 3

    All Ed saw was grassland full of color. He looked behind him and saw miles of it without the door he came in through anywhere in sight. A soft breeze rolled through the grass waving it around. He felt the wind flutter his dark robes, washing a feeling of calm down his bones. He walked for a while, but could see nothing else but grass.


    He laid down on the grass and looked up at the moving clouds. It made him relax after a while, and he dared to close his eyes.


    "Edward.." he heard a familiar voice call and his eyes shut open. He found himself surrounded by heavily armed men, trapped in a cage in a dark dungeon. On the other side of the cage, a familiar face slowly sunk into the soil.


    "Edward..." she seemed to say, but her lips did not move.


    "No..." he rushed for her sinking form, but was blocked by a sharp sword swinging his way. He swayed out of the the way and pulled out his sword too. A fight ensued between him and those in the cage. They tried to keep him in, he did not spare them his Yhenxia sword one bit.


    Slashing wildly, his eyes kept wandering to the figure sinking into the sand.


    "Move!" he bellowed, his internal energy whipping wildly around him. The energy slapped into the armed men, crushing them to dust. Ed rushed to the cage door, but it would not budge no matter what he did.


    Slash after slash, swinging wildly at the iron bars, his eyes deadly red, his hands cracked an bleeding, he watched the soi take the figure completely.


    He opened his eyes to find himself standing outside the door, in the hall of doors, Ku Jian to one side, Nti Anem to the other and the man in purple robes before him, frowning deeply.


    Ed''s energy was still spinning wildly as a deadly killing intent sipped from him, into the air, soffocating not just those around, but the entire city of desire, making many pause and look towards the library.


    "Who has this kind of killing intent?" someone asked, coughing up blood. He was not the only one.


    "This killing intent is accompanied by a deadly energy. It has to be. Why else could it paralyse the entire city?" another said.


    "This is bad! I feel as though my insides are rotting!" someone said.


    "Call the city lord!"


    Inside the city lord''s mansion, the residing elders appeared before a young man who looked no older than twenty.


    "Lord!" they bowed.


    "It is coming from the library! We need to go over and check it out!" another said.


    "Do nothing!" the boy said.


    "Lord?" they asked.


    "That man is there, nothing will happen..." he said and the elders frowned in confusion, but he did not care. He looked towards the direction of the library.


    "Will he come out this time?" he asked.


    Back at the hall of doors, Nti Anem hurried back several steps, "Ed! It''s an illusion!" he said hurriedly.


    "I know." Ed said and his energy settled as he retracted his killing intent. He looked towards Baskii and struck him a dangerous look, "never do that again." he said and started to walk away. Ku Jian remained stuck in place, trembling as she looked at Ed''s leaving back.

 119 The towers first level 1

    Nti Anem sighed a relief after seeing Ku Jian return from her shock and follow after Ed, then looked at Baskii in anger.


    "Tests like that could kill him, and us as well." he said, then his eyes followed after Ku Jian''s leaving back with frown. This woman is clearly scared, but still followed Ed anyway, he thought.


    "It was not really a test. This place is called the library. A place where knowledge is stored. It forces people to live their fears and collect what it learns from them."


    "So the knowledge stored here are gotten from people. Clever. Never use that knowledge in the tower. People will die." Nti Anem said, then followed after Ed. Baskii only frowned but followed after him too. When they returned to the room they were in before, they found Ed and Ku Jian sitting and waiting for them. On the other side of the door to the room, they could hear an argument going on.


    "Should we go down and look?" someone said.


    "Do you dare?" another commented.


    "Standing around here won''t help either."


    "That kind of killing intent, the person must be dangerous."


    "Why hasn''t the city lord sent people yet?"


    "Do you think this a place people can make a fuss? The city guards respect this place as a holy ground."


    "Isn''t this person''s existence a nuisance?" another countered.


    Discussions were hot. Regardless, Ed sat without care and Ku Jian sat staring at him with innocent eyes. Seeing this scene, Nti Anem sighed inside. This girl has soon forgotten her fear for Ed in such a short amount of time.


    "Can we enter the tower now?" Ed asked Baskii


    "Of course. After taking the test, the library has a record of you now. So, you will be able to enter the tower." Baskii said and Ed nodded and got up. Before opening the door, he paused and looked back at Baskii.


    "There is a strange energy here. A familiar energy. Light. White light. The purest ever felt. Where is this coming from?" Ed asked. To this, Baskii smiled.


    "Not many can say they have felt light that pure. Where did you first feel it, to be this familiar."


    "I travelled with it once. I need to find it again. It needs me." he said solemnly and Baskii''s smiled widened.


    "Only darkness claims to know light''s requirement for it''s existence. The purer the light, the darker it''s companion. How dark can you be for light so bright to need you?" Baskii asked and Ed froze. His mind wandered at the man''s words. Was that it? He was not worthy to be needed by her, that is why he is here? Her light was so pure, so bright, he was not enough then? Enough what? Darkness?


    "Ed..." Ku Jian felt the air around Ed change dangerously, so she tugged on his clothes. Outside, those by the door heard voices from inside, but could not make out what was being said. They were about to raise their voice and insist that those inside come out, when a cold sipped into their bones. This was not killing intent like before. This was despair. The aura seemed to suffocate them, yet they felt their hairs stand.


    Danger!


    They all retreated the the farthest corner of the library, not minding what they hit on the way.


    "Ed, time in the mist is different! As long as you find the right point in time, you can return! Until then, groom yourself to whatever you deem necessary!" Nti Anem said anxiously. This was the worst thing that could happen. If Ed went on the rampage and killed people, this would be fine. But if he fell into hopelessness, he would die!


    He could see Ed''s form look as though turning into a misty illusion. This scared Ku Jian and she hurriedly tried to grab his sleeve but her hand passed through him.


    "You have all the time, but only you can return and finish the quest! You have no choice! You either become good enough to go back or she dies!" Nti Anem persuaded urgently.

 120 The towers first level 2

    Ed felt things melt into each other. His mind seemed to be lost in a misty forest. Nti Anem''s urgent voice seemed to penetrate the mist and reach his ears.


    Yes! There was no one but him to fulfil the quest. There was no other outcome but his return. He will leave this mist and return just in time to save her life. That is the only outcome. At this, Ed''s eyes cleared.


    Seeing that he was better, Ku Jian and Nti Anem sighed a relief. Both wished they could tear Baskii apart as they slapped him a glare.


    "What nonsense are you playing at?!" Ku Jian fummed.


    Ed turned to look at Baskii dangerously. "You think I dare not kill you?" he asked.


    "Speaking is not a crime." Baskii said in amusement.


    "The next time your energy touches me, I will grab onto it. You will die." Ed responded.


    "Oh? Quite daring words, traveller." Baskii said.


    "You wished to look into my mind. You are welcomed to. But be prepared to never leave." Ed warned.


    "The mist is all I see. Your mind? Your past? Do you even have any left? The mist has taken all of it. I wonder though, if you are so far gone, why are you still alive? Is it the light? It it her?" Baskii asked and Ed turned away and opened the door.


    He stepped out to a deadly quiet library, but cared little for those staring at him in fear. He made his way for the exit with Ku Jian tailing behind him. Nti Anem threw Baskii one last glare before leaving with them.


    On a table nearby, a young man watched those leaving with an odd smile on his face.


    "I see the light realm is going to be interesting this time around." he said and the girl sitting beside him frowned.


    "Which one do you think that aura came from?" she asked him.


    "Who cares. We must make sure to go to the tower and watch their progress." he answered.


    "Does brother Ah think they are as strong as you?" she asked and he chuckled without care, when they suddenly heard someone on the next table say something that caught their interest.


    "It''s him! Now we know why patriarch abandoned the entire sect to protect that boy as his disciple." a girl on the other table said.


    "We are not sure it is him that released that aura. It could be the energy manipulator or Lady Jian." the man beside her protested


    "It''s him." the last on the table said and they all turned to him.


    "Brother Jia, how..." the girl asked.


    "It''s him. It can only be him." Jia Lin said solemnly. They could notice his hands clench around his cup.


    "Does it matter? It does not mean he has the ability to back up that power. He has to grow first! Brother Jia, he is still not your match!" the girl protested.


    At their conversation, the young man on the other table chuckled, "Interesting." he said.


    The girl beside him turned abruptly to those on the other table and they paused.


    "Sorry, I over heard a bit. Who was it you said had that aura?" she asked and they glanced at each other.


    "Why should we tell you this?" Jia Lin asked. He had noticed that others turned to listen when they heard her ask loudly.


    "The way I see it, you all do not seem to like him. What does it matter sharing information about your enemy? Even if someone does not kill them for you, you may be helping others make their lives difficult." she chuckled. To this, many in the library nodded.


    Jia Lin but sneered at her, "As if it would be that easy. The only thing known about him is his name. I do know where he is from, but even that tribe had only adopted him after he had grown up. At the time I stumbled upon him, he was no one, so I did not bother to know more. Little is known, even back in our continent. Do you know how far those old folks are going to know a little bit more?" he said.


    "That mysterious? But there is at least still something. Share that." she said.


    "We only know that he is the disciple of the most feared patriarch. A man who entered heaven seeking at age hundred and four or so. His master seems to be afraid of him. He is accompanied by an energy manipulator and ¡­ Sorry, we can''t say who she is for our own safety. But him, Ed he is called. He is probably the one who released that aura and killing intent from before." the girl beside Jia Lin rushed to tell her.

 121 The towers first level 3

    Ed and the rest made their way towards the centre of the city. There, stood a large tower. They could tell this tower was so big, it took up half the city. This was because they could not see it''s sides but could only look up. There was no one guarding the doors, allowing all to enter and leave as they liked. But Ed could guess that only those who have taken the library''s test can even dare approach.


    They walked in without much people even sparing them a glance.


    "Buy your fights! Buy your fights!" a boy said from behind a counter, but many just walked past him. When he saw Ed''s company arrive, his eyes sparkled and called for them.


    "Hey, newcomers! Come and buy a fight! No fight, no rising up the tower!" he said. Nti Anem approached him curiously.


    "Explain. How does one get to the top and what are the rules?" he asked.


    "The top? Isn''t that a bit too soon? Just worry about winning a fight first." the boy said.


    "Since you wont talk, there is no need to waste my time with you." he said and walked away.


    "Wait! Fine... I''ll tell you if you buy a fight." the boy said, but Nti Anem did not care. He led Ed towards the stairs.


    "Amateurs! If you don''t fight, you can''t climb the tower." the boy sneered. He was right. A lot of those who had ignored him were flung from the stairs the moment their feet touched the steps.


    "What does this mean?" some asked.


    "Others are walking past, why can''t we?"


    "Buy a fight and climb." the boy snorted.


    Nevertheless, there were still those who wanted to try their luck and Nti Anem was one of them. He put his feet on the first step and nothing happened, so he continued walking. Ed and Ku Jian followed suit and were able to climb.


    The boy looked at this and paled. It was as though he had just been slapped on the face. Those around saw this and got angry.


    "Didn''t you say we have to buy fights?" one asked.


    "Hurry up ad let us through!"


    "This is cheating!"


    Seeing them start to get rowdy, the boy''s face turned dark. "This is the tower, not your house. If you feel wronged, leave!" he said and the crowd quietened.


    So, the three walked up to the second floor unhindered. The same happened on the second third and fourth floor. When they reached the fifth floor, they discovered there were no more stair cases.


    "Buy a fight!" there was another boy at the counter shouting. He was dressed the same like the other, making Ed wonder if it was a uniform.


    "Why must we buy a fight?" Ed asked. The boy was about to retort in scorn when he met Ed''s eyes. He unconsciously shivered and started spilling all he knew.


    "Every level has five floors till one gets to the forth level. From there, only one floor is needed. The first three three floors have battle grounds. You have to fight and win ten battle credits from one fight alone, to get to the next floor." he said.


    "Why do others have to go through different floors?" Ed asked.


    "The library decides from which floor one can start. Some always start on the fast floor of every level some on the first. If one gets ten battle credits on one floor, regardless of the floor, you can choose to go the next floor or stay back and train." the boy explained.


    "Train?" Nti Anem asked.


    "The floors have training rooms. Many decide to stay and grow in cultivation before going up or else they will die."


    "Then the battles are to the death?" Ed asked.


    "The fighters can set their own conditions. But they must be ready to follow it. As long as you step unto a floor, someone can buy a fight with you. You must accept all fights. Only when you have received enough credits to go the next floor, can you leave to the next floor and ignore other fights bought with you. Those from higher floors can fight those on lower floors free as long as they fulfil some task. But these tasks are rarely given, so many just ignore those on the lower floors. But those on lower floor need to pay high to buy fights from higher floors."


    "I see. So those on higher floors can use those on lower floors to train. It''s a blood bath." Ku Jian said.


    "Can you fight someone from another level?" Nti Anem asked.


    "Fights are limited to the levels you are on. Those on higher levels can watch fights on lower levels but can''t participate."


    "We will buy fights." Ed said.

 123 Clearing the table 2

    Ed and the rest felt the eyes of the fighters pierce through them, as though trying to find who the rankless one was.


    "Observator? What kind of card is this?" the curator raised a brow at Nti Anem.


    "Slot it in and find out." Nti Anem answered and the curator did as said.


    "Who do you wish to fight?" he asked.


    "Let the tower decide." Nti Anem answered.


    When he did, Nti Anem''s name remained blank on the board, not paired with any other.


    "Have you fought before? I have never seen this kind of situation." the curator frowned.


    "There are no fights for me to fight means just that. Move on." Nti Anem said and the curator paused. But he was right. The tower had decided.


    "Observator. Does this mean you are only going to just watch the games till the top level?" Ku Jian asked and Nti Anem nodded.


    "Impossible! Don''t make up stuff!" before the curator could rebuke Nti Anem, one of the fighters had opened his mouth.


    "And if I do?" Nti Anem asked.


    "I will crawl backwards!" he answered.


    "Hoho... You are really full of energy. Hot blood flowing to your head! But, think about it; this tower has a mind of it''s own. How can you know what it thinks? Besides, do you know why it is so for me?" Nti Anem asked and the fighter paused. He was right. Who could say they understood the tower? Every once in a while something odd happens and an odd ball steps in. Won''t it be him just dropping a stone on his own foot if he is wrong? Would he have to crawl backwards? The man paled.


    The curator slot in Ed''s card next and saw ten names immediately arrange under his. At this, the curator paused. He was not the only one who frowned at this development.


    "Is this what rankless means?" someone asked.


    "Ya! Seven of those names are in the top ten." someone exclaimed.


    "So what? Don''t you understand what this means in the tower? It does not particularly represent his strength. It just means the tower wants to torture him." another said.


    "Still, everyone the tower has put in top places were always able to hold their own. The ranking is not just a torture plate."


    "Boy, you should wait and train some weeks. These names are no joke." the curator suddenly pitied Ed greatly. What did this boy do wrong to the tower to put him in this kind of position.


    "It does not matter." Ed said.


    "I know this is time one would feel heroic boy, but you should think logically. Two people on that list, always kill their opponents." the curator said and the others agreed.


    "That''s true! Ephiom and Hammer head. They insist on killing those who fight them!" someone said.


    "This boy has such bad luck!" another said.


    "Boy, do you still want to fight?" the curator asked Ed.


    "Why do you keep calling Brother Ed a boy? He is clearly the same age as you!" Ku Jian said.


    "Little girl, at his cultivation level he is still a child. You on the other hand. You look young making one confused, when you are clearly already an old woman!" the curator said.


    "You dare call me an....!" Ku Jian started to scold.


    "I will fight." Ed said and they all paused.


    "The new ones never listen." someone said.


    "How would they? They leave their homes where they are best cultivators and think they are the best outside too." another snorted.


    "I would love to see his fight. I bet he would loose." Ed''s disregard for their advise ticked off a lot of them.


    "Fine. Take a seat and wait." the curator said.


    "Put in mine!" Ku Jian said excitedly, " I want to play too!" Ku Jian said to the curator and he frowned. The fighters were already very annoyed by Ed''s crew. Ku Jian taking this as a game caused even more anger.


    "Who brought all these people here? Hurry up and scram from this place! Do you think this is a joke?"

 124 Clearing the table 3

    The curator sneered as he slot in Ku Jian''s card. Two names appeared next to hers. At this, she frowned.


    "How many times can I fight in a day?" she asked. The curator could clearly see that she was not satisfied with the outcome.


    "Girl, I know it''s normal for people to be hot blooded, but you must not be rash." he said.


    "How many times?" she asked impatiently.


    "There is no limit." he answered.


    "Schedule me to fight ten people. Let the tower choose." she said and the curator paused.


    "Even if you want to do as him, shouldn''t you have much more care for your life?" someone asked from behind them.


    "Who cares? I will not be behind!" she said. Many thought she wanted to fight equal numbers as Ed because she admired him. But they did not understand that Ku Jian''s greatest fear is Ed leaving her behind. She must never lag behind or he will climb the tower without her. That was a fact she was sure about.


    The three took their seats and waited their turn. Ed tilted his head back and closed his eyes. He tried to feel that familiar light from before. In fact, he had always kept his attention on the light. This time though, he wished to trace where it was coming from. Sure enough, it was in the tower. But he just could not tell where.


    Ku Jian stared intently at him as he did so. She watched his every move as though wanting to find out what he was thinking. Her actions were caught by Nti Anem, who found Ku Jian''s obsession with Ed unsettling. With this girl clinging to him like a parasite, they may not move as fast as they should. Especially when he was not sure why Ed indulged her, he did not know when she lags behind, if Ed will wait for her.


    Those sitting around were entrapped by Ku Jian''s beauty; the men, more than the women. Yet none of them came up to start a conversation as they were all waiting to be called up to fight.


    Ed had not opened his eyes, or he would have notice Jia Lin enter the hall with some heaven sect disciples.


    Jia Lin did not pause when he saw Ed. He only glanced at him and moved on. Still, Nti Anem caught the look in his eyes and smiled. It looks like we will not need to work hard to find this boy enemies, he thought.


    Jia Lin and the rest handed in their cards to the curator and some picked opponents, while others let the tower choose. As all five of them stood in front of the curator, one of them caught Ed''s name on the board.


    "What kind of situation is this, Curator? Someone can fight this many people? Usually this is reserved for the top ten. Still, they never fight this many people." one of them asked.


    "Yes, even looking at the names, most for it were picked at random. What kind of situation is this? Why haven''t we heard of it?" another asked.


    "You haven''t heard of it. It is abnormal. The challenger is a rankless fighter." the curator said impatiently. He suddenly felt that he should push up Ed''s fight. Or else, for everybody that comes here, he would have to waste saliva and explain this phenomenon. At his words, he nodded towards the direction of Ed''s group in irritation.


    "The one sleeping is a rankless fighter. Don''t ask any more useless questions!" he said and the heaven sect disciples turned to look in Ed''s direction.


    "It''s him again." one said.


    "He is an anomaly back home, should one be shocked he is even odder here?" someone else said.


    "Right! I should stop being shocked."


    "True. I for one think that there is something inhuman about him." the only girl amongst them said. Jia Lin looked at Ed''s sleeping form and frowned. He did not like the feeling rushing through his body when he saw Ed. This was someone he had rejected entrance into the emperor sage academy. Even if he ended up doing well, not to the point of becoming a person he can only look at from a far.


    "Your fight is up, rankless." the curator told Ed. Those that had been there before Ed frowned at this, but seeing the irritation in the curator''s eyes, they refrained from complaining.


    Ed got up and looked to where the curator was pointing. A young man just walked through the doorway looking tired and bloody. Behind him, tower guards were carrying a half dead woman. Seeing her covered in blood, no one cared. Their eyes only followed Ed''s form walking through the door way.


    "Your opponents have been informed. They should already be in the crowd. Follow the referee''s instruction." the curator said and Ed passed through the doorway.


    After his back disappeared from view, the fighters all scrambled out to watch his fight, to the dismay of the one who had fought last. Even Jia Lin was interested.


    "Come. Let me see with my own eyes how he fights." he said and followed the excited crowd out.

 125 Clearing the table 4

    Ed stepped out and was met with the stern face of a bald referee.


    "Step onto the table." the referee said and Ed frowned slightly for a second. He looked to the stage the referee was pointing and wondered why he was calling it a table. Nevertheless, he did as asked.


    He immediately felt the feasting eyes of the crowd upon him. Many were gauging his cultivation, others did not wish to miss a thing so as to make good bets. When they saw his face was new to them, some sighed.


    "A newcomer?"


    "No need to bet. One knows how dangerous it is to bet in a newcomer''s fight." another said and many nodded in agreement.


    "The challenger is here. Plate, announce the opponent!" the referee said to no one in particular. But one could see him looking towards the bronze plate and the looking away with disinterest, only to look back in shock. He was not the only one. The entire crowd went silent for a second, as ten names appeared on the plate under Ed.


    "What?" many exclaimed.


    "This list of ten names is all over the place."


    "It is obvious that this is a newcomer. He is not on the top ten ranking, how can this be done?" someone asked.


    "Look at the list. Bold letters. This was picked by the tower." another said.


    "Who is this?"


    "This will be an interesting fight. Look, Ephiom and Hammer head are on the list!" someone said excitedly.


    "There are Ephiom is in the top ten too. I should bet on this fight."


    "What is the tower thinking, could it have malfunctioned and wanted to kill a newcomer?" the audience was abuzz with speculations.


    "A rankless, huh? They exist?" the referee asked Ed as though he would know the answer. At this another round of talks ensued in the audience. Seeing Ed''s stoic face, the referee looked to the crowd.


    "Opponents, step unto the stage!" he ordered and the crowd cheered as ten fighters jumped unto the stage. Two women were amongst the line up. One walking through the air, down to the stage and the other flipped in without care for her exposed legs.


    "It''s Lady Fu." someone said, as he and many others stared at her, love struck.


    "Young master Ephiom has stepped on too!" someone exclaimed. The man fluttered unto the stage like a fairy. If someone had not specifically said he was a young master, Ed would not have known. His facial features were not quite distinctive if he was male or female. It did not help that he wore a loud flower outer robe and moved like a girl.


    Ed stared at the face of those who had arrived for a second, before looking away.


    "Rankless huh?"one of them said.


    "It could either mean you are at the end of the ranks or at the very top at which one can''t reach." another said.


    "I think the tower could not decide." the girl in red laughed without care, her large breasts jiggling. She looked wild and seductive with clothes barely covering her body.


    "This will be a group battle. No matter who beats him, you all win." the referee said.


    "Well, who is going to do this for the rest? This lady is tired." the wild girl said.


    "Nothing about you is a lady. I will. I want to be the one to kill a rankless." another said.


    "You, Hammer head? I will be the one to defeat the rankless." another countered.


    Then a ring tore through the air, causing the referee to look to the bronze plate in fear. ''The tower was interfering?'' He thought in horror.


    The names on the tower turned smaller, giving space for the words; ''one winner''.


    "The one who lands the defeating blow wins. The rest, this fight will be recorded as a loss." the referee said gravely.


    At this, the hall quietened. Everyone understood that getting a loss from a tower chosen battle is at a disadvantage to you. One loss of a tower''s choice, two wins returns to the tower. Every one knew this.


    If you loose a tower chosen fight, the tower will withdraw two wins from your score. Didn''t this mean the tower wanted these people to fight this boy with all their might, even destroy him? What kind of situation is this? The tension was thick in the air. No matter what, ten people will loose this fight. It''s not like one could beat him again, right? Just when the tension had reached a frightening height, the silence was broken by a melodious voice.


    "Ho Ho... Step forward and make your bets. Predict hoe the newcomer will die! Do we have anyone for split in half? Any one for death by decapitation? Crushed skull! How many body part will survive? Death by choking? Do we have a death by choking? Broken legs, broken arms....." Ku Jian''s voice rang out rapidly like an skilled auctioneer, her hands swinging like a vegetable seller calling for customers on a slow day.

 126 Clearing the table 5

    Many seemed awestruck by the beauty turned market woman, while others that knew she was with Ed''s team could not help their twitching brows. Nti Anem was no different. It did not help that many broke out of their daze and rushed over to make bets.


    "Ho Ho..." she continued to laugh as she collected the bets made.


    "I bet his skull will be crushed from one swing of Hammer''s head''s hammer."


    "Lady, I bet he will loose an arm."


    "He will be split right in the middle!"


    "His blood will flow enough to fill a bucket!"


    The bets were getting more outrageous, as they all waved pouches of spirit stones in Ku Jian''s face.


    "Ho ho... anyone for gouged eyes?" she said, collecting money from here and there with just a wave of her hand.


    "Here, here! Gouged eyes!" someone betted.


    The commotion in the audience angered the usual betting bosses, causing them to pry their way through the crowd till they got to Ku Jian.


    "Girl. How dare you start a betting stand without our permission?" a large man bellowed, saliva splashing every where.


    "Ho ho? You wish to hold the bets yourself?" Ku Jian covered her mouth with her long sleeves as she laughed animatedly. Nti Anem sighed inwardly at the situation. One look and anyone could tell this Ho ho laugh of hers was a comical act. Who was she pretending to be right now?


    "This is our territory!" the large man spat.


    "Then you can have it. This is such an obvious match, you obviously have the money to handle the consequences, right?" she asked and the boss paled. She was right. It was obvious the newcomer would loose. With all these bets, it was sure that many will win big. Can he pay all the price money?


    "Lady, please continue." he turned and left. Seeing him leave, many more came forward to bet. It was clear the lady knew the consequences and still held a betting ring. To them, this meant she did not quite like the newcomer, to be willing to spend so much on his humiliation. None of them even considered the fact that she may be on his side and was sure he would win. If so, wouldn''t all their large investments go to her?


    "This is a fight to the death. We all agree, then." Ephiom said and the rest nodded. Of course, they did not think that with how much they were competing to be the first to beat him, that Ed would survive. So it was best to state that this was a fight to the death.


    "Begin!" the referee said, ignoring the commotion in the audience.


    At the sound of his voice, the wild girl dashed at Ed with all her might. One could tell she wanted to kill him with one swing of her whip. If she does this, they all loose. They were not going to let it happen. Hammer head and another fighter drew their weapons and threw in one full and powerful swing. An archer among the fighters had released his arrow. Many had attacked at once. It was clear, whoever made the killing blow would win. It was all up to fate.


    But they underestimated Ed a little too much. Did they think he was going to stand there and receive their attacks? They were not sure how it happened, but he suddenly vanished.


    "Such speed!" someone in the audience exclaimed.


    As Ed was no more standing there, these weapons were still aiming for their target. Except, their target was now, whoever was unluckily on the other side of the attack. Seeing the change, many swayed out of the way. Only two of them got scratched from being too slow.


    Only few still had their minds on Ed as they swayed away. They saw him move again, his shadow left behind as he appeared before Hammer head swaying from an arrow and slapped him back in the trajectory of the arrow.


    Hammer head felt a weight like that of ten pagodas hit his side, causing him to spit blood, pushing him back towards the coming arrow. He felt as though his organs melted under the split second touch of that weight. But before he could process what happened, the arrow had pierced through his heart to the other side.


    Ed had not stopped, as he caught the whip flying through the air and swung, the wild girl suddenly found herself thrown across the table.


    Only few could catch the way Ed moved. Still, it was only a shadow in their eyes. Nevertheless, this was enough. Two of them revealed their martial skill. Ephiom threw a doll into the air and it grew twenty feet and landed before him, just in time to block Ed''s incoming figure. The doll opened it''s mouth and released a clear gas towards Ed. Ephiom then jumped into the air as he rotated the energy in his core to keep up with Ed''s speed and slapped the twenty feet, fifty pound hay doll and bellowed, "Mud fire!"

 127 Bloody fifth floor

    It needed no saying that the gas erupted into flames, shooting at Ed''s form. Ephiom could still see Ed''s form as he moved, causing him to follow with his fire.


    "Idiot!" one of the fighters said. He could see the fire following Ed''s shadow but not quite reaching him move fast round the table. Only two people were fast enough to activate a shield in time. Still, they barely made it, as the fire still grazed them, as it swiftly charred the other fighters to death.


    It seemed that at that moment, Ephiom discovered that Ed had moved slow enough for him to see on purpose, helping him kill off the other opponents. At this, he seized his attack. What if he kills every one till he is left to face this devil alone?


    "To fast!" the audience could barely see what was happening. Before they knew it, Ehiom''s fire had chared the fighters.


    "What is he doing?"


    "He must have panicked. That rankless is fast!" another said.


    "He hurt Lady Fu!"


    "Her beautiful skin has been seared." many mourned for Lady Fu''s skin. She, on the other hand was too scared for her life to worry about her skin. This rankless was dangerous! Till now, she could tell he moved that fast with pure physical strength! When he had slapped Hammer head back in the trajectory of the arrow, she saw that his movement was very casual. Yet... the power in that casual move.


    "Are you a cultivator? Fight with your energy, then!" she challenged Ed. She hoped to provoke him to use martial skill instead of physical strength. Cultivators had great physical strength. But they never bother to train it as they are too busy cultivating. She did not believe that someone with this amount of physical strength still excelled in fighting with martial skills.


    But did she really think he was so easily provoked? He wanted the fighting experience, sure. But he understood that he had five thousand years to get it. At the moment, getting to the tomb before any one else was the priority. He did not have the time to play.


    With a glance, he was beside her before she could react. He mildly slapped her face and her head spun three hundred and sixty degrees three times.


    "Impossible! Lady Fu!" someone in the audience screamed. The despair in that voice, it was clearly someone she knew.


    The fate of the remaining two were just the same. Seeing that he could no more see the way Ed moved, Ephiom confirmed that he had been played. He helped Ed kill off his opponents.


    Ed''s form appeared before him like the angel of death, making him realise his ten feet doll was no where to be found. As his body took on the weight of Ed''s punch and his organs melted, draining the life from his eyes, he could see the last fighter with his body snapped in half, dead on the floor. How he died, Ephiom was not sure.


    On the sixth level, a man in contemplation opened his eyes at the message stone that lit up in his spatial ring. With a wave of his hand, the stone appeared before his hands and he listened to it''s contents, that caused his eyes to shrink, "Lady Fu died, Brother Fu. She met a rankless and was killed."


    Back in the arena, silence had enveloped the audience. This match. Was it supposed to be this easy?


    "Did anyone see how it happened?" someone asked. No one had. They only understood very little of the even less they saw.


    They turned their eyes to a comical ''Ho Ho Ho''from Ku Jian and gulped. All that money, gone. But, she was just one girl. They could take it back right? Before someone could approach Ku Jian, they heard Ed''s voice bellow them.


    "I leave now. You have five minutes to handle your match." he said and Ku Jian froze for a second, before rushing back stage.


    "Curator! Curator!" she said to the man, shocking him from his book.


    "Is there anyway to shorten my fight?" she asked.


    "Huh?" he was confused.


    "I only have five minutes to leave this level. Say, there must be a cheat right? Tell this younng Lady!" she shouted.


    "The only way is if you have defeated those the tower has given you before the fight begins. That still counts as a win." As the curator spoke, those who were waiting for their fights, including Jia Lin and his crew arrived. They heard what the curator said and saw Ku Jian pause, "Are my opponents already around?" she asked.


    "They are in the audience. But, just because I pushed the rankless'' fight does not mean I will push yours...." the curator started to say then saw her rush out back into the audience.


    "Idiot. How will she know who is who?" he said and returned to his book. The next moment, screams ensued outside. It only lasted a few seconds, before it stopped. The chill of the silence caused the hairs of those inside to stand.


    Ku Jian had run out into the audience and saw Ed''s leaving form. He threw her a glance and she smiled, "You go, I will be right behind you." she said and Ed walked out of the fifth floor without looking back. Nti Anem on the other hand was very suspicious of her smile. He gave her a deep look before following Ed out. The floor only regained it''s rowdy nature when Ed stepped out the door. Many released breaths they did not know they were holding. Someone so powerful, they were careful not to breathe.


    Ku Jian looked at the crowd the moment Ed was out the door with a cold smile. No one was sure what happened the next second. She had waved her hand in the air and a dark thorny branch appear. The next second, screams tore through the hall as it had expanded, peircing through all in the room. The amount of blood that spilled that moment, one could almost see red in this black and white world.


    When done, the thorny branch returned to palm size and the curator and other below stepped out to the bloody scene, just to see Ku Jian put it away and step out of the fifth floor, her dress clean, the choking scent of blood left behind.

 128 Killing their way up

    It was as though now, they had gotten permission to move up the tower, the next set of stairs appeared on their own. Ed only paused for a moment, and the next second Ku Jian was running out the door. He did not bother to glance at her, as he started unto the next level.


    This time, there was no continuing flight of stairs after the first one. They immediately found themselves facing a dead end. They looked back and found nothing behind them.


    "Get your slot cards.." a bored voice said and they found a boy almost asleep with a bell in his hands. He rang a few times as his head drooped.


    "What floor is this?" Nti Anem asked.


    The boy looked up at those who were walking before him and froze.


    "The.. there is no floor in this level." he said and Nti Anem frowned.


    "There is no level from the fourth floor. We are on the second floor." he said and the boy shivered under his cold stare.


    "This is the fourth floor." the boy answered. At this, Nti Anem nodded...


    "Ah.. that old thing must have learned his lesson and sent you directly to the fourth floor." he said.


    "What are the rules." Ed asked the boy and he trembled even more, causing Ed to frown.


    "Why are you trembling?" Ku Jian asked the boy.


    "No..nothing."


    "Have you seen us before?" she asked.


    "No."


    "Stop trembling."she said.


    "Okay!" the boy shook even more.


    "I will kill you if you don''t start talking." Ku Jian said.


    "thecuratorsallknowyourfaces.arankless,anobserverandbloodqueen.wearetobecarefulwhenweseeyou." he said in one breath.


    "Slowly." her eyes turned cold.


    "The curators all know your faces. A rankless, an observator and blood queen. We are to be careful when we see you." he took in a deep breath and said.


    "Blood queen?" Nti Anem raised a brow at Ku Jian, only to meet her innocent face staring at Ed without care.


    "The rules of the level." Ed asked again.


    "Defeat enough people to enter the golden ranking. Then you can choose to cash in the benefits of that rank or proceed to the next level." he said.


    "The cards." Nti Anem said and the boy worked fast and handed them their cards. Looking at it, they found that it was different from the last time. It was not just a blank card with their name on it, it now had the number zero on it.


    "It represents the number of people you have defeated in the level. The colour represents the rank you are in. there are grey, red, yellow, orange, gold, gold being the highest and grey the lowest." the boy explained. At his words, Ed understood one thing; he was the only one who could not see colour in this world. Every other except for the old man from the library, could. What that represented, he did not know.


    He looked down at his card and all he saw was black. He assumed it was because of his inability to see colour in this world, but was told otherwise by the boy, who had seen him stare at his card and thought to explain.


    "You are a rankless. Your card is black. I do not know how this will work inside the level, but the tower will know how to handle you." he said and Nti Anem raise a brow.


    "What do you mean?" he asked.


    "You will know when you step in. This level is not like those below." the boy said, "Oh and be careful, time is odd there." At this, Nti Anem and the rest walked past him and stepped though a large door way.


    As though they had torn through a veil, they immediately found themselves in the middle of a battle stand off.

 129 Killing their way up 2

    Two teams stared each other down. The humid air was colder than the peaks of Mount Gri and their gaze could burn a hole through a dying star. Separated by two miles of elephant grasses dancing to west sea breezes, each team wore an identity tattoo on their arm to tell each other apart. Their generals sat on demonic beasts of equal status. Just when they had reached the height of their stand off, ready to attack each other by the word of their generals, three people appeared right in their middle.


    Ed and his groups looked round the situation they were in and raised a brow. Was this a level? It seemed like a world of it''s own.


    "I see, a pocket world." Nti Anem said with a nod, then he paused as his face broke into a frown.


    "That boy outside said we should be careful of the time in here. Ed, this could be bad." he said and Ed frowned. If they were not careful they could be stuck here much longer than they wanted.


    "Hey! You three! You dare to interrupt our battle?" one of the generals asked, his bald head about to burst from protruding veins.


    "Brother Ed! It''s a battle! Can we stay and watch?" Ku Jian said and Nti Anem frowned.


    "You can stay, we are in a hurry to be some where." he said and she frowned.


    "No matter what you do, I am not leaving Brother Ed. So you can stop dreaming!" Ku Jian protested.


    The two teams saw that they were discussing and almost went mad with anger. These people, they look down on them two much. They dare to discuss in the middle ofbattle? Did they not think they were dangerous?


    "Get out of the way, bloody newcomers!" someone scolded.


    At this, many thought him right. These three just appearing here, artefacts don''t work on this level, so they must have just entered the level.


    "Hey, you three. You just came in right?" the general with the eagle tattoo finally spoke.


    "Ho Ho.. how did you know?" Ku Jian started and Nti Anem sighed.


    "How about you join our team. We will show you the ropes." the boy said.


    "You have not even asked them what rank they are on and you want them to join your team? Don''t think that I do not know what you are doing, Nna Tang!" the general with the tiger tattoo said.


    "Oho? And what is that?" Ku Jian asked with exaggerated suspicion, her hand on her cheeks filled with air.


    "If they end up having a high rank, good for your team, if they end up having a low rank, they will not survive the battle anyway." the tiger tattooed general said.


    "So what then? You have a better solution?" Nna Tang sneered.


    "They come to my team." the other general answered.


    "Haha! You are so funny, Inang. Isn''t that the same thing you want to do?" Nna Tang asked.


    "Hm! We are of course the better choice." Inang snorted.


    "You think yourself smart, don''t you?"


    "No, stronger." Inang snirked.


    "You are equally matched, ho ho.. So, no solution!" Ku Jian said.


    "We are not! When I beat him in this battle, no one will dare say that again!" Inang insisted.


    "You speak as though I will stand still while you do it! You will die here today." Nna Tang said.


    "Good! Truth can only be determined in battle!" Ku Jian said, then turned to the fighteres they were blocking.


    "Half of you on this side move over to the other side. The other team! Do so as well!" she ordered. The teams did as she said. Now, they had shifted away and Ku Jian and her group were no more blocking their path, she put her hands on her waist and looked at both sides.


    "I can''t believe this." Nti Anem muttered.


    "Men do not talk with their mouth, but with their fist! Who is the strongest? Who is right? Let your fist decide!" she shouted and silence followed the next second; as she let her words sink in, then she ordered, "Fight!"


    As her words drifted out into the wind, the two teams attacked, under the sigh of Nti Anem and Ed''s blank gaze, A ''ho ho'' laughter guiding their way.

 130 Pause!

    @@


    Guys, I am hurriedly posting this to all my readers in all platform that matter and all books.. I have a situation and I will be unavailable for a while. Hopefully only a few days. Actually I''ve had the incident longer that is why I have not been writing and you have not been receiving chapters.. . Thank you for your patience. I know I have the best readers in the world.This author will hurriedly get better and return. Please accept my humble bow!@@

 131 To Walk The Mist is Returning, But...

    Hi guys, it''s your author here.


    God, it''s been long. I should have returned months ago, but your author has been quarreling with the God of luck. Many things have happened to me, I have officially denounced small gods that dare to stand against me. I got better, that''s good. But someone in my family got ill, and the kind that sends the entire family running all over the place looking for cash and calling all the doctors they know type of illness. Just when I thought everything got stabilized, this author''s laptop crashed and I could not repair it. For those who have been reading my other book, Lucy Wickshire, you know of this laptop issue. I have been posting there because with borrowing someone''s laptop, you only have limited time and Lucy Wickshire has been winning so far. But, I have been accumulating chapters for To Walk The Mist slowly so that we can get some regular start. So raise your hand and be amazed, we are back!


    But... and this is a big butt... Keke..


    I have been trying to get webnovel to pick up my book. Why? when you are low on cash you consider all the things that could give you cash, but now that I think about it, this is not the right platform as, being a reader myself, we know webnovel can be a bitch. The coin rates are high and are making it harder for readers to follow their favourite works.


    So, this is a good thing, if you think about it. So, I was looking into other platforms with better services for readers and this author alike, and got a contract with moboreader.


    So that is the but. The past week, I have been getting moboreader up to date with To Walk The mist chapters and will be done in a few days; give or take five days. So that is the but.


    Find authorized novels in Webnovel£¬faster updates, better experience£¬Please click www.novelhall.com for visiting.


    I will not be posting my new chapters on webnovel, but on moboreader. So head on to moboreader and find To Walk The Mist in five or so days from this post. (Just in case there are those who don''t know when this was posted, it''s November 18th.)


    Am I worried readers will leave? Well, you stayed this long, didn''t you? At least go over and find out if the reading experience is better over there. They''ve also got an app so, you can read just as well as on webnovel.


    I am aiming to have my chapters longer as this book is classified xuanhuan there and my competitors are releasing large chapters.


    Thanks for waiting. I see your comments but i''m usually unable to do anything. I wanted to wait till I finish posting the chapters that are here on moboreader before saying anything about the return, but I saw the comments and got itchy.


    Ya, for those who go over there before the five day or so mark and see chapters that are free here, locked, don''t go spoiling your authors show by telling people that they can read those locked chapters free here. This author is trying to make a few dollars an save up for a new laptop!


    Now that I think about it, I should probably not tell you about the return. But then again, I know some take a while to see updates from books that have been dropped for a while so, giving five days to gather loyal readers is good. So please pity this author and let people there pay a few coins to read...


    I''ve said too much. See ya.

 132 Read on moboreader

@@


    Guys,

 130 killing their way up 3

    @@"Oho, that old man is funny." Ku Jian said and disappeared from her spot. Sounds of killing could be heard from afar the next second.


    "Get them!" someone roared from nowhere and they were immediately besieged. Ignoring the coming crowd, Ed turned to Nti Anem and frowned.


    "You know that old man, don''t you?" he asked.


    "No, I do not." Nti Anem quickly denied, then flicked his wrist as he whispered a spell. A barrier formed in between himself and the incoming people, then he did the same on Ed''s stairs.


    "Apteil, no cheating!" the voice of the tower bellowed. But this time, it did not sound like an almighty being, it sounded like a child who had his toy taken away.


    "He knows you." Ed said, completely ignoring the carnage Ku Jian was making on her stairs.


    "No, I do not. We must only keep our end of the bargain and kill people" Nti Anem could feel the dangerous air around Ed and hurriedly denied, "I have only heard he was a vengeful old man. He lost his land and is taking it out on everybody."


    "Apteil, you dare?" the voice came again. This time, he sounded wronged.


    "Clear the way." Ed ordered and those on the other side of the barrier, Nti Anem and Baskii went silent. No one was quite sure who Ed was speaking to.


    .......to be continued......


    read there!

 131 Leaving the tower 1

    @@"What do you want to do with him?" Ed asked Nti Anem.


    "Let''s leave the tower. When we are out, you give him to me." he said and Ed looked away and started climbing the stairs.


    "Young Man, let go of the young master and I will do whatever you ask." an elderly man walked up.


    "Oh? You are much stronger than the boy yet you did not come and help him out?" Nti Anem asked and the man only glanced at him.


    "My job is only to interfere when the young master is about to die. It is not my job to fight his battles." the man said and Nti Anem snorted.


    "Well, you will not be getting you pay then. We will be extracting the eternal fire from him." he said.


    "You don''t care for how the Fu clan will react?"


    "Must be a great clan. Of course I care. We must visit them to make use of their anger to horn ourselves." Nti Anem said. He did not seem to notice the righteous looked at this moment.


    ....to be continued...


    read there!